BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Confusion, Disinformation, Communication.
Published during 1976/77, "HOW REAL IS REAL?", by Paul Watzlawick, would reveal many of the structures and patterns of ritualistic imprinted and modeled reactive behaviour, assumptions of rationalistic thinking, expectations of fear-based superstitions, and spurious conclusion trends of anxiety dominated experience which humans constantly utilize as a basis for decisionmaking, motivation, and belief.

While one example of public and popular disinformation, "Alternative 3" would soon be published, this year would neither be a threshold, starting point of end to the use of disinformation within and by societies for the purpose of control and manipulation of the individuals who aggregrate to form the masses. Whether such lies, prejudices, assumptions or inuendo originated in 500 B.C. or 1996 A.D., the spiritually deadening and mental enslavement (brainwashing) influence would be substantial in preventing the spiritual growth of humanity and in denying the spiritual growth of the individual.

Like a cancer permeating most politically structured human groupings - from tribes to nations to multinationals - disinformation weakens the ability of the peoples so dominated to constructively cope with current, recurrent, and prophetic disasters. The major reason for the death of most civilizations and empires in the history of humanity is the development of rigid, irrelevant and destructive forms of coping.

Some extracts from Watzlawick include these:

" This book ( How Real is Real? ) is about the way in which communication creates what we call reality. ... And the most dangerous delusion of all is that there is only one reality.

And here is a final paradox. All those who have tried to express the experience of the pure Now have found language to be woefully inadequate."

While most of the references to "Alternative 3", the story from the book and not the concept itself - have been extracted from the history files (They were included in an early version to show what ONE disinformation project, even well intended, could influence) and collected in the Appendix, Z30-ALT3.CON, a number have been left in this 1977-78 file. Before looking at the appendix, see if you can easily determine which entries in this file are based on fact and which are a record of an effective and attempted mass delusion - the result of fantasy.

Imagination enables humans to "play" with the facts of personal experience and test for similarities, correlations, patterns and apparent randomness of relationship between individual events. Fantasy constructs a reality which has only a fleeting similarity to the reality of experience. Humans who are dependent upon fantasy to bring "life" into their experience betray the weakness of their spirit, a diminished lack of self-esteem, and a basic avoidance of participation in the reality surrounding them. Their dependence upon fantasy is a reflection of their low level of awareness - of themselves and their surroundings.

Like an autistic child, the fantasy dominated have chosen to create a fiction reality within their minds to replace the true reality for which they lack constructive coping skills. This is the true destructive quality of fantasy: it can become an addiction of mental masturbation in which the individual takes increasing delight and satisfaction is being able to create an artificial experience which appears to safeguard the sensitive ego from the potential risks of pain, and joy, which are part of the experience of interrelating with other living and non-living entities. Disinformation promotes the development of cultural fantasy; fantasy dulls the awareness of the individual and increases the susceptibility of the individual to deception and manipulation by a control-motivated entity. The result is individual and cultural schizophrenia.

Memory Stimulators.
1977 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

Black Sunday; Star Wars; Red Alert; Annie Hall; An Enemy of the People; Semi-Tough, Telefon; A Bridge Too Far; The Deep; New York, New York; Slap Shot; The Pink Panther Strikes Again; A Star is Born; Exorcist II; Black Sunday; The Spy Who Loved Me; Smokey and the Bandit; The Eagle Has Landed; Equus; Ruby; Close Encounters of the Third Kind; The White Buffalo; The Turning Point; Race For Your Life, Charlie Brown; Oh God!; World's Greatest Lover; Why Shoot the Teacher?; Twilight of Love; The Choirboys

NEWS:

Consumer Price index: 181.5

   Examples of American Cost of Living 
   ====================================
 One-Family Home:                    $54,400
 Annual College Costs - Harvard       $7,060
 Intermediate sized car:              $4,887
 Monthly Electric Bill:         $26.00
 Haircut:                        $3.00
 Gasoline per Gallon:            $0.64
 Daily Newspaper:                $0.20
 First Class Postage stamp:      $0.13
 Production Worker Gross Earnings:   $11,740; 
   after tax earnings as a % of Gross: 86

Sometime during 1976/77,
A Biosafety Level 2 agent later known as the AIDS (Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome) viral complex began spreading to humans out of the Congo-Zaire rainforest in central west Africa. Infected humans travelled along the Kinshasa Highway toward the Atlantic coast. Highly lethal but not very infective, it is communicated between persons, not through the air but by the interchange of bodily fluids. AIDS would come to be most frequently transfered through rough, forced, or anal sexual intercourse; the communal use of hypodermic needles by drug addicts and abusers; blood transfusions; and in some cases by kissing.

1977 - By this year,
"The Perimeter Acquisition Radar Characterisation System" (PARCS), a phased array radar system, was in operation to support the USA Safeguard ABM system in North Dakota. It would remain one of the most capable sensors in the Space Surveillance Network of the USA, making covert launches by private concerns in the USSR and the USA and UFO movements more difficult to go unnoticed.

1977 - By January,
The Monetarist theory of economics has gained political acceptance.
Most notably Milton Friedman and his followers, maintain that recessions are caused by declines in the rate of expansion of the money supply. The monetarist school of economic thought teaches the principle of setting annual targets for growth in the money supply, say 3%-4% annually, as the best means to achieve stable growth in the economy and control inflation. Government spending and taxation, and bank credit and reserve protection are not considered as important considerations.

The monetary policy focuses on controlling government monetary measurements and may achieve one objective at the expense of others. A lower inflation rate may precipitate extreme volatility in interest rates and an economic recession. Also, there is no inclusive definition of the money supply itself nor is there any dependable statistic from which to gauge its level. This is partially because of the increasing amount of capital which remains hidden to consideration by economists and politicians: black market and underworld banking, private banks, barter, unrecorded income.

The Monetarist theory acknowledges that a capitalistic economy MUST have continual expansion of the money supply in order to have continual profit. Without continual economic expansion the system begins to implode on itself. Rather than consider the problem as a failure to be able to maintain a balance, the political and academic leadership involved remain obsessed with justifying ways to continue doing what has been done in the past.

1977 - On January 3,
Louise Zinsstag wrote about Eduard Albert Meier to Timothy Good, a British UFO researcher:

"... I can't get rid of the idea that this (space)woman Semjase does him no good ... I am sure that within a rather short time she will let him drop, because it is out of the question for him to fulfill her wishes .... What he misses is a name, a good one, and he will never get that because he was in prison as a youngster. And most of all he misses a real education, although I must say his technical knowledge is absolutely astonishing. He seems to have gotten a certain pre-education in his early twenties while he travelled in Syria and Jordon, which serves him well for understanding the difficult things Semjase talks through with him ..."

Zinsstag, an educated cultured woman in the 1970's still wondered, like some of her associates, if Meier was a witch under the magic spell of one! So-called modern human societies harbour the same iniquities which have plagued human societies since humans gained conscious rational abilities: a distrust for anything simple on the basis that the more complex and sophisticated something or someone is, the more "intelligent" and worthy they should be. The key word is "should", often treated as "must"; in reality, the key phrase is "seldom are". Such is humanity that truth is judged not on the spiritual level of relevance and reality; truth is judged on the image-ineering level of social acceptance, political power, financial wealth, physical attractiveness, and spiritual inertness. What greater indication can a culture have of inevitable failure?

During his 4th and 7th contact with Semjase, Meier was told of the Pleiadian propulsion system that allowed the beamships to transcend distance and time. She said:

"For travelling through cosmic space a drive is necessary which surpasses the speed of light many times over. But this propulsion can come into action only when the speed of light is already attained. This means that the beamship needs at least two drives - a normal drive which provides acceleration up to the speed of light, and a second hyper-drive, as you would call it. With this we are able to paralyse time and space simultaneously. They collapse into null time and null space. And only when time and space have ceased to exist are we capable of travelling through distances of light years in a tiny particle of a second. This is done so quickly that living forms are not aware of it.

The reason we need 7 hours to reach Earth is because first we must fly far into space before we can convert to hyper-speed. We then come back out of the hyper-space condition far outside of your solar system, and fly to here once more in normal drive.

... your advanced scientific circles are already working on systems known as light-emitting drives and 'tachyon' drives. The elemental principles are already known to them. The light-emitting drive serves as the normal propulsion system to move the ships to the limits of space and time. Once there, the tachyon drive is brought into action. This is the hyper-propulsion system, which is able to force space and time into hyper-space. We use other names, but the principles are exactly the same."

Tom Welch would not hear of this information for more than a year.
When he did, he would find that specialists either connected with NASA or with companies like "General Dynamics" had been quietly working on such a propulsion system. Yet Meier had written notes on the system from a formal education equivalent to the 5th or 6th grade. He did not live near major libraries or major scientific centres. Meier had no immediate contacts with persons working in those fields. At the time, most physicists did not know what the word "tachyon" meant, and, to further apply the concept to space propulsion was a huge step to make.

Shinichi Seike of the "G Research Lab" at Uwajima City, Ehime, Japan would include a chapter on the Properties of Tachyon in his book "The Principles of Ultra Relativity".

1977 - On January 6,
In Montreal, Quebec - Mrs. Florida Malboeuf, of Casgain Street on looking out of her window at 1:00 A.M. saw a strange looking object drifting above the rooftop of the house across the street. It was dome-shaped, and resembled a flattened oyster with a chain of bright lights around its rim which almost blinded her. She estimated the object to be about 20 feet wide. After seeing 2 humanoids for several minutes that apparently came from and went back to the craft, she saw it leave. Three other persons saw it above the local Rosemont subway station.

1977 - The Winter 1976/77
Results in so much snowfall in the northeastern U.S.A., including 44 consecutive days of snowfall in Buffalo, New York state, that it is declared the worst of the century. This increases concern over the possibility of an imminent new ice age as snowbound cities leave persons freezing to death in their cars. A half million American workers are laid off for lack of energy supplies and an energy crisis is expected.

The television series "In Search Of" presents an episode later in the year titled "The Coming Ice Age".
It is mentioned that signs of a dramatic freezing period are found indicated in ice samples judged to be 89,000 years ago and indications suggest that some event had resulted in considerable clouding of the atmosphere: volcanic, meteoric, or something else undetermined. New York, U.S.A. is gauged at having been under a mile thick of ice 18,000 years ago. Other indications suggest that the climate, on average, has been gradually getting colder over the past 3000 years with this warm spell lasting 10,000 years to the present. Suggestions are made by scientists to use nuclear detonations to raise the global climate temperatures or the spreading of soot on polar ice. If the polar ice was melted it would rise sea levels by 180 feet.

1977 - On January 23,
"Roots", a 12-hour serialization of Alex Hailey's semi-fictional history tracing Haley's ancestry from Kunta Kinte, a Mandinka African youth captured by slave traders in 1767, began on American television. Haley agreed to the TV broadcast favoured over his original preference of a movie because he could see more of his book in a serialization on TV, and television was believed to be the medium able to reach the greatest number of people. The series would produce a rebellion of American black culture in which black Americans would feel a kinship to Haley's description of his family's history. In turn, because little of Haley's history is positive, reaction against white Americans and the dominant white American institutions would develop. A sentimental portrayal, Roots, encourages the viewer to feelings of judgementalism, anger, rage, and self-obsession - non of which are spiritual in context.

It is not that the story is untrue but rather that it is not relevant to the origins of most African Americans: it was a half-truth. Most were sold by their tribes to the British merchants as slaves not even during a period of African environmental hardship. Slaving had long past been part of the tribal African culture before the Europeans arrived. Once in Europe, not all slaves were abused and mistreated as Haley suggests. Blacks were frequently made the slave supervisors on the plantations and larger commercial ventures, and it was Blacks who mistreated and disciplined other Blacks as often as it was a White. Particularly at the farm level, it was not unusual for the family of the white landowner to work in the fields beside the Black slave.

American slaveowners were completely unaware of the long present slave customs in many other parts of the world; hence, customs granting freedom to the slave under certain circumstances were not adopted in America. Also, unlike much of the rest of global human commerce in slaves, the purchaser, in America, was more often poor and uneducated than wealthy and educated. The worst of human factors led to the worst abuse of an institution indicative of the weaknesses of a state-dependent, or, materially-oriented society.

The use of the mass media in this instance again promoted unspiritual values in the culture from a position of drama and incitement rather than from a focus of understanding, forgiveness, and prevention. The American drug trade would largely be concentrated in Black neighbourhoods to the end of the century. It would represent Black American enslaving Black American with the owner-dealers making a living by making others dependent upon them. Roots did not enable them to become spiritually free of a possible abusive past; it prompted rebellion so that some Black Americans could have the material benefits had by some White Americans: abuse, manipulation, deception - all justified by the crude human feelings of anger, pride, greed, envy, vice.

1977 - The January 24 issue of "Maclean's"
Prints "The god that failed", an article by Walter Stewart, describes the failure of overdependency on the state.
The modern welfare state, in countries like Sweden, Canada, Britain, Austria, Denmark, West Germany, France, the Netherlands, and other states - has failed to provide efficient desired necessary services to the people it is to serve. Rather than individuals taking responsibility for some of the usual risks of industrialized mass culture by voluntary self-sacrifice and planning, they have increasingly left the burden to bureaucrats. The difficulty has been that bureaucratic systems do not respond to individual needs, require extensive and costly reporting systems, must intellectually justify each activity, and, are often redundant when their programs are activated because of the lengthy development time required. Noting from the article:

"... a Swedish civil servant complains that 'nobody wants to do anything for himself anymore; it's all up to the state.' ... generous pensions, its health plan, free education, unemployment benefits, income supplements ....

At the ministry of social welfare in Vienna, Dr. Elizabeth Weiser complains that 'Austria is really on the way to George Orwell's 1984. For everything there is protection, but we have to pay for it all with taxes. ... Officially, I am a fervid socialist and turn up for the parade on May 1 with a placard, but personally I abhor it all.' ...

(In Scotland) Along the debris-strewn streets, row upon row of grimy tenements stand, with crumbling facades, broken sidewalks and boarded-up windows. The people who live here are poor. They are neat, well-dressed and cheerful. But their surroundings are old, crowded, sagging and dilapidated. Jill Bradbury, a researcher with Scotland's volunteer housing program, Shelter, explains that 'there are about 15,000 people on the waiting list for housing in this area, yet you see these places boarded up. There is no money to rehabilitate them. Something just isn't working.' ...

In Denmark, there are complaints about a gleaming new hospital with nine empty floors; in West Germany, groaning taxpayers have seen the cost of medical insurance triple in five years; in France, the social security budget is running a 2-billion-dollar deficit; in the Netherlands, social spending has doubled over the past 13 years; in Britain, concern over the swollen cost of health and social security - now running at about $27 billion a year - is matched by complaints about run-down facilities, waste and stupidity. ...

Canada's welfare bill soared from 2.6 billion in 1965 to $14.3 billion a decade later, and there is no end in sight. Government spending, of which welfare is a major part, now totals more than 40% of Canada's Gross National Product; that is higher than the burden on beleaguered Britain ... something happened on the road to Nirvana; the gap between rich and poor has not been eliminated, nor even greatly narrowed; health standards have improved, but numerous deficiencies remain; and as for opportunities, well, the right school tie, the correct church, the proper parents or an advantageous marriage are often still as useful aids to advancement as brains and diligence. ...

In Britain, welfare accounts for one third of all public spending in a nation close to bankruptcy - and still the benefits are meagre. ... Austria spends 18% of its GNP for 'social purposes'...

In fact, in many countries, benefits discriminate in favour of the affluent.
... The regulations are frequently so complex that the bureaucrats themselves can't find their way through the undergrowth. ... hospital staff behaved with callous stupidity.

In Britain's welfare state, the poverty cycle has not been broken, nor even badly bent. Sociologist J.C. Kincaid of Leeds University, in a study of "Poverty And Equality In Britain", contends that 'during the period 1960-72 it would appear that there has been almost a doubling of the numbers below, or just above [the poverty line]. ... less and less egalitarian, self-defeating and increasingly irrational.' ... Arthur Seldon, an economist with the "Institute of Economic Affairs" in London ... notes that 'the original idea was to take from the rich and give everyone a minimum floor of services, and that was fine. But now we are taxing people so much that those with below average incomes are paying for the benefits. ... the welfare state has encouraged tyranny in bureaucrats and crookedness in private citizens, who apply for benefits they don't need because, after all, they paid for them. 'There is a certain amount of arrogance and bullying on one side, and a certain amount of opportunism on the other. It becomes a war of all against all.'...

The way of the United States has been to adopt some bits and pieces of the welfare state and reject others. ... The resulting mishmash is neither cheap nor effective ... U.S. spending on social welfare rose from $50 billion in 1960 to $171 billion in 1971. If the increase alone - $121 billion - had been divided among the nations 25 million poor, every family of four would rejoice in an annual income of $19,200. Poverty would disappear. But most of the money vanishes on its way through the system; today, the United States has just as many poor as it had in 1960. It also has more bureaucrats and higher bills. ...

The U.S. approach tends to be both more demeaning and less fair than the European one. ... The failures of the European welfare state are written in red ink; the failures of the U.S. system are often written in uglier materials, such as blood. In Britain, they complain about the insolence of office; in the United States, about rats eating babies. ... In Sweden, the disadvantaged complain of the high cost of decent food; in the United States the poor often eat dog food. A Senate committee on nutrition reported in 1974 that 'one third of the pet food purchased in slums is eaten by humans,' and a more recent study suggested that 'pet foods constitute a significant part of the diet of at least 225,000 households, affecting some one million persons. ...

Arthur Seldon ... believes that most of the welfare system could be scrapped and replaced by a negative income tax; those who need help would get it automatically, in the form of cash .... Scotland's Trevor Davies: 'We think if you put the planning into local hands, into voluntary agencies, self-help groups, and so forth, instead of trying to run everything through a centralized bureaucracy, you would save money and provide better service.' ...."

Increasingly, mass humanity is facing problems of mass proportions in an unstable industrial economy in which the dependency of the individual on the state and on other members of the society is high relative to that of agricultural economies, or hunting and gathering societies. With humanity's large numbers, the latter two types of social organization are impossible now because there simply isn't enough land. And the raised material level of the industrial lifestyle is unlikely to be voluntarily abandoned by the privileged human.

The half-truth left out of the equation by the politicians, known since the time of classic Greece, and necessary for a view of reality - is that industrial-base economies have only prospered in human Earth societies when they were expansive: increasing their domination or control over other societies, usually attended by military production subsidized by the state infusing massive amounts of capital into the economic system.

1977 - On February 8,
"The Enterprise", a U.S.A. North American Rockwell space shuttle craft is attached to a 747 and tested at Edwards Air Force Base. It is a result of X-15 and lifting body technologies which have proven to be unsuitable for operation both in space and in the atmosphere.

1977 - On February 14,
Lawrence McCool was driving along Highway 90 and was near the intersection of 90 and Route K, near Pineville, Missouri, trying to find the strange orange light that others had reported during the previous few nights. Reaching the crest of a hill, he suddenly saw a domed disc, not more than 75 feet above the ground, hovering over the trees, shining brightly and in the midst of a bright orange glow. His CB radio wouldn't work, his truck slowed, the lights went out, and the engine stalled. The weather was sleeting. McCool noticed a slight dome on top of the disc shape and he thought the outer edge and the centre were brighter than the rest. He estimated its size at 18 feet in diameter and between 4 and 6 feet thick. It hovered for several minutes and then faded from sight, and the radio, lights and engine came back to normal.

1977 - On February 27,
"The Chemistry of Smoking", the title of an article, was published in "Time" magazine.
The views of Columbia psychologist Stanley Schachter were expressed:

"Almost any smoker can convince you and himself that he smokes for psychological reasons or that smoking does something positive for him ... We smoke because we're physically addicted to nicotine. Period. ... withdrawal symptoms: increased eating, irritability and poorer concentration. ... Smoking doesn't reduce anxiety or calm the nerves. Not smoking increases anxiety by throwing the smoker into withdrawal. ... stress depletes body nicotine, and the smoker has to puff more to keep at his usual nicotine level. The key is the acidity of urine. One result of anxiety and stress is a high acid content in the urine. Highly acidic urine flushes away more body nicotine than normal urine does. ... smokers who were administered mild acids (vitamin C and Acidulin) in heavy doses smoked more over a period of days than comparable smokers who took bicarbonates to make their urine more alkaline."

His tests also show that bicarbonates reduce smoking under stress.
One experiment indicates that partygoing increases the acidity of the urine for smokers and non-smokers alike.

"It follows that the concerned smoker should take the Alka-Seltzer before - not after - the party. ... the smoker's mind is the bladder. ... it's probably a good guess that the low-tar brands are hooking millions of teen-agers. ... Now so many brands are so weak that the kids don't get sick enough to stop right away. They just get hooked. ... It's possible to control and restrict smoking, but the price appears to be a chronic state of withdrawal."

While billions of dollars were spent on military expenses during a period of undeclared war, and hundreds of millions of dollars went to advertise and politically lobby in favour of smoking, research into the causes, possible remedial and cure programs and prevention programs received minimal support. Obviously, the leaders of both Communist, Capitalist and Socialist industrial based nations believed that an addicted citizen is easier to manipulate and deceive than a clear headed person with a greater degree of awareness and self-control.

1977 -
Ron Cargile, in Feb/Mar, near Pinewood, Missouri, had heard of the sightings locally on his CB radio but was sceptical.
He decided he would take a look, so he went E. on Route K, crossed E, and stopped on the local high point. Just after 10:00 P.M., the CB was buzzing with static. Off to the left he saw an orange glow rise from the woods and begin drifting towards the large tree in front of him. The object was very bright and Cargile thought it was no more than 5 or 10 feet in diameter. He could see that it was disc-shaped with a dome on top and a band of colored metal that ran around the center of it. The object seemed to come toward him, suddenly veering away from him and passing behind the closest tree. The radio interference faded, Cargile started his truck and headed home.

1977 - During the year,
Near Valensole, France, a friend of Maurice Masse had an unusual experience.
It was broad daylight in fine weather and he was driving his John Deere Diesel tractor when the engine died. His transistor radio, powered by batteries, also stopped. He then became aware of a sort of whirlwind or atmospheric vortex to his right. Although he could not see any object, there was a definite phenomenon that moved away from him and ascended along a ridge, twisting the tops of the pine trees violently as it moved up, scattering the leaves from other tall trees. Parallels with crop circle phenomenon were drawn by some investigators.

When the phenomenon had passed, the tractor started normally.
One of the radio batteries was found completely dry a few days after the sighting.

1977 - During 1977,
A series of events took place on Crab Island, near Sao Luis, Brazil, in which one man died and two were severely burned by light rays shone on them from hovering craft at night.

1977 -
Third Country Bankers Acceptances become an additional norm for international trade and finance.
It is drawn on a bank in a country other than the country of the importer or exporter, and paid in the national currency of the accepting bank. Also called "refinance bills", they become favoured by exporters to obtain bank financing at competitive rates. Since the mid-1970s, Japanese and South Koreans have financed a large portion of their exports, including exports to European countries, through bankers' acceptances denominated in US dollars, which accounts for much of the growth of these acceptances through the 1980s.

1977 - During April,
Eduard Albert Meier and his family were moved from Hinwil, Switzerland to Schmidruti.
The farm was described by some who saw it as "an abandoned 50 acres of weeds, mud, and outbuildings falling down. It had no electricity and no running water. Beneath the 3-foot flood in the cellar lay 2 feet of mud. Old and diseased trees on the land bore little or no fruit, and underbrush grew thick in the surrounding forest. Water that could have been used for irrigation flowed at will, eroding the land in some places while leaving other sections dry." With the help of his friends, Meier began immediately to renovate the place.

Electricity and plumbing would come later.
First they removed the mud (from the basement of the house) by shovel and replaced it with dry gravel and poured concrete. Then, they put in vegetable gardens, damned and directed the water, filled ponds with irrigation, shored sagging walls on the barns and farmhouse until they could be rebuilt, and reshingled the roofs. Meier taught everyone how to do the work and it was done at every hour and day possible. Remember that he only had one arm.

His abductions and visitations continued throughout this period with his frequent disappearance in the middle of the day followed by his working in his office from midnight to three or four in the morning, when it was quiet. One day while some of the volunteers were up on a carriage house roof preparing to shingle it, Billy (Meier) came up the ladder behind one of the workers, and, suddenly, disappeared. Five or six people were always working around the building at the time; no one saw him leave, nor return. Four hours later, Meier suddenly reappeared, sitting on a cement slab by the barn, smoking a cigarette and appearing peaceful as he always did when he returned from a contact.

On another occasion, Billy had gone off into the woods to one of his visitations and had been gone some hours when, after momentarily having looked away, Engelbert looked back at a large nearby meadow to see Meier standing in the middle with no trees nearby to have concealed his arrival. He appeared to have arrived out of nothing. Herbert Runkel stayed with the Meiers for 6 months, through to the Fall, and while he constantly looked for anything that would reveal Meier to be a fraud he found nothing.

1977 - On May 1,
Dr. Carl Otto Aly, M.D., administrator of a 90-bed clinic in Sweden, in a lecture given at the Statler Hilton Hotel in New York City, New York, noted that

"Constipation is something of a beginning for cancer."

1977 - On May 2,
Mildred Andrews, head of the organ department of the faculty of music, University of Oklahoma, she stated that:

a) The human voice "is probably the greatest musical instrument we have";
b) Society must guard against using music so much that it is cheapened;
c) Today we "seem to be afraid of silence";
d) "I feel that music can so envelop us that the art can be cheapened"; and,
e) Music should not be "used in the church to escape silence, 
                                            but as a real aid to worship."

1977 - In May,
The British Parliament voted two to one to process radioactive wastes into solid glass at Windscale, Cumbria, for above-ground storage. This will permit ease of monitoring and repair. Secondly, some use may be found for the fission products.

1977 - During May,
"Stress blamed for passive men, wild wives", a newspaper article, appeared in the "Manchester Guardian" and was reprinted in numerous other North American papers. Dr. Pierre Mornell of Mill Valley, an assistant professor of psychiatry at the University of California's medical school and author of a book on sexual relations, was reported to have discovered a "marital syndrome" he termed "passive men and wild, wild women."

Statistics now give a one in three marriage to divorce chance in the United States, and one in two chance of divorce in California. This is how he describes an evening at home with a passive man:

"He arrives around 7 p.m. exhausted from a day at the office. He has usually spent his day dealing with people and their problems and he' had it up to his eyeballs. He wants to hide, withdraw, retreat from everyone - including (or especially) his family. He has a drink or two, reads the newspaper, wolfs down his dinner paying only token attention to his wife, maybe a little more to the kids, and withdraws behind the television's Monday night football game or Tuesday night's movie. Remaining glued to the set through the 11 p.m. news, he usually comes to bed with his wife (who is) already asleep."

As home life deteriorates he may not arrive until 11 p.m.
He is probably having an affair. Or, ... (he) has three stiff drinks before dinner, a bottle of wine with it, and nods off on the couch - a cosy convenience he uses in order not to risk the demands of the marital bed.

This kind of retreat causes his wife to make greater demands for ... "something he is not giving her." This causes him to retreat further. "She feels more pressured, becomes abusive. He retreats further. She becomes hysterical, bitchy." And then, the "wild, wild woman .... The relationship deteriorates as the husband lapses into total silence and the wife "loses control." ... (frequency of sexual relations diminishes to once or twice a month and) increased causes of impotence and premature ejaculation (occur). He says wives often focus their frustration on the man's lack of help in the house.

"Dirty clothes lying around or unwashed dishes (when its his turn) often lead to tremendous power struggles and unmitigated rages. These in turn lead to the psychiatrist's couch - or divorce. ... I think she keeps goading her husband because unconsciously she is threatened by the power she is developing over him."

More profoundly, (Mornell) blames male passivity on modern industrial society in which pressures of work have produced the absentee father, thus removing a son's chance of following a "necessary" masculine model. And while the modern middle-class father follows goals outside the home ... he becomes more critical of male efforts inside. Thus the passive father begets the passive son - a man who approaches his marriage in a negative manner.

Mornell dislikes America's reliance on an increasingly passive culture, dependant on pills and alcohol, which reaches its nemesis in television - "The epitome of passivity in society where an average American home has the (television) set on for more than seven hours a day. The female victims of passive men describe their men ... as "weak, immature, absent, ineffectual, indifferent, uninvolved, inactive, uncaring - or another child needing care." The doctor has only one prescription: Work on a marriage as you would work on a job.

This "syndrome" expanded throughout industrialized societies.
The "educated" intellectualizing, material-centred spouses strove for material goals which subverted the spiritual goals they had volunteered to follow at the alter. Society often demanded unreasonable commitment to one's career as the price for participation and advancement. Most such societies promote and educated their citizens to follow authoritarian relationship communication patterns including rigid role definition and familial expectations.

Mass media advertising and entertainment reinforced this imprinting and conditioning. While short-term focus on one's profession is not unreasonable, long-term primary commitment to one's job can only lead to feelings of abandonment and betrayal in the spouse. Lack of communication and emotional distance, brought on by chronic tiredness, encourages miscommunication, victimization, abuse, anger and vengeance. At the root of much of the problem is the structure of the society: authoritarian passive-aggressive relationships rather than assertive empowered ones.

Working in a society in which the individuals have been educated and prepared to cope with reality by the use of positive coping skills does not unnecessarily burden one with the emotional and communication problems of others. Such positive coping skills include positive self-esteem, positive self-direction, positive expectation and planning, assertiveness communication, positive self-responsibility, positive relaxation, expression of reverence, and others. This choice has been offered to North American and other technically advanced societies over the last 3 decades with little acknowledgement by societal leaders and virtually no interest shown by the individual participants. The resulting degradation, anarchy and dissolution of relationships amongst the participants has produced a continually weakening society.

1977 - On May 30,
Luis "Boyet" Mijares told his mother that he had received a phone call saying his father was alive and inviting the boy to come and see him. He insisted upon going. "Tibo" Mijares had been a Philippine newspaper columnist. He knew that under a dictatorship and martial law, the best way to survive was to flatter who could pay you. He had written a favourable column in the government-controlled "Daily Express" and was welcome into Marcos office almost any time without appointment. He had served as "Media Advisory Council" for the regime. A lawyer by training and married to a judge, Mijares was also president of the "National Press Club." A highly intelligent man of practical morals, he left a trail of misappropriated funds, bad debts, rubber checks, and petty extortions. When Imelda turned against him, it was time to leave.

Late in 1974, Mijares had rashly accused Kokoy Romualdez of cheating the Lopez family.
Kokoy warned him, "You will see what will happen to you. I will tell this to my sister."

On February 20, 1975, Mijares issued a statement declaring his severance of relationship with the Malacanang Palace, morally and as an employee. Ferdinand first tried to discredit Mijares. For awhile, Mijares catered to both sides, feeding information to both about the other. Beginning in May, 1975, Mijares began receiving offers of bribes from the Marcos regime. On June 16, he received a phone call from Ferdinand. He was offered a bribe of $50,000 not to testify. It would be war if he refused.

Mijares testified and requested political asylum.
Ferdinand had offered Mijares $100,000 to recant his testimony and retire to Australia.
On April 27, 1976, "Conjugal Dictatorship" by Luis Mijares was published to the great embarrassment of the Marcoses.

By February, 1977, Mijares himself had disappeared.
Mihares phoned his wife, Manila Judge Priscilla Mijares, saying he was taking a Pan American flight to Guam. He left in the company of Querube Makalintal, a Marcos intelligence officer posing as a revenue attache at the Philippine Consulate in San Francisco. Fabian Ver also boarded the same flight. They changed to a Philippines Air Lines flight to Manila in Guam. NISA agents met the trio at the airport in Manila and took Mijares to Ver's headquarters at Fort Bonifacio, where he was put in a dungeon.

On May 30, Mijares 16-year-old son had gone to see his father.
His body was later found dumped outside Manila. His eyeballs were protruding, his hands, feet and genitals mangled, his head bashed in, and his chest perforated with multiple stab wounds. The mutilation was typical of incidents where, to extract information from an uncooperative prisoner, another member of the family was grotesquely tortured in front of the other. That had not been the case here. The vengeance of the Marcoses had been to have the father forced to see and hear the torture and mutilation of his son.

1977 - By June 6,
The oculometer, a device developed by the Honeywell Radiation Center in Lexington, Massachusetts, had been in use by advertisers for some months. Originally developed to monitor unobtrusively the eye movements of astronauts, the infra-red beam of the device is directed at the eye of the subject and the portion reflected by the cornea is detected by a sensor. The angle of the reflected light is determined electronically and the result is that the operator knows where the focus of the subject's eye is directed.

Following a study of housewives looking at advertisements, the following was determined:

    1. A person in a commercial commanded instant visual attention;
    2. Products and slogans are noticed after the persons depicted;
    3. Attention spans of the viewers were short: 4 seconds or less.

While many possible civilian benefits have been suggested, it is noteworthy that psychologist James Porterfield, at the Wright-Patterson Air Force Base in Dayton, Ohio, has used the oculometer to study whether the eyes could control military weapons normally operated by hand. Within a year, weapons would be manufactured designed for such operation; they would be used in war within 11 years.

1977 - During the last week of June,
William S. English, a Data Analyst for the USAF Security Services Command stationed in England at RAF Chicksands, viewed what would become termed the "Grudge/Blue Book Report #13". It detailed abduction and mutilation of humans by spacebeings, observation of UFOs, military encounters, and a variety of technical and engineering concepts tremendously advanced beyond the sophistication of modern humans. By the second week of July, English was met on check-in by an Air Security policeman and instructed to see the base Commander immediately.

He was escorted by 2 officers to the Headquarters's Building where a Colonel Robert Black informed him that he was being discharged and sent back to the USA. Although a civilian employee, English was given no further explanation and was not allowed to contact his wife or family to notify them of the changes. He was immediately escorted to RAF Lakenheath under armed guard and flown to the USA.

After arriving in the USA, English tried repeatedly to contact his wife and family yet on each occasion he found that his wife's phone was answered by a man who promptly hung up. Neither could he send messages by way of friends. After several months of trying to make contact by phone and through the services of friends, English found out what the military whom he had worked for had effected. She and his family had been transferred to another base shortly after his forced departure. She had been told that he had quit his job and deserted her and his family. For the next while Bill English would find his movements closely watched by USA Intelligence.

Several months later, while working as a security guard at a college he took the opportunity to attend a speech by Stanton Friedman with whom he conversed afterward about Grudge/Blue Book #13. Friedman, Allen Benz and Jim Lorenzen then took him back to the offices of the Aerial Phenomenon Research Organization (APRO) - a largely UFO debunking organization - where they recorded his statement.

1977 -
The "Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunications" (SWIFT) is organized by a group of European bankers who wanted a more efficient method than telegraph wire (telex) or mail to send payment instructions to correspondent banks. A nonprofit, cooperative organization, it facilitates the exchange of payment messages between financial institutions around the world. Among its hundreds of members are USA money centres and regional banks, and major banks in Europe, Latin America, Africa, Asia, and Australia. SWIFT provides the framework for an international communication system between financial institutions, using common terminals and standard communications protocols.

By itself, SWIFT is not a payment system; a SWIFT message is merely an advice, an instruction to transfer funds to a specified account at another bank. The exchange of funds between banks takes place on domestic funds clearing systems. In the USA, interbank transfers of funds are handles by the Federal Reserve System's Federal Wire Network (used by the Federal Reserve Banks and the Treasury for very large currency transactions) or by the "Clearing House Interbank Payments System" (CHIPS) - which would be modified in 1981 to effect settlement at the end of the day.

1977 - On July 17,
Near Happy Valley, northern California, U.S.A., Pat, a woman in her forties, was puzzled by events which accompanied sightings in the area. One night she heard heavy footsteps on the roof of her home. Another night she observed a huge bird flying low in the glow of a streetlight. On this date, the 17th, she saw a sphere of light near her bed and in the morning she discovered that all the doors in the house were open.

1977 - On July 26,
The 1977 World Population Report, published by "Population Concern" was summarized in the "London Times":

"The report points out that if the present rate of population growth had existed since the birth of Christ there would now be 900 people for every square yard of the Earth. Half the fuel ever used by man has been burnt in the past 50 years. The world's population is now more than 4.000 million and increasing by 200,000 every day.

Two hundred thousand extra people on this crowded planet every single day! That is 73,000,000 a year. And that will result, in only 3 years, in more additional people than the entire present population of America!"

1977 - On July 27,
Report of a "Suppression" Bill being rushed through the U.S.A. legislature to become law by September, was published in the London "Evening Standard":

"It prohibits the publishing of an official report without permission, arguing that this obstructs the Government's control of its own information. That was precisely the charge brought against Daniel Ellsberg for giving the Pentagon papers to the "New York Times".

Most ominous of all, the Bill would make it a crime for any present or former civil servant to tell the Press or Government of wrong-doing or pass on any news based on information "submitted to the Government in private".

1977 - By August,
The budget of American advertisers had topped $33 billion a year.
Their purpose was to shape the consuming habits of Americans.
The cost: nearly $600 for each family in the land.
Here was an unsolicited "educational" program designed to misinform the average American.

Misinformation is used to motivate, deceive, manipulate, confuse people.
Typically, good misinformation, like acts of fraud, are 80% true and accurate data associated with 20% garbage. American advertising was telling the consumer that certain products were available. It also encouraged the average consumer to follow the portrayed majority in its habits, choices and successes. It projected the "average" person as happy, carefree, generous, sensual, relaxed, beautiful, of high moderate income, with gross material benefits, a great job and a contented family with obedient children and passionate spouses.

The advertising medium did not permit discussion nor encourage criticism.
Turn on your TV; there was no one listening to, or concerned for, you, yet there was an image reflected back at you. Read your newspaper or magazine or listen to your radio: they told you what reality was. The deception was that the average American was depressed, anxious, concerned about finances (or should have been), did not feel comfortable with their physical bodies, were too self-centred to be sensual, were compulsive in habit, not proportioned according to the social ideal, had low to moderate incomes, were always short of possessing some material gadget, were not all that enthusiastic about their job, had a family that inter-communicated poorly, children that acted out and spouses who were either obsessive about physical sexuality or too tired, frustrated or distracted to be passionate. American advertising told the consumer that they were not average; they were worse than average. It had a solution: you could relate to and become an average consumer by buying .... The deception was the image.

The manipulation was the promise.
The confusion was the suggestion that if you did something simply to be more "average", how could it be extravagant, improper or wrong? The reality was that no matter how much you bought to LOOK like that ideal average, those purchases would not change what you were, for the better, spiritually.

1977 - During the year,
"CIA Improvised Sabotage Devices" was published by "Desert Publications" of Phoenix, Arizona, and made fully and freely available to any member of the public. There was no means or needs test involved, no registration of ownership, no government orprivate concern for the public welfare. In "The Introduction" it was noted:

"... why spend time on improvising field expedients to do the job (of sabotage)?

for one thing shelf items will just not be available for certain operations for security or logical reasons. In these cases the operator will have to rely on materials he can buy in a drug or paint store, find in a junk pile, or scrounge from military stocks.

Secondly, many of the ingredients and materials used in fabricating homemade items are so commonplace or innocuous they can be carried without arousing suspicion. The completed item itself often is more easily concealed or camouflaged.

In addition, the field expedient item can be tailored for the intended target, thereby providing an advantage over the standard item in flexibility and versatility.

While most of the pertinent information on sabotage shelf items is available in catalogues and other publications, much of the improvisation know-how has remained in the minds or files of a few individuals.

It is the intent of this manual to consolidate and bring up to date a selected body of this information for wider use (by whom and for what purpose?)."

The manual then continues with sections describing standard explosives; standard firing systems; improvised firing systems including electric pressure switches, water-drop electric delays, expansion electric delays, pocket watch electric delays, electric pull-release, mousetrap electric release, acid and rubber chemical delay, fuse lighter non-electric pull, fuse lighter nonelectric pressure; improvised detonators including rifles and grenade fuses; steel cutting techniques; standard charge preparations; derailment techniques; improvised cratering explosive; cone shaped charges; platter charges; counterforce charges; diamond charges; cable cutting charges; ambush or antipersonnel charges; disassembly of the USA 3.5" high explosive antitank rocket; improvised incendiaries including igniters, time fuse fire starters, homemade napalm, incendiaries; dust and vapor explosions; storage tank charges.

The manual provides detailed descriptions on methods for destroying property and endangering lives; there is no other purpose. And most human governments show no leadership in protecting their citizens from possible acts by mentally disoriented and confused persons who wish to enact vengeance against faceless and largely innocent and ignorant citizens for the wrongs which he or she feels have been committed by the authorities representing the culture.

1977 - During the year,
The last case of Smallpox would be treated in Somalia.
It had led to the deaths of as many as 600,000 people per year in Europe during the Black Death, even though it was not the major fatal illness of the period.

1977 - During August,
The BLONDS developed a particular animosity toward the GRAYS for reasons of survival.
It became known to the BLONDS that the GRAYS intended to destabilize human political systems with a limited nuclear war which would kill massive humanity and result in the remainder being easily corralled into slavery. Nuclear radiation influences the GRAYS very little; it influences BLONDS to the extent that humans receive adverse and fatal effects. BLONDS rejected the nuclear war solution as dangerous to themselves.

Their strategy was one of working on the use of biological contamination as a means to destroy or decimate human populations. The AIDS virus was an initial effort. Other biological "bombs" are expected by 1995. Their development program began in 1975 and progresses slowly due to the strength of human immunodefenses plus the deceptions required to maintain the programs and tests in absolute secrecy.

BLONDS hope they can succeed with their biological bomb before the GRAYS and humanity succeed with a nuclear war. Requiring a planet base for expansion of their numbers to an optimum size before attempting to find a further planetary base, the BLONDS believe they can cope with any earthly geological upheavals, if humanity can be decimated or destroyed. They are confident that the GRAYS will forego nuclear war as an option if the numbers of humanity can be reduced by other means. BLONDS have provided technical improvements in the areas of : antimissile missiles, human sensors for security, pollution control, political peace diplomacy. Their apparent idealism and efforts are targeted at preventing degradation of earth's environment below a survival level for them before they can decimate human populations.

1977 - On the evening of Tuesday, August 30,
Over Healdsburg, northern California, an entire family of five, the Crays, saw 3 round objects in the sky including one which was estimated to be 50 feet long. They landed, flashed and zoomed. One hovered over their car; it had no windows. The location is 90 minutes by car north of San Francisco. The Air National Guard had been conducting maneuvers that evening over the ocean, well off the coast of Bodega Bay, forty miles from Healdsburg. Bright coloured lights attended the craft and were also seen by an unnamed couple in a car, a woman living in Alexander Valley, and a man named Melville who watched the object depart with the Crays.

Large round lights, pulsating and blinking, rose one after the other into the sky from the coastal hills south of Fitch Mountain, located east of the town. There was a large cream-coloured object and six smaller ones around it - green, red, and blue. They were driving home at the time and pulled off the road so as not to block traffic and to stop and watch the lights and objects. They were driving down a hill to Highway 101 and when they reached the intersection with Old Redwood Highway, one object apparently left the group and zoomed to within 40 feet of the road. They continued south on Old Redwood Highway until suddenly the road was flooded with light which was "much brighter than the high beams of a car at the same distance, it was like the light was in my head."

Mrs. Cray estimated its diameter at 50 feet and said it had several windows and 2 beams of light.
The older daughter drew an oval object with a bright glow and added that a face looked back at them behind the windows, a silhouette like a frogs head. Several aspects of the experience confused them: it appeared as if they could touch it although it was at least 10 or 20 feet away, its direction of movement relative to the car seemed wrong, the time progression of the experience seemed to be in slow motion, and their destination seemed further away than it really was.

Mrs. Cray, Cathy and Jeff felt nauseated; Jeff vomited upon arriving at Mr. Melville's place.
Cathy and her mother developed headaches and nausea that night and were upset for two days. They were unable to sleep normally for several days. Jeff felt fine the next day but did not eat normally until the day after. Mr. Melville noted that the luminous object had been seen over a local winery. At the time of the sighting, visibility was 30 miles, temperature 87 degrees F. with a dew point of 49.

The Air National Guard routinely fly helicopters for training in rescue missions from Hayward over Richmond, south of Novato and south of Petaluma, not taking them close to Healdsburg. The helicopters fly at an altitude of 3,000 to 3,500 feet during these missions.

1977 - By the Fall,
A 200-Ton Shipload of Natural Uranium was discovered.
It had been stolen 10 years earlier while enroute in the Mediterranean Sea.
An average 500:1 ratio yields uranium metal from average uranium ore.
Variations of the ratio can be quite extreme. We have no record of the purity of this shipment.
On an average basis, the 200 tons could have yielded 800 pounds of uranium metal.
As little as 8 pounds, or as much as 80 pounds, of U-235, the reactive isotope, could have been refined from that.

The supercritical mass for Uranium-235 is defined as 110 pounds (50 kgs) so the above amounts would not have been sufficient to make a modern nuclear weapon by themselves. Mixed with as little as 22 pounds (10 kgs) of Plutonium, the possibility would have been much greater for success. Obviously, the hijackers could not find someone with a large nuclear power reactor (over 2 megawatt) capable of producing the plutonium, or someone with another shipload of ore, or someone with a combination of the larger reactor and some additional ore - so it sat waiting for a buyer for 10 years.

1977 - In the Fall,
Two people on Benjamin Creek Road, near Happy Camp in northern California, saw a Douglas fir tree snapped in two while an unknown force dragged their pickup truck in reverse around a bend for 50 feet. The top 80 feet of the tree was thrown about 60 feet away, while a glowing white sphere moved over the area.

1977 - On September 6,
Lorraine, in the company of her daughter, near Happy Camp, in northern California, U.S.A., saw a disk-shaped craft which was "lit all the way around."

1977 - In September,
A cluster of lethal events began to be reported in the Belem area of Brazil through the health unit on the island of Colares. At first Dr. Wellaide Cecim Carvalho de Oliveira, discounted the reports from the patients about the "chupas" as popular myth or local sorcery. When every day started bringing a new patient, she conducted a more thorough study of the lesions exhibited by the victims, notably burns that resembled radiation injuries.

These lesions, according to Dr. Oliveira began with intense reddening of the skin in the affected area. Later, the hair would fall out and the skin would turn black. There was no pain, only a slight warmth. One also noticed small puncture marks in the skin. The victims were men and women of varying ages, without any apparent pattern.

One day, a woman arrived early in the morning very agitated saying she had been hit by a chupa.
There was extreme reddening of the skin on her left breast and two puncture marks elsewhere. She could barely raise a glass of water to her lips. She had trouble breathing and was dizzy and felt weak. They were later defined as characteristic symptoms of the "attacks", along with headaches, a decrease in the number of red blood cells. Three hours later, the doctor was urgently called to the woman's house. She was in a deep coma, the body was totally rigid, gasping for breath. She had no fever and did not want to vomit. The patient was sent to Belem in a car of the Prefecture. Hours later, a death certificate came back noting heart failure as the cause of death.

The official diagnosis completely disregarded the data that Dr. Carvalho had supplied and she became suspicious. The authorities remained silent about the whole situation and she stopped sending statements about such cases. In fear and frustration, she destroyed a 30-page document she had prepared about her clinical observations.

A few weeks after the events had started, a Brazilian Air Force team had arrived on the island.
They arrived in two vehicles, two officers and a dozen men, engineers, geologists, and a biologist.
They erected two shelters and asked witnesses to keep quiet about what they had seen.
At night they set up telescopes and cameras to photograph the chupas. The mission lasted 90 days and 300 night photographs plus several motion-picture reels and a 500 page report were compiled, accompanied by a catalogue of sightings, maps, and interview transcripts. Copies were sent to Armed Forces Headquarters in Brasilia, and the originals went to Barreiro do Inferno (the Gate of Hell) in the state of Rio Grande do Norte.

By the time the sightings subsided in November, 1977, Dr. Carvalho had seen over 35 patients; all suffered from lesions to the face or thoracic area, claimed to have been inflicted by the chupas. Due to the nature of the injury, the consistency of the placement of the lesions, and no report of same on other animals, the "attacks" appear to have been carried out by an "intelligent" being in that they were not random nor done for the purposes of killing for food.

The Belem headquarters of the 1st Regional Air Command (COMAR), covering an area four times as large as France, maintained a UFO field investigation team from 1974 to 1982. The unit accepted that UFOs existed and sought to investigate them scientifically with no information being made public.

1977 - During September,
William S. English becomes the subject of an assassination attempt while riding his motorcycle between Tucson and Sierra Vista, Arizona. Currently starting a small custom leather shop in Tucson and going to visit his father who had a Real Estate office in Sierra Vista, English was followed by a black, 1978 Lincoln Continental car. Eventually, it tried intentionally to run over or run English off the road. Having missed him, it screeched to a stop, swung around and headed back at him again. English escaped by taking his own path over the desert on his motorcycle. This was the first of over 14 attempts that would be made against his life. A short time earlier he had relayed what he knew about the Grudge/Blue Book #13 to Stanton Friedman and representatives of APRO.

1977 - On September 30,
The Houston Control Center was closed by NASA.
It had been the Earth-based command center for Project Apollo.
The total cost including the development and production of all the hardware, facilities, tracking networks and launch costs, was estimated by NASA to be $24.5 billion ($118 billion at 1991 currency valuation). The last mission, Apollo 17 was concluded in December, 1972. Thereafter, human scrutiny and concern for the heavens diminished markedly making clandestine flights easier. Simple math means EACH Apollo mission, including the failures, cost almost $7 billion (1991). The General Accounting Office suggests that NASA USUALLY provided underestimates, by up to 30%.

A total of 358 kg of lunar soil and rock samples had been returned to Earth for analysis and by the end of Apollo 14, scientists had already established that oxygen could be produced from lunar soil in sufficient quantities to make shipment of liquid oxygen into orbit as a propellant economically viable. Humans had landed and walked on the surface and determined that there was a light atmosphere and whispy cloud presence plus atmospheric circulation. They had also been advised telepathically by spacepersons already present not to return and to quit leaving their junk on the Moon. What cost is human pride worth? Or, is it intellectual vanity?

1977 - During the year,
The degree of computerization of information about individuals was criticized in the British press.
Teachers in public and other schools protested the "intrusive details" they were required to supply on their pupils' "confidential record cards" - details about the children's home-life, about the behaviour and personalities of the parents. At many schools for very young children, the students were being encouraged to keep weekly diaries about their home-life and had to write essays entitled "My Mother" or "My Father". Teachers were told that it was imperative that all possible details be supplied regularly to the local authorities.

Many other forms are required by law to be completed for reasons of taxation, banking, investment, import/export, charges under the law, medical history including strength and dose of medications, credit sources used together with the frequency of use, the timeliness of the payments, the size of the balance and an itemization of the purchases. A large minority of the work force in larger technically advanced nations resides in the civil service. Job applications, resumes, interview notes, personnel evaluation, test results, and personal habits are likely to be entered into some computer on them.

The amalgamation of all pertinent systems into one, or several, "Big Brothers" in the modern age is entirely possible. Reports on millions of people in the U.S.A. were gathered on individuals, innocent or guilty, by the FBI. In more recent times masses of those files have been computerized.

The disturbing fact about a quantity of this "personalized" information is that it promotes spurious analysis from subjectively prejudiced descriptions of what and who individuals are and what their actions and affiliations mean.

1977 -
"A Testable Theory for UFO Abduction Reports: The Birth Memories Hypothesis", is produced during the year by Alvin H. Lawson, Professor of English at California State University, assisted by physician, W.C. McCall. Described as a result of research conducted over the previous decade at an Anaheim, California hospital, the author believes that it is "one of the few scientifically testable hypotheses yet proposed about abduction cases and other aspects of the UFO enigma." The theory presented is derived from:

"The imaginary abductee study induced imaginary abductions in 16 volunteers who had demonstrated no significant knowledge of UFOs. Eight situational questions comprising the major components of a typical abduction account were asked of each subject. Expected major dissimilarities, an averaged comparison of data from four imaginary and four putatively real abduction narratives showed no substantive differences. ... asked to imagine a scenario under hypnosis and described a convincing story where no abduction had been reported."

This study would be quoted by anti-UFO adherents and disinformation purveyors as late as 1996 in support of their intellectualized denial, intentional attempts to deceive the public, or, status quo dissassociation with reality and psuedo-idolatry of science. IF the theory was as authoritative as it is self-described, none of the following could be presented as concerns.

Only 16 subjects are tested over a period of 10 years.
That is, 16 subjects out of a population of over 250 million are tested over a period of 5200 weeks and their responses are said to provide scientific proof of the responses of the remaining millions. If this were true, almost ANY theory devised on ANY subject of human perception and experience could be "proven". The numerical significance relative to either the time duration or the small number of subjects totally disqualifies ANY conclusions and observations.

It raises the possibility, real or imaginary, that the author tested 250 subjects over a period of ten years (about one every 20 weeks), found that only 16 fulfilled the expectations of the theory, discarded the reaminder, and reported the subset as the only participants - all of whom coincidentally totally reinforced the theory. If such were the reality a ratio of 16 out of 250 subjects is irrelevant.

If there really were only 16 subjects, the time duration of 5200 weeks would only enable the study to be relevant if it were conducted with subjects taken from an institutional detention environment in which mass media contact was absent and social contact was restrictive - special penetentiary, high risk mental illness ward, concentration camp, forest fire remote spotter without radio or TV, lighthouse keeper without mass media, .... Anyone else chosen from the North American population during the period 1967 - 1977 would have had a high likelihood of direct or indirect exposure to some form of reference to UFO phenomenon.

Of the 16 subjects chosen, nothing is specified regarding the nature of their selection beyond that of "had demonstrated no significant knowledge of UFOs." This is NOT a scientific selection. Who decides what is "significant" and what exactly was regarded as "significant." To one person, "significant" could mean believing that one has experienced an abduction themselves; to another, "significant" could be a conscious acknowledgement of reports of UFOs. There is a dramatic perceptual and experiential difference. Thus, selection of volunteers may have predisposed a particular conclusion. Inadequate characterization and choice of subjects is a major flaw in any so-called scientific study.

It is noted that the subjects are hypnotized and questioned and that the resulting answers form the bulk of the evidence supporting the theory. There is no indication given, and, in the field of hypnosis such is difficult, as to the qualifications of or expertise of the inductionist - who is presumably the physician. Over the next 30 years, and already obvious to the well known (ie. Milton H. Erickson, Ernest and Shiela Rossi, William S. Kroeger, and others) - hypnosis is an art, NOT a technical skill. Some subjects are impossible to hypnotize; some are very easy to hypnotize; a great variation exists between the two. The suggestion that any hypnotist could take any 16 subjects and successfully and fully hypnotize all 100% is ludicrous to any knowledgeable person.

An excellent hypnotist is ethical, empathetic, compassionate, self-directed, assertive, sensitive, reflective, innovative, experienced, well-informed, humble, and analytical. Few practitioners, be they academics, artists, lay therapists, physicians, psychiatrists, social workers, ... meet this criteria. Competent hypnotists, like those competent in many other professioanl fields - tend to be the minority of those who actually practise. In a scientific study, if the inductions used as verification are not taped and available for review, they don't deserve mention. Human authority structures frequently replace the relevance of ability with the irrelevance of title. We have little knowledge here, either by example or by reference, that any of the inductions were carried out in a truly scientific or professioanl manner.

Technically, a subject in a hypnotic trance can be subtly manipulated and coerced into fabricating and believing a new reality sought by the inductionist. This fact would produce countless injustices in the area of child abuse prosecution, religious leader abuse of support staff, sexual abuse of patients by psychiatrists, and others over the next 15+ years. A true scientific study includes a copy of the inductive and questioning script in the study and varies little from it in the execution of each induction. This was not evident here.

Questionnaire construction continues to be a changing and improving field.
It is one of those activities frequently dominated by academic intellectuals who seem to lack the experience, empathy and humility to recognize the weaknesses of their creations. Most researchers who devise questionnaires do so without a substantial analysis of previous styles of structure and findings. Many people re-invent a bent wheel which they proudly display as an original. Academic institutions add credibility to both the structure and the findings by publishing thousands of such studies each year - usually with little relevance, practicality, or, thoughtful development. Most authors are seeking field acceptance and academic accreditation by the technical completion of an activity. True, long questionnaires frequently drain the energy and strain the attention span of the respondent.

Questionnaires which are shorter than 10 questions are often so focused on the theoretical statement being tested that anyone with an IQ of 80 can often perceive the orientation and expectation of the administrator. If questions are asked which must be answered with either a "yes" or "no", there is frequently a skewing of the answers apart from the reality because the reality requires such additional options as "sometimes," "don't know," and "not applicable." Coerced into an either/or statement, some questionnaires produce results which are grossly deceptive by their expressed authority of results. Similarly, questionnaires which tend to have all positively or negatively expressed questions can often encourage a pattern of answers. In a series of 8 questions, one can hardly vary question delivery, variability of answer options, introduction of non topic variety, inclusion of open-ended opinion eliciting requests, ... - and, remain focused enough to provide enough relevant detail to support any but the simplest of thesis.

Volunteers frequently seek to please the questionnaire provider as a factor of ego-fulfillment for the priviledge of participating or out of subconscious obligation for whatever benefit has been offered by the provider: attention, academic credit, social distinction, payment, sandwich, gift, .... More impartial subjects are often those chosen at random from the population and willing to participate for no other reward than that of facilitating the collection of accurate and relevant data.

The use of the word "substantive" presents the same difficulties as the use of the word "significant."
To a full-time academic or a professional intellectual the use of these terms is often dissociated from reality. Rather than define a "scientific" study, they frequently portray a subjective orientation of either status quo or reactionary attitudes cloaked in such bywords as "objective" because many readers are conditioned to assume that what they take to be the meaning is what the experimenter intended. Closer study often reveals this to be false. In this way, students, uninformed public, and status quo professionals contribute to the deception which may be injected into a study by the use of normative (popular) wordings through their lack of awareness of the potential variation in meaning and their willingness to accept as truth whatever is structured in the basic structures of rationalization which have been imprinted on them by their culture. To that extent, a good debater (rationalizer) can often persuade such an audience to accept and believe almost any suggestion as both the truth and reality.

The above represents the most obvious and glaring examples of misinformation that can be present in any questionnaire-based study. The final caution which will be noted here is that any study which is self-described as "scientific" usually is not. A scientific study does not need to tell you what is obvious by its structure, content, and expression of conclusions.

1977 - On October 18, shortly after 1.30 A.M.,
Two people were returning from a visit to Amos, California to southern California.
They saw a bright light approaching from the south. They stopped their truck but could hear no sound, even with the engine turned off. The object flew to the right as the passenger readied a camera, then experiencing a thought that to film it would be a waste of time. Instead, he looked at it through the binoculars: he saw four square lights on what appeared to be a fuselage, without wings or tail. The light was bluish-green. The passenger regrets not having taken pictures of this atypical sighting.

A number of experiences have suggested over the decades that some space beings are capable of projecting thoughts and controlling the mind of the target(s). This may range from hypnosis-like induced images of what the ships and beings appear like to induced experiences and conversations and post-hypnotic suggestions either to forget the real or faked experience or to hold it aside until a later date. This makes ALL sightings and experiences suspect as to what is real and what has been "planted" and what is the rationale being the deception. Is it to protect us from a reality that would threaten our sanity because it conflicts with our strongly held assumptions about reality, or a means to prepare us to be future "programmed" replicants capable of devastating humanity, or a way of preparing us/the space beings for a future Walk-in, or ....

1977 - On October 18 and 19,
Charles Kowal, of the California Institute of Technology (Caltech) rediscovered the planet "Chiron" in photographs taken through the 48-inch Schmidt telescope at Palomar Observatory. Chiron was classifed as an 18th-magnitude object comparable to the largest asteroids and many times larger than the typical nucleus of a comet. It was defined as "asteroid 2060", later to be changed to "Chiron" on November 1, 1977, and declared a planet.

1977 - Over the next 10 years,
"Limited Partnership Units" become a popular from of investment and tax shelter.
Individual investors participate in the business as a minority partner receiving a share of the profits made and being responsible for a share of the losses, if any. The limited partner does not have any operational responsibilities regarding the business invested in and only limited liability. Many real estate developments, often of a resort nature, as well as other ventures were invested in by North Americans and Europeans. The ventures could be located either within the country of the investor or elsewhere.

Typically, high operational expenses in the early years contributed to additional expenses to the investor, which were treated as losses and written off against the investor's regular income. If the investor was in a high tax bracket, all of the "losses" could be written off and an equal amount of income tax could be saved. In this manner, large amounts of tax from high income earners could be deferred to private investments which held no tax consequence. This presented the situation where for the government to collect the amount of taxes which it had budgeted for, it would have to raise the tax assessed against lower income earners, or, be left with a higher deficit and with fewer funds to provide a central bank reserve.

1977 - During November,
The Cobra Dane Radar (1175-1375 MHz) on Shemya Island at the western edge of the Aleutian Islands would begin to be a major source of data to NORAD on the USSR ICBM/SLBM tests impacting near Kamchatka Peninsula, eastern Soviet Union. By 1984, it would become the first US radar to track Soviet space launches. It is one thing to be able to detect a launch and track it; yet another to know what the purpose of it is.

1977 - By December,
Eduard Meier had shown a series of photographs to Herbert Runkel which he said had resulted from time travel with the Pleiadian Semjase. They showed the rubble of San Francisco following a massive earthquake that would occur sometime in the future. Later, a friend of Herbert's discovered an article in GEO magazine that showed an artist's conception of what the long-predicted catastrophe might do to the city, and Meier's photographs obviously had been taken, so it was believed, of this lifelike painting. Meier was seldom away from his property to any great distance and is never know to have seen this painting directly. Also, good photo analysis could have demonstrated whether Meier's photo was of a painting or of an actual scene. Regardless, with all the beautiful photographs that no one seemed able to duplicate or explain, Herbert was unable to understand why Meier would resort to such an obvious fabrication.

Meier said that the Pleiadians simply placed in the artist's mind an accurate picture of the real future, the same one Meier had photographed. Eduard only had the truth and his rational suggestions to account for the occurrences. Herbert had an educated distrust of anything unknown or beyond conventional simplistic, human-centred description. Herbert, a supposed friend, was called upon to choose a position: one which would deny Eduard, please the loud sceptics and gain him respect in conventional society; or, one which would support Meier on the basis of the trust he had earned in the past, lower the sceptics upon him as an observer and further segregate him into the fringe elements of society. Herbert chose the former, and so would most of you. Gossip had won again: innuendo, suggestion, prejudice, lack of fact.

1977 - During December,
VISA (formerly National BankAmericard Inc.) became a member-owned association, based in San Mateo, California, that licensed Visa service marks to financial institutions issuing VISA Credit and Debit cards. It provides net settlement services for its members through its transaction settlement networks. Visa manages a global electronic communications network, called VisaNet, connecting financial institutions, merchant authorization terminals, and automatic teller machines.

The Visa International Services Association, Mastercard International, and numerous other credit cards entered the market with the intent of expanding market sales through convenience. Cheque cashing was becoming increasingly difficult and time consuming for it often required multiple verification of identification. Theft and robbery were increasing with the incidence of drug and alcohol abuse: carrying large amounts of cash was proving hazardous. The credit card required minimal verification and was difficult for thieves to use.

The aspect of the card which became more used by the cardholder was the line of credit associated with it.
Increasingly, because of convenience, more purchases were made on a spontaneous basis than under careful consideration. When unemployment increased, those now with a reduced or no income resorted to the use of the credit on the card with the expectation that their period of unemployment would be short; too often it was not. Increasingly, largely inexperienced persons with minimum savings, were persuaded by promises of higher incomes and independent businesses, to purchase educational or training courses on card credit as well as the startup materials and supplies. Real estate investment seminars advocated the credit limit on multiple cards to make a down payment on property.

All of this credit was costly, as much as 40% more costly than a personal bankloan.
The major difference was that credit card advances could be obtained without a job history, asset list, interview, or ability to repay assessment. Within 10 years, numerous consumers would have 12,000 credit on their credit cards. The problem for bankers was that the increased interest charges paid by their depositors on the credit card balances were draining away bank deposits to the card companies and the competition was fragmenting their personal loan business which added to their profits. The trend threatened to diminish bank profits and raise the cost of their reserves.

For the consumer, the capitalism myth of an ever more prospering society never returned for long and the consumer's hope of bailing out of debt was seldom met.

1977 - On Saturday, December 17, at 7.45 P.M.,
A red luminous airborne object was observed by 2 residents of Council Bluffs, Iowa.
This object crashed to earth in the vicinity of a dike at Big Lake Park, on the northern city limits.
A bright flash was seen, followed by flames 8 to 10 feet high. When the witnesses reached the dike they found a large area covered with a mass of molten metal that glowed red-orange, igniting the grass nearby.

Police and firefighters arrived quickly.
One officer described it as "running, boiling down the edges of the levee" over an area about 4 feet by 6 feet. There were 11 known witnesses and two had seen a hovering red object with lights blinking in sequence around the periphery beforehand.

Inquiries at nearby Eppley Air Field and Offutt Air Force Base confirmed that there was no aircraft operation in the area. Analysis of the metal indicated that it was chiefly iron with small amounts of alloying metals such as nickel and chromium, which excludes meteoric material. The microstructure indicated that it was a carbon steel that was cast, reheated to about 1,000 degrees F. and then cooled. Two similar falls in the same region were reported in July 1978.

1977 - In a December 26 "Maclean's" issue Interview,
Dr. Gregory Fouts, an associate professor at the University of Calgary, Alberta, specializing in developmental psychology, addressed the subject of television depiction of violence:

"TV producers and especially sponsors of television have emphasized the entertainment value of the TV and have not paid attention to what the viewers need. They usually produce the cheapest kinds of entertainment, meaning production costs. It is cheaper, for example, to produce a crime show than a good drama. And as long as you're in the profit motivation, you're going to produce those programs that realize the largest profit. ...

Pro-social contents are those that are specifically designed to help a viewer ... For example, if you have a home environment in which the parents encourage solutions to personal problems, then the child is getting pro-social modeling in the home, and when he sees violent contents he may go to his parents and say, "I saw such and such violence on TV.' And the parents sit down and talk to the child, then he can use that model on TV as a point to diverge from rather than to imitate. ...

Generally what we found was that the more TV programs are discouraged by parents, the happier the child, the less aggressive he is in the home, the better the relationship with the parents, the more use of books for example. We also found that parents who buy children TV sets for their bedrooms, for example, those kids generally are unhappier. They are more aggressive in the home.

... those kids who watch TV to avoid homework, to avoid social interaction, and in fact do not have the social skills, I suspect are more susceptible to TV violence because they are less able to evaluate what's going on.

... it is true that these are victim-like behaviours we acquire by watching media ... some people pretend that they're victims when they're not really victims. But they learn these behaviours via TV. ... He may be sensitized to a possibility of being victimized. That is, we found that the more TV violence children watch the more likely they believe that there may be a crime. That they have to watch out for it in their neighbourhood. ... I would never advocate encouraging your child to see violence. But if they do happen to see violence then you have to put it in the right context for them and talk to them; and yet the problem is that most parents do not talk to their kids in any constant way about what they see.

Violence is defined as some kind of pain that is done intentionally. ... psychological forms of violence. And those are usually in situation comedies where you have sarcasm, name-calling, verbal aggression, even passive aggression like the silent treatment. ... whatever kinds of violence a child prefers on TV is what he'll show in the home. ... if you have children who are watching TV and you call them to dinner and they say "no", that's an indication of addiction.

... the thing is, you have to make the home environment attractive. ... In fact, we found that the more you eat while watching TV, the more you're influenced by it. It's as simple as that. ... Don't actively stare at the TV. If you're going to watch the TV, put it in a situation where there are more distractions where the child can play. Where there is noise around him so he doesn't become or isn't glued to that TV set. ... you have to be consistent.

1977 - During the year,
Deng Xiaoping, a powerful Chinese leader, told the Chinese people that "to be rich is glorious."
The new direction would result in thousands of the former conservative communist supporters being executed and a trend towards capitalism. Extremes often promote the development of reactionism rather than rebellion. The former seeks to acknowledge individuality of effort and reward; rebellion seeks to equate existence with reward.

1977 -
Persons reported Missing in Canada during the year totalled 25,731 adults and 62,587 young people and children. Canada's population is just over 21 million. That is over 240 people reported "daily" including 170 young people and children. Reports are usually not accepted until the person had been unacounted for over a 48-hour period. Of those reported, 24,477 of the missing adults and 61,338 of the juveniles were found or accounted for. Still, 2503 people - 1,254 adults and 1,249 juveniles - remained unaccounted for at the end of the year.

Many of the missing juveniles are runaways and unless they require medical attention under medicare, or, become involved in activities which attract the attention of the police, a teenager's apparent disappearance may remain unsolved. Life on the street, on the run, or as a drifter is challenging and difficult for many and exposes the individual to many dangers. Hence, for the reasons noted, many are "discovered" and their whereabout made known.

There are also unloved adults and juveniles whose absence is desired and whose unexpected departure from a community goes unreported. Still other disappearances go unreported as a consequence of the individual's habits which may include any of, or combination of, shyness, secretiveness, aloofness, depression, negativity. Juveniles who go missing from a family where the parents have separated and/or divorced are usually kidnapped by the parent which has limited or no visiting rights, or, by the parent who has been forced by the courts to provide private visiting rights to a spouse who has become highly suspect of sexual, physical, or spiritual abusive behaviour toward the son or daughter. A relative few disappearances are resolved as murders, suicides, and accidents.

Most murders do not result in the reporting of a missing person because most arise out of poor communication skills and imprinted destructive behaviours. That is, the vast number of murders are committed by spouses or persons of close relationship, are unplanned - though they are often predictable, and are the climax to an acting out of intense emotion - often originating from long-term feelings of rage (anger, pride, frustration, revenge), insecurity (identity, anxiety, addiction), and possessiveness (co-dependency, sloth, gluttony). The fact that the individual's emotional state has become intense is a signal that they are not coping constructively and that the origin of such inefficient coping is a trauma induced energy block - either from a personal experience, or, "inherited" from a past relative.

Since the public regard such crimes as verging on the sphere of private relations and since an elected government is often only concerned with those issues highlighted by a sensationalistic-seeking media, human governments have a long and persistent record of attempting to understand and provide remedies which would protect the health and lives of their citizens. Consequently, the percentage of murders attributed to these causes remains high and relatively constant relative to population totals. A much lower number of murders are the outcome of the commission of illegal activities such as robberies, kidnappings for extortion, sexual assaults (rapes). Fewer still are arranged, that is, pre-planned murders which may result in persons being reported missing.

An increasing number of juvenile disappearances are arising from the breakdown of reality within the culture, trust between parent and child, and, increasing alienation between family members. A continuing development of a provision of rights before they have been earned and the restriction of expectations without awareness and discussion promotes this trend. With the increasing urbanization of the population, children and teenagers are withdrawn from livelihood participation as would have been explicit in hunting and gathering bands, nomadic and hunting tribes, and agricultural nations.

Industrialization and urbanization have largely enabled parents and nations to first exploit child labour and then to abandon the child. The modern child and teenager is provided with time, capital allowances and freedom which children in previous generations would have had to "earn" by helping to produce each of the benefits. Bereft of constructive activity and only to relate to the work activities of their parents as some form of rationale for abandonment, these children are encouraged to feel unwanted, unloved, materially spoiled, and, encouraged to be ego-centred, act out in rebellion or to attract attention, and search for sensual experience through an increasing reliance of peer-based activities which hold forth the possibility for acceptance, recognition, emotional support, and ego-flattery. This peer environment, devoid of adult norms, models and expectations provides very little in terms of constructive coping skill development and self-responsibility. The result is the widening of a "generation gap" of attitudes, expectations, and realities.

Trust between family members is encouraged to diminish as parents find that work or social obligations demand more of their time for adult activities exclusive from those of the family. This leaves less opportunity for family units to intercommunicate and to share experiences. In addition personalized one-on-one periods of relaxed communication and parental-to-child emotional support are being reduced. Culturally and otherwise encouraged increasing sexual desire in parents, and adults-in-general, is being frustrated by spouses which find it increasingly difficult to appreciate their sexuality in other-than-utilitarian behaviours. Lack of both individual personal spousal private periods of unregimented time are encourging repressed emotional expression, miscommunication and alienation between parents.

Transference of co-dependency to addictive behaviours continues to increase adult reliance on legal (prescription) and illegal (narcotic) drug use, tobacco abuse, alcohol abuse, sugar abuse, nutritional abuse, verbal abuse, physical abuse, and, sexual abuse. ALL of these addictive behaviours either steal time directly from the family unit, or, more deceptively, they require the expenditure of monies which necessitate longer hours of work or a lower, and more socially frustrating, standard of living.

Sexual abuse within the family ranges from performance expectation of the male (verbal emasculation and humiliation), to performance demand of the female (spousal rape), to participation by the child (incest). When either or a combination of these factors are present physical, emotional and spiritual health destructive behaviours are modelled. As the behaviour becomes more personalized and coercive to the child, or adult, distrust is heightened and departure from the family unit becomes an expression of identity survival. Unfortunately, human cultures are showing little recognition of the magnitude of the destructiveness of such factors - so, they continue to grow.

As family relationships become more structured, less flexible, more functional, less sensual (spending longer periods of relaxed or shared activity time together), more cost dependent, more compromised and less supportive of trust-building - each family member is encouraged to form an independent "un-related" identity. Such is a definition of a non-family from which departure, to the unrealistic and inexperienced juvenile mind - seems a logical and preferential direction. For these betrayed youth, no family is better than a pain-inducing family. Yet the need for social interaction and sensual experience together with their naiviety will usually result in their recognition of their capital co-dependency to their parents, their lack of spiritual strength, and, their return to the family unit. Again, either the usual lack of governmental or religious "support", or, the coercive interference of such institutions - will tend to aggravate the health of the individuals and of the society.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1978 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

Capricorn One; The Deer Hunter; Gray Lady Down; Jaws 2; Halloween; The Day That Shook The World; True Grit; Coma; Heaven Can Wait; Speedtrap; King of the Gypsies; California Suite; A Question of Guilt; Pretty Baby; Blackout; Who'll Stop the Rain; Hanging on a Star; La Cage aux Folles; Two Solitudes

General News:

Consumer Price Index: 195.3

Mt. Etna, Italy, has a major volcanic eruption for more than the 70th time in 2000 years.

1978 -
American Military Expenditures this year will represent 5% of the GNP, that is $109,247 million.

1978 - By this year,
The Philippine 5th CSU (Constabulary Security Unit), inside one of the buildings of Camp Crame, was well into the business of creating martyrs of real and suspected opposition to the Marcos dictatorship. These officers were the creation of USA special instructors Colonel Lansdale and Frank Walton and the training schools in the USA and Taiwan, fully supported by numerous changes in the White House. They were the officers who stuffed dead rats into peoples mouths, electric cattle prods into vaginas, mashed testicles, forced prisoners to eat their own ears and other parts of their anatomy.

Then they had favorite techniques as well: The "submarine" had the victim's head submerged in a toilet or a bucket of water; the "zap-zap", where the victim had electric shocks applied to their genitals or nipples; the "water-cure", where gallons of water were poured up one's nose until they almost drowned; the "baggy", where a plastic bag was placed over your head until you nearly suffocated; the "buttstroking", where you were jabbed in the back with a rifle butt; the "telephone", where your eardrums were burst by someone clapping your ears with the palms of their hands from behind; "Saigon roulette", where the torturer loaded all but one round in a revolver and fired at your legs; the "San Juanico Bridge", where you were forced to lie suspended between two beds or supports with your head on one and your feet on the other - whenever you sagged, you were beaten or kicked. Of course any of these could result in your death; eventually some combination would.

In July, 1977, Vilma Riopay, a 21-year-old catechist at the Magballo church, had been picked up and tormented until she became a physical and mental invalid. Later, in 1977, Colonel Aure had directed the torture, rape and murder of Purificacion Pedro, a 20-year-old graduate of the University of the Philippines arrested "on suspicion" of being a member of the tiny NPA. She was shot in the shoulder during her arrest and then beaten with rifle butts. Then she was taken to a Bataan hospital where she was gang-raped and hung by her neck with her brassiere - a slow strangulation.

The head of 5th CSU was Colonel Ishmael Rodrigo, an Ilocano from the Marcos hometown of Batac. He had served during the Korean War, became one of Lansdale's top Huk killers, and worked for the CIA in Manila and Saigon. Eventually, he was transferred to the US Army Green Berets as an intelligence officer with the rank of colonel. In Vietnam, he became friends with William Colby, a top CIA officer, following which he was sent to CIA headquarters in Langley, Virginia. After the declaration of martial law, the CIA sent Rodrigo back to Manila. There General Ramos gave him the job of running the 5th CSU.

Constabulary chief General Fidel Ramos particularly enjoyed having sex with the wives, sisters and daughters of the prisoners. The reputed top torturer of the 5th CSU was Captain Rodolfo Aguinaldo. His talents left any who survived permanently disabled or mentally crippled. Aguinaldo, a fellow Ilocano from Laong, was Marcos favorite. He received special training from American Army and CIA instructors during the late 60s in the brutal art of extracting information whether any existed or not. After proving himself to be unusually persuasive, he was sent to the CIA/KMT Political Warfare Cadres Academy in Taiwan where his skills in torture were raised to new heights. Colonel Miguel Aure and Major Cesar Garcia helped Captain Aguinaldo's men conduct the physical abuse. Both were fanatical anti-Communists.

While President Richard Nixon and Henry Kissinger were in office, the USA did nothing to assist Philippine political prisoners: they were too busy sanctioning Marcos dictatorship so that the American media could be fed stories of how a WWII Allied war hero had wiped corruption, crime and the Communists out of the Philippines, and, backed the USA efforts in Southeast Asia.

1978 - Before this year,
Wallace Groves, millionaire ex-convict, had gained ownership of Grand Bahama Island through an elaborate conspiracy with the Nassau Bat Street Boys. His Casinos in Nassau and Freeport, Grand Bahama, had been run for him by people who were associated with the Mafia's Meyer Lansky, and Groves himself laundered millions of dollars for the CIA through banks and casinos in the Bahamas.

1978 - During January,
Frederick Von Mierers, of New York became an EXAMPLE of a WALK-IN from BOOTES Constellation, Arcturus star system:

"Frederick walked into his body a few years ago, coming directly from that star (Arcturus) where he knew John. Frederick is a remarkable soul who has experienced every type of life on earth and on numerous planetary systems. ... 'Yes, it occurred in January of 1978. I came directly from Arcturus and am a totally different entity from the one that I replaced.'

The 'old' Frederick was born on Christmas day in 1946, was four years old when his parent died in an automobile accident. ... career in architecture and design ... male model ...

... during the mid-seventies ... a drunken driver in a stolen car (struck his godmother and close companion) ... who suffered a debilitating stroke ... rest home ... he contracted a severe .. infection ... remained deeply depressed ... bewildering substitution of egos (in January 1978) ... recollected several previous lives ... 3 beings materialized in his room.

"I knew that I had come from Arcturus, where I had lived in a hydrogen-light body, and I knew why I had come back. ... saw the coming wars, the destruction of New York City, .... He shut himself away from everyone for six months. Then he sold all ... and dedicated himself to a life of service to humanity."

(149) Frederick ... sold his valuable possessions to finance his lecture tours and video tapes (spent 700,000 dollars on them) ... does charge for astrological life readings, which he will do only for Walk-ins and serious seekers who want to turn their lives into more fruitful channels. ... readings "cover past lives, complete psychological makeup, why we are as we are, our future, complete diet, and gem prescriptions, the major emphasis being on how we can change ourselves by becoming conscious of our unconscious minds."

... stresses the importance of wearing certain gem stones next to the skin, calling gems the chakra centre of the earth, or the "condensed light of God's own thoughts" which neutralize the "power of the dark side" to interfere with our spiritual development. "... better not to indulge in sex, but rather to redirect that drive into spiritual growth, ... Living and androgynous life leads to higher evolvement of the mind." Both Frederick and John are vegetarians, and regular partakers of herbs ... does not discourage ... eating chicken and fish "during the 17 year period while their bodies are adjusting to the changeover" from being meat-eaters.

1978 - On January 18,
An alien was shot and killed at the Fort Dix Army Base next to McGuire AFB, N.J.
On September 16, 1980, a Sgt. J.M. of the PACAF who was stationed at McGuire at the time of the incident would write a description to Len Stringfield.

1978 - On January 21,
"What made Mark kill himself at 20?", an article by Christie Blatchford, Star staff writer, appeared in the "Toronto Star", a Canadian national newspaper. It described an ever growing incident happening throughout North America.

"... a bright young man ... with everything to live for, left his parent's ... home, walked to a nearby ravine, and hanged himself from a tree. ... He left a note, baffling in its coolness .... A growing number of doctors believe that even children as young as 5 try, that they have a wish to die, if not an understanding of what it means. ...

In the United States this year, 700 adolescents will succeed.
In Metro Toronto, said a report this week, another 3,500 between the ages of 14 and 19 will try - almost 10 every day. ... Even more will think about it. ... Almost three-quarters of the students (in a high school survey) had experienced thoughts on suicide. They saw it many ways - as "fashionable," as "the greatest kick of them all," as "one hell of an answer to the immediate problem."

... a growing number of Canadian teenagers not only consider suicide, bit consider it an option, and a reasonable one. ... "They get a kind of tunnel vision," Bill Hughes, a board member and volunteer with the Toronto Distress Centre, says. "They see no hope, and they get to the point where they can see nothing but more of the same." ... suicide is not a choice or a right, but the end of choosing, the end of rights. ... he used to spend hours in his room reading or studying or writing, ... Nine out of ten adolescents who attempt suicide are depressed. ... Mark, who had returned in the fall from a year-long stay in the Far East and Asia where he mastered at least one foreign language within two months, was depressed. He found Canadian culture, with its waste and emphasis on material wealth, repugnant after months of eating rice and sleeping on the floor and living with simple people.

"He tries ... tried, very hard to live simply," says his mother, ... He mastered most things he tried. ... "Everything he does, he does intensely, and usually well," his father adds. Returning to Canada, he wanted to change things here, make people realize "we don't need much to live. We took him out to dinner on his birthday," Alan says, "and you could see he was uncomfortable. 'We have so much here, Mum,' he said."

His parents think that because he couldn't "save the world overnight", he may have considered himself a failure. He talked of going back, and helping. "Being a doctor was one of his latest ideas, but medicine takes so long." "A lot of kids who try suicide think they're unique," Bill Hughes says, "They can't possibly imagine that someone else feels as lousy as they do. They don't know that feeling rotten is part of being human, that sometimes almost the total population will feel that way."

If the reality of the individual is framed within superficial mass media, manipulated by advertising and "norm" selected detail, educated with highly selective "political" ideas and histories which serve to promote current authority structures, and, socially, other norms suggest what you must believe, say and do - in order to be accepted - perhaps you are dead already. Within such a framework, an individual, who becomes aware, is shocked by the weight of unreality which must be dispensed with in order to "live" in reality. If such a picture (largely imaginary) appears hopeless, the individual may believe that the act of suicide is no more significant than the dream reality they feel trapped inside. Such is one result of a society which has no true spiritual basis. It is not that it has lied about reality - it has forgotten where it put it.

1978 - By February,
William S. English had been the subject of another assassination attempt.
He had established his leather business in Tucson by now and did much of his work out of his apartment. One night on the spur of the moment, he was invited to spend the night with friends for whom he had been rebuilding a saddle. On returning to his apartment the next morning he found that it had been fire-bombed and everything he had was destroyed in the fire including a favoured pet hamster. The previous year he had seen a copy of the Grudge/Blue Book #13, been discharged from USAF Intelligence, separated from his family and had experienced an assassination attempt.

1978 -
The USA "Electronic Funds Transfer Act" provided the legal framework for "electronic funds transfer" (EFT) into, or out of, a consumer's bank account. Written receipt of such transactions were required, the consumer was limited in liability for unauthorized transfers and procedures for error resolution had to be developed by the institutions concerned. Such transfers could originate from a telephone, electronic terminal, computer, or magnetic tape. Wire transfers such as Fed Wire and CHIPS were one category of EFT. The second category included automatic teller machine networks, retail merchant point-of-sale debit card systems, and telephone bill payment systems.

Many technical problems arose in the mechanization of teller services and for a time MOST consumers were adverse to the use of automatic teller machines because of their breakdowns and errors. The banks persisted in coercing the consumer to use the machines by cutting staff and reducing business open hours. For some people, if you wanted to do your banking and not wait in long slow lineups for personal service, you made use of the machine.

1978 - On March 11,
At the Baskatong Reservoir, northern Que. - a luminous flattened-bell-shaped object is photographed.

1978 - By March,
S.C. Gwynne, a 25-year-old American bank officer arrived in Manila to take a loan application.
Because he spoke French, he had been promoted in less than a year in this first job after college, to loan officer for North Africa. Six months and 28 countries later, the confident and naive analyst arrived in the Philippines to negotiate a $10 million loan for Rudolfo Cuenca, Marcos associate and head of the "Construction and Development Corporation of the Philippines" (CDCP). The stated purpose of the loan was to buy earth-moving equipment from another customer of the USA bank where Gwynne worked.

Gwynne was met at Manila International Airport by a genial CDCP "expediter" and driven in a red Jaguar, complete with a pretty hostess who informed him that she and the car were at his disposal for the balance of his stay. He was checked into a 5-star hotel, wined and dined by Cuenca at a premier restaurant, where the finance minister of the Philippines "just happened" to drop by the table. He let Gwynne know that Cuenca was a good friend. Gwynne was then invited to fly off in the company plane to Baguio where a very nice time had been prepared for him courtesy of the brothels.

But where were the estimate, business plan, contracts, and other details which ANY bank officer would have poured over in detail? Gwynne began to have severe reservations about authorizing the loan. Returning to headquarters, he found the wheels of business, or greed, were in high gear. The earth-moving manufacturer had called to make sure that Gwynne was taking a "hard look" at the loan. The president of the bank called to add encouragement. The heads of both the bank and the construction company somehow shared political connections. The loan was approved. Gwynne, wisely, moved to another California bank within 18 months.

Cuenca's interest payments stopped.
Rudi had started off in business in the Marcos fashion.
A college dropout, he had entered the construction business with a loan from his father, the highway commissioner at the time. The money had actually been "borrowed" or embezzled from postwar reconstruction funds provide by the USA for the Philippines. In 3 years he went bankrupt but managed to keep one truck. In 1965 he had been a fundraiser for Ferdinand Marcos. When the government ran out of money to finish an expressway, Cuenca offered to finished the highway in return for the authority to collect tolls.

Cuenca set up his Construction and Development Corporation of the Philippines, a suitably government institution sounding name. Cuenca then began receiving lucrative government contracts. He had not been forgotten. In 5 years, road-building costs for the government escalated by 1000% Some of these projects were financed by the World Bank. Cuenca got a $1 billion contract to reclaim 500 hectares of Manila Bay. With the assistance of Marcos associates in the Middle East, CDCP also won more than $1 billion in Arab contracts, including $350 million to build a cross-Iraq highway. When the project was due to be 70% complete, less than 4% of the work had been done.

While Ferdinand Marcos had begun his political career as a 10% kickback and bribe "negotiator", as President he demanded from each participant in the government contracts - supplier, subcontractor, general contractor - adding up to .. as much as 80% of the total cost. Many businessmen who were not Marcos buddies turned over shares in their companies in return for selection privileges for contracts. A business is worthless without business. Other promising businesses learned the "legal" facts of life: the Marcos control of the armed forces and Constabulary could result in your business being seized for all manner of supposed infractions - if you refused to share your shares. Such takeovers were gradually melded together to form agglomerate monopolies which stifled competition. This happened in all of the primary industries: sugar, bananas, coconuts, tobacco, and others.

Martial law assisted patronage in providing the power and the means to break big business and free enterprise.

1978 -
"Capricorn One", an American movie, is released.
It depicts powerful business and bureaucratic sources attempting to fool the public with sophisticated manipulation of the media into believing in the success of a doomed manned space mission to Mars and back. Desperation of the forces depicted extends to murder of witnesses and concealment of information for the purpose of protecting careers, profits and fraud.

Open airing of the concept probably prevented such an incident from happening.
The downside was that it justified the end of publicised space probes both to those who engineered them and to the public which had become numb to their novelty in the face of other mass media distractions. Overtaxed citizens, depressed by the implied responsibility conveyed on them by increasing burdens of mass media reports of international problems encouraged the average person to seek comfort and satisfaction in material pleasures: career advancement, money, larger houses, more appliances and cars, drugs, sexuality, religion. As a possible disinformation project, it successfully justified cutting back the space program, which astronauts had been warned to discontinue by aliens from the earliest flights. The existence of a real covert second U.S.A. space program was not revealed until the late 1980s, when it was "discontinued". Perhaps U.S. $2 billion was spent on it; no results were made public.

1978 -
It was proposed by 2 policemen, that some cattle were taken up into the air, mutilated while in the air, then dropped to the ground. Carcasses had been found in seemingly impossible places, sometimes with broken bones as if dropped from above. It was also suggested that the animals had been marked in some way previous to the mutilation incident. Testing revealed that patches of hide on mutilated animals fluoresced under black light, such that it could be a marking mechanism.

1978 - At the beginning of April,
Eduard (Billy) Meier met with Wendell Stevens, Lee and Brit Elders.
Over the previous 3 years, Meier had met over 100 times with Semjase, his spacewoman guide, and they had talked about interstellar travel, life on Erra, universal law, advanced physics, archaeology, astronomy, Creation, the fate of other human races, the destiny of the planet Earth, and spiritual societies obscuring even the Pleiadians. Meier described his feelings of his trips:

"If I go there, if I talk to them, if I am in the ship together with them, I never like to return to the earth. Every time I have trouble coming back. You see, if I am shouting there, really shouting, pounding my fist on the table, it's something else than if I am shouting here on earth. I'm shouting there in peace and in love. Sometimes I have to make myself very, very angry to come back home.

It's so peaceful and restful and loving there, speaking together with them.
You see what can happen, and everything in the world is okay.
There I am much more clear in my head, in my thinking and feeling, than here.
Then I have to return to a world which is full of turmoil and shouting and everything.
There is fighting, day after day, hour after hour, second after second.
With them it is not so. If you are shouting there, it is with peace and love, too."

According to Meier, the Pleiadians' desire to reveal their presence slowly and without ceremony arose from the events that occurred long ago, when early earth humans believed that visitors from elsewhere in the universe were gods or the angels of God. He explained:

"The Pleiadians distance themselves every time from such things.
There is one way around this problem. To tell the people, to tell them again, again, again, what's really happening, what the Pleiadians are really, that they are humans like the humans from earth, that they are no more. What I have to do practically every day, I have to shout. I have to beat my fist on the table to tell the people what is real. And they have the same problem. But there is one way of teaching. Tell the people day after day, hour after hour, they are really not gods. ... Impossible to connect them. It's exactly the same thing if you have a motor that works with regular gasoline, and you go and put pitch into the gasoline, it blows up. ... (their) vibrations, the waves and everything, that's much higher."

Meier informed his visitors that the Pleiadians were also interested in earth humans because they were an earlier form of their society. He explained the feeling during dematerialization as being "a condition of being well-balanced"; "as if you would find yourself in eternity." That condition does not end when you are re-materialized. Depending on your emotions and state of mind, you are not aware of it until the body touches some other material thing. "When I leave the ship, I jump into the hole, and into the hole, what we call, "arrange" the material." You can't see them when they come out of the ship until they touch the ground. They have 32% oxygen (on their planet). It is better and lighter breathing (than on the earth). Meier talked about civilizations that lived in harmony in the universe and travelled faster than life, about life on Erra and the androids and the spiritual leaders there. Not once did he contradict himself.

At this meeting, Meier brought out pieces of metal which he had kept for at least 3 years.
They had been given to him as samples of the metal of which the beamships were made. "They told me that the metal is in four states." According to his notes, one of the samples represented the next-to-final stage in a 7-step process the Pleiadians used to make the metal. It appeared to be an alloy containing silver and gold. Meier made no attempt to sell his story or attract attention by bringing out articles: if you asked him specifically about something which he could answer, you got an answer; otherwise, you did not. Meier had also shared a recording of the spacecraft's sounds with the investigation group. They had been very sceptical; now, they were overloaded with stories, signed witness statement, photographs, material evidence. Stevens remarked "It just got to a point where one man couldn't have done so much so well to fool so many people for so long."

A witness, Herbert Runkel, told the group what the difference was between those who quickly discounted Meier's observations and experiences as a hoax and those who saw something deeper: "These thoughts always come from people who know nothing about the case. They hear about the case, or they see only one or two pictures. They never go to the place where the pictures were taken. Because people who have seen the places always say, 'That is not possible'." When the group went to the site of perhaps 1/3 of Meier's photographs, and where he had taken a film of the beamship, they agreed. At one point he had stood 52 yards from the position of the beamship as it moved in front of a tree. Directly behind the tree, there was a drop straight down. The weather at the site was always cold and windy.

1978 -
Erwin Chargaff, is quoted in the book, "Bio-Revolution: DNA and the Ethics of Man-made Life", by Richard Hutton, as follows:

"This world is given to us on loan .... My generation, or perhaps the one preceding mine, has been the first to engage under the leadership of the exact sciences, in destructive colonial warfare against nature. The future will curse us for it."

1978 -
An expedition organized by Ari Marshall, a Greek industrialist interested in the legend of Atlantis, went in search of a huge underwater pyramid reported to be the southwest of Cay Sal Bank, near the Bahamas. Closed circuit television footage of a pyramidal mound off the Cay Sal Bank at a depth of 750 feet unfortunately had a limited field of view and it left inconclusive a determination of whether the mound was stone or not. Large holes were shown in the side through which glowing and possibly electrically charged particles were passing. Marshall recalls:

"The first thing we noticed when we got near the area was that all the compasses
were going beserk.  We spent eight hours making tapes, stating at 700 feet to 1500
feet deep.  We would go about a mile, then make a 90 degree turn and go back again.
Finally I saw it coming up on the sonar screen.  I told the captain to stop and then to
proceed slowly.  We were right over the pyramid.  The top seemed to be about 150
feet from the surface, with the total depth about 650 feet.  We lowered the camera
and high intensity lights down the side of the mass and suddenly came to an opening. 
Light flashes or shining white objects were being swept into the opening by
turbulence.  They may have been gas or some sort of energy crystals.  Further down
the same thing happened in reverse.  They were coming out again at a lower level.  It
was surprising that the water in this deep area was green instead of black near the
pyramid, even at night."

Light penetrates water to the degree that it is clear.
Murky waters can block out all surface light in as little depth as 1 foot (.3 metres).
In clear water, the diffusion influence of the water begins to limit the transmission of colour significantly by a depth of 33 feet (10 metres). Before a depth of 400 feet (1202 metres) has been reached, all surface light has been filtered out and the darkness is so impenetrable, in crystal clear water, that a person cannot see anything. Most, if not all of the pictures and film taken here would have only had the artificial lighting supplied by the camera equipment.

With the level of technology at this time, deep underwater pictures tended to be defined by how far the lights illumined and that was dependant upon water turbidity. Small objects passing close to the lens could appear brighter and larger than in reality. The most significant aspects of what was observed here is that there were holes in the side of a pyramid-shaped mound in the middle of the seafloor with apparent water currents flowing in some and out others. Geologically formed mounds never have holes in the sides unless they have been made by some lifeform. Geologically formed underwater pyramidal mounds had never been found before which had water circulating in at one level and out at another. Highly magnetic mounds have been discovered and can be meteorites. Underwater efflorescence is usually extremely localized and has never been recorded before around a large object.

Other surveyed locations which have structures which could be seamounts, pyramids, inactive volcanoes, or weather induced swirls have been found at

   23 degrees 26' N and 79 degrees 43' W  (1500 feet depth),

   23 degrees 34' N and 80 degrees W      (1800 feet depth).

A strong tornado which touches down without further advancement in any direction over a shallow depth of not more than 33 feet (10 metres) and where the bottom has a considerable depth of very fine and loose sand could result in the water being sucked up into the waterspout and while creating such a whirlwind current as to both agitate the sand and leave it swirled into a pyramid-shaped mound. These depths are not reflected at these sites in the modern era.

1978 - On May 15,
Mrs. Victor, (see August 10 and September 15, 1975) of Gilroy, California, was in the home of one of her patients, an elderly woman, when she suddenly fell on the floor as if someone had thrown her down violently; over the next several minutes she was severely beaten by an invisible entity. The older lady reported that she saw Mrs. Victor turning and spinning on the floor, hitting obstacles in her path. She suffered multiple bruises, a sliver of wood punctured a vein, and she broke her leg. She had to spend 6 days in the hospital.

1978 - On June 19,
Near Arcahon, France, a UFO was sighted over the town of Gujan-Mestras.
There were independent witnesses near Creon and La Reole also. Frank Pavia and Jean-Marc Guitard, knocked on the door of baker Mr. Varisse, who was preparing the next day's bread at 1.30 A.M. The teenagers had stopped at the side of the road to repair a turn signal on their car when all the lights of the town suddenly went out.

At the same time a powerful rumble like an earthquake occurred and they saw an object they described as oval, red, surrounded with white "flames", flying towards them at an altitude of 11,000 feet. Jean-Marc felt unable to breathe and fainted. The object changed directions and flew away. The brightness of the UFO had triggered the photocells that control the lights for the whole town.

Mr. Bachere, a 35-year old restaurant manager, and his wife, at about the same time, saw "a bright orange ball, very bright" that hovered over La Reole at about 1,000 feet before disappearing. It reappeared at the same spot one minute later.

1978 - On June 23,
Jacques Vallee, a ufologist and several friends who had gone to Happy Valley, in northern California to investigate some sightings had driven out to one of the sites beyond the Saddle, up to the highest point at the end of a trail. At about 11.15 P.M., they saw a very bright light, white with a tinge of red, straight ahead of them, several miles away across the valley, on the slope of China Peak. The sighting lasted no more than 10 seconds.

1978 - On June 23,
"Ekran II", A Soviet satellite, blew apart in space when its battery exploded.
The mishap was not admitted by the USSR until 1992.
Then incident had happened while the satellite was being observed by a ground-based telescope.

1978 - On July 5,
A similar shower of metal from the sky to that which occurred on December 17, 1977 near Council Bluffs, Iowa, happened about 1 mile southwest of the first incident.

1978 - On July 10,
A similar shower of metal from the sky to that which occurred on December 17, 1977, and on July 5, 1978, near Council Bluffs, Iowa.

1978 - By July,
APRO (Aerial Phenomena Research Organization, founded by Jim and Coral Lorenzen in 1952, was invited to join the investigation of Eduard Meier being carried out by Lee and Brit Elders, Tom Welch, Wendelle Stevens, Jim Dilettoso and Gary Kinder. Jim discounted Meier's photos from the beginning, perceiving them as being nothing more than "art". Lorenzen misunderstood the invitation to be a request for him to supervise the investigation so that the APRO stamp of approval would make the efforts of Stevens and Intercep "beyond question". Jim assumed that he would have "control of the investigation" and that he "would decide which tests would be done and what scientists and labs to use." Several times he remarked to Stevens, "There seems to be an awful lot here for one party to fake. Either it's a big group with a big scam, or something is going on."

Lorenzen talked at length with producer John Stefanelli; he travelled to San Francisco to speak with Marcel Vogel, the scientist which Dilettoso found at IBM; he met with representatives of a computer company that manufactured image processing equipment for analyzing photographs. Lorenzen asked Stevens for the transparencies and photos he had of Meier's, not recognizing the past difficulties which had transpired with the Meier originals. Frequently Meier had lent his photos to interested parties for them to make copies and return the originals. Too often, the originals had been kept and the copies returned, or, nothing was returned. Stevens did not wish to be a party to further extending the process, so, if the photos or transparencies were to be studied, they would be, while remaining in his possession. This hurt the pride of Lorenzen who now believed that his reputation should be authority enough for others to turn over everything to him. Dilettoso was now building contacts in the science community and APRO was not so depended on for such assistance. As time progressed, less and less detail was passed to Lorenzen by Stevens, who himself wanted to maintain control of the project.

Lorenzen, through his association with other UFO interest groups located in Europe began to hear back rumours about Meier. These suggested that every time a group of Americans left Meier's, the Meier's group would laugh at them behind their backs at how easily they had been fooled. Lorenzen also heard that affidavits from alleged witnesses actually refuted Meier's claims. Proud and increasingly paranoid, Lorenzen, like so many humans, took the easy emotionally reactive position of simply assuming that Meier had "used models", and, that "he threw away those pictures that didn't turn out." Lorenzen confidently castigated the other researchers for not having checked the developing and printing options which Meier had used, all the while praising himself as one who would have checked those avenues first. A year into the investigation with the Intercep team, Lorenzen would ask the team to pay his way to visit Meier in Europe. As they had been using their private monies throughout, piggybacking their visits onto business trips, and travelling on the super cheap - they said no. Lorenzen took offence at the denial and demanded that the team turn over all of their evidence to APRO for investigation. The team said no, again. APRO was hurt, mainly by their own pride and ignorance.

1978 - During the summer,
Jim Dilettoso, working with the Intercep team, set out to find equipment sources and the services of scientists which could be used to further test the legitimacy of Eduard Meier's claims and evidence. He would spend a year writing and phoning them. Scientists needed to open-minded as well as knowledgeable about services or equipment. The lack of a budget to work with made the approach that much more difficult. Then, a scientist's career and income is often tied to their credibility, and many, if not most, believed that their credibility would be seriously threatened if they were known to be associated with the study of UFOs. Further, of those who agreed to assist, most declined to allow their reputations as employees of noted organizations or their employment designation to be used as any indication of the authority of their conclusions. Finding a true scientist, with strength of character was near impossible.

1978 - During July,
Pope Paul VI entered his 15th year as pontiff.
He was the spiritual leader over 18.1% of the Earth's human population: 740 million baptized Catholics.
The Church supported 3,700 bishops, 130 cardinals, 42,839 priests and 986,686 nuns.
He had almost doubled the number of cardinals in the Church. He had guided the results of Vatican II, for which some priests and archbishops were calling him a heretic. Early in his reign, 1964, he had established the Secretariat for Non-Christians, a vigorous, optimistic and liberalizing agency.

1978 - In July,
Anwar Husein, a photographer, was taking pictures in the Spanish Pyrenees on what he remembered to be a very bright quiet morning when he unawarely photographed a UFO. After his film was developed, back in London, the developing lab drew his attention to the object in the picture, which on further investigation provide to be authentic "objects".

1978 -
While picking apples one day in Arkansas, a middle-aged lady fell from the ladder and deeply cut her leg. She also received a severe blow on her head that so stunned her that she was unable to move or cry out. While lying on the ground, 2 humanoids approached. One was tall and thin, the other quite short. They began to give her abundantly bleeding leg medical treatment, with an instrument they had with them. Within a short time, all bleeding and pain stopped and there was only a small scar where the wound had been. They gave her a piece of metal with markings engraved on it depicting pyramids and six-pointed stars. She invited them to her house for a meal, but they replied that the only nourishment they took was juice. Next, the lady offered them some fruit juice, but the response was that the juice they used was different from that consumed by humans. Their voices seemed to come from their abdomens.

About 6 weeks later, the lady's dog did not return home as usual, so she walked deep into the forest to look for it. Coming to the edge of a clearing, she saw a horse lying on its side with 2 men dressed in white at work on it. There were 2 USAF helicopters landed in the clearing; present were 2 men in USAF uniforms and the 2 humanoids who had come to her aid earlier. She felt that she had stumbled on something secretive and began to retreat. The group noticed her presence, she began to run; they ran after her, she managed to evade them. Then, overtaken by a helicopter, a blue beam of light was flashed on her, which severely burned her right breast and clothing. She went to the hospital, was treated, and told the staff of the incident. The sheriff insisted on taking her to a psychiatrist, who diagnosed her as sane. Harassed at all hours, afterwards, by strangers who insisted on questioning her, she and her husband moved to another state. Then the harassment began all over again.

1978 - On August 2,
In Vallenoncello, Italy, a bright oval object descended while illuminating the ground.
After the object's departure, the witness found an irregularly shaped burned area in the grass, about 2 metres in diameter. The grass had changed to a reddish colour and was covered by a dark jellylike substance. The witness collected some of the substance but eventually threw it away, not knowing what to do with it.

Vegetation only began to grow two years later.
The burned area was still noticeable in 1981, and it was covered with moss and small cactus-like plants that were not typical of the area. An analysis by the regional centre of agriculture research found an abnormal level of calcium at the site.

1978 - During the year,
Luis Silvera, while walking through the Interior in the Parnarama region of Brazil, saw a light shining on him from the sky. He ran back to the house where he collapsed, drained of strength. He had a high fever for two days, but no marks on his body. He described the beam of light as having several colours in it and said that it made him feel strange and nervous. He had a headache that passed rapidly.

1978 - By August,
Dr. Robert Nathan, of NASA's "Jet Propulsion Laboratory" (JPL) in Pasadena, California, had been approached by Jim Dilettoso, who was investigating the authenticity of Eduard Meier's photographs. Dr. Nathan had conceived image processing in the 1960s and developed it for nearly 20 years. The procedure he used now was more advanced, more costly and more time consuming than earlier approaches. Nathan's job was to detect and analyze objects in space, whatever their nature. He agreed to look at the photos as an individual, not as a scientist at JPL, and that any opinion he might render would be his own and not that of the NASA facility.

Nathan had made copies of the transparencies in Wendelle Steven's possession, at the JPL lab and then taken those to Bob Post. Post who was head of the photo lab where every JPL photo of planets, stars, asteroids, and comets was processed and printed, had worked there for 22 years. The photos he had usually been shown of suspected UFOs had been poor in definition and detail. These were good. He had commented that "From a photography standpoint, you couldn't see anything that was fake about them. That's what struck me. They looked like legitimate photographs. I thought, God, if this is real, this is going to be really something."

1978 - By August,
Eduardo Cojuangco, Jr., of the wealthiest Chinese family in the Philippines, and one of only 2 civilians in the Marcos "Rolex 12", was now the second richest man in the Philippines.

Eduardo's great-grandfather, Jose I, had been a forceful, proud Chinese immigrant from the Chinese province of Fukien who had come to the Philippines to escape poverty and oppression in 1861. He started in Manila as a building contractor. With his profits he invested in rice and sugar lands in Tarlac. Agricultural tenants soon gave him an opportunity to become a moneylender. His combined profits from rents and financial services allowed him to expand his landholdings rapidly through foreclosure. Poverty had taught him to be stringent in personal material pleasures and ruthless in business. He had no compassion for farmers who failed to work as obsessively as he, failed to plan for coping with potential problems, and freely enjoyed the moment as it passed. Their human impulsiveness, sloth, natural misfortune, lack of caution and inability to emotionally detach themselves from the concerns of others - would be his benefit.

With persistence, the family fortunes grew.
It acquired 16,000 hectares of prime sugar-land, a 6500-hectare tobacco plantation, and a sugar mill. They would come to own the Philippine Bank of Commerce, the First United Bank, and the Philippine Long Distance Telephone Company. As American political and business influence grew in the Philippines, the Cojuangcos weaved their way into the backrooms of decision-making. After WWII, their Hacienda Luisita became a base for the CIA, a guarantee of preferential treatment.

The clan had split into jealous and intolerant factions when Ninoy Aquino, from a rival clan, married Cory Cojuangco and campaigned for the post of Tarlac province (their area) governor in 1960. Jose Cojuangco Jr. and Senior underwrote his campaign, which aroused the thwarted pride of Eduardo and his father for it seemed that the clan were supporting a rival. The animosity between Eduardo and Ninoy increased when each found that they could not change the opposing principles of the other. Martial law reversed the political authority of the two with Ninoy ending in jail and Eduardo contributing to the state decision-making from the secret Rolex-12 "cabinet".

Although 20 years younger than Ferdinand, Eduardo could offer a fascist-like ruthless business, money-dominated dimension to the underworld and government bureaucratic power of the increasingly politically powerful Marcos. Eduardo acquired a seat in the new Congress, became the ruling party's chairman for Tarlac province, international socialite and business executive for the Philippine image, head of the huge horse-racing and basketball sports and gambling franchises, director of the Manila Hilton hotel, owner of Filsov Shipping, director of First Philippine Holdings, and owner of over 140 companies taken over during martial law. He would eventually become chairman of San Miguel, the Philippines' largest corporation. With a little help from Ferdinand Marcos and Juan Ponce Enrile, he took over the entire coconut industry. Together they created a monopoly by controlling funding, processing, marketing, and development.

They attempted to manipulate the American market for coconut oil by buying Philippine oil cheap, shipping it to America, and warehousing it there until prices rose. A sudden increase in interest rates and the Soviet grain embargo (which flooded the American market with the competing product - soybean oil) caused coconut oil prices to drop, and, Marcos and Cojuangco had to sell their aging supply at a $10 million loss or watch it go rancid. With the sudden dump of huge quantities of oil on the market, the U.S. Justice Department filed a suit charging that the two had conspired to create an artificial shortage; several USA firms lodged anti-trust actions - money and political negotiations saw the Justice Department issue Marcos and Cohuangco with a caution "not to do it again".

1978 - By September,
Colman Von Keviczky of "Inter-Continental UFO Network" (ICUFON) had sent out a flyer to his membership claiming that UFO models had been found hanging in Meier's barn, and that a picture Meier claimed to be of an extraterrestrial named Asket was actually Meier's wife in a blond wig. Proclaiming the case a hoax, however, did not deter VonKeviczky from advertising at the bottom of the flyer's front page: 11 slides of original Meier photos for only $33; and, for an additional price, copies of Meier's contact notes.

1978 - During the year,
James A. Baldwin would publish his report on the Gogodala.
A culture similar to that of ancient human band societies, the Gogodala of Papua, New Guinea have no history of warfare, few accidental deaths, very little infanticide, malnutrition is rare, and calories consumed per day is higher than in many other human groupings.

The average Gogodala diet supplies 3571 calories per person per day.
Fish supply 80% of the protein and 7% of the calories. Alternatively, the sago palm supplies almost 80% of the calories in the diet. Lotus seeds make up 15% of the diet protein and about 5% of the calories. Part of the reason for the high caloric intake without either obesity or long hours of hard labour is the incidence of parasite infections, the introduction of infectious diseases, and the hyperendemic presence (almost 100% exposure) of malaria. Predation by wild animals including crocodiles and poisonous snakes is low. One third of the children born die from malaria before they reach the age of 3. Infectious diseases, brought by the Europeans since 1900, now include venereal diseases, tuberculosis, measles, influenza, and leprosy. Each take their toll of life.

With the tropical climate, absence of footwear, marsh and lagoon fishing, and sinply designed housing - many people acquire parasitic infestation. Common problems include skin diseases, lice, scabies, filariasis (from mosquitoes), and hookworm. They tend to induce big appetites, weakness, and stupor in the victims. The Gogodala respond by demonstrating compassion and empathy for one another by comforting and assisting.

The use of DDT would kill the mosquitoes (and reduce the presence of malaria), the chemical would also lead to an increase in a type of moth known to kill sago palms - a major food resource. When given the option of accepting foreign aid in the form of DDT and vaccines, the Gogodala rejected it. To accept the aid would result in the destruction of a great number of the food supplying sago palm trees and result in a dependency upon external aid. Freedom was preferred.

1978 - Within a three week period in September,
4 sightings/contacts took place. All were in Venado Tuerto, a small town 3 hours south of Rosario, Argentina.

In the first, a young carpenter, Alberto saw seven objects and two beings on the ground.

In the second case, a boy named Oscar saw three objects and went inside one of them, communicating with a very tall man and a small robot. It is described in detail after this summary.

The third case involved a 16-year-old baker named Francisco who felt intense heat from a luminous object during a blackout of the local transformer.

The fourth involved a fifty-three-year-old man who was driving at night and found himself "teleported" over four miles and had to be admitted to a local clinic for chest pains. Venado Tuerto is a rural area of very flat land with some modern estancias, many swamps, andlagoons.

1978 - On September 6,
Oscar was sent to gather a herd of horses in the morning, near Venado Tuerto, Argentina. Riding his horse Cometa through the fog, he felt something fly overhead and saw an object arrive from the south, another from the west, a third from the east. They started dancing, emitting powerful lights of changing colour. They changed rapidly: green, red, yellow. His eyes "started getting cloudy."

The boy lost control of his horse which bolted and ran toward the wire fence, where Oscar managed to stop it. Returning, his father scolded him for not bringing back the horses to which he responded that he had found a big round thing in the field. The father was impatient and unbelieving and sent the boy back into the fog. Back at the spot, Oscar found the objects on the ground. Cometa became nervous again and the herd ran in all directions.

The object was about 30 feet in diameter, 15 feet high, ending in a half-sphere dome with several round windows. A door opened and a ladder unfolded to the ground. A being appeared in the opening. It was 7 feet tall and was wearing long gloves and a cylindrical helmet. It seemed to be tethered to a breathing apparatus linking it to the object; it invited Oscar into the object. The boy tied the reins of his horse to the ladder, climbed up, and stood next to the "giant". From this position he was able to describe the ship's interior, which had a panel of buttons, tables, and a small "robot" which was occupied with cutting into pieces the large bones of some animals similar to horses or cattle.

Impressed and scared, the boy rushed back out and down the ladder.
The tall being joined him, and Oscar asked him for one of his gloves as proof of the experience.
When the giant complied, the boy observed that his hand was green with the middle finger shorter than the others, the nails like conical dark blue metallic claws. With one of these claws the bing pricked Oscar's right arm near the shoulder; it felt like a mosquito bite.

While Oscar was carrying the huge, heavy glove, riding towards the estancia, two flying craft caught up with him and emitted a small slab and a sphere that joined together in the air, brushing against the horse and pulling off the glove like a magnet.

Oscar's family showed little interest in his excited description of events although his father, Don Felipe admitted to having heard a "strange humming sound, like the flame of a torch moving rapidly through the air." The parents also reported that during the following days the boy had no appetite and frequently woke up at night screaming. He said, "I dreamed I was inside the saucer and they took me and did things to me."

At the spot on Oscar's arm where the giant had pricked him, a small line developed, two inches long. It started itching that night, and he washed it with water and soap. Two or three days later the ends healed, and he was left with a small depression in his skin. In addition to this mark he experienced a series of spots resembling psoriasis, which were thought to be "of nervous origin".

Six days prior to the sighting, Oscar's father had found a dead cow on the property; the hindquarter and the ribs were missing. This was very puzzling to him as he expected that if thieves were responsible, they would have taken the hide. The family is descended from a race of white Indians who go back to the Incas and they are one of the last families in the area to wear the traditional garb of the gauchos.

After the incident, the horse had become very shortsighted and eventually died.
During the event the horse had tried to kick the spaceship ladder and had injured the back left leg.

The entire area has a kind of quiet, tragic beauty and an uncertain future: every year the lakes and the lagoons are gaining on the land. Nobody seems to know where the water is coming from. Entire villages have already been submerged, and in places the road to Rosario is a mere levee with wide lakes on both sides. Here and there one can see the top floors of old houses and formerly proud hotels emerging from the gray waters.

The family live on a 40-hectare farm that was given to them by the previous owner of the estancia in his will. They grow corn, wheat and soya. The family members are very close and obviously happy together. They did not have a television at the time of the sighting.

Oscar's schoolteacher and a clinical psychologist described Oscar as having the logical-concrete type of intelligence with great difficulties to pass on to the logical-formal period, possibly due to the limited stimulus he has had in the local rural environment. He pays little attention in school but is well behaved. He is very honest and tells the truth. He likes to talk of life outside the school: the real - when he is out in the fields, the everyday, what happens at home. He loves horseback riding and nature. He is described as not an imaginative child with no expression of fantasies.

1978 - During the year,
The U.S.S.R. "Cosmos 954" nuclear-powered satellite spread radioactive debris over part of Canada when it fell out of orbit.

1978 - During October,
"Project Ivy Bells" was begun by the USA Navy when they tapped an underwater communications cable between Petropavlovsk and the mainland of the USSR. Until 1981, a recording device was attached to the cable and would be periodically emptied of its surveillance information by USA nuclear-propelled submarines.

USSR Admiral Gorshkov shifted his newer longer-range submarines to the Northern (Arctic) and Pacific fleets to have them avoid the constrictions of NATO surveillance in the Baltic and Black Seas. In wartime, the Northern fleet would have had to traverse the Greenland-Iceland-United Kingdom (GIUK) gaps to reach Allied shipping lanes or strategic launch positions. In the Far East, submarines operating out of Vladivostok would have to pass through straits bordering Japan, an Allied nation.

The naval base at Petropavlovsk on the Kamchatka peninsula provided an alternative and was developed as a major submarine facility. However, Kamchatka could only be supplied by ship and aircraft for there were no railroads or vehicle roads between the peninsula and other populated areas. Until satellite communications developed further, most communication between the distant post and the rest of the Soviet Union was transmitted through the cable which ran across the Sea of Okhotsk seabed.

1978 - On the evening of October 3,
Mr. Hideichi Amano, while using his mobile unit ham radio and driving up a mountain near Sayama City, and in the company of his 2-year old daughter, Juri, experienced a strange encounter. After completing several calls from a high location, the interior of the car became very bright as the fluorescent tube he had fitted in the car became 10 times brighter than normal. None of the light seemed to pass through the windows to the outside. The child, moments before standing on the passenger seat beside him, was now lying on the seat, and foaming at the mouth. He noticed a round patch of orange light beamed through the window onto his stomach coming from a point in the sky. Alarm became terror as he sensed something metallic being pressed against his right temple.

Amano glanced sideways to see a humanoid standing with a device in its mouth which was being pressed against his head. From this tube came an incessant babble, as though a tape recording being played to fast. The being seemed to have a round face, but no neck, 2 sharply pointed ears, 2 small motionless eyes that glowed bluish-white, and a triangular depression on its forehead. The mouth was clamped around the pipe-like object and no nose could be seen. While the babble continued, he felt it difficult to move, and his mind became "vague". The car refused to respond to his efforts to start it and the lights also would not work. After 4 or 5 minutes, the being began to dim out and then vanished. The orange light disappeared, the interior lighting returned to normal, and the other equipment that had been switched on now began to function.

In a confused and frightened state, Amano drove quickly down the mountain, only then remembering little Juri's earlier state. Stopping, he found her now standing and asking for a drink of water. He reported the incident to the police who poked fun at him. Amano had a severe headache afterwards. A television program heard of the encounter and arranged for him to be interviewed under hypnosis. During the programme, information came out that in addition to his memories, Amano had been instructed to return to the site at a future specific time. This may have been additional information provided by Amano's brain in defence against the hypnotist's insistence on gaining more information.

1978 - On October 21,
Frederick Valentich of Avondale Heights, Melbourne, Australia, was flying a Cessna 182 light aircraft to King Island, midway between Cape Otway, Victoria and Tasmania, at 4500 feet altitude on an evening flight. Shortly after flying over the lighthouse at Cape Otway, Valentich contacted ground control at Melbourne and spoke with them for 6 minutes about a craft which approached him from the side, had a green light and a sort of metallic light on the outside, was large and travelling at a speed he could not estimate. It seemed to be playing some sort of game with him, Valentich reported. Suddenly, it seemed as if both had become stationary with the plane orbiting and the UFO orbiting above it. Transmission ceased and nothing was ever found of the plane or pilot. The episode is well detailed in the book Melbourne Episode by Dr. Richard Haines.

1978 -
Steven Spielberg's first movie, "Close Encounters of the Third Kind" (and presumably his later one "E.T.") are rumoured to have been financed at the appropriate time to foster acceptance of friendly aliens and pleasant UFO experiences. "Close Encounters" cost US$27 million to make.

Whether with awareness or with naivety, Spielberg received encouragement, technical facilities and the production support of Julia and Michael Phillips to present a collage story of supposed meetings between spaceperson cultures and humanity. By this time the senior decisionmakers in the USA intelligence community, armed forces and other advisors to the White House have "negotiated" an arrangement with the GRAYs whereby the GRAYs will ostensibly trade access to their much superior technology for the sanction to abduct and place implants into American citizens, ostensibly for research and monitoring purposes. The fact that the GRAYs have been responsible for ALL of the cattle and human mutilations which have mysteriously occurred is suppressed by the psychological human defenses of denial and intellectualization. The true intent of the GRAYs is not yet acknowledged at this point.

In too often typical human political response, the American citizenry are treated like children by their senior decisionmakers. Afraid that the common American could not emotionally and intellectually cope with the open acknowledgement of the GRAY's and other spaceperson' cultures, the public have been "protected" from this reality - as if the "problem" would go away. By deceiving and manipulating the public, the likelihood of real anarchy in the open acceptance of the GRAYs, under such a program of disinformation, becomes highly possible.

To prevent this anarchy, these decisionmakers, by now, had begun a conditioning preparation of the population in expectation of an orderly introduction of the GRAY's presence. The simplistic and unrealistic portrayals presented in the movie, disadvantage the viewer from being prepared to cope with different spaceperson cultures having widely differentiated intentions regarding humans.

In particular, the psuedo-spiritual theme of open-armed acceptance to any being which is technologically superior is a replication quite simply of human political authority structures - most of which have consistent histories of abuse to humanity and the environment. It stands as homage to a new god of representative technological power: the extraterrestrial. A truly spiritual approach would have been a humbling acknowledgement of "God", of the positive decisionmaking power of prayer and meditation, of the capacity for forgiveness, compassion, empathy, teamwork, individual self-esteem and assertiveness: NONE of which have been promoted at this point (1996) by the cultural leadership.

1978 -
Governor Scott Matheson, of Utah, expresses anger at the finding that the AEC has been guilty of a massive public relations campaign and cover-up of blatant malfeasances for over 25 years including:

"Funding has been cut off, studies have been discredited and their results discounted ... Some scientific papers on this issue (health safety relative to radioactive fallout from nuclear bomb tests in Utah) have found their only place of prominence at the bottom of some federal agency file."

Citizens in Utah or Nevada who received a dose of 1000 millirems per hour after a single blast in 1953 were compared to those near the Three Mile Island site who received a dose 400 to 500 times smaller !

Later, congressional subcommittees would condemn the AEC for

1) knowing the hazards, and failing to warn the sheep herders; 2) knowingly disregarding and suppressing evidence connecting radiation to deaths; 3) wrongly denying compensation to sheep ranchers for their losses; 4) acknowledging that the government must promptly compensate the victims for its mistakes. "the only victims of the U.S. nuclear arms since World War II have been its own people."

1978 -
According to the MUFON (Mutual UFO Network, Seguin, Texas) over 1,600 different entity incidents were compiled in their Humanoid Study Group (HSG) report, as of 1976. Of this number 166 were reports of on-board experiences. According to Study Group co-chairman, physicist David Webb, some of the recurring features of these kidnappings include:

"On-board medical examination, induced amnesia, intelligible communication, paralysis of the witness and such physical characteristics of the humanoids as slanted eyes, small stature, small noses and ears and a mouth slit."

In geographic terms, over half of the documented abductions have occurred in the United States, followed by strong concentrations in Brazil (20%), and Argentina (6%). It is to be expected that such reports would not be as easily made in countries in which literacy and education standards are low, where mass media is virtually absent, where socio-political institutions are openly authoritarian and the public take refuge in the uncompromising standards of such religious, social or political memberships. UFO abductions, or the reporting of them, has increased dramatically since 1965. Most such experiences go unreported because many contactees simply do not remember the experience. Usually, they are consciously left only with an awareness of time loss and the sight of a UFO.

1978 -
In the November issue of "Der Spiegel", the huge international magazine, an 11-page cover story on UFOs: "apparition or Reality? The UFOs Come." was printed.

The magazine cover was a dramatic Meier photograph - a beamship accompanied by a remote-controlled craft, the latter just below the horizon. Now people from all over the world would visit Meier, in Switzerland. A few would sign his guest book as coming from Tahiti, Japan, France, Germany, Spain, Italy, Mexico, Belgium and the U.S.A.

Popi (Mrs. Meier) would remain disgusted with the visitors.
"I was fed up many times," she said later, "but we didn't have a choice.
They would come into my house and say, 'Okay Billy, let's go.' Not a word to me.
I got aggressive, I could not see why people couldn't understand when I told them that Billy was busy right now. They came here with their problems and Billy had to be here no matter what. He didn't care about his health, and the people didn't see that he needed time to relax, to take care of himself, and to be my husband. Nobody ever asked Billy, 'So, you have a problem? Can we help you with anything?'"

Brit Elder later remarked:

"At the very beginning, Billy sincerely questioned his sanity. .... Then he got to where it became fun. All of these people he'd never met before, coming to talk to him. Then the photographs hit the magazines, and all of a sudden he was swamped with people. They started lining up outside. Literally lining up. And that he didn't enjoy. People would say, 'Give me this photograph,' or 'Let me have that photograph.' Then they would disappear and he would never see them again. Here I think all of the fun left it, because half of everything got stolen. The kids were being harassed at school. His wife was unhappy, and he wasn't real happy. Because there was a constant flow of human bodies.

Always..... Popi was very jealous of the contacts anyway, not just the fact it was a female space traveler, but also that Billy was doing something she couldn't be part of, and that she, deep down inside, didn't want to be part of. She didn't want anything to do with the contacts. She didn't want to talk to the people who were invading her privacy. I've seen her take on everyone in the kitchen, tell them to get out, leave, leave the house, go away, she never wants to see them again. Because they were making demands on her husband, and in her mind that was separating her husband from her. She finally got to a point where she didn't care. She didn't care if anybody showed up, she didn't care if her house was a mess. She didn't care what happened to her kids, herself, or her husband. Everything around her was overrun with strangers."

1978 - In November,
Jacques Vallee, mathematician and ufologist, while in Mexico, heard of a fall of metallic residue in the mountains near Puebla.
The object was chiefly composed of iron, with 1.1% of silicium and traces of manganese, chromium, and carbon.

1978 - As of November 28,
The Chicago-based "Center for UFO Studies", headed by astronomer Dr. J. Allen Hynek, has compiled UFOCAT, a catalogue generally regarded to contain the most complete listing of computerized world-wide sightings. Over 63,000 cases from 133 countries are compiled with, relative to population size, the United States being in the lead with the number of sightings, closely followed by Canada, Great Britain, Australia and France.

If we were to project Dr. Hynek's estimate that only 1 in 12 sightings is reported, we would be faced with a figure upward of 3/4 of a million potential UFO occurrences.

1978 - By December,
The Last Titanium Pigment Plant is built in the USA for the next 12 years.
Capacity for the paint industry had been established, there were few enforced regulations against the use of lead pigment, and use in plastics and papers was still minimal due to perceived cost and the continuing quality expectations re; a disposable-based product income. Plastics which discoloured as they reacted to the chemicals in a polluted air environment and as the plastics outgased and "decayed" were not yet considered a problem.

Also, the construction of plants in other countries with lower real estate costs, lower taxes and lower cost supplies of energy proved to be more attractive to business leaders.

1978 -
Over New Zealand's South Island, in late December, swarms of oval, luminous UFO's were observed by hundreds of witnesses including pilots and a television crew. At least 10 were recorded in a group by the latter observers.

1978 - On December 30,
Near Christchurch, New Zealand, Captain Bill Startup, the crew and television reporter passengers photographed and observed a round bright object which grew in size from a point to the size of a large balloon filled with glowing light. On a return flight 2 more objects were seen, one a sphere with lateral lines around it and which seemed to focus itself for them. The sphere appeared to be spinning. All were picked up on radar which showed the objects in formation with the plane and varying in its size.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1979 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

The Riddle of the Sands; The Prize Fighter; Mad Max; Friendly Fire; And Justice For All; Apocalypse Now; Monty Python's Life of Brian; Rocky II; Murder By Decree; The In-Laws; The Jerk; The Great Santini; The Prizefighter; The Amityville Horror; The Great Train Robbery; Breaking Away; Wild Blood; An Almost Pefect Affair; The Return of the Mod Squad; Sanburn

General News:

Consumer Price Index: 217.7

1979 -
An American study on "Why People Called the Police", conducted between 1970-1978, produced the following results. Crime calls were outnumbered 4 to 1 by non-crime calls: the kind that get no media or political attention. The latter category was growing all the time. Constantly, the message was the same; people want to be able to turn to the police with their social and personal problems, not necessarily for a solution, but sometimes simply for a shoulder to cry on. The police represent the only 24-hour social service available for which there are no user fees. Why? Citizens are forced to call for help to an institution which is chronically inefficient in its resolution of 80% of its requests due to a lack of training and mandate - because there is no other.

1979 - During the year,
A U.S.A.F. medical expert investigated the case of a young college student, Greg, who reported an encounter with a bright green light after which he saw "two ships with a violet red light going back and forth." The doctor examined him and found a five-inch diamond-shaped red mark on his chest and small puncture wounds in his legs. The mark on his chest did not fade for months. The holes were approximately the size of those made by a hypodermic needle, but such needle marks would have disappeared more quickly.

1979 - During a Civil War in Sudan,
An Ebola filovirus epidemic breaks out.
All medical researchers except Dr. Joseph B. McCormack declined to investigate due to the hazards of the war, the disease and the ecology. McCormack volunteered to try and retrieve some samples of infected blood and return with them to the US Army Atlanta, Georgia base for analysis in the hope of finding a cure or remedial agent.

McCormack arrived in southern Sudan in a light airplane flown by two terrified bush pilots who remained too scared to get out of the plane. It was late afternoon and the pilots gave McCormack until sunrise the next morning to collect his samples and return to the plane. They would take off then whether he had returned or not.

McCormack took up the backpack he had brought and walked into a nearby Zande village.
There, a quarantine hut seemed to have been designated for a number of infected persons were inside it; concerned villagers stood around outside it. His flashlight dead and no spare batteries, he requested and borrowed a lantern from one of the villagers. Entering the mud hut, he found a number of victims lying on straw mats on the ground. All appeared to have the Ebola disease in various stages of progression from red eyes to convulsions to bleeding out and death. Throughout the night, he took samples and tried to care for the patients. At one point, a convulsing woman thrashed about and resulted in the needle McCormack had inserted into her arm coming free and momentarily sticking his thumb. Was he infected?

At dawn, he gathered up the samples, rushed to the plane, handed them to the pilots and chose to stay behind.
He had brought two bags of blood with him, chilled in ice, which supposedly had antibodies to the disease. Fearing that he might now be infected, he transfused himself with the bagged blood, and rested for the day. His rational capabilities plaguing him with fears and fantasies of contracting the disease, he drank half a bottle of Scotch whisky that evening to help him get some sleep.

He worked with Ebola patients for the next 4 days.
At the end of the 4th day, the old lady whose blood had been jabbed into his thumb, recovered.
She had not had Ebola, more probably malaria. Her "convulsions" were more likely shivering motions associated with fever and hallucinations. Although he had breathed the air in the blood soaked hut for days and been close to infected patients, he did not get the disease. He would assume later that this indicated that Ebola was not easily transmitted.

1979 - By February,
Ugandan leader Idi Amin administration and his tribe's genocidal war against the Ibo had ended.
The war had prevented farmers from planting their crops and famine would follow.
Warring tribesmen had broken into the Moroto armoury and stolen 12,000 automatic weapons and a million rounds of ammunition. They then proceeded to burn the countryside and kill people of other tribes. The UN has done nothing effective. The USSR and the USA, rather than staying away or providing education in spiritual aspects of interpersonal harmony such as trust, honesty, forgiveness, negotiation, tolerance ... have been active in supplying weapons for profit and advisors and mercenaries for training in war.

Within 16 months, Uganda's northeastern Karamoja region will have some 400,000 people facing starvation. Successive Ugandan governments up to that time, will have done nothing effective to restore order; corrupt officials, a commonplace, will have stolen international relief supplies, and sold them at enormous profit for themselves, while the intended recipients die of starvation.

By August, 1980 1.5 million war refugees would be in Somalia, more than one for every three indigenous Somalis. Thousands dead, hundreds more would be following them daily. During 1973, a famine had claimed the lives of 250,000 people in the Sahelin drought in West Africa. During 1980, in East Africa, 60 million people will experience prolonged hunger, including 2.5 million refugees from prolonged and indecisive military conflicts in Chad and the Ethiopian provinces of Ogaden and Eritrea as well as the strife in Uganda.

1979 -
A deputy sheriff took photographs for 130 consecutive days of the body of a horse which had been mutilated but did not decompose. Presenting his findings at a Department of Justice conference convened in Albuquerque, New Mexico, he found no interest from the other participants; he resigned in disgust.

1979 - On March 5,
Antonio Gonzales Llopis, and many others, took photographs of an incident which occurred near Gran Canaria in the Canary Islands. In the evening, a swirling light over the sea was noticed and photographed. A moment later, a huge, dark object rose rapidly out of the sea, going straight up. It surmounted a ball of fire, the light of which was so bright as to obscure any detail in the pictures taken. After the object had disappeared, a bright trail and a golden cloud illuminated the sky for half an hour.

1979 - In April,
The National Power Nuclear Reactor Project construction permit was signed.
The project would become the largest construction project (in cost) ever completed (to date) in the Philippines. Located in an environmentally and politically unstable country, the power plant would have one 626-megawatt reactor (two were originally considered) and the price would be $722 million ($500 million for two reactors was originally proposed), plus, it would cost an additional $387 million for interest and escalation costs, bringing the total to $1.1 billion. Financing of the reactor was arranged with the USA Export-Import Bank.

With much behind-the-scenes encouragement, Librado Ibe, head of the Philippine Atomic Energy Commission, issued the construction permit in April 1979, a week after the Three Mile Island nuclear accident in the USA. He then took his wife and children to live in the USA, fearing that the same or worse would happen in the Philippines. Bankers who had delayed the contracts and business arrangements of President Marcos associate had been subjected to assault and threat to their family.

Several months later, Marcos would stop the project himself to order an investigation into the technical side. The investigators concluded that the site was unsafe and recommended new safety features. Westinghouse renegotiated the contract to meet these obligations and the price now rose to $1.8 billion - $55 million for added safety equipment, $645 million for higher interest costs, inflation, and more kickbacks. All the companies were worried about the money they would lose if the project did not proceed; the American government was worried about a loss of face if the project didn't proceed; Marcos and his associates KNEW that the Americans were so obsessed with the project that more kickbacks could be demanded. Eventually the cost reached $2.2 billion and work was pushed through to finish in 1984, in hopes of avoiding more problems and further increased cost.

At about the same time, 1984, Disini's leveraged empire suddenly collapsed.
He left the Philippines hastily for Austria, where he had sent much of his true wealth and where he had purchased a palace outside Vienna. Both he and Imelda Marcos had become friends with political leader, Kurt Waldheim.

1979 - In Mid-April,
Conclusions came of Marcel Vogel's examinations of samples brought to him by Wendelle Stevens and Jim Dilettoso concerning the legitimacy of Eduard Meier's described experiences. These included various crystals that Meier had labeled as originating on certain planets in other star systems, and four states of metal used in forming the hull of the Pleiadian beamships. Stevens sent the evidence to Vogel through the regular mails (!) and when they arrived Vogel found a lavender crystal, two packages filled with darkened metal specimens, and the last containing a half-inch triangle appearing to be an alloy of silver and gold.

Vogel studied the samples in his IBM laboratory.
Except for its clarity and the beauty of its soft violet tinge, the amethyst crystal revealed no unusual properties. The two metal specimens darkened by oxidation contained only small and impure quantities of aluminum and sulphur, with some silver, copper, and lead. When Vogel touched the oxide with a stainless steel probe, red streaks appeared and the oxide coating disappeared, leaving a pure metal. Vogel had "never seen a phenomenon like that before." Apart from the unusual property, Vogel never let on that he thought them to be any different than silver solder.

The final fragment was the triangle.
When Meier had received it in 1975, the Pleiadians had cautioned him that scientists would be able to easily analyze the components of the alloy, which included the basic building blocks of the universe, but that the alloy was bonded in a unique way involving 7 separate developmental stages that by 20th century earth technology would be impossible to duplicate. "This information can be only a suggestion to the earth scientists for the still distant future", one Pleiadian had told Meier. Vogel stayed late at the laboratory one evening to study the specimen.

By June, Vogel had studied the triangle under a $250,000 scanning electron microscope, he recorded the analysis on video tape. The tiny specimen held very pure silver, and "very, very pure" aluminum, plus potassium, calcium, chromium, copper, argon, bromium, chlorine, iron, sulphur, and silicon. One microscopic area revealed "an enormous melange of almost all of the elements in the periodic table." And each was exceedingly pure. What intrigued Vogel in addition to the purity was the discreteness of the elements. Each pure element was bonded to each of the others, yet somehow retained its own identity.

"It is uncanny when you look at the juxtaposition of the metals. One layer against another is very pure, but they do not interpenetrate. You have a combination of metals and non-metals together, very tightly bonded. I don't know of anybody even contemplating doing something like this."

In one small area in the middle of the sample blown up 500 times, he found 2 parallel grooves joined by furrows, precise hairlines somehow micro-machined into the metal. But even more surprising to him was that the major element present in that small area was the rare-earth metal thulium. "It is totally unexpected. Thulium was only purified during WWII as a by-product of atomic-energy work, and only in minute quantities. It is exceedingly expensive, far beyond platinum, and rare to come by. Someone would have to have an extensive metallurgical knowledge even to be aware of a composition of this type."

Vogel then had raised the magnification to 1,600 times and discovered

"A whole new world appears in the specimen.
There are structures within structures - very unusual.
At lower magnification one just sees a metallic surface.
Now one sees a structure composed of various types of interlacing areas.
This is very exciting."

At 2,500 diameters, Vogel could see birefringent structures -

"Very exciting! It is very unusual for a metal to have these birefringent areas.
When you first take a section and grind it off, it looks like a metal, it has
the lustery appearance of metal, but now when you take it and go under the
polarized light you find that, yes, it is metal, but at the same time ... it is crystal!"

Vogel placed the specimen in a small plastic bag and left it in his lab coat.
The next morning, Vogel called Dr. Richard Haines, a research scientist at NASA's Ames Research Center to come and see what he had discovered. Haines arrived, and when Vogel went to get the specimen, he could not find it. During the night, the specimen had disappeared, or, been taken. Vogel was embarrassed by the loss of the sample. He said later, that had he been able to get more specimens, he would have gone much deeper into the metallurgical study of it and would have invited a second opinion from a person he knew at MIT.

Wendelle Stevens and Lee Elders later published a preliminary report which Vogel disparaged for its lack of technical perfection. His final summary to Gary Kinder was:

"I cannot explain the type of material I had.
By any known combination of materials I could not put it together myself as a scientist.
With any technology that I know of, we could not achieve this on this planet!
I showed it to one of my friends, who is a metallurgist, and he shook his head and said,
'I don't see how this can be put together.' That is where we are right now.
And I think it is important that those of us in the scientific world sit down and do some serious study on these things instead of putting it off as people's imagination."

1979 -
John H. Tobe in his "Constipation: Its causes, control and treatment" notes the increasing digestive epidemic which is sweeping North America and some real and suggested remedies which would not become well-known to the public for another 10 years!

"It became evident to me that laxatives only add to or aggravate the existing trouble. These producers of bowel action are made from either herbs or drugs and if a laxative is what you desire, you certainly have a wide selection from which to choose. However, remember that all lazatives are cathartics and their function is to irritate the digective tract, causing it to empty or evacuate its contents much more rapidly than it would normally do. Yes, they all function by irritating various sensitive organs and the membranes that line the intestines.

It has been brought to my attention that there are many individuals, especially those who lead sedentary lives and are fond of their food, who take laxatives or purge once a week or even more frequently. They are definitely suffering from constipation and, thus, the purge or laxative is necessary to keep them in half decent condition. It is for such people that a basic raw vegetable, fruit and grain diet is badly needed. That changeover to a proper life-style alone could correct the condition.

Yes, there are millions of people in the world who take large quantities of drugs regularly for constipation and common sense should indicate that by doing so they are depriving the body of water, salts, various nutrients and essential body fluids. Loss of body fluids could eventually cause irritation of the mucous membrane of the intestinal tract. However, the gravest danger of regular purges or laxatives is the fact that the body does not get a chance to properly digest and assimilate the food. Thus some form of deficiency disease could be and probably will be the result.

At best, laxatives are only a crutch but in America today there are millions or tens of millions of people who use laxatives regularly. In fact, most of those people can't have a bowel movement without the use of their favorite laxative. ...

Laxative Foods ...

Fruits:
prunes, apricots, figs, peaches, plums, mango, papaya, banana, apples, pears, avocado, citrus , grapes, watermelon, dates, cherries, fresh berries with seeds, raisins.

Vegetables:
spinach, celery, lettuce, okra, onions, garlic, raw potato, asparagus, turnip, squash, parsnips, pumpkin, carrot, cauliflower, cabbage.

... The value of bran in constipation should not be underestimated ... What it does is absorb from 8 to 10 times its own volume in water .... Back 30 or 40 years ago Surgeon Captain Cleve prescribed one tablespoon of bran daily to keep the bowels of the navy in order. ...

As I'm sure you understand, America is becoming a nation of older people.
Well, when we pass 60 years of age (or sooner), we don't have the same appetite nor do we eat the same foods as we did in our youth. Soon we begin to complain about our bowels. We fail to recognize the vital fact that as we grow older we don't eat as much as we used to eat and therefore we don't have the bulk to excrete that we used to have. We just assume we are constipated.

For some strange reason, when our food intake drops to 1/2 or 1/3 of what it used to be, we still expect to excrete just as we did before. It's unreasonable, unrealistic ....

There is no doubt about it, refined foods, some of which are ultra-refined, are the prime cause of constipation ... eat whole foods ...

My interest in enemas was aroused back 20 or more years ago when one of my readers wrote and told me that he took 2 enemas a day. He went on to say that he had continued this practice for nearly half a century and at that time he was in his 90's. Another man, an undefeated world champion wrestler, told me that he took an enema whenever he missed a bowel movement. He is still alive in his 90's.. Apart from these two personal examples, most literature on the subject indicates that enemas are safe and should not be feared (when properly administered). ...

how to take or give an enema ....

You lie on your left side with hips raised slightly on a pillow .... Then, after a bit of lubricating oil (wheat germ or other non-petroleum derived) has been applied to the nozzle, the tapered nozzle is gently inserted into the rectum. ... the water is allowed to flow slowly and evenly into the rectum and the bowels ....

Maximum benefit is derived from an enema when the water or solution is retained for as long as possible. ... most effective when, after lying on the left side for some time, the patient changes to the right side and finally lies on his back with knees drawn up. ...

Why the enema is not recommended and used more frequently by physicians in the treatment of constipation ... the simple, plain truth that once a person used the enema he would have no reason to go back to his physician for further treatment. Thus if the physician recommended an enema and taught one how to use it, he would be doing himself out of some business. ...

It is better to use the enema more frequently than to use too much water and distend or overdistend the colon, thus reducing its elasticity and consequently creating more or less permanent dilation."

Consider also that as one ages, the potential for chronic infestation of the intestines with one or more kinds of disadvantageous parasites increases and that their damage, if not expelled, can result in the toughening, thickening, scarring and loss of elasticity and peristaltic ability of the intestinal wall. Other organ weaknesses may contribute to slow or inadequate digestion and slow passage of stool as can composition of the diet. Remember that licorice tea herbally and safely encourages peristaltic action.

1979 -
Operational Targets would define the USA Fed Monetary Policy for the next decade.
Objectives would be expressed in terms of projected changes in monetary structure and credit. The Feds ultimate objective would be balanced growth in the economy, as measured by changes in the Gross National Produce (GNP), the inflation rate, unemployment, and other factors. The primary near-term focus would be the management of credit in the banking system - because reserve levels remained critically low. It is difficult to plan for "balanced growth" when you fail to understand that your whole political and social system is constructed on a belief in progressive growth through eternal expansion of markets and money supply. Unless you can imagine, theorize, construct - or otherwise formulate a balanced economy, how can ANY of your policies or targets be relevant?

1979 - By June,
20 Pounds of Enriched Uranium is discovered to be missing after an inventory check at a fuel fabrication plant in Erwin, Tennessee. The supercritical mass for a U-235 20-megaton nuclear weapon is defined as 110 pounds (50 kgs) so this quantity could not be used by itself to construct a nuclear weapon. Used with 22 pounds (10 kg) of plutonium, it could be enough.

1979 - On June 14,
Edgar Jopson, the 21-year-old grocery store owner, decorated entrepreneur and student - who had asked Ferdinand Marcos to sign a statement that he would not run for a third term as President, was captured by the constabulary and sent to the 5th CSU for many months of torture. Decorated as "man of the year" by the Jaycees, an American independent free enterprise organization, he had become disenchanted by the government totalitarianism and joined the NPA Communists. Colonel Rodrigo applied brainwashing techniques to him. Captain Aguinaldo's men added the physical abuse.

He escaped with the help of a bribed guard, only to be recaptured in Mindaneo in the summer of 1982, shot 3 times, and then later 6 more times to finish the job. His bloated body was turned over to his father by the Constabulary and a storm of protest arose briefly. There were scores of victims whose bodies were never found. There were hundreds of cases of forceful interrogation. By December, 1979, more than 200 men and women had been formally arrested as "potential sources of information", during a period of less than 2 years .

1979 - In June,
The European Parliament First Election was held.
The first directly elected, multinational assembly in European history was set up to cope with European problems. The European Common Market (ECM), which began as the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1958, now had a central political authority.

1979 - By July,
Eduard Meier had drawn a set of rules to bring some sense of orderliness to the circumstance which resulted in strangers visiting him and his family at all hours, and often treating he and his family with the abuse of disrespect for privacy; the lack of politeness and honest concern that attends immaturity and self-absorption. Work schedules were enforced and dues collected from those who lived at the farm, as well as from regular visitors. Everyone remaining at the farm longer than 30 minutes was expected to work. And if anyone wanted to speak with Meier they had either to do so in the field as they worked next to him or in the kitchen after they had earned a piece of his time.

1979 - In the autumn,
Near the town of Oktoberskaya, Vladimir Kuzmin was camping out with several friends.
They were watching a dark aerial body (with dim lights across its equator) move smoothly towards them just above the treetops. It emitted a very intense, strangely shaped cone of white light shining down. The circle of light was brighter than daylight and estimated to be 100 metres away from them. Its diameter was about 2-3 acres in area. They were all paralysed but could move their heads and eyes. The object and its beam stopped for a moment and then continued on out of sight. Hypnotic regression after 1991 may yield other information.

1979 - On August 30,
Comet Howard-Kozmen-Michaels plunges into the Sun and is vaporized.

1979 - By September,
The USA Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA), a super-secret elite agency formed of senior political, military and intelligence personnel, was formed to effectively merge all federal powers dealing with civilian and military emergencies under the direction of one agency.

The concept of the FEMA derived from the WWI partnership of cooperation when corporate leaders, in full support of the government's involvement in the war, helped mobilize the countries industries for a massive war effort. Such activities and approaches also took place in Canada and Britain. Senior business and industry executives volunteered their skills to managing war production for the government. After the war, some received medals for their contributions; many were looked upon favourably for future government contracts, and a few were unjustly destroyed by the media when sensationalism through misrepresentation of the facts sold newspapers and destroyed careers and lives.

The basic motivations involved with such a closeness of "spirit" were the confidence which the corporate leaders held in their military-political leaders and the consensus held by both that annihilation by an enemy was a real possibility. Populations involved were smaller than those of 1984, politics was simpler and less global, the media were less knowledgeable and less critical of government and business decisions, and, those who believed that they were knowledgeable and were decisionmakers were both more confident overall and more uniform in their opinions. In 1984, the majority of Americans did not believe that they were on the verge of a nuclear war nor that they would be invaded at any moment. Some top American political leaders in 1984, having lived through the civil unrest of the civil rights movements of the 1960s and the anti-war movements of the 1970s, had become traumatized such that they were becoming more paranoid as their fear grew regarding potential civil unrest. They chose to force a consensus where one would not likely be otherwise found.

1979 - In the fall,
Lee Elders travelled to Switzerland to visit Eduard Meier and ask his permission to bring a Japanese production crew from Nippon Television Network Corporation to interview him. Meier was on the verge of a nervous breakdown. He had been locked in his office and not speaking to anyone for 3 days. All Meier would take was coffee and cigarettes and respond "Leave me alone." Finally, he summoned Elders.

Elders walked into the dark office on the 3rd floor of the farmhouse.
One light was on. Billy sat in his chair, hair and eyes wild.
Elders believed he was looking at a beaten man, totally withdrawn, staring at him.
Elders didn't speak for a long time, and then said: "How are you, Billy?" Meier's responded, "Oh Lee."
Then he poured out his heart for two hours ... about problems on the farm, how the pressure was getting to him, how he couldn't go on anymore, and, how he was going to break the contacts. After two hours, Elders asked: "How about some tea?"

Four hours more passed, during which Elders tried to convince Meier to continue what he was doing. He drew an analogy between Meier's photos and Michelangelo's paintings and the fact that his photos were raising the consciousness of the planet. His work with the contacts was important. His problems were minute because he was accomplishing something great. Finally, Elders told Billy that he had a Japanese production grew waiting in London, England - could he bring them? What would he tell them?" Billy agreed; the crew were sent for.

1979 - By September,
"Electromagnetic-Hypersensitivity Syndrome" would be influencing persons who experienced high negative stress levels AND worked near electromagnetic fields. Such syndromes would be the result of the human biological system adopting a patterned response to the presence of electromagnetic fields AND gross negative stress levels. This concept is more fully covered in the file on Energy Blocks.

Common sources of this type of radiation include televisions, computers, stereos, fluorescent lights, telephones, electric heaters, high-voltage power lines, electronic security systems, fire detectors, automobiles, any motorized appliance, and others. Symptoms could include any combination of the following at any one time: it is not necessary for the same symptoms to constantly repeat, although some usually do. ALL such symptoms are biological defense mechanisms including physical, emotional and neurological focal points.

Such symptoms for electromagnetic hypersensitivity include these:
minor headache; nausea; dizziness; severe fatigue; an inability to concentrate; other vision difficulties; skin reddening or rashes; allergies to sunlight; sensitivities to certain smells such as noticeable chemicals and perfumes. If the symptoms continue to worsen because the person's life system is exposed to increasing levels of negative stress ... confusion, depression, decreased memory, sleep disturbances, and even convulsions or grossly abnormal behaviour may become responses. While a cure would be found by the late 1980s, the adversity of the conventional medical system, the intolerance of both so-called holistic and medical systems, lack of funding for promotion and a generally institutionalized dependency patterning in the North American society would prevent much awareness or utilization of the block-stripping process.

1979 -
In the Introduction to "The Search for The Manchurian Candidate: The CIA and Mind Control",
by John Marks, Thomas Powers writes:

"secrecy invites dangerous temptations, and that any ideal
- even the 'victory of freedom' - may be corrupted by ill-chosen means."

1979 -
In "How Wars Begin", author and British historian, A.J.P. Taylor notes:

"In the old days the deterrent [conventional arms] worked nine times out of ten.
Now presumably it [nuclear arms] will work 99 times out of 100.
But if past experience is any guide ... the hundredth occasion will come."

1979 - In the October issue of "Science",
John L. Ruehle and Donald H. Marx publish an article entitled "Fiber, Food, Fuel and Fungal Symbionts".
Dr. Ruehle is principal plant pathologist and Dr. Marx is chief plant pathologist and Institute Director, Institute for Mycoohizal Research and Development, in Athens, Georgia. The article details fundamental growth characteristics shared by many plants on the Earth, a process which humanity has not been aware of until now and which humanity have largely aggravated. Some of their findings are as follows:

"Forest and agricultural scientists are struggling to increase yields of food, fuel, and fiber which are essential to human needs and which must be produced on a fixed quantity of land. ...

Plant scientists have learned (or been taught) to think of a dual system - the soil and the plant. This thinking should be expanded to include a third component - the mycorrhizal fungi. Mycorrhizae (fungus roots) result from symbiotic colonization of fine roots by beneficial soil fungi. The vast majority of economically important plants form mycorrhizae. ...

Mycorrhizae ... are increasingly recognized as important contributors to the cycling of soil nutrients. Many soils in the world are deficient in available major nutrients, particularly phosphorus; and plants grow poorly in areas without adequate mycorrhizal fungi. ...

Forest trees require mycorrhizae to survive and grow in the natural forest environment.
In modern agriculture, crop plants have been selected and bred to give adequate yields only under luxuriant soil and fertility conditions. Consequently many plant species are cultivated with minimal numbers of mycorrhizae. ... with the cost of fertilizers increasing rapidly, we can no longer use these chemicals so lavishly. ...

Although some fungi are fairly host-specific, others have broad host ranges and form ectomycorrhizae with members of numerous tree genera in diverse families.

The fungal symbionts are stimulated by root exudates.
Hyphae (fungal cell groups) grow over the surface of the feeder roots and form a fungus mantle (covering). (The covering then grows to replace the normal root "skin"), which is the distinguishing feature of extomycorrhizae.

... The greater the density of tree stands and the closer the proximity of the tree hosts to the seedling production areas, the greater the chances for rapid natural ectomycorrhizal development on the seedlings. ...

Many tree species requiring ectomycorrhizae would not reach plantable size in the nursery if they failed to develop adequate ectomycorrhizae. ... Mycorrhizal deficiencies are also seen in nurseries that use large amounts of soluble fertilizers. Heavy fertilization, especially with nitrogen and phosphorus, changes the biochemical status of seedling roots and reduces their susceptibility (accessibility) to infection by (co-opting with) mycorrhizal symbionts. ... heavy fertilization to obtain the fastest seedling growth inhibits or eliminates mycorrhizal development. ...

Vesicular-aruscular (VA) endomycorrhizal fungi occur on most food crops throughout the world, but they are ignored by many plant scientists because they have little effect on root morphology and are difficult to detect in roots. Also, these fungi have not yet been grown in pure culture and are not detected in routine soil assays with nutrient media. ... These fungi are more commonly spread by growing from feeder root to feeder root and, at times, are disseminated by moving water, soil, insects, and animals.

The importance of VA endomycorrhizae to phosphate nutrition is ... significantly increased growth of plants - by several hundred percent in some instances - on soils deficient in readily available phosphate. The main effect of plant response to these symbionts is increased efficiency of nutrient uptake (similar to a growth hormone). ...

Ion uptake in plants is governed by the absorbing capacity of the root and the movement of ions to the root. ... for relatively immobile ions, such as phosphate, zinc, copper, molybdenum, and sometimes ammonium (unlike those of nitrate, sulfate, and potassium) movement to the root is a limiting factor. In these cases the distribution of root hairs and mycorrhizal fungi in the soil may determine the rate of ion uptake.

Plant species differ in their production of roots and root hairs.
Many tree species have few fine feeder roots and few or no root hairs.
... Plants with few feeder roots and root hairs should benefit more from mycorrhizal (attachment) than those with numerous feeder roots. ...

Mycorrhizal fungi may ... grow at much lower water potential than higher plants.
Hyphae (groups of cells) extending into the soil, can increase water movement to the roots. Plants with few root hairs and feeder roots probably benefit from symbiotic (attachment) when growing in sandy or semiarid soils. Thus instead of irrigating to accommodate a crop, we might (use) mycorrhizal (assistance) and tailor the crop to the existing droughty environment. ...

Large growth responses to inoculation with VA mycorrhizae are more likely to occur in tropical than in temperate soils. Many of the arable soils of the tropics are highly leached Oxisols and Ultisols and are low in bases and relatively acid; these soils contain large amounts of exchangeable aluminum. Tropical soils are commonly deficient in phosphorus and other essential elements and they tend to immobilize added phosphorus. ... the interaction of rock phosphate with artificially introduced VA endomycorrhizae increases plant yields in tropical soils. ...

The management systems that produce high yields in developed nations are often not directly transferable to developing nations. Furthermore, the environmental effects and energy costs of some of these systems are being questioned in the United States. ... When a mycorrhizal symbiont that is ecologically adapted to the planting site is used, seedling survival and growth can be improved on a variety of sites. ... "

Unfortunately for humanity, and the Earth's rainforest ecology, this information came 20 years late and would largely be ignored for at least the next 30 years. Tropical rainforests were decimated in Brazil, Costa Rica and southeast Asia by massive slash and burn techniques or by defoliants. This drastically decreased the remaining fungal symbionts and left the porous hummus thin top layer of ground cover unprotected to rainfall. Nutrients were quickly leached to depths not accessible to new root systems making current cropping inefficient and future reforestation virtually impossible. When the forest clearing was intended to open up and create an expansive agricultural industry, it usually created a virtual desert within a few years at a high capital cost, high mortality of unique lifeform species, high degree of pollution and waste.

1979 - During the year,
Gordon Michael Scalion, an American electronic communications consultant loses his voice.
During his recovery, one evening, a spacewoman "floats into his room and dictates" a variety of details and observations. His voice returns and he gains the capability to see auras. His past level of awareness, rooted in the physical-rational world of science, he finds displaced by a new awareness which enables him to enter trance-like states and see visions of the future. He "sees" that:

     1. The Earth will be very quite in the year 2001;
     2. The Sun will appear to move in the opposite direction;
     3. A wind will blow from the east;
     4. A massive earthquake will occur in California in February, 1998;
     5. Geological changes will occur abruptly in the USA;
     6. Volcanic eruptions and earthquakes will occur in sequence;
     7. There will be massive changes in the oceans.

1979 - In the fall,
Jim Lorenzen, of APRO, who had been given more exposure to the Meier evidence than anyone else outside of the "Intercep Group", told an audience gathered at "UFO '79", the APRO Convention in San Diego,:

"My present disposition is that the Meier case is a hoax. It's not that simple though.
(Some aspects) are very difficult to explain. ... Part of it, I would say, is mysterious
and I can't account for it, but that doesn't mean I have to buy the whole package."

Character assassination began against members of the Intercep Group (Lee and Brit Elders, Wendelle Stevens, Gary Kinder, and others - from the time of this convention. Flyers and brochures were sent out by gossip mongers who chose to believe the gossip of others and to dramatize that still further with their low self-esteem. Directed against the Intercep Group because they had taken a more open minded review of the Meier data than most others, the exaggeration of emotionally reactive persons trying to protect their own narrow world-view, member of Intercep adopted a policy of not releasing any more information on the case: they went "underground". Letters started arriving stating: "We want to see what you have. Send it to us."

Brit wrote back: "No, If you want to see what we have, you come to Phoenix and look at it. It does not leave our possession." This hurt the pride and egos of those who were largely not genuine in their request placed in the first place. Some further replied that:"They don't have anything at all. They're not going to let anyone see what they have because they don't have anything at all." To these, Brit replied again: "It's here, but if you want to see it you come here to see it." None of them ever did. For the next 2 years this would irritate Lee Elders who believed that they had tangible evidence, which had to be held in secret because of people who criticized yet had never been to Switzerland to see Meier or the evidence.

Several points can be expanded on here.
First, Jim Lorenzen began APRO in the early 1950s in order to satisfy his intolerance for scientific confusion. Conventional science and authorities had declared that there could not be such thing as a UFO because a) all could be explained away as "normal" occurrences, and, b) because their existence would call into question all of human knowledge and assumed greatness. Curious in finding the challenging explanations behind the sightings, APRO spent much of its time focused on disproving sightings rather than on confirming sighting information. After many years of searching, and frustration, the Lorenzens realized that they would likely never prove the existence of UFOs. Loss of enthusiasm resulted in an increasingly structured and bureaucratic approach which seemed to say by their actions: "Let's just report the cases and forget it. Because getting involved takes a lot of time and a lot of money, and nobody's going to believe it anyway." They tired of the hassle.

Secondly, this was one of a number of UFO interest groups which were perfect for infiltration by C.I.A., F.B.I. and N.S.A. and Air Force Intelligence agents: it was open to and capable of circulating disinformation fed to it; it could be made popular by the addition of several well-known names which would attract all the would-be "crazies" which the intelligence agencies would then have identified. Coral and Jim Lorenzen never worked for these agencies. Neither did they suspect deception from their staff and membership. Their pop scientific attitude, common amongst most college trained and theory based scientists, encouraged their misuse by government agencies and private industry concerns which emanated from the Bilderburger Committee.

1979 - By early October,
Tom Welch and Lee Elders had borrowed a gamma radiation detection device from a local party in Switzerland.
The physicist assured them that the equipment had been used both in the lab and in the field for 10 years and had always read accurately. The instrument would measure electromagnetic radiation and detect any artificially caused change in the molecular structure of grass and soil.

While the Japanese film crew had been filming Meier, Welch and Elders had tested the location where Meiers specified the first Pleiadian beamship had arrived, back in 1974. They found significant readings that formed a circle about 21 feet in diameter. To their further surprise, the readings within the circle pulsated. The readings were 100 to 400% above the normal background readings. A physicist confirmed that an electromagnetic force strong enough to change the electromagnetic nature of every molecule where the readings were taken had been present at the site.

Near Meier's farmhouse, they found a giant circular spot which also pulsated and showed high readings. At another alleged landing site, at the edge of the forest below the farm, Welch again got sporadic readings up to .15. At another site in the gravel road leading to the front of the house, he got lightly pulsating readings from .05 all the way up to .2. Checking Meier's personal articles, they found his gun gave a reading of .01; his watch read .05; a metal charm which Meier kept in his pocket measured .1; his left shoulder fluctuated from .1 to .15; his right arm fluctuated from .05 to .1.

1979 - By the late 70s,
The USA was importing nearly 50% of its oil consumption and the world oil price had increased more than tenfold. Dependence on Middle Eastern oil supplies had been restricted to as low as 10% in accord with the suggestions of the March, 1969 Cabinet Task Force on Oil Import Control, but this was unlikely to continue.

1979 - At the end of autumn,
A telegram of alarm sent to U.S.S.R. KGB Residents from the KGB Chairman which read:

"World conditions, which are steadily deteriorating, are approaching a situation where the world stands on the threshold of a nuclear catastrophe. The ruling circles of the United States of America are planning to deliver a massive nuclear strike against the USSR and its allies, and to this end at the present time they are increasing their military potential and stepping up their preparations to begin a military conflict. In this connection the leadership of the KGB of the USSR directs all its residencies to change their basic orientation in acquiring intelligence. ... focus your main attention on intelligence of a military-economic nature which would substantiate material on the preparation being made by the USA ...

This is another indication of how discrete and separate the activities of the Bilderbergers and personnel are relative to the publicly received political leaders and state acknowledged military leaders. Whether you hold one of these positions or are chosen to participate by virtue of your resources of familiarity, money, social position, or professional merit, the freedom to be part of this self-appointed elite is, on the surface, more respectful of the individual than state and corporate bureaucracies. In addition, the covert nature of the organization and its activities is prone to have the leaders play political games of fear and aggression in order to maintain international conflicts capable of maintaining or increasing defence budgets.

Beginning in 1980, this game of "Russian Roulette" in which major political foes are driven almost to the point of mutual annihilation in order to provide a pool from which to siphon funds to finance the survival of the covert perpetrators is diminished until by 1988-89 most of the Communist Parties of the Soviet Bloc were practically gone under the strain of glasnost and perestroika. You can only "play" the risk so long before you get burned. More peaceful ways would be chosen to siphon monies to support Bilderberger plans before a nuclear provocation occurred between two newly nationalist states turned to war or the Earth's ecology turned against humanity. That was the hope.

1979 -
The Trident Submarine Launched Ballistic Missile (SLBM) is activated for replacement of Poseidon SLBMs this year.
Under development from the late 1960's, two models are produced. The C-4 is a 34 foot (10.4 m) long and 6 foot (1.8 m) diameter missile capable of delivering 8 independently targetable 100 kiloton nuclear warheads to a range of 4,600 miles (7,400 km). The D-5 is a 46 foot (14 m) long missile which carries an average of 10 - 475 kiloton warheads to a maximum range of 7,000 miles (11,300 km). The Trident employs a 3-stage solid-fueled booster rocket with inertial guidance refined by stellar or satellite navigation. Its accuracy allows undetected patrol by submarines anywhere in the world.

It is more accurate than most land-based missiles.
It is the weapon of both total retaliation and, if an accident should occur, total self-destruction of humanity. 475 kilotons is about 34 times more destructive than the nuclear weapon that destroyed Hiroshima and killed over 100,000 people! 31 USA and British submarines will carry 16 Trident SLBMs each: a total of 496 missiles; a destructive power of 235,600 kilotons. 496 of the largest human cities could be annihilated. About 14.5 kilotons is adequate to incinerate 100,000 people in an urban location. Is this an indication of human intelligence? Why would an advanced spaceculture want to contact this degree of "intelligence"?

1979 - During October,
Dr. Robert Nathan conducted experiments on some of Meier's photos, brought to him by Wendelle Stevens and Jim Dilettoso. The latter met Nathan at NASA's Jet Propulsion Laboratory in Pasadena, California. Nathan instructed Bob Post at the photo lab to have 4 X 5 color film positives made from Steven's internegatives. These copies were digitized into a computer format. Post asked Audrey Adkins to remain after work and process the transparencies. During the developing, Adkins noticed that the actual grain in the film was in better focus with a 20 X microscope than the picture itself.

The new transparencies revealed that Steven's internegatives were several generations away from the originals. They were so bad that Nathan was upset with Stevens and suspected that the latter had intentionally brought him this grade of negative to test his expertise. The earlier high resolution prints which Steven's had shown Nathan had obviously been original or more closely original quality. Because Stevens could not assure Nathan of the quality of the slides he was bringing, and, because Stevens did not either have, or take the opportunity to convey to Nathan the difficulties which Meier had faced in retaining the originals, Nathan assumed that all of the photos were fakes.

1979 - By November,
Mohammed Al-Quraishi, self-proclaimed Mahdi, or messiah-like liberator, had gathered together a fanatical group of armed Moslems and seized the Sacred Mosque in Mecca, Saudi Arabia. His supporters demanded that he be recognized by other Moslems as the long awaited leader which would lead all Moslems to victory over their enemies. Declaring inspiration by the Iranian overthrow, these terrorists stated that the Ayatollah Khomeini had brought a new dawn to the Moslem world. The uprising would eventually be crushed and many of the participants would be executed.

Documents found on the bodies of some of the rebels, who demonstrated signs of superior training and good defense tactics, established that they were South Yemenis. Soviet military advisors had been training the Yemenis and equipping them profusely. The military operations undertaken by the group of rebels suggested thorough planning. This attack had been directed at the House of Saud, so American intelligence agents believed. Dozens of Soviet generals and hundreds of Cuban soldiers would be airlifted to the Marxist state of South Yemen in the coming months in an effort to make it the best prepared to attack and control all of the regional Arab armies. Within the next 10 years, most Yemenis families would possess a personal store of at least 6 rifles of varying sophistication, grenades, mechanized transportation, anti-tank weapons, ....

1979 - By early November,
Politically induced Famine in Cambodia had resulted in the deaths of 167,000 persons and the change in lifestyle for over 350,000 from material self-sufficiency to material urgency and desperation. The military influence had grown from the long war in Vietnam. North Vietnamese and Chinese support had been routed through Laos and Cambodia in the hope of protection from air attack by virtue of international law. Virtue was not a consideration for the Americans who had actively participated in and promoted the war for 2 decades. Early in the 70's, America had intensively bombed areas of Laos and Cambodia and used CIA agents to organize, brainwash and arm bands and tribes into fear-driven warriors. Households were stripped of their male members' work contributions in order to train and serve as combat and insurgency troops. Males became increasingly dependent upon the military system which provided them with capital in exchange for servitude. Such military indoctrination lulled men and their families away from their former patterns of self-sufficiency.

Crops did not get planted.
Others were confiscated by the government or by the troops themselves, for food.
A great number of crops were destroyed by troop "exercises", chemical weapons and the devastation of bombs. When the situation became widespread enough for the rest of the world to become aware of it, emergency supplies of food were flown in from industrialized nations ... most of whom were responsible for the militarization of the country. In predictable fashion, the emergency supplies of food were confiscated by the political authorities and used to feed the military. The innocent civilians influenced died of starvation.

1979 - On the evening of November 11,
Commandante Lerdo de Tejada, skipper of a Supercaravelle of the Spanish Airline TAE, on a charter flight from Salzburg to Tenerife, landed his plane unexpectedly at Valencia, in Spain, on the evening of November 11th. After the airplane had passed over Ibiza, he was requested by Air Control in Barcelona to tune his radio to emergency frequency 121.5 Mhz. He did but heard no instructions. Then he saw 2 powerful red lights to the left of the plane. The object which seemed to be carrying the lights bore down on him at high speed. They were at 24,000 feet. The object seemed to be as big as a jumbo-jet. The object was so close and the speed so great that at one point, the captain felt forced to perform a sharp turn to avoid possible collision. The UFO followed the plane for another 30 miles.

Senor Morlan, director of the Manises Airport at Valencia, his traffic controller and other personnel confirmed seeing an odd object with red lights over the airport. Senor Juan J. Benitez, newsman, found that there had been a vigorous response to the alert by the Spanish Air Force as military radars had picked up unidentified targets in the precise area where the TAE airliner was flying. The unidentified radar echoes persisted and two F-1 fighters were scrambled from Los Llanos five minutes after the Supercaravelle had landed. It is understood that visual contact was made - and that one of the fighters was approached closely a number of times by the UFO.

1979 -
A U.S.A. Congressional investigation (1976-1979) of the death of John F. Kennedy concludes that there was a "probable conspiracy" in the assassination of JFK and recommends that the Justice Department investigate further. As of 1991, nothing further has been done. The files of the House Select Committee on the Assassination are withheld from the public on a secrecy classification which makes them available in the year 2029 - presumably after the conspirators and accessory participants have died of natural causes and Bilderberger tactics have been enacted.

1979 - During 1979,
The fact that Clay Shaw worked for the C.I.A. is admitted, under oath, by Richard Helms, Director of Covert Operations, C.I.A., in 1963. Clay Shaw was implicated as a major conspirator in the assassination of U.S.A. President John F. Kennedy in the investigation carried out under the direction of Jim Garrison, and later publicized in the movie "JFK". Clay Shaw reportedly died of cancer in 1974. No autopsy was allowed. He was one of the C.I.A. officers who had investigated the Dahl sighting in the early 1950s - where evidence disappeared, witnesses went into hiding, and other investigators died in a plane crash.

1979 -
Stanton T. Friedman, a nuclear physicist and lecturer from Haywood, Calif., in a Foreword to the book "UFO Sightings, Landings and Abductions: The Documented Evidence", by Yurko Bondarchuk, noted what he referred to as the "government point of view", that being the most important aspect of the UFO phenomenon: its potential as an object to be utilized for strategic purposes. In theory, the country which will first duplicate UFO behaviour will be the one to rule the planet. Thus, there are three obvious reasons why all governments wish to hide the best of UFO information:

1. They try to find out, with the means at their disposal, how UFO's work, but they cannot possibly inform their own citizens of their findings without giving away vital data to potential enemies.

2. They must be concerned about such potential enemies who, by duplicating UFO behaviour before they do, would gain the upper hand.

3. Any announcements confirming that some UFO's are intelligently controlled extra-terrestrial craft inevitably would result in a push by the youth of the world for an earthling rather than a nationalistic orientation.

Also in his Foreword, he noted that

"To the 'aliens' we are all earthlings, and there is no better way to see ourselves than through their eyes. We must appear to them, I believe, like a primitive society, spending most of our energies actively engaged in tribal warfare. ... in less than one hundred years we shall be travelling to the stars. Surely, any advanced civilization in our immediate galactic neighbourhood concerned with its own survival and security will want to monitor others who are about to break their gravitational shackles.

Clearly, no government on this planet would want its people to owe primary allegiance to the planet rather than to the country, in view of the fact that in the name of nationalism, governments spend about four hundred thousand million dollars each year for military purposes. Therefore, it is difficult to imagine how a nuclear holocaust can be avoided as long as more and more nations obtain nuclear weapons.

1979 - During November,
American hostages are taken in Teheran, Iran, with the intention of keeping the USA from attempting to overthrow the new government through the use of the Iranian secret service, which the USA had trained, CIA operatives, USA Special Forces and by other means. It would raise feelings of vengeance in the proud American populace, most of whom knew nothing about the inequities and tortures which had been perpetrated and assisted by the USA over the previous 20 years.

1979 - By December,
The Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) had been given the ultimate responsibility for the development of civil defense plans in the USA in accord with the concerns of TEAM B. They are to introduce and organize the means to activate martial rule over the whole USA on an immediate basis should the President declare a state of national emergency. Such emergencies are loosely categorized as a) nuclear attack by the USSR; b) environmental catastrophe; c) widespread social unrest - civil war; d) invasion by another nation or by "aliens"; e) any other reason deemed necessary by the President.

At this point, the FEMA is situated to become the supreme controlling agency senior to a collection of companies that will be engineered into becoming global leaders in their respective industries. FEMA quickly recognizes that in the new global arena of political power, information acquisition and handling will become the most critical element to the control and manipulation of events along lines favourable to the aims of the FEMA leadership. As presidentially appointed administrator, policy advisor, and intelligence analyzer, the FEMA becomes the "spirit" of American politics.

One of the first measures of the FEMA is to recruit the National Security Agency as its first "prince". The NSA will become the domestically located intelligence processing and storing resource for the FEMA. Already highly proficient and involved in these areas, affiliation with the FEMA will ensure that it receives adequate legal protection, capital funding and intercompany coordination to become a "king" in its specialty.

1979 - By December,
The USSR had been aware of at least one USA Pre-emptive Strike condition.
Beginning in 1968, amidst rising anti-Vietnam War demonstrations and a failing marriage, John Walker of the US Navy began conveying the electronic key codes to the USSR. They were used and changed daily in an effort to maintain secret broadcast communications between Navy units. Earlier in 1979, a US nuclear submarine senior officer, who had been recently briefed on a Rand Corporation report on winability of a nuclear war and totally frustrated with the stalemate in southeast Asia, drugged his fellow key holder and officer and undertook to launch a pre-emptive strike against the Soviet Union.

The submarine officer had read that, theoretically, a nuclear war could best be won with the fewest casualties by launching an unannounced (pre-emptive) nuclear attack (strike) against the enemy. The officer had served through 20 years of Cold War intrigue and suspense during which he was often asked to be in a perpetual state of readiness to die for his country in what would likely amount to a suicide attack on the Soviet Union. He had been in rotating submarine duty for over 10 years. For at least 5 years, his command had rehearsed procedures for the launch of nuclear missiles against the Soviet Union at least once per week. This time, in a state of nervous breakdown (disorientation) after a long period at sea, the officer communicated his intentions to a senior USN land-base and the Soviets were able to translate the message.

Minutes before implementing the double key access to the firing controls of the nuclear warhead missiles on the submarine, a more senior officer from a land base in California warned the submarine officer that if any missile were launched from the submarine, the land base would be forced to attack the submarine as a rogue unit acting in mutiny. The submarine officer became further emotionally disabled and a member of the crew relieved him of his command. In the interim, personnel in the Soviet Union were alerted of an impending attack and counter-strike preparations were initiated. Minutes before a counter-strike was to be started, word arrived from the codebreaking department that the American pre-emptive strike had been stopped and was a mistake on the weakness of American personnel.

This incident was used afterwards by the Soviet leaders to justify their emphasis on increasing their military might and their capability for massive retaliation. The position of the Soviet military was that American officers were poorly trained and undependable and that eventually, a rogue officer would initiate a nuclear attack. Mirroring the American political historical approach of only negotiating from a (coercive) position of military superiority, the Generals and the KGB demanded the potential to destroy the USA. If they were going to be attacked "without cause or provocation", they wanted the assurance that no American would benefit from the outcome: reciprocal annihilation. This accelerated a new weapons buildup in the Soviet Union, soon to be followed by the USA.

1979 - One night in December,
An estimated 10 lights appeared suddenly over Madrid, executed a brief aerial ballet then sped off in the direction of Barajas, a major airport 6 miles from Madrid. There, photographs were taken.

1979 - On December 28,
Afghanistan was invaded by the U.S.S.R..
Neighbouring Iran had fallen away from both the U.S.A. and the Soviet Union, and felt increasingly threatened at its borders. Historically, Britain had wanted the U.S.S.R. away from its empire in India; the U.S.S.R. wanted no British presence on the fringes of Asia - stemming from the era when Britain was a large and expansionist state. As was typical with British empire building, the British had made several attempts to subdue the country; the Soviet Union had never made war on the Afghans. Beginning in the 1960s, Soviet arms and advisors were supplied to the Afghans who had no security forces and a small army. In 1973, the increasingly left-wing army, under the direction of Mohammed Daud, a nephew of the king, Mohammed Zahir Shah, staged a coup and Daud became President.

Apart from the desires of the Afghan Communist Party (ACP), Daud improved relations with Pakistan and Iran. In late 1977, Daud approached the Shah of Iran for a loan to build a modern highway from Iran through Afghanistan to Pakistan. The Shad agreed provided that Daud got rid of the ACP. In early 1978, all ACP leaders were arrested and jailed. The ACP appealed to the U.S.S.R. which could see no realistic possibility and promised them nothing. The ACP went ahead anyway, on April 27, attacking the palace in Kabul with tanks and aircraft. After a brief battle, Daud and family were arrested and shot.

Now the Soviet Union was more supportive.
Yet the ACP had split some years previously into 2 factions, one Chinese-oriented and the other Soviet oriented. The so-called Chinese-oriented faction was largely so in reputation due to the slander of the "Khalq" faction led by Noor Mohammed Taraki who sought favours from the Soviets by such ruse. The "Parcham" faction, supposedly pro-Chinese, led by Babrak Karmal, became the target of KGB infiltration for the purpose of keeping their activities supervised. The Soviet Union has always aggressively held their borders against incursions by the Chinese.

The KGB needed "illegals" and the Parcham wanted to cooperate:
All the leaders of the Parcham faction became recruited agents.
The Politburo urged the formation of a coalition government; then, the question of leadership arose.
The KGB were ordered to produce a detailed report of Taraki and Karmal.
Karmal was described as the more reasonable and disciplined, had shown himself to be pro-Soviet and would listen to advice. Taraki was described as stubborn, intolerant, irascible and shallow.

The Politburo chose Taraki, on the grounds that Karmal was unknown and that "We know Comrade Taraki personally as a fighter with a pro-Soviet orientation ..." The personal connection was Mikhail Suslov, then in charge of ideology in the Soviet Communist Party, and whose influence outweighed even Brezhnev's, the secretary general. Soviet advisors flooded into Afghanistan and the KGB and MVD sent help to set up new police and security forces. Taraki ignored all advice.

Taraki started with land reforms, confiscating the lands of the Mosque and feudal landlords and turning them into collective farms, which the Soviet Union now discouraged from their history of failure. Taraki was committed to Marxist-Leninist dogma without concessions. He embarked on a countrywide campaign against religion where the population was fanatically devoted to Islam. Brezhnev only listened while Taraki complained of zealots, who he dismissed for government, and the Parcham faction, whose leadership he withdrew from the government. The Afghans were a kind and patient people who didn't mind who ruled as long as they were left alone. Disturbances began. Taraki ordered the resistance tribes to be unarmed; Islamic tradition deemed it morally correct for all including children to be armed to uphold their faith. The Soviet advisors tried to oppose the hard-line only for Taraki to tell his officials to listen to the Soviets but follow his orders.

On March 22, 1979, the Pushtu population of Herat staged an uprising that killed many Soviet specialists before being suppressed. Incredible brutality was displayed by government and Pushtu forces. Soon, much of the country was in an uprising. Taraki now appointed Hafizullah Amin, a skilful organizer and recruiter, who had returned from the USA in 1965, as head of the government. Amin arrested or executed the remaining members in the government of the Parcham faction. Moscow was perplexed. If they left, and Kabul should fall to the rebels it might set an example for other countries in which Soviet-backed governments were being challenged. In September, 1979, President Taraki was summoned to Moscow and told to get rid of Amin. On returning, Taraki called a meeting of the government at the palace to discharge Amin and re-establish a coalition. Amin came prepared with his personal guards. Several shots were fired at him and he entered the palace with his guards and killed many members of the Cabinet, the Khalq Central Committee and Taraki.

Amin appointed relatives to all the key government posts and surrounded himself with bodyguards. He refused to work or speak with the Soviet Allies saying that they betrayed the cause of the Afghan revolution. The Politburo in Moscow reactivated the KGB Eighth Department of "S" Directorate of the KGB - the direct action department - dormant since 1973, to assassinate Amin. Amin was careful to avoid poisoning attempts and by December he had devised a plan to get all U.S.S.R. influence out. He intended to enlist the support of the armed opposition, make a worldwide announcement demanding that the U.S.S.R. remove all advisors, and appeal to the UN for help. The Soviets heard of the plan and asked for strategies from the KGB again.

The KGB suggested a raid by special commandos on the presidential palace in Kabul, overthrow Amin and his supporters, put in place a government that would be acceptable to Moscow, and then introduce a policy of national reconciliation. The Party executives and the military preferred the strategy of putting troops into Afghanistan, kill Amin, occupy all the country's principal towns, speedily destroy the centres of partisan resistance, and then withdraw. The KGB warned that the resistance would grow in proportion to the Soviet presence. The military were arrogant in their position that they could put these peasants under control quickly. On December 28, the Soviet army moved to Afghanistan by land and air. Airborne troops and special forces were dispatched to the palace where to their surprise they met heavy resistance from Amin's guard who had been instructed to fight to the last man, and they did. Reinforcements had to be brought in to finish it.

As early as May, 1979, two divisions of U.S.S.R. forces, consisting entirely of officers and soldiers of nearby tribes (Tadjik and Uzbek) had been placed at the border following the massacre at Herat in May. Some units were sent into Afghanistan to protect Soviet specialists there. Their sympathy for the local people, their devotion to Islam, and their dress in identical uniforms to the Afghans. It would not have been unthinkable if some of these troops were to join with the rebels following the invasion. In the months ahead, the Soviet Union and its embassies received considerable attention from demonstrators and reporters who abhorred their apparent unwarranted invasion. Tens of thousands of Soviet troops would die; many more would be wounded.

The significance of this example is that modern human large political systems continue to make decisions without reference to history and often in opposition to what their own intelligence analyst suggest. This, for the Soviet Union, was a textbook repeat of what the U.S.A. had done in Southeast Asia, although over a shorter period of time and with much less air bombardment. As more nations, racial and religious groups assert their independence from federations and arbitrary political borders, the potential for more political mistakes potentially involving the use of small nuclear transportable weapons by rebels increases. By operating on the expectation of an "Alternative 3" rational (destroy humanity on the Earth and safeguard a select few to a space station or other planetary settlement for later return), resources which might have negated its apparent justification have been used to intensify the need for it!

Economies of large empire countries, like the U.S.S.R and the U.S.A., are being destabilized by the deficits largely accumulated by an emphasis on military research, armament and covert spending. Without militarily weak, undeveloped nations providing the resources for a profitable economy, these large nations cannot extend their powers for very long. Adding to their own fall, these countries have taxed and controlled the economies of their smaller dependencies, and, filled them with armaments and expectations of a high standard of living. They have provided the servants they require with the means to assert themselves and the motivations to strive for the impossible. At some point, the hypocracy will break in anger when countries realize they have sacrificed the health and resources of their citizens to stockpile weapons that can only lead to their own destruction.

1976 - 1987 (+/-) Soviet Navy underwater studies - bright sphere (Arctic Ocean)

1976 - 1987 (+/-) Soviet Navy U/W studies - vertical cylinder (Pacific Ocean)

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1980 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

Revenge of the Stepford Wives; Coal Miner's Daughter; Dressed to Kill; Friday the Thirteenth; Heaven's Gate; Private Benjamin; The Elephant Man; The Empire Strikes Back; Tom Horn; The Kidnapping of the President; 9 to 5; Hide in Plain Sight; Brubaker; Dirty Tricks; Caddyshack; Raise the Titanic; Ordinary People; Borderline; Honeysuckle Rose; Airplane!; Phobia; Agency; Melvin and Howard; Defiance; Can't Stop the Music; The Competition; Used Cars; Gloria; Suzanne; Urban Cowboy; Somewhere in Time; The Bunker; Bronco Billy; Tribute; Cheech and Chong's Next Movie

General News:

Consumer Price Index: 247.0

An underground FEDERATION base is established in northeast Mexico.

1980 - By January,
The Ayatollah Khomeini, Moslem religious leader and political leader of Iran, had placed an "Islamic Contract" on the life of Egyptian President Anwar Sadat for his attempts to negotiate peace with Israel. The Ayatollah had called on all faithful Moslems to try and kill Sadat with a promise of "special blessings of Allah" for the person who executes Sadat. It would not be the last such call for murder - a clear example of the non-spiritual quality of the foundations of fundamentalist and institutionalized Islam.

The CIA and the USA White House had supported the totalitarian and coercive political measures of the former Iranian leader, Shah Mohammed Reza Pahlavi, with a supply of armaments and the training of its secret police force in torture techniques. In return, the American leaders expected that the Shah would be able to suppress any Middle East unrest and safeguard American access to Persian Gulf supplies of petroleum. With the Shah's overthrow, this strategy was now out of direct American control.

The Shah's once huge armed forces had quickly fallen into chaos with a lack of discipline and an uncertainty of leadership. Many of the army's highest-ranked and best trained officers were executed by the Ayatollah's "Revolutionary Court" which largely consisted of devout and pious religious leaders. Under such an uncertain and dangerous administration, many of the 415,000 troops were said to have deserted. Maintenance and repair of the regular and high-tech weaponry had fallen off dramatically.

Attempting to rule the country through a Moslem theocracy of ayatollahs and priests, none of which had any experience in the administration of government, the military or the commercial markets ... resulted in an image of political weakness to the rest of the world. Khomeini was most powerful as the accepted god-like religious leader of millions of Moslems. He was re-starting an Islamic revival and preparing the people for a world-wide Jahid, that is, a holy war. The Shi'ite Moslems of the Persian Gulf States of Iraq and Saudi Arabia were increasingly encouraged to rise up in revolt against their "oppressors." In the latter, the Shi'ites were directed against the ruling and rival sect of the Wahhabis. Such political erratic strategies directed against the members of the status quo of all surrounding nations would not pass quietly.

1980 - During this year,
Saudi Arabia, a nation with less than 10 million in population, will rank 6th in annual expenditures of Earth nations.
It will devote over 12% of its per capita income to the purchase of armaments.
Meanwhile, Syria will devote over 28%;
Egypt will pay out almost 16%;
Israel will top all nations in per capita expenditures on armaments - at over 31%.
With such heavy and fast armament buildup, can humans avoid a war?

1980 - By this year,
Mary Summer Rain, who would write the book "Phoenix Rising" would provide predictions about the end of the century.
She moved to Colorado in 1977, a novelist with many rejections.
She drove into the woods and saw the image of an 80 year-old Chippewa woman, "No Eyes", who became her mentor and spiritual teacher.

She has predicted that great storms would cover all towns and that the seasons of summer and winter would become confused. New countries or political organizations would make nuclear armies and natural disasters would prevail greatly.

1980 - Beginning on January 1,
Charles Monet, a 56-year-old loner Frenchman living by himself on the Nzonia Sugar Factory, a plantation in western Kenya near the extinct volcano of Mt. Elgon, would soon experience the effects of a Biosafety Level 4 extremely lethal viral agent.

Relatively new to the country, Monet had immigrated in the summer of 1979.
He had the liking and ability to make friends with wild animals and did so with wild monkeys, weaverbirds, and a pied crow. He had a woman housekeeper and made friends with several women from the town of Eldoret, nearby. Just before New Year's Day, Monet and a female friend had driven up to the Mount Elgon park to camp in the rainforest surrounded by teeming wildlife. In typical fashion, Monet made friends with animals like monkeys and baboons.

Today, the pair drove further up the mountain to a small valley below Kitum Cave.
Herds of elephants (as many as 70 at a time) go inside the cave at night to obtain minerals and salts.
Monet and his friend explored the huge bat-frequented cave by flashlight.
A petrified rainforest inside, the cave displayed needle sharp crystals amongst examples of the petrified specimens buried in a long past blanketing of volcanic ash. Way at the back of the cave was a pillar covered with black guano from the velvety insect-eating bats which covered it. Monet and his friend, who would later become a prostitute in Mombassa, on the Indian Ocean coast of Kenya, returned home sometime over the next day or two.

1980 - By January 6,
Reports of Dreams that the Messiah was coming, experienced independently by 3 aged Rabbis in Jerusalem, had been popularized throughout Israel. The news was beginning to circulate to other countries around the world and the people of Israel themselves were expressing excitement and anticipation.

Shabetai Shiloh, who is said to have forecast the October Arab-Israel war, said that the Messiah will come soon. Shiloh said the war marked the first of three rounds of fighting heralding the Messiah's arrival. In the second round, all the nations of the world must be angry with Israel, Shiloh said. The third round, he said, would be a 3-month war between the superpowers.

According to the prophets, a Jewish false prophet will arise in Israel at the height of its turmoil.
He is described in Revelation 13: 11 - 17 as a miracle-working man who will masquerade as the Jewish messiah. He will lead Israel to worship the leader of the great 10-nation European confederacy. Appearing to be good, he is described as the anti-Christ. While Christ would advocate national humility and human universality, he will advocate national pride. While Christ would encourage assertiveness, respect for others, honesty, compassion and negotiation - an anti-Christ would, in reality, devise programs and political actions which reflected aggressiveness, intolerance, deception and manipulation and coercive actions predicated on unrest and urgency.

1980 - On January 8,
Charles Monet, who had recently visited Kitum Cave, began to experience a throbbing pain behind his eyes.
The headache worsened; his temples began to ache; regular medications offered no relief.
Then the pain seemed to circle around within his head. A severe backache grew.

On January 10, Charles Monet's symptoms worsened in severity:
nausea; fever; vomiting to the point of dry heaves; a strange passivity; an expressionless face; fixed, paralytic, staring eyes; drooping eyelids. His eyes turned bright red. His facial skin turned yellowish and became speckled with red dots. Monet became sullen, resentful, angry, disoriented and forgetful.

A concerned co-worker who dropped by, took Monet to the hospital at Kisumu, on the shore of Lake Victoria, to the south. The doctors, unable to diagnose the condition, fed Monet antibiotics. They had no noticeable effect. They advised Monet to go to Nairobi Hospital, the best private hospital in east Africa. He was still able to walk and had money so the doctors put him in a taxi, sent him to the airport, and he boarded a Kenya Airways flight.

After the 35-passenger Fokker Friendship propeller-driven commuter aircraft had taken off, Monet became airsick. By now bruises have begun to form on his face. He coughs red black-specked mucous into the airsickness bag. While his head was turning a black-and-blue colour, the connective tissue in his face begins to dissolve and the muscles of his face droop. The airsickness bag fills to the top with the "black vomit" which teems with highly infective virus. He closes it and hands it to a flight attendant.

Monet becomes rigid as his blood clots up lodging in every organ, muscle, vessicle of his body.
More complex brain functions fail; Monet becomes an automaton. As blood vessels break, he gets a nosebleed. His clotting factors used up, the blood flows freely. With brain functions failing and physical symptoms worsening in severity, Monet may have become hostile to touch and unable to think and reason. Eventually, Monet slumps back into the seat, as if dozing.

At the Jomo Kenyatta International Airport, the plane lands in late afternoon, and Monet, still able to walk, stands up, dripping. His shirt is a red mess of blood. He stumbles across the tarmac, through the airport terminal and into a taxi - mumbling "Nairobi ... Hospital. The taxi sets off. At the hospital, Monet pays the driver, gets out of the taxi, and walks over to the Casualty Department Reception window. Monet is instructed to sit in the waiting room while the attendant gets a doctor. He sits down and obeys the signs requesting quiet from those usually attending with cuts.

Suddenly, Monet becomes dizzy and utterly weak.
His spine goes limp and nerveless and he loses all sense of balance. He goes into shock.
He leans over, head on his knees, and brings up a huge quantity of blood from his stomach which spews onto the floor. He loses consciousness and falls forward onto the floor. Monet continues to vomit in reflex action as he lies unconcious. A tearing sound is heard as Monet's anal sphincter relaxes and blood mixed with intestinal lining is expelled. Pools of blood spread out from the body.

Moments later, aides arrived, picked up the body onto a gurney and hastily wheeled it into ICU.
Monet suffered respiratory arrest from inhaled blood. His pulse was weak. The attending physician, Shem Musoke, cleared Charles Monet's mouth in time to be showered with an expulsion of the black vomit. With Monet dehydrated from excessive blood loss, Musoke attempted to start a blood transfusion. Wherever Musoke attempted to start the injection, Monet's veins collapsed and blood began to flow from the needle punture. Black blood now flowed from Monet's bowels and Monet sank into a deep coma. He died several hours later.

An autopsy revealed that Monet's kidneys were destroyed; his liver had died 2 or 3 days earlier.
His body was encased in a waterproof bag and buried ... somewhere.

1980 - During January,
The Madison Group, a group of ultra-conservative Senate Staffers, met for lunch at the Madison Hotel in downtown Washington.
Its purpose was to embarrass, bedevil, and defeat the Carter administration.
Making use of high-level security clearances, which they held because of their staff positions on sensitive congressional committees, they planned and executed a campaign featuring concocted stories based upon nonexistent or totally misrepresented classified documents and information.

Once the presidential campaign began in earnest, they established a liaison with the Reagan campaign in the person of Charles Kupperman. The group was not without resources. Not only did their intelligence clearances provide access to extremely sensitive information, but they could also call upon ideological soul mates within the executive branch to assist in their projects.

1980 - About January 21st,
Dr. Shem Musoke of the Nairobi Hospital in Kenya developed an aching sensation in his back.
Nine days earlier he had treated Charles Monet.
Long hours of hard work became a rational denial to belittle the symptom.
Later, when he looked in the mirror, he noticed that his eyes were going red.
He rationalized again: perhaps he had malaria.

Musoke developed a fever.
His backache spread to become a full-body ache. He started taking anti-malaria pills.
That didn't help so he had a nurse inject him with an anti-malarial drug.
The pain of the injection was unlike that of any injection he had ever had before: severe.
An abdominal pain began. He rationalized, again: perhaps he had typhoid fever.
He prescribed himself a series of antibiotics: no effect. He continued to work in the hospital.
The muscle and abdominal pain became unbearable, and he developed jaundice.
Confused, he went to Dr. Antonio Bagshawe, a physician at Nairobi Hospital for diagnosis.

Dr. Bagshawe considered the symptoms and rationalized that Musoke's illness could be gallstones or a liver abscess. She ordered an ultrasound examination of his liver. The images suggested that it was enlarged. He was placed in a private room with nurses attending him around the clock. His demeanour became stunned as if his brain was preoccupied elsewhere. Exploratory surgery was recommended.

A team of surgeons opened up Musoke in the Nairobi Hospital main operating theatre.
His liver was swollen and red; no sign of gallstones. The bleeding could not be stopped.
It was as if he had become a hemophiliac. Eventually, the surgeons took a liver biopsy and closed up the incision. Shortly, Musoke's kidneys began to fail. An aura of emergency swept the hospital as the prospect of losing this well-liked doctor began to arise. Dr. David Silverstein took over the direction of the treatment of Dr. Musoke for Ms. Bagshawe, his physician had to travel out of the country.

Silverstein suspected the possibility of an unusual virus from the symptom of the kidney failure.
He took a blood sample, drew off the serum, and sent samples to the National Institute of Virology in Sandringham, South Africa, - as well as to the Centers for Disease Control (CDC) in Atlanta, Georgia, USA. The South African lab reported back that there was Marburg Virus in Musoke's blood. Almost nothing was known about it. First discovered in Marburg, Germany, in 1967, little had been heard of it since. Silverstein quarantined the hospital, keeping the 67 staff and patients inside.

Near the end of January, Dr. Musoke's condition began to reverse.
From a state of passivity, he became disoriented, angry, and obstinate.
After many days, his fever subsided; his eyes cleared; his mental functioning and character returned; ... slowly he completely recovered: the virus had mutated to a harmless-to-human form. None of the others in the hospital contracted what had been a case of Marburg virus. Vials of the Musoke-mutated contaminated blood ended up in US Army laboratories.

1980 - Early this year,
The Possibility of a Major War breaking out in the near future had been investigated and considered by the Rand Corporation, a major contributor to policy development of the USA White House, Pentagon and Intelligence community. At this time, Rand had published a report stating that a limited nuclear war would probably be fought before 1984, and that an all-out nuclear holocaust appeared certain to occur before the end of the 90's.

1980 - On January 31,
Governor Ronald Reagan stated that he did not think that the proliferation of nuclear weapons was "any of our (American administration's) business". He then criticized the Carter administration for attempting to halt the spread of such devices and technology, implying that such was foolish. Mr. Reagan worried some of his staff by his belligerent and occasionally cavalier attitude about the use of military force. These concerns focused primarily on nuclear weapons and the threat of nuclear war. It was believed by many American advisers that a nuclear exchange would more likely come as a result of the actions of some smaller country than through intentional acts or miscalculations on the part of the superpowers.

Reagan described in some detail, in an interview with "Associated Press", how he would handle arms control negotiations with the Soviet Union. The one card that he had not played, he said, was the threat of an "all-out nuclear arms race." And if he were elected President, that option would be a real one. The media networks ignored the quote entirely. It was one of those cases in which the press becomes not a medium of information, but a powerful actor - deciding for itself what the public ought to think about, what is going on, and then acting to turn that "ought to" into reality.

What these and other nation's advisers, in their human self-centredness discounted, was the potential for either an astronomical influence or a geological influence to result in global nuclear contamination.

1980 - In a diary entry of February 20, by Brit Elder,
The Intercep team investigating the case of Eduard Meier set new guidelines:

"Point of problem: additional security needed. ... no (scientist) willing to attach name to analysis. ... Too much going out of our office, not enough coming in. ... Reorganize thoughts, get out of frustration's way, proceed.

     (1) tighter security;
     (2) no open release of material or information to anyone;
     (3) one of us present for any analysis;
     (4) no more verbal reports;
     (5) low-key research, find the right ones for the right work;
     (6) no info to outsiders, gets too twisted;
     (7) everything done must be signed for, creates paper trail;
     (8) all work must be made known to Lee, he will coordinate and authorize research from here on. ...

Personal opinion:
Wish more people with education, reputation, background, qualifications, had courage and curiosity to pursue subject."

1980 -
The USA "Monetary Control Act" phased in reserve requirements for all depository institutions over an 8-year period, and granted universal access to the Fed Discount Window to federally insured depository institutions. It allowed the Fed to impose supplemental reserves as needed to carry out monetary policy, and safeguard the banking system from collapse. Since the centralization of the banking system in the 1930s, this was the first major change in Fed policymaking. It significantly broadened the Federal Reserve's authority to manage bank reserves.

For many institutions, adherence to the reserve guidelines would not be seriously undertaken until the last minute, 1988. For some, it would be the difference between no reserves as minimum reserves relative to risk. Until a uniform level of reserves was in place a very real possibility of global banking collapse grew with each day of depositor retreat, loan default, and credit expansion.

1980 - Dated April 26,
Hal Lindsey wrote in the epilogue of his "The 1980's: Countdown To Armageddon":

"It is my prayer that you have made the decision to accept the Lord. Also, I pray that you will carefully seek out other believers who follow the Bible. You will need to grow in your understanding of God's word.

We may go through a period of severe difficulty here in America before the Rapture comes. We need to be trained in how to believe God's promises and receive guidance and strength from Him.

I sincerely hope to see all who read this book at the soon-coming 'family reunion.'"

1980 - During the spring,
Sissel Volan writes the following in
"An Approach to Peace Education, UNICEF Fact Sheet E4: Disarmament and Development":

"The economic problems caused by extensive military spending are far greater in the Third World where (capital) resources are scarce. The Third World must depend upon other countries for food, education, and monetary aid. However, military expenditures of industrialized countries are more than 20 times greater than the funds they devote to official assistance to developing countries."

1980 - On May 18,
Mt. St. Helens, Washington State, U.S.A. erupts after being dormant for over 100 years.
There had been over 20 eruptions since 1900 B.C.
Warnings and premonitions were provided beforehand with little notice being taken.
An earth tremor from within the mountain resulted in the whole north face collapsing, triggering an enormous landslide of rock and ice. Clouds of hot gas, ash and lava were blasted both laterally and vertically, reaching heights of up to 12 miles (20 km). The eruption changed 230 square miles (600 sq. km.) of picturesque landscape into gray wasteland of flattened scorched trees and thick mud and ash. 60 were reported killed. The estimated explosive equivalent in human armaments is 500 thermonuclear weapons equal to 1 ton of TNT for every human on the Earth. The explosion was heard over 300 miles away. One cubic mile of rock was estimated to have been vapourized. 200 square miles of forest were devastated. With this huge additional amount of atmospheric dust circling the planet, regional climates would be influenced for the next 10 years.

1980 -
Mutilation of animal incidents were reported from Texas, Colorado, Wyoming, California, South Dakota, Nebraska, Iowa, Kansas, Oklahoma, Arkansas, Illinois, North Carolina, Alberta and Manitoba. State historian Myra Ellen Jenkins said in her report that no cattle mutilations in New Mexico were recorded prior to those of recent years. She disputed the government Rommel Report which suggested that most mutilations were the result of predators and decomposition.

1980 - Before June,
Wally Gentleman, a movie special photographic effects professional, had taken a look at Eduard Meier's photos.
Encouraged by Bill Jenkins, who hosted a popular Saturday night talk show on KABC radio, Los Angeles, Gentleman contacted Lee Elders in Phoenix, Arizona. Jenkins had brought by the photo journal "UFO ... Contact from the Pleiades" which the Intercep team had published through their new company "Genesis III Publishing". Mr. Gentleman wanted to see more.

Mr. Gentleman had been involved with special effects for 35 years, beginning as a teenager, in England.
There he had developed a technique for "shooting down planes" by using photographic images on a drone. He studied animation and eventually joined the special effects team at the well-known Pinewood Studios in Buckinghamshire. There he worked with rear projection techniques and used photographic means to create backgrounds and avoid expensive sets. In 1957, he emigrated to Canada where he worked for the National Film Board for 10 years as director of special effects. Stanley Kubrick said some of his work utilized the Gentleman's techniques in his film "2001". Gentleman had moved to Hollywood, California in 1977 and had, along with other projects, worked as an expert visually re-creating actual flying saucer reports on the Jack Webb series "Project UFO". He knew of foreground hanging miniature models to fit certain backgrounds, and knew, that models done poorly would "show up like a sore thumb."

Viewing Meier's movie footage with Elders, Gentleman commented: "They have a ring of authenticity."
He checked them with a "perspective interlock" drawing board geometric process.
The difficulty once again, was that original photos were difficult to come by to analyze.
Mr. Gentleman found:

"There are many things that are correct on many of the shots.
Therefore, if somebody is faking them they have an expert there.
And being an expert myself, I know that expert knowledge is very hard to come by.
So I say, 'Well, is that expert knowledge there or isn't it there?'
Because if the expert knowledge isn't there, this has got to be real."
... Some of (the ships) are behind the twigs of a tree.
You've got to be some special effects man to do that, I can tell you.
And the objects that were behind the tree appeared to be at the right distance for ships that were a long way away. That's called 'aerial perspective'.

When you look at mountains you see different colours that deepen in blue as you go farther away, and all of these photographs had that aerial perspective indicating distance. ... (a one-armed man with no assistance could not possibly have produced the footage) ... This Meier really had to have a fleet of very clever assistants, at least 15 people, who would know what the interface reflections of a shiny object were at certain times of the day, how to support these objects so that wires are not seen, how to rig it, how to watch it and stand by with their little airguns to spray the strings when they begin showing up.

What we would do is go out and shoot the scene, and then bring it back to the studio, and then shoot the object onto that film by duplication processes, which is a very sophisticated procedure. It's difficult to do on 35mm, even worse with 8mm film he was using. And the equipment was totally out of his means. If someone wanted me to cheat something along those lines, $30,000 would probably do it, but this is in a studio where the equipment exists. The equipment would cost another $50,000. ... I think it would be well nigh miraculous for a person with 2 arms to do that sort of work by himself on a mountaintop. ... It's all that sort of complication that leads me to think that the objects he's photographed and filmed were there independently and he simply snapped the shutter."

1980 - During the year,
Luis Alverez, Nobel prize-winning physicist, will publish his theory that the extinction of the dinosaurs stemmed from the impact of an enormous meteorite. In the following years, geophysicists would uncover increasing chemical evidence for such a cataclysm from the Earth's strata. The theory would not become public knowledge until its publication in Science Newsfront in November, 1991. His theory would renew interest in locating asteroids and comets in space. During the 1980s, the Mount Palomar Asteroid and Comet Survey would begin in California. "Spacewatch", a project conducted from the Kitt Peak observatory in the desert outside Tucson, Arizona, would also be started.

1980 - During the first week of June,
William (Bill) S. English met Robert Black in Belen, New Mexico for the purpose of looking for a large UFO which had been buried.
In July, 1977, Colonel Robert Black had been instrumental in having English removed from his civilian advisory duties at a military intelligence post in England and sent back to the USA without any communication being allowed with his family. Now, Colonel Black was coming to English saying that he also had been involuntarily retired from the Air Force and believed that it was due in part to English's viewing of the Grudge/Blue Book #13 document. Further, Black believed that he knew where a huge space vehicle was which had crashed at the White Sands Missile Testing Range. It had been too large to move off the site so the Intelligence personnel involved presumably buried it where it lay.

Black had first contacted English earlier in the year, probably in February, with his request for a meeting. He had told English that he was putting every bit of money he had into outfitting a vehicle for the search and asked if English would be interested in joining him in the search. English was attracted enough to the idea that he sold his business and put his savings into the modification of the vehicle also. English contacted Wendelle Stevens, told him what was being planned and asked if he would be interested in participating. Stevens declined because of his then current involvement in investigating the Billy Meiers events.

When English met Black in person, he asked about his family and was told that his wife, who had been told that he had quit his job and deserted her and their children, finished out the school year at RAF Chicksands, England, and then requested and received a transfer to a different school within the Department of Defense Schools in Britain. Black covered his responsibility by saying that he had been told that the situation was beyond his authority after English had been escorted off the base. His answer as to why English had been targeted was that English had seen the Grudge documents and read them and so he knew what Intelligence was looking for - and NO ONE outside of an elite intelligence group were to know the truth.

Along with Black in Belen, was a Sergeant Horn who had worked with Black and reputedly been dismissed in like manner to Black. Together the 3 set out northward from Belen towards Sante Fe and Albuquerque, crossed eastward towards the Trinity (atomic bomb test) site, tested the equipment in several locations, headed back southward towards Alamogordo, past Holloman AFB, entered the test range through the White Sands National Monument (which was then open to the public), and went to the northernmost boundary of the park and entered the test range from there. From there they began their search with the expectation that it might have to be conducted during the late afternoon or night in order to avoid day patrols and tests.

English was walking about 500 to 1000 meters in front of the van with a metal detector shortly after sundown when he heard the sound of an incoming rocket. He recognized the sound from his experiences in Vietnam, where he had worked in military intelligence. He screamed a warning to Black and Horn only to see the van disintegrate into smoke and debris. English set off on foot to escape with his canteen and a knife and travelled northwest through the desert for 2 days until he came to a major road. There, he hitch-hiked a ride to Tucson and went to see Wendelle Stevens. After showering and getting a shirt, English related his story of the previous several days events to Stevens who recorded it. The original tape later disappeared. Stevens then drove English home.

As they were approaching the apartment building where English lived, he noticed a black car parked in front of the building. English asked Stevens to let him out of the car a short distance away and English entered the building through the back door. For the next several days, English made plans to disappear. An emotionally difficult decision, he broke the relationship he had with his girlfriend fearing that harm would come to her if they stayed together. English took what possessions he had left and sold them to a thrift shop. Then, he moved to a small trailer on the west side of town and stayed there for a month. Then he packed a backpack and caught a bus to Phoenix, Arizona, where he made sure he was arrested in the bus station by a Phoenix police officer on a charge of non payment of an old traffic ticket. Once in the holding cell, he called his sister in Tucson and had her come, pay his ticket, and take him back to her residence. He spent the night there and then headed off across the desert by night in the direction of San Diego.

1980 - On June 8,
A NORAD Computer Full Alert signalled a Soviet Union attack on North America.
It resulted in (SAC) nuclear weapons equipped bombers being redirected from their on-duty in-air standby flightpaths to a convergence on Soviet Union targets as specified in sealed orders left with the pilots.

An error in the detection was recognized within 6 minutes and the bombers were recalled in time to prevent Soviet Defense Control Central from dispatching nuclear missiles against the approaching bombers. The cause of the malfunction was found to be a malfunctioning 46-cent computer electronic chip in the NORAD computer. Such electronic devices must be manufactured to the highest human degree of proficiency: military specifications. These have ranges of efficient operation which exceed those of civilian components by at least 25% and the quality control of the units is considerable more intensive than that of civilian components. No American nuclear weapons equipped submarines were situated within striking distance of the Soviet Union on this day. An immediate response from one would have resulted in a Soviet city or military installation being destroyed in .. less than 10 minutes. This was the second publicly reported error incident. Another had occurred in 1977.

NO FAILSAFE ELECTRONIC SYSTEM CAN BE BUILT BY HUMANS.
The only electronic system guaranteed not to fail is the one which does not exist. As is usually true when insufficiently advanced lifeforms are provided with more advanced technology, their use of the technology eventually falls to the most primitive of their concerns. At the request of human political and military leaders, the GRAYs had provided their most primitive forms of electronics to humans to duplicate. With humanity, the prospect of self-destruction, motivated by a heritage of fear and political abuses, appears to supersede the spiritual reverence for life: the latter would provide the motivation to find more positive, hopeful, honest, alternatives.

1980 - During June,
Kurt Waldheim in an address entitled "The Arms Race and the Human Race", to the Annual Conference of the Non-Governmental Organizations associated with the United Nations Department of Public Information, stated:

"the world needs scientific knowledge and research if age-old problems of hunger and
disease are to be solved.  However, one-third of all scientists are at present engaged
in military related research and development.  This talent and creative energy is being
consumed by the search for acquiring or developing the means of destruction."

1980 - On June 13,
A Solar Subflare of importance is recorded.
An increase in X-rays and microwave bursts from a common acceleration source on the Sun have been emitted near to a sunspot penumbra reversal of the solar magnetic fields. A 10% drop in the interplanetary magnetic field occurs. Solar sunspots and flares influence the operation of electronic components, sometimes drastically.

1980 - On June 15,
William Goodlett, of Salem, Virginia, experienced the following:

(p 120)
... was a woman of about 20, with long dark hair, wearing a long brown dress of heavy homespun material. ... mother was working in a nearby vegetable garden, because they could not go out in the daylight sun. To the right of the doorway in a small mound of earth leading to their underground home, and to the left on a high hill was a large domed satellite with yellow light shining from its many windows, through which he could see a robot testing an organ that it had just constructed for them.

... two girls came galloping into view on horses twice the size of earthly ones, although the girls were "normal" size. One leaned down and asked something of the robot, who came out of the satellite and pointed to Goodlett and the mother. Goodlett says of this strange occurrence: "The girls did not speak, but the thoughts of the horses came to us: 'Are you real? Are you people?'"

... the females slid off the horses and embraced him and his mother, saying,
"Oh, we're so glad.
One of the horses saw a light and told us.
We have ridden 8 hours to get here.
The messenger came to us yesterday.
We didn't know that you were here."

(The) father, who had a white beard, and the robot then joined the group and they entered the tunnel to their underground house, while the horses gazed through the doorway.

... I seemed to know that some catastrophe had occurred to destroy human life, but that people were beginning to return to the planet. ...

1980 - By July,
Iraq had guaranteed a supply of petroleum to France and Italy in return for those country's construction of a nuclear power plant and a uranium enrichment plant. They would also be expected to provide the nuclear fuel necessary to make the plants operational. The capability to manufacture nuclear weapons appears to have been negotiated for Iraq.

1980 - By August,
Pakistan had acquired the information required to construct nuclear weapons.
A brilliant young Pakistani scientist receiving training at a North American university was unwittingly aided in obtaining access to previously military classified information vital to the efficient construction of nuclear weapons. When it was discovered that he was acting as a Pakistani intelligence agent on behalf of the Arab supportive nation, the individual had already left North America to return to Pakistan. Capital support from Libya, a long-time supporter of the Palestinian Liberation Army, for Palestine, would speed its construction of a nuclear device from a timeframe of unlikely to one of possible. A highway linking Pakistan to Iraq would provide an important link for the potential transfer of nuclear industry components.

1980 - By August,
"E Systems", a Greenville, Texas, private corporation and CIA front had been chosen by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) to represent the "international surveillance technology" company of preference. In return for adhering to the requirements of the FEMA, it would receive preferential consideration for most CIA, NSA, Pentagon, and FBI initiated tenders for surveillance equipment and associated research and development. On occasion, its personnel would be engaged in the technical modification of aircraft, painting over of aircraft identification, electronic concealment of crafts and personnel, implementation of "black" operations for the FEMA and the development of "black" (secret) technologies.

In return for its cooperation, the White House (Presidential administration) would ensure that secrecy orders were enforced against attorneys presenting civil cases against E Systems, and in any such proceedings the participants would receive orders, to be enforced as a matter of national security, not to talk about any documentation they saw, not to make copies of any documentation in the possession of E Systems, not to make notes of any discussions about or information gained from or about E Systems. At best, legal and legislative authorities might be given a brief view of some documents but no copy of any document would be left with a judge.

This was deemed necessary because 85% of the value of E System's contracts would become government classified as secret with more than 30% of the total being classified as Top Secret. Disinformation would be fed to the mass media and the general public to ameliorate concerns about the activities and motives of the CIA and DIA. E Systems would become the global leader (king) of electronic warfare and surveillance including optical and listening devices. They are the 8th kingdom inducted into the FEMA oligarchy of global power.

1980 - At the end of August,
A disinformation spectacular success originating with the Madison Group, was a totally fabricated story that reporter Jack Anderson swallowed whole and reported. It resulted in a series of columns by Anderson that appeared in hundreds of newspapers across the USA, just as the Democratic convention was ending.

The information was supposed proof that President Carter was planning an invasion of Iran just before the election, an invasion that moreover was opposed by his military advisers, who, according to Anderson's source, believed that the President was simply trying to provoke an international crisis to ensure his re-election. ALL of the senior advisers to the President later stated that the idea of launching a second rescue mission was never seriously considered or discussed. A contingency plan was, of course, developed. Conditions never arose that were even remotely consistent with the use of any military option and no order that was in any way similar to the one reported by Anderson was ever issued by the President or anyone else in the American government. Anderson made no attempt to check with any of the high-ranking officers of the government. Obviously, like information submitted before a jury and then withdrawn, gossip conveyed through the media to the people cannot be retracted from the minds of the listeners.

1980 - By September,
The magazine "Second Look" had quoted Jim Lorenzen as saying that Eduard Meier was a totally unreliable witness because he "was jailed for thievery as a teenager, escaped from prison, joined the French Foreign Legion, deserted and served out the remainder of his jail term in Switzerland."

It is, unfortunately, often indicative of so-called advanced human cultures that there is more of a reliance on the letter of the law than on the intent of the law. Lorenzen knew nothing of the circumstances surrounding Meier's history. Further, even at worst, would several civil charges carried out by a teenager categorically place a person in a position of eternal distrust. If so, the legal system is a shambles to begin with.

1980 - By September,
"Fate" magazine published a book review by George Earley on the "Intercep - Genesis III" book "UFO ... Contact from the Pleiades" which stated that "this book is nonsense - handsomely packaged, to be sure, but nonsense all the same."

1980 - By September,
William (Bill) S. English had reached San Diego, California, in his attempts to elude persons who were threatening his life.
From there he had travelled to Los Angeles, stayed in a shelter for the homeless and been directed to the Hudson House, which he later found out was a halfway house for gays. He stayed there for 3 months and after the obligatory 2-week canvassing requirement, he got a job as a fry cook at a gay restaurant where he worked and saved his money for 3 months.

1980 - In early September,
The Madison Group launched one of its most vicious ploys in the character assassination of David Aaron, deputy to National Security Adviser Zbigniew Brzezinski, suggesting that he had been responsible for the arrest and execution of a valuable American spy in the Soviet Union. The charges were false, and were eventually proven so, but not until after the election, and not before seriously disrupting the legitimate activities of one of President Carter's chief national security aides. The New York Times released a story on Aaron BEFORE they received any evidence to support the allegations, and without concern for the damage that it could do to the career and current effectiveness of an individual important to their national security.

1980 - In mid-September, 1980,
Forged documents would be shown to George Wilson of the "Post" by sources originating with the Madison Group, suggesting a planned rescue mission of the hostages being held in Iran. It would be dated March 16, 1980 and entitled "Orphan Eagle Claw Loss Estimate." The document predicted that 20% of the hostages would be killed or seriously wounded during the assault on the embassy compound, another 25% during the effort to locate and identify the hostages, and 15% more during their evacuation to the waiting helicopters. Frank Carlucci, who was deputy director of the CIA and later became Deputy Secretary of Defense in the Reagan adminstration, was the man who supposedly ordered the study. He replied back to Wilson, who had asked for a confirmation, that he had "been unable to find anything in this alleged CIA document that is either accurate or which approximates any memorandum we prepared." Two months later, Jack Anderson reported that he had learned of a secret CIA study that had predicted 50% casualties among the hostages from the April rescue attempt.

1980 - On September 22,
Iraq invaded Iran.
Iraq's leader, Saddam Hussein, has been encouraged by the highest political and diplomatic authorities and decisionmakers in the USA. Admiral Stanfield Turner, then director of the CIA, would later state that the CIA had known of the impending invasion and had advised President Jimmy Carter accordingly. Carter was concerned over how an invasion by the USA would look to the international community; invasion by a neighbouring country did not pose such concerns.

There were no "official" channels of communication with Iraq from the USA at the time.
Contact was made through oil industry businessmen and military couriers operating through the countries of Saudi Arabia and Kuwait. Carter's national security adviser, Zbigniew Brzezinski, made strong public statements before the invasion that, in effect, Iran should be punished from all sides (for having taken American hostages the previous year) [for attempting to restrict foreign intervention in national policies] and that he would not mind an Iraqi move against Iran.

In a report to be made public in the fall of 1980, through the "London Financial Times", would indicate that the CIA satellite data and analysis had been made available to Saddam through third-party Arab governments. It indicated that Iranian forces would quickly face defeat.

The immediate success of Saddam's Iraqi forces to the extent that all of Khuzistan was taken in 1980, surprised some American decisionmakers. The USA would supply armaments to BOTH sides over the next decade.

1980 - During the year,
The USAF First Tactical Fighter Wing at Langley AFB, Va. was asked to demonstrate how fast it could go to war.
Only 17 of its 72 new F-15s could be put into service.
Embarrassment and shock led to the finding that the USAF had spent too much money on buying new armaments (planes) - good for defense equipment development contractors - and insufficient on the practical spare parts and maintenance aspects of the equipment. Many planes, stripped of parts to keep other planes flying, became "hanger queens," useless in a test of wartime readiness.

Defense contractors remained very busy, politicians touted as to how much military power they now had to threaten other nations with and those whose lives might depend on the operation of that high profile hardware were, in reality, sitting naked like the emperor without clothes. Their confidence and security was a sham, at their expense and for the profit of the industrial-military complex.

By 1983, the proportion of fighter and attack planes rated ready to fly and fight would be boosted from 51.7% to 71.8% with one fighter wing demonstrating an ability to have each of their planes fly an average of 4 sorties (combat missions) per day for four days - a rate considered high. Much of the improvement would be credited to the introduction of - more new planes - considered easier to fix and requiring less technical skills:

.. the F-15 air-to-air fighter, the F-16 fighter and attack plane, the A-10 tank killer.
All of the new planes would be present in large numbers.
Was it cheaper to buy new planes rather than parts for almost new planes?
Continued reliance on perpetually new additions would result in little work for the small enterprise parts jobber. The result, modernization of the majority of tool and die enterprises, involved in spare parts manufacturing, would continue to decline.

1980 - On October 10,
The city of El Asnam, Algeria, was destroyed by the largest earthquake recorded in this century in Africa, having a magnitude of 8.7. The reported death toll was 3,500. Some parts of the region were raised by as much as 15 feet, disproving the generally accepted earthquake theory that quakes resulted in earth uplifts of only inches per occasion.

1980 - By October,
The SLBM Early Detection and Warning System for the USA was upgraded.
USAF/Raytheon Pave Paws, solid-state 420-450 MHz radar systems on the east and west coasts of the USA replaced the earlier system of 8 radar sites activated in 1968. With no mechanical parts to limit the speed of its radar scan, a phased array technology is possible. Thousands of small radar antennae co-ordinated by 2 large computers - allow the tracking of suspected Submarine-launched-ballistic-missiles (SLBMs) and a prediction of their impact points. Four Pave-Paws sites replaced the previous 8 sites and provided overlapping coverage from the northeastern USA across the southern periphery and up to the northwest.

The 2 original sites at Cape Cod AFS (Air Force Station) in Massachusetts and Beale AFB in California, also feed display data on the position and velocity of satellites to the USA Space Command. Reliability would be stated as 99% in 1992. The Robins AFB, Georgia and the Goodfellow AFB in Texas would become operational in 1987.

What is frequently forgotten by humans in the thrill and pride of their new technical achievements of complexity is that more complex systems have more complex methods of failure. While mechanical systems, on Earth, have a regularity of failure based on degree of use, wear, and physical environment relative to design; electronic systems have a regularity based on their tolerance for changes in the immediate physical environment, reliability of the software used to direct and control it, design of the interfaces between the operator and the program and between the program and the logic and memory of the system, and, the changes in the interplanetary environment.

The potential and dramatic influences of the latter are intermittent and infrequent and humans will not have gained any appreciation for them until 1985. Electronic systems provide a sense of apparent invincibility to most non-technical persons whose livelihood does not depend on their operation. Unfortunately, in human societies, the decisions regarding how electronic systems will be utilized is usually made the responsibility of administrators, managers, politicians and military personnel who have little understanding for or regard for the inherent "unpredictable" failures of electronic systems.

During the period 1980 to 1985, the "improved" SLBM - EDWS would alert the American military to 22 apparent full-scale pre-emptive attacks from "somewhere". Cultural conditioning would lead to the automatic expectation that any such attacks had originated at the command of the Soviet Union or the Communist Bloc. On at least 6 occasions, planned and automated nuclear weapons counter-attack programs were initiated. Had a non-USSR SLBM array been launched from any ocean with the USA as the apparent target, a full scale nuclear annihilation of the USSR could have been initiated by the USA. Within 15 minutes a similar nuclear weapons automated attack would have been implemented by the Soviet Union against the USA. Were either nation able to contact the other in time, explain the error, and self-destruct the missiles flying through the air, considerable aerial debris and the potential for some atmospheric nuclear explosions would have been high.

The factors which influenced the electronic systems to fail, or to be misinterpreted by the operators included but were not limited to:

    1. Human error resulting from fatigue;
    2. Random integrated circuitry error;
    3. Detection of multiple launches of UFOs from ocean bases;
    4. Random occurrences of major solar subflares;
    5. Excessive solar sunspot activity;
    6. IC failure due to changes in the immediate environment.

1980 - In the Nov/Dec Premier Issue of "Science Digest",
Robert Jastrow noted the following in an article entitled "The Case For UFOs":

"Can you imagine a form of life as far beyond man as man is beyond the worm? 
Science assures us that such highly evolved beings must exist on the stars and planets
around us, if life is common in the Universe.

These extraterrestrials are not like the flower children in  "Close Encounters of the
Third Kind"  or the cowboys of  "Star Wars".  They are creatures whom we will judge to
be possessed of magical powers when we see them.  By our standards, they will be
immortal, omniscient and omnipotent.  They are the kinds of creatures who would be
capable of a trip to the Earth from another star.

How can these bizarre notions be supported by science? Here is the evidence.
One hundred billion stars like the Sun surround us in our galaxy alone; according to indirect but solid astronomical evidence, many have planets made of the same ingredients as the Earth; the molecules on their surfaces enter into the same chemical combinations, subject to the same laws of chemistry and physics as molecules on our planet. ....

Moreover, recent discoveries in astronomy prove that if life exists on other planets in the Universe, most of this life is far older than life on the Earth. .... Earth is a very recent arrival in the cosmic family of planets, and man is among the youngest denizens of the Universe.

... Since about 1960, television stations scattered across the Earth have been spraying their signals into space at a million-watt level. In the course of the last 20 years, that expanding shell of television signals, moving away from the Earth at the speed of light, has traveled 240 trillion miles; it has now swept past more than 40 stars in the neighbourhood of the Sun. ... If any of those 40 nearby stars harbor intelligent beings, our presence is now known to them. ... we can expect to receive a message - or a visit - by the end of this century.

And would these superior beings bother to talk to us?
'In their eyes,' one observer notes, 'Einstein would qualify as a waiter and Thomas Jefferson as a busboy.'"

1980 - During the second week in November,
William (Bill) S. English left his job in Los Angeles declaring that a family emergency was taking him back to Tucson, Arizona.
This began the second stage of his plan to escape into safety and anonymity away from the threats of the military and political intelligence community. His life had been threatened a number of times previously with assassination attempts, his career had been terminated, and his marriage and a subsequent relationship had been severed. Using what money he had saved, he travelled east to the farm which his mother had bought several years previously in Virginia.

During the next 8 years he lived in Virginia.
The first year he helped his mother and stepfather remodel the house and look after the farm.
During that period his stepfather would be forced to return to work in Saudi Arabia as a construction engineer. His mother was becoming emotionally unbalanced and finding the coping difficult, Bill left the farm and began living in Lynchburg, the closest town.

Over the next several years, English divorced his wife believing that the interrupted and manipulated communication between them was too much to rectify along with the uncertainties of his future and his desire not to be re-identified by the intelligence agencies who seemed to be hunting him. He remarried only to find at the end of 3 months that his new wife was pregnant, could not cope with the prospect of additional responsibility, and, wanted a divorce! Emotionally devastated, for they had discussed the emotional significance which it held for Bill, he fell into depression and alcoholism for 6 months, after which he re-oriented himself.

1980 - During the year,
A Riot in Protest of Judicial Sanction of Police Brutality occurred in Liberty City, a part of Dade County, Florida state, USA. Five police officers had been charged with the beating death of a motorcyclist. They had chased the motorcyclist at high speeds and eventually apprehended him, beating him to death in the process in front of numerous witnesses. They were acquitted and the public took to the streets in rage. The final tally was 17 dead, $200,000,000 in property damage and about 900 arrests.

Perhaps the most revealing statistic was that 68% of those arrested had no previous criminal record.
The subsequent inquiry into the riot revealed numerous causes which included racism, poverty, unemployment, hooliganism and downright criminal behaviour on the part of some, but the most common complaint heard from the many groups and individuals called to give testimony was the years of oppressive, impersonal policing that preceded the riot. People viewed the police as intruders in their neighbourhood.

Prior to the riot, police patrolled that area of metro-Dade County 3 to a car.
That fact alone should have told somebody something.
It certainly told them something after the riot.
By 1985, the same area would be patrolled by police officers, alone, on foot.
The authorities would have realized that the entire community, no matter how poor or humble, must have a say and an input into how they are policed, that the police and the community must work shoulder-to-shoulder on identifying the problems, setting the objectives and providing solutions. It was an expensive lesson. There would be other police departments in North America would not adopt the new directions until well into the 1990s, prompting the question of whether this costly display of civil rebellion is necessary in the USA in order to effect constructive change in the local institutions.

1980 - On November 23,
In the region of Campania, Italy, an earthquake of 6.9 magnitude resulted in great damage to the old hill villages above the city of Naples. Landslides contributed to the damage and blocked some of the winding mountain roads leading to the villages, hindering the rescue operations. 3,000 to 40,000 (??) were reported killed?

1980 - On November 28,
Alan Godfrey, a West Yorkshire policeman in the town of Todmorden, a Pennine hill town in Britain, had an experience similar to that of Herbert Skinner (Schirmer) of December, 1967. He was later hypnotically regressed by a British psychiatrist in an experiment conducted by Manchester solicitor Harry Harris with researcher Jenny Randles in attendance.

Godfrey had experienced problems with some cattle and had decided to go on the spur of the moment to patrol the outskirts of the town to ensure all was alright. At just after 5 am he saw a number of lights on the road ahead which he took to be a bus. Getting closer, he came upon a dome-shaped craft with a circle of windows around the middle hovering just above the road. His headlights reflected back from the surface; an instant later the object was gone. He got out to check with his flashlight but found nothing and returned to the police station. There he discovered that he could not account for 15 minutes.

Under hypnosis, he recalled being taken from his car, which had lost its engine and light power, following being hit by "a strange beam". On the craft, he met beings with grey/white faces that spoke telepathically and performed a medical examination. Before returning him to his car, they promised to make further contact in the future.

Godfrey says he did not know of the American incident from 1967, and 3 police officers on an adjacent force also confirm seeing the UFO heading for Godfrey's patrol car.

1980 - By late in the year,
"The Committee on the Present Danger" was formed of American Intelligence leaders, political leaders, academic and industrial military proponents to determine how a nuclear war could be fought and won. The eventual 150 member organization would include such persons as:

[Positions noted may be current or near future]

Richard Pipes,
Harvard professor and Soviet Specialist on President Reagan's National Security Council (NSC);

Paul Nitze,
State Department advisor and Negotiator at the Arms Limitations Talks during Reagan's Presidential term

William Van Cleave,
later proposed by Reagan as Chairman of the General Advisory Committee (GAC) to the Arms Control Agency

Ronald Reagan,
California State Governor and president-elect William Casey, director of the CIA

Richard Allen, head of the National Security Council

Jeane Kirkpatrick, ambassador to the United Nations

Martin Anderson, Policy Co-ordinator to President Reagan

Charles Kupperman, Executive Director of the Committee, and later
.... Executive Director of the GAC to the Arms Control Agency

1980 - By winter,
H.David Froning, Jr., an astronautical engineer at McDonnell Douglas Corporation for 25 years had entered into the Intercep investigation of Eduard Meier. His wife, Irina Froning, had noticed a copy of the Genesis III Publishing book on the Pleiades, which included references to Meier's work and "tachyons", in a friends office and she mentioned it to her husband who she knew was also working with tachyon concepts.

A staff manager at McDonnell Douglas, Froning had helped develop missiles for ballistic missile defense, and had done exploratory research to develop ideas and technology for advanced spacecraft design. A longtime member of the British Interplanetary Society and the American Institute of Aeronautics, Froning had presented many papers on interstellar flight at technical conferences in Europe and the United States.

The idea of actually transcending vast interstellar distances had intrigued Froning for 15 years.
Searching for a way to take humankind beyond the speed of light, he had spent much of his spare time examining Einstein's laws of relativity and considering new ways to encompass those theories in a more general law, much as Einstein's laws of relativity had not violated, but encompassed Newton's laws of motion. After seeing the book, Froning stated

"I guess I was never so impressed by a book.
If what this Meier is saying is just a hoax, he's being cued by some very knowledgeable scientists. ... It was a revelation. All of a sudden many things made sense. It had never occurred to me that tachyons might exist completely outside the dimension of time. ... But I didn't have anything to tie (quantum ramjets powering starships to nearly the speed of light and a conceptual model of what a craft might look like travelling faster than the speed of light) together. What hung me up was the seeming impossibility of being able to cover these tremendous interstellar distances within a matter of minutes, rather than centuries here on earth. Then I read the Meier book, and suddenly it all seemed plausible.

Most people think that faster-than-light speeds occur on our normal space-time realm of existence.
But when Meier mentioned that the trip took 7 hours and the longest part lasted only several seconds, it occurred to me that during that interval almost no time at all passes. And this gave me the further idea that you could actually arc above our space-time plane of existence and travel trillions of miles through space with only several seconds passing. I had never thought of that possibility."

Froning located Wendelle Stevens in Tucson, with the help of a bookstore owner, and obtained access to some of the contact notes which Meier had made of his meetings with Semjase. The voice of Semjase addressed each of the major scientific requirements to accelerate to the speed of light, make the jump or hyper-leap, and then decelerate.

"Though she doesn't say specifically how it's done, she gets technical enough to
satisfy me as a scientist. And that's very convincing when somebody does that."

This, from Meier, who had no engineering academic or employment background and could not even be said to have more of an interest in engineering or physics than the average person. Froning was further impressed when he calculated the propulsion efficiency of his new quantum ramjet and determined the typical times for such a craft to reach light speed would be about 4 hours. According to Meier's figures, the Pleiadian ships required approximately 3.5 hours to accelerate to the speed of light, only seconds to traverse a distance of nearly 500 light years, and then another 3.5 hours to decelerate and fly to the earth. The credibility of Meier's numbers amazed Froning. To arrive at his figures, Froning had utilized complex formulas involving acceleration rates. Then he discovered that not only did Meier claim it required 3.5 hours for the Pleiadian beamship to reach the speed of light, but that at that point the ships would have travelled approximately 92 million miles. That figure, too, was within 20% of his own previous calculations.

I think it would be very improbable for someone with Meier's educational background to hit on this combination of figures and have them be within a scientifically acceptable range. He would have to be coached by someone who's very knowledgeable in the sciences, who has knowledge of special relativity and of flight mechanics to know what kinds of times and distances make sense. If this is a hoax, it has to be with the assistance of someone like myself who could account for the plausible things that take place.

I've only discussed this Meier case with scientists who are fairly open-minded about interstellar flight, but I'll tell you, the majority of them think it's credible and agree with at least part, or sometimes all, of the things talked about by the Pleiadians."

1980 - By December,
Lucius Farish, a columnist for the MUFON UFO Journal, publicly defended Wendelle Stevens and the Intercep Group:

"You are free to think anything you wish concerning the Meier case or Steven's investigation of it; however, the fact remains that you have no proof that the case is a hoax. I've heard all kinds of "accusations", but I have yet to see one iota of real evidence ... When anyone takes thousands of dollars out of his own pocket to investigate UFOs, I think he deserves to be heard without a bunch of clowns harassing him because he showed them up at their own games."

1980 - In December,
"The Ascher Memorandum" was released by the World Bank.
It was prepared by staff members and consultants under the direction of William Ascher, a specialist in "political risk" at Johns Hopkins University. The World Bank had currently budgeted $3 billion for the Philippines through 1986. From 1976 to 1980, $680 million had been spent on rural development: there had been a 50% decline in the real wages of the Filipino worker between 1965 and 1975, largely due to the practices of President Marcos and his associates. Marcos had, to the IMF and World Bank, committed himself to encouraging trade development through abolishment of tariffs and subsidies and the establishment of tax-free industrial areas.

None of this had benefited the Philippine economy because the martial law state had used the changes to effect greater economic monopolization by Marcos and his associates. The forces of free enterprise and individual civil rights were now taking a stand against the Marcos bureaucracy and the Bank was encouraged to change its policy accordingly. It was time to cut one's losses or suffer the consequences.

In effect, the memo intimated that it had been acceptable to support, without normal consideration of effectiveness, accountability, or, spiritual consideration, - a totalitarian dictatorship, as long as you didn't get caught onboard if the ship sunk. In other words, the guiding institutions of the human world didn't have a soul: they had an appreciation for authority, pride and power. The memo was ignored.

1980 - On December 27-29,
A Triangular UFO was witnessed near Woodbridge, England.
A USAF UFO Report signed by Lt-Col. Charles I. Halt, Deputy Base Commander, RAF, Woodbridge, stated that 2 security police while on patrol sighted a UFO either hovering or on legs outside the back gate of the base. Being early in the morning, it illuminated the entire nearby forest with a white light. Metallic in appearance and triangular in shape, a pulsing red light was on top and banks of blue lights appeared to be on the underside. It was estimated to be 2-3 meters wide and 2 meters high, in size. It maneuvered through the trees and disappeared. Witnesses said 5 aliens emerged from the craft and seemed to be performing repairs.

1980 - On December 29,
A low-flying UFO was escorted by 23 helicopters including some Chinooks and possibly Hueys, near Dayton, Texas.
It is expected that it was escorted to the TOP SECRET underground installation within Fort Hood, Texas.
The SECRET Air Force Base is NOT listed in the Air Force Officer's Guide or the Air Force Almanac [it is an Army AFB]. The name of the base is Gray AAF, Texas. The special group piloting the helicopters are known as the BLUEBOYS. The Texas Department of Public Safety works closely with Gray AAF on UFO cases.

1980 -
The Cost of Policing in the USA, for 1980, according to the National Institute of Justice, was $22 billion on private security and $14 billion on public police. From as early as 1978, the ratio of private to public policing personnel in North America has been 2:1 and growing in favour of private presence.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1981 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

Cannonball Run; Porky's; The Four Seasons; Zorro, The Gay Blade; Mad Max II; Outland; Arthur; Excalibur; Eye of the Needle; On Golden Pond; Raiders of the Lost Ark; True Confessions; Rollover; Looker; The Boat; Enter the Ninja; Screamers; Scanners; Paternity; The Road Warrior; S.O.B.; For Your Eyes Only; Goodbye Pork Pie; Four Friends; Road Games; Mommy Dearest

General News:

Consumer Price Index: 272.4

An underground FEDERATION base is established near Kinsley, Kansas, U.S.A.

1981 - By this year,
Libya has an airforce of 210 military aircraft.
Two thirds of the planes are still sitting in crates. Libya has no trained pilots.
If it wants or needs to use its new armaments it must recruit, or borrow, pilots from the USSR, Syria, Pakistan, North Korea or Palestine. Libya supports the Palestinian and United Arab Republic intentions towards either the elimination of Israel or its 'downsizing."

1981 - In the January 11th issue of "Crisis Advisory Newsletter"
from Survival Publications at P.O. Box 134, Somis, CA 93066,
its editor, Ben Barker writes:

"1981 is the time of the awakening ... The Age of Affluence is over, and the Era of
the Imaginative is upon us.  Fortunes are going to be very elusive for awhile, and
safety and survival will become the prime directives.  The cities will self-destruct. 
The banks will fail.  Retreat properties will become unavailable at any price, and those
willing to sell such parcels will name their own price multiples.  It will be a time of
opportunity."

1981 - In late February,
Eric Eliason of the U.S. Geological Survey in Flagstaff, Arizona was approached by Jim Dilettoso, acting on behalf of Intercep, with two of Eduard Meier's photos digitized, by UCLA Image Processing Institute, on magnetic computer tape. Eliason had been developing image processing software for 8 years to enable astrogeologists to analyze photographs of the planets beamed back from space. He had spent 2 years producing the intricate radar map of cloud-covered Venus acquired by Pioneer 10, and later applied this software in the processing of space photography beamed back by both Viking and Voyager.

After preliminary explanations by Dilettoso, Eliason fed the tape information into the computer and began using the library of image enhancement techniques which included turning the image, filtering it, stretching the contrast, and others. Describing one test as "pretty sophisticated," he said he could not imagine anybody being able to fool it. This test examined the precise point at which the image of the craft met the blue of the sky.

"One conclusion I made was that it certainly hadn't been dubbed in.
There was just a natural transition.
If you had a sharp contrast boundary, you might think, Well, that looks pretty hokey.
But right along these boundaries there were no sharp breaks
where you could see it had been somehow artificially dubbed.
And if that dubbing was registered in the film, the computer would have seen it.
We didn't see anything."

Eliason wanted more information and a confirmation that he was working with an original to dispel the possibility that he was working with an extremely well constructed superimposure. Secondly, like most other scientists, he was bothered by the use of his testimony as an expert. "I don't like that because the world just isn't that way. There are too many uncertainties." To some scientists, nothing is certain - even though their purpose is to find certainties.

1981 - During the year,
P. Cappellano's Private Archaelogical Mission searches the underwater shelf off the Canary Islands for possible evidence of sunken ruins of human habitations: Atlantis. At a depth of about 50 feet (15.2 metres) stone slabs are found covering at least a 900-square-foot area. The stones are carefully set, and wide stone steps lead down to a landing deck. Certain marks carved in the stones appear to be symbols or signs that are common to carvings on rocks on the Canary Islands.

1981 - On March 25,
William Goodlett, a Walk-In from Salem, Virginia -

(p 121) ... discovered himself to be a ball of light conversing with a similar being as they floated through the air. "I was a pale blue ball about the size of a basketball and the other one was somewhat larger, a pale yellow colour with a slight tinge of red glowing in the centre. We were about a hundred feet above the ground that was covered with clumps of blue grass and blue bushes. Groups of from ten to thirty brown animals of several species were grazing, and the largest were the size of horses, but thinner, with longer necks and long hair. As we watched, some of these creatures formed a circle facing the center and began a sad song,

"Where are our beautiful two-legs? Why have they gone away?
Oh, where are our beautiful two-legs? Oh sad, unlucky day."
And they wept tears and leaned their heads and long necks on one another.
Some of the colts asked what the two-legs had been like, and the horses raised up on their hind legs saying, "They walked like this. When you're older you can go someday to the larger hills and there's one made of stone that you can see, but it's not beautiful like ours were." There were several clusters of two-storey wooden houses, but the windows and doors were boarded up, and I wondered at the time where the wood had been obtained, since I saw no trees.

The being that floated alongside me remarked,
"Our two-legs all died. A fungus ate them up, and they closed their houses.
... They were like yours except all blue, and some had yellow and some brown hair.
They used to play games with the four-legs. ... "Is that what you call them, people?
We called them two-legs." The animals took no notice of us, and I wondered
if a similar fungus could have destroyed some of our prehistoric societies ....

1981 - During the year,
The U.S.A. Columbia space shuttle, using solid rocket boosters providing 2.5 million pounds of thrust is launched.
21 miles into the flight and 2 miles up, the boosters are dumped.
The craft experiences 1.5 to 3.0 G's with more vibration and flight noise than expected.

The Shuttle is a delta wing, high drag, zero thrust spacecraft.
Astronauts undergo 2 years of training as teams in Houston, Texas, before participation in flights.
There are 2 categories of crew members: pilot and mission specialists.
Astronauts will be portrayed as heros conquering adversities to provide humanity with more knowledge.
Hybrid human-advanced robotics technology will have to be developed in order for the accomplishment of purpose with caution. Selection of astronauts will be based on a meritocracy which evaluates the following factors:

   a) devotion to the ideal of exploration/risk/privilege;
   b) technical expertise (achievers before brute force & stubbornness);
   c) ability to concentrate all of one's attention on a task
                (oblivious to or in denial of all other reality).

1981 - On an unknown date in 1981,
Mrs. Iona Hoeppner, a science teacher at the Briggsdale School in Weld County, Colorado, went to the site of a reported mutilated calf 2 days after the incident to obtain some samples. She found a perfect 4-inch square circle had been cut out of the calf's belly, there was only a small amount of a transparent maroon-coloured fluid in its carotid artery, and there was a small pool of red fluid on the loose ground near the head of the calf, and another small pool under the belly. Two bloodless puncture wounds were in the calf's throat and the tongue had been cut out.

Mrs. Hoeppner took samples back to her lab, prepared stains, set up cultures, closed the windows, locked up the lab and went home late. Overnight, the lab was broken into and all the samples were taken except for a piece of hide. She reported the burglary to the school superintendent who refused to make a complaint to the sheriff on the rationale that it would "upset the school". Mrs. Hoeppner phoned the sheriff the next day and said she was interested in comparing the samples she had gathered with his. He had forwarded his to the diagnostic laboratory at Colorado State University in Fort Collins. She followed up with them to find that they never received the samples. She returned to the site to find the calf now covered with maggots, except in the immediate area of the original incision. She carefully took samples from various parts of the body as well as some more of the red liquid on the ground. It did not appear to have seeped into the soil at all, nor did it much later on.

Returning to her lab, she made both dummy specimens and working specimens and carefully hid the latter. The next day, all of the dummy specimens were gone but there was no sign of forced entry. Analyzing the samples she had hidden, she found that the red fluid was an inorganic substance, thinner than blood, and containing no detectable bacteria. It was sterile. Under a microscope, there were strange looking rectangles in it, approximately 10 microns by 3 microns, with striations on them running crosswise. Also throughout the fluid, there were small crystals about one by two microns. It took 2 weeks for this fluid to be absorbed by the loose ground at the site. The hide cut left by the mutilators was neither a cut nor a laser burn. Not one single cell had been destroyed. The incision was made between the cells, cell by cell. Not one cell was even damaged.

1981 - By April,
American Monetary Policy Changes extending from the "Monetary Control Act", were beginning to be demonstrated. Until now the Fed had the power to selectively impose surcharges on discount window borrowings, as well as to impose reserve requirements on assets of nonbank financial intermediaries, such as money market mutual funds. This authority expired. In an attempt to limit the recession, or delay it, the Fed injected new reserves into the banking system by buying securities from securities dealers.

1981 - On April 10,
A Riot against the Police occurred in Brixton, England.
Brixton is a residential area in central London. A couple of uniformed "Bobbies" found a black youth who had apparently been stabbed. He was very agitated and it was necessary for them to manhandle him in order to apply first aid. While they were doing so, a crowd of about 30-40 people misperceiving that aid, gathered and began to jostle and harass the police. There was a build-up after this incident that culminated in a full-scale riot which lasted for 3 days. When order was restored to Brixton, 279 police officers had been injured and 82 people arrested although the figure could have been in the hundreds had the police been able to arrest all of those who qualified. 61 private and 45 police vehicles and 145 premises were destroyed or damaged. Such adversity from the public had never been faced by the British police previously.

Lord Scarman, a law Lord, would issue his report in 1982 after conducting an inquiry.
Long held in high esteem by the British police and generally regarded as pro-police in his opinions, he noted the following among his observations:

"The police were unimaginative and inflexible in their relationship with the community as a whole and with community leaders in particular, and in the methods of policing they adopted. The criticism was directed at all ranks of the force. It was said that they were insensitive to local opinion, unimaginative and uncomprehending in their dealings with the ethnic minorities, and have their priorities wrong. The critics suggest that a more responsive, and responsible, attitude might develop if the Metropolitan Police were made locally accountable. Lip service is paid, they say, by senior officers to the need for consultation and good relations with the community. ....

Community involvement in the policy and operations of policing is perfectly feasible without undermining the independence of the police or destroying the secrecy of those operations against crime which have to be kept secret. There is a need to devise means of enabling involvement."

New policing principles would be adopted by the Metropolitan force in 1985.

1981 - During the year,
Richard Price, an American who believed he had been abducted by spacepersons in 1955 who inserted an implant into him, approached UFO investigators for their advice. He had received harsh criticism and treatment for his openness in the past. When the investigators learned that the implant had apparently been placed under his penile skin and that he had been warned not to touch it lest he die, they advised him to do nothing further. He followed their advice until 1989.

1981 - In May,
Ruth Leger Sivard, writes in "World Military and Social Expenditures":

"The world arms build-up has reached a new level of danger.
Warning signals come from the political arena as well as from the military.
One sign is the growing militarization of political authority.
In the Third World, the governments of over 50 countries are dominated by the armed forces.

The obsession with military solutions to global problems has pushed arms budgets to $550 billion this year. About $100 billion of this outlay goes to the growing stockpile of nuclear weapons which already contains one million times the explosive force of the Hiroshima bomb.

... The following information demonstrates that only 5% of the 1977 world military budget
(equal to US$17.5 billion) could meet many of the world's needs.

* One of four adults -- 700 million in all -- is unable to read and write.
--- Cost to extend literacy to all adults by the end of the century: $1.2 billion.

* A majority of Third World people have no access to professional health assistance.
--- Cost of a preventive and community-oriented training program to sharply increase medical auxiliaries: $250 million

* More than 500 million daily eat less than the calories needed to maintain ordinary physical activity.
--- Cost of aid to improve the capacity of the Third World to grow its own food, and prevent malnutrition: $750 million

* An estimated 300 million live in slums and shanty towns.
--- Cost of an expanded minimum-shelter program, incorporating self-help construction: $750 million

* 200 million school children are chronically hungry.
Malnutrition threatens their mental and physical growth.
--- Cost of supplementary feeding to ensure full development: $4 billion

* Infant mortality rates average 5 times higher in developing countries.
--- Cost of supplementary feeding for 60 million malnourished pregnant and lactating women: $1.5 billion

* In the Third World only half the school aged children are now attending school. Population is growing. To even maintain the present enrolment, 250 million new places will be needed before 1985.
--- Cost of providing 100 million new places in primary schools: $3.2 billion.

* Over 1,000 million people in rural areas and 200 million in the cities are without reasonable access to safe water supplies.
--- Cost of hygienic water supply systems, towards the goal of clean water for all humanity by 1990: $3 billion"

Absent from the suggestions were the following critical possibilities on which all of the following would rely for their own success. Does this mean that humans have a mental block to these considerations, an addiction to their abuse, or have they simply been conditioned by the "brainwashing" educational systems structured by their political and religious authorities to avoid these spiritually based aspects of self-determination and self-responsibility in a world in which ALL life is held reverent?

* Adoption of a principle of honesty and openness in relationship between the governments of nations and their citizens:

* A saving of 5% of national budgets devoted to confounding bureaucracies.

* Preparation of the citizens and politicians in the Developed World for entry into a steady state economy with increasing self-reliance and reducing individual and family negative stress loads:

* A saving of 25% of national budgets promoting forced commercialization and economic expansion and competitive technological dependency.

* Mandatory education throughout the school systems of all nations in the crime and disease prevention areas of interpersonal communications, assertive communication styles, listening skills, empathic support, basic health care, nutritional and food preparation guidance, baby and infant understanding, parenting skills, gardening, efficient waste disposal, awareness of other human cultures.

* A saving of 10% of national budgets spent on social support and judicial, medical and penology institutions in an attempt to correct the abuses inherent in an authoritarian, competitive, reaction-based social system.

* The awareness of the human genetic weakness of hypersexuality and the responsible appreciation of it through improved methods of birth-control, self-regulated family size, proper nutrition, energy block dissolution, the spiritual benefits of a committed relationship between adult humans.

* A savings of 10% of national budgets spent on economic disruptions, additional medical, judicial and penology costs for interpersonal abuses, separations and divorces - and, for extended social support for single-parent families, increasing instability of family structure and increasing elements of rage within the society.

Instead, the powerful human governments will continue, as always, to promote and sanction:

    a) Political self-deception and "intelligence" operations;
    b) Capitalistic economic expansion credos as "patriotic";
    c) Schooling in authority structures, competitiveness and technology;
    d) Economic manipulation through sex/gender-biased advertising.

1981 - By June,
The Clearing House Interbank Payments System (CHIPS) was modified so that settlement occurs at the close of each business day when CHIPS members who owe payments to other banks transfer funds to a special settlement account at the Federal Reserve Bank in New York and others receive payments due. CHIPS members send and receive payments from other USA banks through the Federal Reserve's Federal Wire, the Fed's electronic funds transfer and securities transfer network.

This allowed for debits to arrive for an account before a corresponding credit which was necessary in order to clear through. Because wire transfers can be done in a matter of minutes - hours at the most - the capital for the repurchase of a security could arrive before the capital had been sent to pay for the original purchase. In other words, I could contract to buy a debenture from you through your bank. Your bank would send your invoice and the CUSIP codes to allow verification. Next, my bank could send an invoice and the CUSIP verification codes to the bank of the investor who had contracted with me buy the securities which I was buying from you. The debit to my account for your invoice would be prepared. The credit for my invoice from my secondary sale would be prepared. At the end of the day, all credits to my account would be posted first, then the debits. Under the old book and ledger system it was not practical to post the entries as soon as they arrived.

First, intermittent posting throughout the day would be very time-consuming and contribute to error production.

Secondly, the account holder had until the end of the business day to cover any amount which had arrived earlier.

Thirdly, it was not good customer service to "confuse" their account record by repeatedly going into overdraft only to show that the debit had been covered by a credit before the end of the business day.

In effect, I could purchase and sell securities without any money - as long as I had a repurchaser and received the payment in a timely fashion. However, to be prudent, the banks involved would mandate that I had sufficient funds in the account to cover your invoice. Then they would accept the invoice and the securities. In essence, I could keep a capital "float" in the account which would never leave the account, or, it would leave the account only long enough to accept the security and then to accept the payment from the repurchaser and transfer the security out again. This would be more important as time progressed.

1981 - In June,
Gene Viernes and Silme Domingo, two Filipino-American labor leaders in Seattle, who were trying to organize opposition to Marcos in the labor movement, were shot dead by agents on orders from President Marcos and General Fabian Ver. Three members of a USA-based pro-Marcos gang were convicted and sentenced to life; a fourth member of the gang was murdered just before he was to give evidence against Anthony Baruso, owner of the murder weapon. Baruso was an Ilocano and an intimate of Ferdinand and Imelda Marcos, and was on a first name basis with Ver's guards at Malacanang Palace. The families of Viernes and Domingo charged that the USA intelligence agencies were aware that the murder was being planned, and that Baruso was never indicted because he was being protected by the CIA and the FBI at the request of General Ver. Ferdinand was initially named as a defendant along with his government in the 1982 lawsuit, but this was dropped at the request of the U.S. State Department.

Under the "Head-of-State Doctrine", the leader of a foreign nation cannot be prosecuted for acts undertaken while he is head of state. One result of the doctrine is that if he cannot be required to testify, Marcos cannot implicate Americans in a politically embarrassing manner. Also, effectively, the doctrine suggests that any mass human political structure WILL inevitably sanction the murder of political enemies; the doctrine protects the leader from the intentional direction of such assassinations, or, the erroneous bureaucratically misinterpreted desire of a leader to have an individual enemy "terminated".

1981 - During the year,
Mark MacGuigan, Canada's Minister of External Affairs, would echo the sentiments of NATO members as Honourary President of the North Atlantic Council Ministerial Session, held in Brussels. In his "North Atlantic Alliance, A Bedrock of Security", he would write:

NATO must be "ready and able to respond to aggression at whatever level is necessary. ... We must convince our publics that unilateral disarmament increases rather than reduces the risk of war. We agree with the peace movement that the nuclear arms race can and must be arrested. They should be assured that we are not trying to match the other side one for one and that we are not seeking military superiority but greater security at the lowest possible level of armaments, nuclear and non-nuclear ... Of course we must bargain from strength. There must be no backing down from our resolve to counter the Soviet threat."

This typical political 'non-speak' states that we are not trying to reach a point of military superiority ... yet we must, in order to negotiate!

1981 - Between June, 1981 and August, 1982,
The Teresa II site of Yamashita's gold was cleared of bullion by President Ferdinand Marcos and his associates. 153,000 cubic feet of gold bullion was moved to a new secret and controlled hiding place, where it was re-smelted. In its original form it would have carried Chinese markings and smelting characteristics and would have been identified immediately as "stolen". It had taken 5 years to locate the exact site and gain safe access.

1981 - In the July-August issue of "The Patriotic Cannon",
Editor Robert B.Clarkson pointed out that "governments at all levels in the United States actually collected $722 billion in taxes in 1980. A family of five paid $15,865.63 ... in taxes." He continued:

"Taxation as a percentage of GNP (Gross National Product) or PDI (Personal Disposable Income) is now between 47% (official Department of Labor statistics) and 53% according to Chanber of Commerce. ...

The awful right of funding the necessary and unnecessary state activities is so harshly focused on one segment, the middle class, that one could assume the establishment is actually trying to wipe out the middle-income group to create a two-class society of a few rich and powerful rulers over a controlled mass of serfs. ...

Complacency in the U.S. is gradually being replaced by fear, confusion and anger. The belt-tightening is beginning to hurt, and the conventional remedies are drying up. Should the recession last beyond mid-1982, as I suspect it will, social unrest will become inevitable. That's really why the heavy defense budget is an essential, as was the draft, to beef up and feed a standing army to quell domestic disturbances. ...."

1981 - By July,
Fabian Ver, head of the Philippines Secret Police, and half-brother to President Ferdinand Marcos, had military communications companies set up in America for him by his friend Raymond Moreno. Amworld, Telecom Satellites of America, and Digital Contractors won USA Defense contracts in the Philippines to supply espionage and internal security equipment to the Philippine armed forces and internal security forces. Amworld would purchase $17 million worth of US military communications equipment for the Philippines as part of a $100 million US aid package in 1983. Payments to the company would be halted by the Pentagon when it was discovered that some of the money was being diverted to Ver.

Association leads to complicity so the USA authorities and officials involved with Ver usually looked the other way and sanctioned his activities. Ver was able to move easily between the Philippines and America despite his implication in illegal activities in the Philippines, the suspicion by the Defense Department auditors that he was skimming money from defense contracts and the fact that he was able to openly maintain a wife and family in the Philippines, and, a wife and family in America - both in lavish style. He had the best of co-conspirators in the field of intrigue, illegality, deception - Ferdinand Marcos and the CIA.

Ver also received large commissions from contracts with local weapons production companies that either short-delivered or overbilled the Philippine military. On behalf of USA-based arms traders, Ver awarded secret contracts to Philippine companies, including Avacorp, partly owned by Edna Camcam. While married to Aida Petel, with 5 children, for many years his mistress and business partner was Edna Camcam. The Philippine companies delivered only a fraction of the arms paid for by the armed forces. The rest were diverted to Iran and sold at inflated prices through arms traders, and, sometimes with the assistance of the CIA.

1981 - By August,
International Banking Facilities (IBFs) were authorized by the USA Federal Reserve Board as separate banking centres in USA domestic banks or the offices of a foreign bank. Their existence allowed participation in Eurocurrency lending through a separate set of accounts. Essentially, an IBF was an in-house shell branch (a separate book of assets and liabilities) that made loans to foreign customers, other IBF's, US offices and foreign offices of an IBF parent bank. IBF deposits, limited to non-USA residents, other IBFs, and banks owning an IBF, are free from reserve requirements, federal deposit insurance assessments, and some state income taxes.

1981 - By August,
American Military Advisors were assisting San Salvadoran government troops repel well-trained and highly committed Communist FLMN guerrillas. Officially no more than 55 advisors were in San Salvador at a time. Officially, they were in non combat roles as instructors. In reality, in addition to the instruction they provide, they accompanied and assisted in the direction of government troops during battles. Their houses were likely to be attacked by guerrillas and, in battle, a guerrilla would have no way of knowing who was an instructor and who was a formal soldier. The environment therefore made it mandatory for American advisors to carry and use weapons; otherwise, their activity would have been comparable to a suicide mission.

The manner in which the CIA and Pentagon could use a small number of soldiers to produce a massive effect was in the manner in which they employed their resources. American AC135 surveillance airplanes with a crew of 35 would be positioned over the target zone at 25,000 feet during the night. It was later declared that they could tell the difference between a cow and a Communist at that height. A C130 gunship would be flown in from Panama. The AC135 would confirm the co-ordinates for a barrage of gunfire and canon-fire to an American AC130 gunship positioned at 7000 feet altitude. The AC130 would still be referred to in 1995 by military personnel as the most effective gun platform which the US Army possessed. It is capable of firing 10,000 rounds of ammunition in 10 seconds. A 6-man advisory team on the ground, supporting 1000 troops would be quite adequate to counter any guerrilla force met during the night. Only the ground advisors were officially in San Salvador.

President Ronald Reagan would publicly assure the American public that no combat troops would be sent to San Salvador and that those Americans there were unarmed advisors. Oliver North was the President's intermediary with the San Salvadoran advisors. A policy was in effect from the beginning that advisors respond to the media with evasion, obscurity of fact and deflection of suggestion or request. After the war, efforts by numerous officers and a Congressman to have the advisors appropriately decorated with medals for the service they provided on the authority of their political leaders was repeatedly denied. Some had been killed in battle and some had been assassinated in an effort to bring the reality of the American involvement to the American people. Casualties were not all killings or murders.

At least $350 million was spent through open and covert means by the American government to militarily assist the San Salvadorian dictatorship. In 1982, a Colonel Harry Melander would be photographed by CNN television news carrying an M-16 and small arms as he accompanied government troops on a field manoeuvre. When the media reported their finding to President Reagan, it was again denied that any Americans were carrying weapons unless for self-protection. The Colonel was hurriedly escorted out of the country as if he were a criminal. In 1983, guerrillas would gun down an American advisor in public with the intent of gaining media attention to the reality of the situation. In 1984, 6 American advisors would be killed in a major battle at San Miguel.

In 1985, 4 American marines would be gunned down in a city cafe, again in hopes of alerting the American public to their involvement. In 1987, 28-year-old Greg Tonius, an American advisor, was killed in a battle in which the guerrilla leader later stated that he believed the advisor had acted heroically, as a soldier. His family and the media were told that he had died in his sleep, the result of a clandestine mortar attack at night on his quarters. Yet of the 5000 American personnel who served in the fighting against the El Salvadoran guerrillas, none of the ground-based advisors would ever be recognized for their bravery, military duty or presence. This is a direct affront to the military regulations respecting a soldier in any modern state. It does not inspire further allegiance from the soldiers nor further confidence in the government. It does cover up, partially, political deceit, manipulation and lies.

1981 - By August,
Jacques Gansler noted in "The Defense Industry" that defence contracting operates outside the normal patterns of supply and demand because there is only one purchaser, the government, and only a small number of suppliers. Therefore, when the demand goes up because the government is spending more, the prices go up as well. This increases the amount of money needed for military spending. It takes a while for competitive producers to move in and moderate prices. Government reports repeatedly indicate that inflation among defence producers is chronically worse than in the rest of the economy and that increased defence budgets drive inflation up even higher."

1981 - By September,
Titanium Pigment plants begin closed in the USA included those at Sayreville, New Jersey, and St. Louis.
Manufacturing and sourcing elsewhere were less costly and better quality and the industry demand had stabilized. A serious North American recession was in progress, the construction and real estate industries were failing in activity, interest rate cost of capital was increasing, and currency devaluations were occurring. NL Chemicals concentrated their interest on plants in Varennes, Canada, Leverkusen, West Germany, and, Langerbrugge, Belgium. Meanwhile, the use of lead returned or continued as a white pigment - its illegality not restrained by a bureaucracy which had become too big, cumbersome and complicated to be effective. Jobs and capital investment were lost and the public health continued to be endangered.

1981 - By November,
Eurodollar Deposits into International Banking Facilities (IBFs) in the USA were permitted for both domestic and foreign banks, and in Asian financial centres. The majority of such deposits were made into London, Britain, banks - where there is an active secondary market for LARGE Eurodollar deposits. Banks holding Eurodollar deposits use them for making loans, denominated in dollars, to corporations, foreign governments and government agencies, domestic USA banks, and others.

The creation of IBFs and the release of Eurodollar restrictions facilitated the interest rate and currency swap market. These are used by bankers and investment managers to minimize borrowing costs, to fund bank loans with liabilities of approximately equal durations, to gain liquidity in one currency rather than another; to hedge portfolio risk or raise capital in foreign markets, and also to generate trading profits. Unlike loans or deposits, SWAPS are NOT disclosed on the balance sheet of the issuing bank and reserves are not required for them. Swaps most often are used for funding purposes or for creating assets , and have some advantages when compared to bank loans or deposits in Asset-Liability Management where reserves for loans reduce profits relative to the riskless assets of gold bullion, gold certificates, government securities, and, non balance sheet assets.

1981 - By November,
Cosmos 1275, a Soviet satellite, breaks into pieces 50 days after it had been launched.
It was part of a Soviet test to destroy space satellites with a ground-based particlebeam weapon.

ASAT Anti-satellite attack systems will also be tested in which an orbiting target satellite is approached by an ASAT satellite carrying a conventional blast mechanism. The ASAT is detonated near to the target and the shrapnel destroys the target. The result is two destroyed satellites and a cloud of human space garbage orbiting the Earth.

1981 - By December,
Eva Bieri had testified to the Intercep group of her observations during the recording of the sounds of the beamship in Switzerland. Eva had stood in a meadow only 2 miles from the Meier's farm, balancing her 2-month-old son on her hip while Mrs. (Popi) Meier stood nearby with a tape recorder. Near the edge of a pine forest 200 to 300 yards away, Eduard (Billy) Meier had sat on his tractor, as another tape recorder turned in the small trailer behind it. Soon, Engelbert and Maria Wachter and others had joined them, and then everyone had watched the sky and waited.

Eva, who had sensitive ears, disliked loud music and loud people.
But when the deafening sounds suddenly filled the sky over her, she became angry not for her own discomfort, but because she felt it would harm the ears of her baby.

"On tape it sounds different than it really was.
It was like the sky was full of sound, not from one place.
The sound was everywhere, and we were thinking it must be very loud
because people came from far away to see what had happened, and they were running, not walking."

She remembered the sound as shrill and unnatural, seeming to echo from within us as it rose and lowered, the sound, though loud, seemed almost pleasant. Eva's child did not cry, but only craned his neck and blinked his eyes and listened.

1981 - On December 17,
The home of Steve Psinakis, a San Franciscan lawyer and son-in-law of Eugenio Lopez, was raided by 20 FBI agents accompanied by San Francisco police and sheriff's deputies. Psinakis and his family were restricted to the kitchen while agents searched his house and files for evidence which might connect him to civil unrest in the Philippines. The FBI justified the action by stating that a "confidential source" had reported finding 600 feet of detonating cord, an empty battery package, a box for a Westclock pocketwatch, and a pair of orange rubber gloves that morning in the trash barrels outside the house. Detonating cord is difficult to come by and hazardous to discard: only an idiot would have left it in their own trash, let alone discarded it so carelessly. None of the evidence was ever shown by the FBI. No bomb-making apparatus or plans were ever found, even when a second raid was conducted in January. A coded list of anti-Marcos sympathizers was found; it was turned over to General Ver, who had those named, arrested, interrogated and tortured. Two of those arrested vanished without a trace. Evidently, the FBI had been co-opted to support the Marcos dictatorship, and its abuses.

In 1977, Psinakis had helped organize a daring jail break at Fort Bonafacio to release his brother-in-law, Eugenio Lopez, Jr. and fellow prisoner Sergio Osmena III: both were political prisoners, held for opposing the Marcos dictatorship. Psinakis had followed up by publishing frequent attacks on the dictatorship in books, pamphlets, and newspapers, and kept a steady barrage of the USA Congress protesting the illegal seizure of the Lopez family assets in the Philippines. To shut him up, 200 arrested Filipinos were promised freedom if they signed a statement implicating him as a leader of the local Light-a-Fire Movement of civil unrest against Marcos. Those who did not accept the offer were tortured until they signed. After Ronald Reagan entered the presidency, Marco and his regime engineered another incident to make Psinakis appear to be a terrorist with the hope that Reagan would extradite him to the Philippines.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1982 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

Death Valley; An Officer and a Gentleman; Blade Runner; Silent Rage; E.T. The Extra-Terrestrial; The Best Little Whorehouse in Texas; 48 HRS.; Trail of the Pink Panther; Will: G. Gordon Liddy; The World According to Garp; Tootsie; The Secret of NIMH; The Elephant Man; Star Trek IV: The Wrath of Khan; Airplane II:The Sequel; Brimstone and Treacle; Amityville II: Tha Possession; Vice Squad; The Missionary; The Last Unicorn; Rocky III; Honkytonk Man; Burden of Dreams; The Challenge; If You Could See What I Hear

General News:

Consumer Price Index: 289.1

An underground FEDERATION base is established at or near the USAF Albuquerque, New Mexico, U.S.A. military base.

1982 -
By this year, In excess of 40,000 nuclear weapons were in the arsenals of the USA and the USSR combined.
The largest of those weapons was 4,000 times greater in blast and destructive power than those dropped on either Hiroshima or Nagasaki. The total destructive capability of these 40,000 weapons is 1 million times greater than the Hiroshima bomb and represents the equivalent of 3 tons of TNT explosive for every man, woman and child on the Earth!

Yet the race goes on, more weapons ... capable of hitting a target many thousands of miles away with an accuracy of better than 50 metres.

1982 - During the year,
The Possible Source of the Marburg filovirus was found to be suggested by the testimony of a monkey inspector who had worked in Uganda during a period in which his rich monkey trader employer was exporting 13,000 monkeys a year to Europe for biological experimentation and murder. The inspector had been in charge of removing apparent ill monkeys from the shipment which he believed were then killed. Later he found that the sick monkeys were sent to an "isle of plagues" (later determined to be near the Sese Islands and not far from Entebbe) in northwestern Lake Victoria. Even later, the inspector discovered that if the trader found he was short on supply for a shipment, he would collect the remaining few which he required from the small island refuge. Even much later, the inspector remembered hearing from tribesmen in eastern Uganda of a disease among the people who lived on the northern slopes of Mount Elgon, along the Greek River. Both they and the monkeys in the region were dying of a disease that resulted in a peculiar skin rash, bleeding, and death. The inspector had never seen the results of the Marburg disease nor heard of the outbreaks until long after they had occurred. Yet, with modern transportation practices - the disease can be transplanted to any location in the world within 24 hours.

1982 - By January,
Epstein-Barr chronic virus infection was becoming an epidemic environmental illness in North America.
Most doctors would not have heard of it or be familiar with it for over a decade. It is characterized by severe fatigue, sore throat, tender lymph nodes, mild fever, an inability to concentrate, depression, and mental confusion. No conventional medical treatment would prove effective in either controlling or curing the illness. It would be almost a decade before North American physicians and holistic health practitioners would become somewhat familiar with it. Due to a cultural perception block in the understanding, prevention and treatment of stress-induced illness patterns, the medical establishment and the general population would be slow to acknowledge a concept of positive and negative stresses in which a balance results in health. Fundamental to the cure of the illness will be the understanding of Energy Blocks, stated in a special appendix file attached to this report.

1982 - In the January 11th issue of the "Crisis Advisory Newsletter",
Editor Ben Barker wrote:

"My publication is an attempt to channel the fury that I feel about how the Destroyers have planted their fangs in my nation, and are sucking out our life blood. Destroyers come in all sizes and shapes, and many of them are bureaucrats, programmed to follow instructions no matter the consequences. Inflexible union demands. Coercive minority-backed programs such as busing. Elected representatives who behave like a gang of thieves with impunity. ...

The options are limited in a world dominated by Destroyers - you may hold still and be consumed now, run and be consumed latter, or attack and risk being consumed sooner. ... The major task (of the newsletter) will be to keep that anger (against authoritarian governments) from exploding into direct confrontations. The government agents love direct confrontations. They're the type of people who would use a sledge hammer to exterminate a fly. ...

The human animal loves familiarity more than anything else, and will accept familiar misery above other courses of action. So, we see that very few are capable of real change unless that change is precipitated by a crisis of some sort. They are simply unable to change their state of mind, and they remain poor in body and spirit.

The war against poverty is how most of us define our lives, and most of us lose - succumbing to debt and poor money management. That war is a trap. It was set by evil men whose dream of control and dominance put them at the helm of the money machine. ...

There are millions of Americans who do not understand that the dreams of the Mega-bankers will reduce them to lives of poverty and desperation. ... The Destroyers are so powerful, so many and so clever that it is folly to resist them. They control governments, banks, major business enterprises - all the tools that matter in this life of sensuality and materialism. What they do not control - the spiritual - they discount. ...

The many single-issue groups pressuring for fragmented slices of freedom are symptomatic of the struggle. Do we have the right to retain our guns? Isn't income tax truly unconstitutional? Hasn't government at all levels grown to unsustainable size and assumed tyrannical powers? ...

The word is spreading. There is a war going on. It threatens to reduce you and your children to the status of slaves. Those without wealth are slaves."

1982 - In January,
Robert Michael (Bob) Gates was appointed Deputy Director for Intelligence, National Foreign Assessment Center, C.I.A., by the then DCI, Stansfield Turner. He had been the National Intelligence Officer for the Soviet Union. He would become Acting Director of Central Intelligence in 1986. He occupied himself with extending the range of analysis undertaken by the agency, defining 10 major areas of investigation and concern in the development of the estimating process in the future. By October, his list of trends, he believed, would dominate intelligence to the year 2000. His approach was bureaucratic and methodological. His trends were these:

     1. Electronic dissemination of finished intelligence;
     2. Desired data would be more secretive and restricted;
     3. Recruitment would be more difficult;
     4. Congress would become a partner with the Agency;
     5. Intelligence information would be used for "public education";
     6. Other nations would use and criticize USA intelligence data;
     7. A dramatic increase in the diversity of the subjects of concern;
     8. An increasing growth in the diversity of the users of the data;
     9. Intelligence would become more central to foreign policy;
    10. Intelligence was the only government arm looking to the future.

Gates was structuring what national intelligence organizations in all major human military-industrial nations have done: plan the chess moves for the political leader(s). Stalin, Hitler, Churchill and Truman had all known this and used their agencies to that end. Their secret agencies had used pride, envy, anger, deception, manipulation, coercion, greed, lies, intrigue and murder to acquire information about factors which could lead to an "advantage of power" over other nations. They then used those same factors to elevate their own degree of power, used covert actions to confuse the use of those factors, or, used prompt action to subvert those factors.

It was a game of strategy.
Games of strategy demand a distrust and dislike of one's opponent.
Humans frequently euphemize these facets until spears are thrown.
Materialistic, emotional or traditional may be the motivations but they are never spiritual.
Motivations based on trust, honesty, and shared advantage have been shown throughout the universe, although humanity still cannot possess faith in such truth, as the foundation to cooperation, happiness and survival.

1982 - Early in the year,
Jim Dilettoso, who had worked at creating sound using digital sound synthesizers, and a former employee of "Micor Corporation", examined, with a digital sound analyzer the beamship soundtapes which the Meier's had recorded. After taking the sounds apart he could not duplicate them.

"That was the point at which I was blown away.
To the ear they don't sound that unusual. It sounds like what you'd expect a sci-fi flying saucer to sound like. But upon analysis, they're continually shifting and changing, and combinations of them are getting louder and softer and doing things at such a rapid rate that even with a synthesizer being able to generate that many sounds it would be really, really complex."

1982 - On February 7,
William Goodlett, a Walk-in from Salem, Virginia, experienced -

(p 130) "There's an older man sitting next to me ... dressed in a long skin cloak, with gray hair and a long gray beard. We are in my house, a large, circular room about 30 or 40 feet in diameter. The walls are upright logs or poles touching each other, and sunk into the ground. A roof of logs or beams is overhead. There is an opening in one side covered by a cloth drape. We are sitting on large flat stones at the end of a circular depression about 18 inches deep and five or six feet across. The bottom is covered with sand, and in the middle of it is a stone fireplace with a small fire burning. The smoke and heat are rising towards an open hole in the roof.

It was something like the Navajo hogans I have seen out west, but we were nit Indians, we were Caucasians. I also knew that we had a mild, cool climate. The older man was telling me that the Chief would give me a thousand, or perhaps as high as three thousand measures of grain for my eldest daughter, who was about 15 years old, to become his son's wife. I was aware that the Chief had several sons, and that I had 10 children and 2 wives. The boy was to become part of the bride's family and work for me. This would be his dowry, and I was planning to go to another part of the land and open up a new section to farm. We were all farmers, but settled a long distance from each other in a land of low, rolling hills with some lakes and streams. I did not see this, but simply knew it as we discussed the dowry, in another language whose meaning I was automatically translating into English while I was in the body of this man.

I did not see the boy but knew that he was a slender young man, blond and long-haired, named David. We were dressed in knee-length cloaks belted at the waist. Our pants were tied from the ankles up by crossed straps to the knees, and we wore heavy skin boots that reached slightly higher than the ankles. We sat with our feet down in the pit, resting them on the sandy bottom in front of the fire. The old man was going to see the Chief and try and get a good bargain for me, for the boy. There was no one else in the house with us at the time, but I could hear talking outside. I felt very comfortable and at home there."

1982 - By March,
Rob Shellman, a sound engineer with the U.S. Navy sonar sound laboratory in Groton, Connecticut had examined the recording which Jim Dilettoso had of the Pleiadian beamships heard by the Meier's in Switzerland. He eliminated one major possibility which would have indicated fraud: the Meier's could not have used any electrical AC source to create the sounds.

"The equipment was set up to analyze for 50 or 60 hz line frequencies, which are common electrical outlets. If the device that generates the sound was an electric motor or machine the line frequencies would be evident. No such frequencies were detected."

In typical yet unscientific concepts, the assumption made by most educated (proud and species-centred) humans is that anything indicative of an extraterrestrial technology must have NOTHING in common with the Earth or any technology developed on the Earth. This is similar to assuming that the Earth is NOT part of the universe: it stands apart from the commonalities present in the rest of the universe; that Earth is a planet totally at odds with the rest of the universe. In the study of extraterrestrial beings, this is akin to believing that the Earth is the centre of the universe.

1982 - By March,
The "Garn-St Germain Depository Institutions Act" was passed as a USA federal law by the Congress to authorize banks and savings institutions to offer a Money Market Account - a transaction account with no interest rate ceiling - intended to compete with money market mutual funds. It was an attempt to stop the depositor run on the banking industry as depositors took their cash and put it into mutual funds and other (non-bank asset) investments.

The Act also gave the Savings & Loans (S&Ls) associations the authority to make commercial, corporate, business, or agricultural loans up to 10% of assets after January 1, 1984. S&Ls were also authorized to increase their consumer lending, from 20% to 30% of assets, and to expand their dealer lending and floor-plan (car) loan financing.

It represented a monetary policy in which the government was attempting to stimulate the economy by making higher-risk banking services more easily available so as to force an apparent real capital growth through additional use of credit. For the banks, competition was on for who could get the most. More loans could mean higher profits.

1982 - On March 28,
At El Chichon, Mexico, an eruption consisting of 3 major explosions over a period of 7 days occurred.
500 million tons of ash were blasted into the atmosphere.
The devastation was widespread with 187 reported killed.
A veil of 20 million tons of sulphuric acid droplets were spread around the Earth in less than a month.
Acid rain tends to stunt and kill vegetation, and, if prolonged, may affect the acidity of fresh water lakes such that fish stocks decline.

1982 - Beginning on April 4,
The Galunggung volcano, Indonesia began erupting.
In 1822, an eruption had killed 4,000 people, but in this series of eruptions of ash, continuing through to August, only a few people lost their lives while 75,000 were evacuated. Many villages all but disappeared under ash drifts; volcanic mudslides (lahars) followed when the rains came and two 747 airliners en route to Australia were almost brought down by sucking ash into their engines.

1982 - In April,
James Fallows, author of "National Defense", demonstrates that defence spending is inherently more inflationary than other kinds of government spending. The problem with military spending is that it adds to the demand for goods by providing wages, and profits to contractors, but it does not increase the supply of goods and services on which money may be spent. This is not true of other kinds of spending. For example, public money spent on transportation and communication helps to develop the structure upon which other productive activity depends. Money spent on schools, clinics, and regulatory agencies contributes to a higher level of production than is possible without a healthy educated workforce or an orderly market. Many economists agree for this reason that public money would be better spent in areas other than the military.

1982 - In May,
Nils Rognerud, a designer, electronic consultant and computer engineer in Los Angeles, took the Pleiadian beamship soundtape from Jim Dilettoso to a sound lab and converted the sounds to wavy lines on a spectrum analyzer. As he watched, the various frequencies vibrated up and down across the screen, converged into a thick zigzag, then split apart and converged again. Rognerud called a second consultant, Steve Ambrose, who built custom microphones for rock stars and had built a tiny wireless radio receiver and speaker that fit inside Stevie Wonder's ear. The radio, called a Micro Monitor, was one of two inventions Ambrose had patented. He understood sound synthesizers and their capabilities. After listening to the sounds awhile and watching it on the spectrum analyzer, he told rognerud that the sounds could not possibly have been made with a synthesizer. They were analog, or natural sounds, and he agreed with Rognerud that they seemed authentic.

"If someone is perpetrating a hoax, they went to some length.
Synthesizers use oscillators that are capable of making things that sound real.
But the frequencies that this sound generated were so random and varied it was beyond the capabilities of an oscillator or even a group of oscillators. You'd have to use a microphone of some analog, natural sound like that of a lathe, metal cutting metal, which has low frequencies and high frequencies, and if you speeded it up or slowed it down you could get the various frequencies that would resemble what this had on it. But even then you'd have to take that and layer it several times, mixing one sound in with another, and this just didn't sound like something that had been layered, track upon track upon track.

When you've dealt with recording and electronic sound you get to be able to hear what happens when you layer one sound on top of another. This was a single sound source recording that had an amazing frequency response. ... How could you duplicate that sound? I'm not just talking about how it sounded to your ears, but how do you show those various things on a spectrum analyzer and on the scope that it was doing? It's one thing to make something that sounds like it and has those consistent and random oscillations in it. If it's a hoax, I'd like to meet the guy who did it, because he could probably make a lot of money in special effects."

1982 - By May 16,
The fact that Israel has 200 Nuclear Weapons is revealed in the public press.
The fact would be disputed and denied until the fall of 1986, when an Israeli nuclear technician publicly confirms the fact. It would then result in anxious discussions.

1982 - By June 2,
The U.S. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) had prepared evacuation plans for 380 designated "high risk areas" across the USA. These plans intended to save 80% of the American population. Blast shelters had been constructed for key government and industry workers who would remain in the vicinity of the major cities.

Fifty miles outside Washington, D.C., a bunker known as "Mount Weather" had been dug into the side of a granite mountain. This is one of 19 bunkers situated within 300 miles of Washington which is intended to house top government officials in the event of a nuclear attack. "Inside, there are streets, sidewalks, a fleet of electric cars, a small underground lake and dormitories with about 2,000 beds. " Duplicates of all important government documents are stored there. The President and his advisers are expected to continue to control the nation from the air in a specially designed jumbo jet.

1982 - During June,
A PLO Artillery Bombardment of the villages of northern Galilee from a terrorist base in southern Lebanon, was countered by the Israelis. When the Israeli army entered Lebanon to destroy the PLO bases, they were astonished to uncover huge supplies of Soviet-made weapons stockpiled in tunnels carved out of rock by an amazing nuclear energy powered tunneling machine developed in the USSR and similar to that used much earlier in the Alternative 3, America-based program. There were tanks, anti-tank missiles, and thousands of shells. Huge underground supply dumps contained hundreds of thousands of uniforms, AK-47 assault rifles and millions of rounds of ammunition. Israeli Colonel (reserve) Yehuda Levi, Israeli Defense media spokesperson confirmed these reports shortly afterwards. For months, convoys of large covered trucks carried these captured weapons out of Lebanon into Israel. A new arms supplier of new Soviet-made weapons would be Israel. In a distant deployment of military forces, it is always preferable, when possible, to position the military equipment near the point of expected engagement and then to airlift in the much lighter troops which will use the supplies.

1982 -
"The Jupiter Effect", first described by authors Dr. John R. Gribbin and Stephen H. Plagemann, in their book by that name, is to occur during this year. They determined that once in every 179 years all of the lanets of the Earth's solar system would become aligned in a straight line perpendicular to the Sun. This alignment was expected to result in greater than usual storms of activity on the surface of the Sun. Increases in earthquake frequency and changes in the Earth's climate were also expected. The expected increased atmospheric drag on the Earth was expected to slightly slow the Earth's rotation on its axis and increase the strain on geological faults according to changes in the Earth's momentum. Some scientists were reported as stating that because nations had constructed water dams over fault lines, the additional surface weighting of those areas would magnify the shock of any earthquakes in such regions. While this could happen, the timing of the earthquake could also be rationalized as being delayed by the additional pressure. Other catastrophic side-effects suggested included floods - caused by broken dams, and, nuclear power plant meltdown - as a result of malfunctioning facilities built on or near responding fracture zones.

The 1970's became a decade in which the number of disastrous quakes recorded in human history reached its highest. It also represented the decade with the greatest amount of international communication, surveillance, and acknowledgement of earthquakes in human recorded history.

1982 - By September, ???
Soviet space station Salyut 7 is launched.
Robot supply ships, sophisticated docking nodes for linking incoming ships and additional living modules plus escape vehicles for cosmonauts on board are indicative of the sophistication. Anatoly Berezovy stays for 7 months.

1982 - By September,
The concept of "Sovereign Risk" was defined when Mexico defaulted on its loans to foreign banks and was threatening to declare bankruptcy. It was unable to make adequate interest payments on its national debt such that the principal was growing. The "Group of 10" confirmed the norm, in their favour, that a sovereign country was not allowed to go bankrupt. [Humans tend to make up the rules as they go along such that the powerful are protected from taking responsibility for their own errors - leaving those who have been exploited to feel that they should be grateful to those who "rescue" them from disaster into misery.] Had Mexico been allowed to eliminate its debt, major banks in Canada and the USA would have faced bankruptcy. In addition, Brazil and several other nations would have been encouraged to follow the example of Mexico. World banking was threatened with the potential of anarchy.

"The Group of Ten" worked jointly with the "International bank for Reconstruction and Development" (the World Bank) and the "International Monetary Fund" (IMF) to find ways to restructure loan payment terms and reduce the external debt burden of less developed (capitalized) nations. Among the options considered were debt and equity swaps, government guarantees of principal and/or interest repayments, and partial write-off of nonperforming loans by creditor banks. In 1989 - after 7 years of anxiety, preparation and negotiation - Mexico's banks agreed to a debt restructuring plan, assisted by $5.5 Billion in financial aid from the World Bank and the IMF, that would guarantee payment of principal and interest on Mexico's external debt.

1982 - By September,
The USA Defense Mobilization Planning Systems Agency (DMPSA), would be led by George Bush, former CIA Director.
He would continue to lead it until 1988.
It was a secret government organization which would spend over $3 billion upgrading command, control, and communications in the Federal Emergency Manpower Agency (FEMA) 's Continuity of Government (COG) infrastructures. Ostensibly created to assure government functioning during war, especially nuclear war, the DMPSA would be so secret that even many members of the Pentagon would be unaware of its existence and most of its work would be done without congressional oversight. That is, this is one example in which the American taxpayer spent over $3 billion in order to have a power structure created which could enforce a suspension of civil liberties and property ownership - a power structure which the American legislature never voted acceptance of nor knew anything about until it was in place!

The DMPSA was sometimes called "Project 908".
Both the parent FEMA and the DMPSA would become subject to investigations for mismanagement and contract irregularities in addition to scandals that their emergency planning provided a distinctly dictatorial political capacity to be provided to the President. Project 908 made it possible for an American President to declare a state of National Emergency and then declare and activate martial rule over all of the USA.

1982 - By September,
The Teresa II site gold bullion was on the market.
Ferdinand and Imelda Marcos and their associates had recovered a stash of gold, in volume, 80 feet by 240 feet by 8 feet, had remanufactured it, and the USA CIA was now helping move and market the gold. The world capital market was faltering and world banking was on the verge of collapse. Depositors had put a run on bank reserves by spending their account deposits or transferring them into real estate assets or non-bank securities. Bank reserves were very low and the risk of bank failures was growing worldwide. If the common people lost faith in the banks, currencies worldwide could become useless.

The USA Federal Reserve, the Swiss Banks, and Central (State) banks worldwide needed a dependable reserve fund source. Only 100% secure assets can be used as a reserve for international banking purposes. These reserves are held for the purpose of covering the losses sustained by loan defaults by bank clients and investment errors made by bank officers. The amount of this "risk" depends upon the degree to which the bank "invests" the depositor's and stockholder's monies into usury instruments such as mortgages, personal loans, inter-bank loans, venture capital pools and other destinations. Each of these opportunities holds a statistical risk, that is, a percentage of expected loss dependent upon past performance. The greater the bank's investment in high risk instruments, the greater the possibility of a loss, the greater the potential magnitude of the loss, and, the greater the contracted profit from the investment. A bank without reserves is a bank courting bankruptcy, or, is a bank without the power to invest and make a profit - which precipitates bankruptcy.

Besides capital deposits, bank shares, and federal government bonds issued by a major capitalist nation (like the USA), gold bullion, or its certificate equivalent, qualifies as "riskless" capital - requiring a minimum of reserves to support usury instruments from which the bank profits. Gold bullion is awkward to transport in quantity and certificates can be forged so a security system involving serial and confirmation numbers on gold and treasury securities had been implemented and globally accepted. To ensure that nations didn't simply "print money" by issuing certificates and giving them serial numbers, the International Chamber of Commerce (I.C.C.), the World Bank, and the World Court in Le Hague, mandated that certificates representing gold bullion or the debt obligations of a major nation, be traded through a non-bank purchaser in order to establish value, before being purchased by a bank.

Thus, if a gold certificate (debenture) representing gold bullion was purchased by an investor, it could be rationalized that the investor had purchased the rights to a real quantity of gold bullion, and, based on that market price, a bank could purchase it and place it in its reserves, as if it were gold bullion . Large capital investments were required from private sources in order to facilitate these transactions and maintaining confidentiality was imperative. Also, bureaucratic delays in the submission and processing of invoices and "payment" could result in substantial losses. With reserves being required desperately a system of discounts was set up whereby the private investor would receive a large profit for a short-term investment. The gold bullion holder would offer the certificate at a discount; the banks would buy them at face value. The private intermediary would receive a good profit.

In 24-hours, a private investor could gross a return of 10% on an investment of 100 million dollars or greater. In net terms, a portion of this profit would go to brokerage fees, bank charges and "referral" fees. Essentially, a certificate would become available on the market from a source which held gold bullion. In the space of one day, a transaction would be completed.

First, a certificate would be offered for sale, usually as a debenture drawn on a multinational corporation in whose possession the gold bullion was, for a discount of 10% or greater, due for surrender in a 10 year term.

Secondly, on the basis of cash collateral on deposit in a bank, a purchase request for the debenture would be issued by the private investor - who, hopefully, had confirmed that he had a bank purchaser.

Thirdly, ideally on the same day, the private investor - who had now technically purchased the debenture and received an invoice - would offer the debenture for sale to a central, Swiss, British or German major bank.

Fourthly, a bank would offer to purchase the certificate and pay the private investor, would receive an invoice, and, by telephone transfer, the monies would flow into the private investor's account.

At the end of the day, the private investor's bank would clear all credit and debits received for the day, posting the credits first. The credit from the bank purchaser would go into the private investors account and the gold certificate (debenture) would go to the bank. Then the debit (invoice) to the private investor's account would be extracted and sent to the bank in which the gold bullion source had offered the debenture for sale, and the transfer of ownership to the private investor, and then to the bank, would be confirmed.

If the paper transaction took longer than a day, then the cost of borrowing enough reserve funds to cover the "overdraft" would be applied to the private investor's account, and, the purchasing bank might withdraw its offer to purchase in order to maintain distance from what could now be an investor on the verge of financial difficulties. If the costs, possibly 100,000 dollars on a 100 million debenture could not be paid by the investor immediately, the investor could lose his whole 100 million to costs, and, incur further liabilities.

If additionally, the value of gold changed before the certificate was resold by the private investor, a greater loss might occur. If successful, which the transactions usually were, the private investor could be included in 3 to 10 trades per banking week depending upon market demand from the banks. Successful investors could multiply their monies every month. With Brazil, Mexico and other states talking about defaulting on multi-billion loans from USA banks, a temporary solution had been found: bolster the banks with private bullion reserves until the global economy improved.

1982 -
An expedition conducted by Herbert Sawinski, an explorer, diver, and chairman of the Museum of Science and Archaelogy in Fort Lauderdale, investigated submerged banks with land outcroppings at various locations between 23 degrees 50' and 23 degrees 30' N and 80 degrees 30' to 79 degrees 40' W. Extensive stone pavements were located and photographed at a depth of 25 feet, as well as distinct walls with vestiges of a pavement running along the top. The main wall continued for a quarter of a mile out to sea, where it suddenly disappeared into 2500 feet of water.

Part of the wall, or causeway, splits near the shore and continues under water partially along the coastline of the present remains of what was once a larger island now under the ocean. At another point on this submarine plateau the divers followed a passageway under submerged rocks and discovered a sunken quarry, complete with shaped blocks of stone still inside it. Investigation was hampered by heavy surface waves, low visibility, and strong underwater surges.

These and other discoveries have been found on an underwater plateau which is about 60 miles on each side of a lopsided triangle between the Straits of Florida and the Santaren and Nicholas channels. It breaks the surface only around the edges, roughly establishing the boundaries of what was once a large island. While there is no fresh water on the narrow land border, there are a number of freshwater springs in the ocean, just as there are in the Azores.

Within this area there are several large blue holes ... circular holes half a mile in diameter, going straight down to depths of 1000 feet although the sea bottom surrounding the holes is only several fathoms deep. These holes in the ocean compare to the large open wells at Chichen Itza, into which the Mayas used to throw jade, gold, and young women as sacrifices to the gods.

1982 -
A 1982 USAF review of biotechnology, concluded that "Electromagnetic Field Force"

(ELF) "has a number of potential military uses, including dealing with Terrorist groups, crowd control, controlling breaches in security at military installations, and antipersonnel techniques in tactical warfare ... (such) systems would be used to produce mild to severe physiological disruption or disorientation. They are silent, and countermeasures to them may be difficult to develop."

1982 - In the fall,
Eduard Meier was in the bathroom in his farmhouse in Switzerland early in the morning when he slipped, hit his head, and suffered a severe concussion. Most of the experiences which he would have with the Pleiadians had passed. They structured their plans in 11 year cycles; this cycle would end in 1986. The "Meier experiment" would fail for the Pleiadians even as had those attempts which they had made before, the aim of which had been to try and attract humanity to a more spiritual lifestyle than they had chosen. The Pleiadians were not perfect; they never suggested that they were. What had they not been prepared for this time?

1. First, what had they done?

2. They had decided that, having approached, not that they wouldn't try again, political and military leaders to whom humans surrendered their will and their resources, only to have such leaders avoid their invitation to a more spiritual approach - they would now try for a grassroots approach. It was a long-shot, but, if human leaders would not make decisions positive to the future of humanity, maybe, if enough people wanted a more spiritual approach, the leaders would abide by the direction of those who gave them power.

3. They had invited a human to benefit from their guidance in return for that person continuing to be an open-minded, positive attitude individual who could experience awe at the wonders of the universe and share that awe honestly and generously with others.
   
   

4. They had guided Eduard into building personal power in the skills of energy consolidation and transfer including psychokinetics, as well as mind-focusing and spiritually strengthening exercises like meditation.

5. They had encouraged Eduard to have many normal experiences which exposed him to numerous cultures, numerous work positions, numerous career directions - all of which would contribute to either an expanded intellectual awareness, or, an increasingly narrow, compulsive and negative frame of reference. His positive attitude led to the former result.
   
   

6. When they believed that he was ready, they began to feed him evidence of their existence in the least threat-to-humanity mode. They encouraged and allowed him to take photographs, and later record the sounds of, their beamships. A "tutor" was assigned to him to educate him in Pleiadian concepts such that he would record them and share them with other humans.

7. It was believed that when other humans heard and saw the evidence that the Pleiadians had supplied, they would be curious enough to consider the possibility of spacebeings, to respect the advice of those obviously technically advanced beings and to seriously investigate the evidence.

The Result:

• While Meier eventually got into the pattern of travelling, working at many jobs and raising his self-esteem, this pattern together with the possibility of juvenile acts of rebelliousness to society, or, against the direction in which he was advised, received neither compassion nor acceptance from human adults in later adults. Persons of low self-esteem (most humans) judged him on how well he fit the acceptable norm of their social group. Time in jail for participating with a peer group, abandonment of a military indoctrination and lifestyle, consideration of more than one religious faith, a drifter away from and then back to his birth society - were all used as examples of why whatever he said could not be taken as the truth.

• Once Meier went public with his mounting evidence, he and his family were besieged by crowds mainly consisting of persons irresponsibly hoping to give direction of their life to an "authority"; persons intending to capitalize on the story or the evidence; persons with an intellectual death wish: God grant me the wish of proving that my curiosity is based on a lie, or, God, prove to me once again that there is nothing new for me to learn - only falsehoods to be proven! ALL of these approaches are the heredity of human authority-based educational systems. Children usually become what they are taught. The constant onslaught of such a negative living mass had its influence on Meier and his family. The only constructive response was to accept those who wished to stay and allow those who wanted to criticize to leave.

• Growing out of the authoritarian-based visitors was the approach taken by the mass media: dramatize, exaggerate, ridicule, idolize, destroy. The mass media never concentrated on the message, only on the man. But the man was NOT the message! While humans destroyed the message with petty gossip, thousands continued to die in wars, millions continued to be spent on armaments, thousands died from starvation and disease, the environment continued to deteriorate, a select group planned to abandon the Earth, and marriages and families crumbled. The spiritual normality which is part of the Pleiadian biological composition blinded them from the biological differences existing in humans which promote the non-spiritual. This factor would ultimately prevent any substantial organized grassroots true spiritual focus in humanity.

The Pleiadians were left with a humbling predicament.
Their ethics demanded no direct interference with or redirection of humanity.
They had attempted, as had other spacebeings, to encourage humanity to a more spiritual following by directing their communication to adopted and self-appointed human leaders as well as to grassroots volunteers. Other spacebeings had interfered directly several times to prevent annihilation of humanity by humans. Time-travel had indicated that humanity WOULD BE decimated. Could, or should, the Pleiadians make any further attempts?

1982 - During the fall,
The discovery of the "Human Immunodeficiency Virus" (HIV) is announced by both the "Pasteur Institute" in Paris, France, and, the National Cancer Institute, in Bethesda, Maryland state, USA. Scientists will call the resulting disease "Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome" (AIDS) because the virus weakens the human immune system and makes it difficult for it to repel other diseases.

HIV is spread by contact with the bodily fluids (stool, urine, blood, saliva) of the infected person and its presence can be quickly determined by either a blood or a saliva test (both are commonly in use by insurance companies by the late 1980s). Such transfers of fluids may occur during sexual activities, accidents, surgery, blood transfusions, multiply used hypodermic needles. The later will arise in frequency amongst groups addicted to illegal drugs and in poorly equipped clinics in poorer countries.

Once in the human body, the virus is carried by the blood through the body.
When either a helper T-cell or a macrophage cell is found, the virus invades it, replicates, and travels to other sites and organs. The AIDS virus appears to progress slowly, depending upon the systemic (spiritual, physical, emotional and psychological) health of the infected individual. Symptoms may never appear or could appear within a few weeks, months, or, many years. Typically, the HIV targets weakened susceptible cells and so may progress cell by cell.

Like many viruses, HIV remains inside a cell, as a parasite, and slowly feeds and duplicates itself.
Sometimes the host cell will die and hundreds of viruses become released into the blood and other body fluids. Some HIVs may be destroyed by a person's antibodies; others will rapidly spread the disease. Viruses are persistent and so is HIV. It just keeps going and going until it runs out of food, or, is forced into hibernation by antibodies or an adverse chemical environment. Viruses don't die, they just go into suspended animation.

An HIV infected person, in which the virus is making progress, begins to get uncommon diseases - which keep reoccurring. Eventually, the person's immune system is so distracted and weakened that they acquire too many diseases which are too severe, either singly or in combination, for them to continue to live. Viruses which cannot be fully accessed quickly by an effective antibody or efficient anti-viral medication, which acts to slow the replication of the virus, have the capacity to mutate and become resistant to any new medication within 6 to 12 months. Since the AIDS virus is in two places at once, such mutation is possible, and likely. Drugs capable of restricting T cell activity decrease the body's ability to defend itself against other diseases.

Restricting the activity of macrophages may lead to concentrations within certain organs while controlling or reducing the rate of spread. Thus, efforts to keep the infected person alive longer may provide them with symptoms of an escalating number of chronic diseases. Drugs being used by 1994 will include AZT, ddI, ddC, d4T, U-90-150. By then, 20 different vaccines will be in use in experimental testing. With the bureaucratic regulations now controlling the testing of vaccines, no "proven" vaccine will be produced before the strain being targeted has mutated. Trial testings may run as long as 15 years. A mutation can occur spontaneously in 6 months. Typically, the most promising, and cheaper remedies - herbs, meditation, visualization, sincere faith, Tai-Chi, prayer, accupuncture, ... would be left until last to try.

1982 - By October 1,
The Reagan Administration had revealed their opinions and intentions to their citizens:

Eugene Rostow, the President's officer in charge of disarmament had written:
"We are living in a prewar and not a post-war world."
When Rostow was head of the "Committee on the Present Danger", he said:
"There is no difference between the Soviets now and Hitler (in the 1930s), except that the Soviets are stronger."

When asked by a "Senate Foreign Relations Committee" if either superpower could survive a nuclear exchange, Rostow answered: "Japan, after all, not only survived but flourished after the nuclear attack."

When Senator Pell asked what sort of a world would survive, Rostow replied that there would be
"10 million (dead) on one side and a 100 million on the other, but that is not the whole population."

Caspar Weinberger, Secretary of Defence, presents spending plans to the President designed to have the USA "regain" nuclear superiority over the Soviet Union before 1990. It would later be revealed that inaccuracy of CIA and NSA statistics were the major contributors to the USSR advances.

Alexander Haig, Secretary of State, had met with Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko to set a date for arms control negotiations, simply as a matter of public deception. Haig openly acknowledges that "The Soviets have made no headway with China and are forced to maintain 50 divisions on the Chinese border. The conquest of Afghanistan has proven to be neither cheap nor easy. They are pouring $200 million a day in aid into Hanoi to prop up the Vietnamese, who are themselves bogged down in Cambodia. The Soviet confront an impossible dilemma in Poland."

Richard Perle, Assistant Secretary of Defence, admitted that "We have to be seen to be making an honest effort - and we will make an honest effort - in any negotiations (although) we are frankly pessimistic." The European Allies of the American had only accepted nuclear weapons within their borders on the basis that the American would conduct serious negotiations with the USSR about arms reductions.

Paul Nitze, former Navy Secretary, will be the chief negotiator at the arms limitation treaty talks. He has been a staunch anti-Soviet pro-nuclear war proponent since the late 1940's. Last May, Nitze noted that "there could be serious arms control negotiations, but only after we have built up our forces... (after) 10 years." In 1949, Nitze advocated "any measures, covert or overt, violent or non-violent, which serve the purposes of frustrating the Kremlin design." Nitze and most of the advisers follow the credo that your can only "negotiate" with an enemy when you are in a superior position to force him to do what you want!

Laurence Beilenson, retired lawyer and author, and mentor to President Reagan, believes that nuclear war with the Soviet Union is inevitable "because of their Leninism." He advocates that the USA prepare to fight and win a nuclear war.

George Bush, former director of the CIA and intelligence adviser to Reagan since 1976, has provided Reagan with an assessment of Soviet intentions and capability which encourages an approach of political deception (The Art of War). Reagan responded during the last presidential campaign by saying that he would not rule out a first strike attack against the USSR for doing so would make them more secure. It might also have lowered there state of paranoia and justifiable lack of trust.

The Committee on the Present Danger is a 150-member organization right-wing group of academics, intelligence professionals and political officials who generally believe that a nuclear war is survivable, inevitable, and acceptable. Reagan and 23 other members of his administration belong to the committee.

Richard Burt, a State Department official, believes that both sides will honour the terms of the SALT II (Strategic Arms Limitation Treaty) because nothing the Americans want to develop is mentioned in it. Heavy expenditure projects like the MX missile system and the B-1 bomber, now planned by the administration, escape restriction.

President Ronald Reagan himself seems to take all his cues from his advisers.
During his campaign, he threatened voters that if American military power wasn't substantially increased, "They (the Soviets) will be able to take us with a phone call." His rationale was that the Soviets could wipe out American Minuteman missiles with a first strike, then withstand a U.S. retaliation, and have enough missiles left over to destroy the American population. Rather than ordering the retaliation, Reagan was inferring that he would have to admit defeat on the phone rather than commit national suicide. This was the usual political deception and blackmail that has elected many modern political leaders.

Pentagon analysts state that the missiles of either side are not accurate enough to destroy a target as small as a Minuteman missile silo. Blasts from initial missiles would likely throw off incoming missiles. For a first strike to be successful, the missiles launched would have to be 90% successful; otherwise, the retaliatory strikes by the Minutemans would be too devastating for the Soviets to survive. The Reagan rationale also discounts the potential participation and successes of the nuclear-armed submarines and bombers. With these FACTS at hand, one is prompted to ask what the true intent of the weapons upgrading requested could mean.

One fact is that it would mean billions of dollars in additional defence contracts to American armaments industries maintaining the employment of hundreds of thousands of academicians and high technology workers with discreet kickbacks for supporting politicians and new more accurate destructive technology more capable of dictating political terms to the whole world. Almost any record of the Soviet geopolitical involvements over the past decade show them to be doing poorly. Many Senators believe it is incredulous that the Soviet leadership could be capable of believing that they could win a first strike victory against bomber, submarine and land-based nuclear missiles.

1982 -
American Defense Industry Contracts for the year worth more than $10,000 each, amounted to $116.7 billion dollars, up 19.3 billion from last year. All of the top ten industry contractors received sharp increases in the capital amount of their contracts in President Reagan's military buildup. The top 10 were:

   General Dynamics               Boeing

   McDonnell Douglas              Hughes Aircraft

   United Technologies            Rockwell International

   General Electric               Raytheon

   Lockheed                       Martin Marietta

Planes, missile systems and submarines were the higher expenditures.

Pentagon contracts to universities rose 20% in value to $852 million.

40 Institutes and colleges received between $2.3 and $235 million;
both Johns Hopkins University and M.I.T. received over $210 million.

Laser weapons, biowar products, and electronic pattern recognition for weapons targeting were among the university programs.

1982 - On October 23,
The New York Times reported "The United States has detonated more nuclear weapons this year than in any other year since 1970, although the Reagan administration says it is still committed to a comprehensive treaty to ban all such tests." As many as 3 detonations per day had been fired in the previous month. James Cannon, speaking for the Department of Energy, stated "Basically, we're trying to put more modern weapons into the stockpile and we're trying to make our weapons safer."

1982 - By November,
"Supply Side Economic theory" is being utilized by many capitalistic nations.
Popularized in the 1970s, it mandates that policy objectives for "growth" in the economy can be met through tax incentives encouraging businesses to make productive investments. Supply side economists emphasize the importance of tax cuts and tax credits which they argue stimulates the economy's overall production of goods and services to meet anticipated demand, encouraging suppliers to produce more, and individuals to earn more, as opposed to stimulating growth in consumer and business spending for goods and services. Will people work more because they can produce more? Further suggested is the idea that the economic stimulus produced will offset the tax losses from tax cuts and credits. With double-digit inflation, the theory now became politically popular.

Unfortunately, and frequently in an authoritarian system, the leadership make decisions which they believe should be advantageous for their subjects. These decisions are made, usually, on a rational basis, justified by some theory or assumption. The rational, perhaps bureaucratic and academic innovator assumes that the practical and emotionally minded production worker will respond as the planner believes he would if he were in their position. Often, in human bureaucracies, the planners have never experienced the reality of those for whom they plan and make decisions.

In a major economic intervention, for success, it is imperative that all of the participants understand what is being done for them, why it is being done, AND, what is expected from them for the new program to work. No one appeared to tell the American business owner why he was getting tax breaks and credits, or, he did not understand what was expected of him or her - greater investment in upgrading his business, expanding sales, or building inventory -, or, the investor was simply greedy and lacked confidence in the new government and policy. The tax credit resulted in lower tax revenues and most of the savings were invested into securities, spent to lower debt, or conserved to increase fallen profits. The result: the problems worsened.

1982 - By November,
The movie "E.T.: The Extraterrestrial" had been released.
Encouraged and assisted in its promotion through discrete financing, the movie is intended to portray GRAY spacepersons as friendly and lovable, despite their odd looks. It centres around a sentimental story about an emotional, immature GRAY which has crashed-landed on the Earth and seeks, with the aid of a group of human youngsters, to return to its home in the sky. It is part of a strategy for the revelation by the USA government that the GRAYs are on the Earth and want to work together with humanity. Within a few years the truth regarding the real intentions of the GRAYs will begin to prove obvious and the fact that the highest levels of political and cultural decisionmaking in the USA have unwittingly conspired with them against the common populous will present an apparent political emergency.

1982 - By November,
"The Missing Children's Assistance Act" is signed by USA President Reagan, after the usual lengthy journey of debate through Congress.
Although the FBI has maintained a computerized missing persons file since 1975, local police departments were not required to record the names of missing children with the FBI - so, the statistics available were unreliable and downplayed the prevalence of the phenomenon.

Under the missing children's act, parents could insist that the names of their missing sons or daughters be enetered into the federal computer databank, and increasing numbers did so. Between 1982 and 1985, the FBI received about 330,000 such reports each year. More than 90% of the children reported to police as missing were runaways who were found, or who returned home, within days.

In some cities, a mother who calls the police - out of overprotectedness, or, lack of adequate parental attention - raises the number of missing children numbers. Even if the child is discovered in 10 minutes sitting on a neighbour's lawn, it remains on record as a "missing child." If the same thing happens a few days or weeks later, with the same child, the number of children reported missing rises again. At any given time, there were, through the 1980s in the USA, about 30,000 children who had gone missing for longer than a few weeks. Of these, FBI agents say they believe that 95% are teenagers who have run away from home, in many cases to escape sexual abuse, or "throwaways" who have been kicked out by their parents. This points out serious chronic spiritual ills within the society.

Nearly all the rest are believed to have been taken by one parent from another in a custody dispute, which leaves room for a very small number who have actually been abducted by strangers; almost none of those abducted by spaceperson cultures are held for longer than a few hours of interviewing and/or experimentation before being returned - usually without their being missed. The National Child Safety Council, would know of no more than 100 children who had been kidnapped by 1985; the FBI would have opened investigations of only 68 of those: persons that met the strict federal criteria for possible kidnapping. Even if that number were to be multiplied ten fold, it would barely reach 50% of the number of children who die each year in accidental drownings.

The media in its capacity to sensationalize and magnify reality would promote the public belief that ALL missing children were abducted by pedophiles. Both naive, oversensitive and highly reactive persons and persons of low self-esteem or carrying a sense of guilt over the loss of their own child, would create "Child-Find" styles of organizations whose major activity would result in the raising of mass hysteria and intolerance. By 1988, such monumental efforts to track down missing children would not as yet have led to the recovery of a single child abducted by a stranger. Morbid fears and unnecessary defensiveness in children would be a result of such promotions. Psychologist Lee Salk would reveal that children were becoming increasingly terrified by all the warnings about evil strangers to the point where "they are going to be afraid to talk to strangers," and will refuse to leave home. His major concern: "How can they make friends?"

Another result of this negative spiritual approach to family breakdown was the actualy stimulation of opportunities for pedophiles and potential pedophiles to gain access to the children of parents most protective of their children. Such overpossessive self-centred parents, rather than learn and teach constructive communication and coping skills to their offspring, frequently stunted the spiritual strength of their child by modelling behaviours of fear, distrust, alienation, emotional over-reaction and emotional deadening, and, denial. Continuing to periodically and frequently abandon their children in order to pursue more material aims, the parents would rely increasingly on the services of childcare workers. Often, as an extension of their own bereft parenting skills, such parents would assume that almost anyone of any age would be capable of effectively and constructively caring for their children. A denial of the reality of the declining respect for authority based upon age by the younger generations in North America, most parents would assume that temporary childcare workers would respect the rights of the children in their care and respect the requests and guidance of their "employer." Increasingly, this would prove wrong - with resulting great trauma for the youngster who received abuse.

1982 - On December 14,
The origins of the "National Coordinating Center" grow out of secret discussions held by USA Department of Defense, White House staff and communications industry executives. The meetings, over the next 3 years, will be held at the White House, the State Department, the Strategic Air Command (SAC) headquarters at Offutt AFB in Nebraska, and at the North American Aerospace Defense Command (NORAD) in Colorado Springs. The industry officials attending constituted the "National Security Telecommunications Advisory Committee" (NSTAC), called "N-stack", set up by President Reagan to address the potential for the telecommunications industry to be compromised by an enemy state or group. It was at these meetings that the concept of a communications watch center for national emergencies - the NCC (National Coordinating Center) was introduced.

Since 1934, American presidents have possessed the authority to take control of any communications facility that it is believed is "essential to the national defense." Set out in the Communications Act of 1934 in Section 606, the authority is referred to as a "606 emergency" by government insiders. The concept of the NCC was to finally institutionalize and organize that authority for widespread and complete activation on short notice whenever it was deemed necessary. Control can be deceptive in its application. One does not physically have to take possession of the facility and place substitute personnel in front of the broadcast switches. The THREAT of such complete control together with the authority of the Executive Office, the President, would often be adequate to the receiving of the full cooperation of the staff on duty. A small number of officers with the authoritative documentation, real or fake, together with a preplanned scenario of what was to be broadcast could alter the reality for a whole nation which had grown to depend on the mass media for its point of reference. This is the crucial difference between a nation which has made a physical medium its god and a nation which has made the Holy Spirit its God: the former can easily be deceived and manipulated; the latter cannot.

Along with the concept of the National Coordinating Center were presented a wide set of plans that would allow the USA military to take control of all commercial communications "assets" - everything from ground stations and satellite dishes to fiberoptic cables, countrywide. In most every military coup in modern human history, control of the media has been the key to success. In some instances, control of little more than the nation's major radio and television station has resulted in success. In the USA, where the public tend to place complete credibility within the mass media, with the expectation that the context of reality will be translated for them by the announcers and program introductions - control of the mass media is equal to control of the minds of the majority of the populace.

1982 -
Scientists in The U.S.A., Canada, Britain, France, and Japan consider dumping nuclear waste into ocean sites in order to lessen the health hazards of land-based temporary holding sites near nuclear reactors and on government military reserves. In the U.S.A. alone, it is estimated that there are 6,000 tons of spent reactor fuel, termed high-level wastes because they contain radioactive isotopes that remain hazardous for hundreds of thousands of years. Low level wastes, such as gloves of reactor workers - are already being dumped into the ocean in drums off the shores of the U.S.A., Japan, Britain, and the U.S.S.R.. Locations receiving the greatest attention as potential future burial sites include the Hatteras Abyssal Plain between Bermuda and Cuba, in the Atlantic Ocean and the Shatsky Rise, east of Japan in the Pacific Ocean.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1983 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

Risky Business; The Outsiders; Heart Like A Wheel; Superman 3; Yentl; Merry Christmas Mr. Lawrence; Porky's II: The Next Day; The Osterman Weekend; Amityville III: The Demon; Staying Alive; The Dead Zone; Baby, It's You; A Killer in the Family; Testament; D.C. Cab; Breathless; Siege; Strange Brew; Right of Way; Exposed; Aladdin and His Wonderful Lamp; Rumble Fish; Hanna K; The Life and Times of Edwin Alonzo Boyd; Never Say Never Again; Yellowbeard

General News:

Consumer Price Index: 298.4

An underground FEDERATION base is established at the U.S. Navy base on Catalina Island, California, U.S.A.

1983 - By this year,
NORAD could track objects as small as 10 cm up to 400 km in altitude above the Earth and as small as 30 cm in the Geostationary Earth Orbit (GEO). Objects of only 1 mm travelling at a relative speed of 10 km/sec can penetrate most satellites. According to the USA Congressional Research Service, there was by this date an estimated population of up to 10,000 objects of human space debris too small to be tracked at altitudes of 500 - 1100 km. with a maximum density at the 850 km level. GEO satellites are usually raised to the 850 km orbit at the end of their 2 to 10 year operational lives where the expected orbital life is more than a million years before re-entry.

1983 - By this year,
Liberation Theologians (Christian) had put this question:

When does the sociopolitical situation of a country become so oppressive and intolerable to human values that armed resistance or armed revolution becomes not only an option, but a duty?

Put another way:

Does not the Gospel premise of human liberation, freedom as a child of God, and the right to hope in the future carry with it a right to resist the inhuman, the demonic, and the enslaving? Should not the Gospel applied to a concrete situation permit or demand resistance if all other avenues are closed?

1983 - In January,
The Super NOW (Negotiable Order of Withdrawal) Account was authorized for use in American banking institutions.
Super NOWs have no interest rate ceilings, but a 7-day withdrawal notice may apply.
In addition, they have unlimited deposit and withdrawal capability, but are available only to depositors eligible for NOW accounts, excluding for-profit business.

NOW accounts began in Massachusetts state in 1974 when mutual savings banks offered interest bearing transaction accounts (NOWs) to compete with commercial banks. These accounts were authorized nationwide for all depository institutions by the 1980 Monetary Control Act. The Super NOW combines the features of the NOW account with those of a Money Market Deposit account. The advent of this relatively complex-to-administer account reflects the degree of competition within the banking industry for depositor cash. High competition in a capitalistic economy often arises from one of several factors:

1. The product of service has been shown to be highly attractive to consumers,

2. Sufficient availability is too high (resulting in a fragmented market);

3. Providers are committed to the product through overstocking/overproduction;

4. There is insufficient alternative opportunities for marketers to switch to.

In the banking industry, the Super-NOW was attractive to a minority of consumers; availability of products for short-term cash investment was high; the banks were "overstocked" with a lack of cash-on-deposit; and, every other alternative had been utilized as developed for the purpose of "reclaiming" depositor cash. If depositor cash could not be increased, bank reserves would have to be in order to meet the new guidelines, or bank profits and safety would fall.

1983 - In late January,
President Reagan's new Defense Proposal was outlined:

..outlays of $238.6 billion for the fiscal year starting October 1, - a 1-year leap of 14% and 10% after inflation. No cuts can be made, said Defense Secretary Caspar Weinberger, without "endangering the security of the United States."

After a poor demonstration of troop and equipment readiness for combat in 1980, the nation's 2.1 million soldiers, sailors, airmen and marines are considered by their officers to be fully prepared. Hefty pay hikes, enhanced military prestige and high civilian unemployment have combined to increase the number of volunteers. Troop quality, in terms of institutional educational patterning - numbers of new recruits with high-school diplomas, has increased from 68% to 86%. Higher degrees of patterning has reportedly provided better discipline. Desertion, absences without leave, drug abuse and alcoholism all are at the lowest levels since 1968. Of course, Americans are now out of the Vietnam conflict and not actively involved in combat anywhere else.

Re-enlistments are at the highest levels in history - 68% of those eligible.
With the non-military economy experiencing high unemployment, the departing soldier is unlikely to get a job with a comparable income after expenses. Even so, some segments of the military are high in vacancies. "E Company" of the Army's 724th Maintenance Battalion is supposed to have 7 missile-repair sergeants. It has one.

Sea Power is expected to rise.
The USA fleet now stands at 514 vessels.
By the end of the year the Navy is expected to have added 4 attack submarines, 1 destroyer, 11 guided-missile frigates and 1 refurbished aircraft carrier. The Reagan budget calls for 23 new ships, 320 F-15, F-16 and F-14 fighter planes and 720 more Abrams tanks. While 15 new aircraft carriers are planned, the Pentagon declares that 22 are required to cover commitments.

The Army's new Blackhawk helicopter in ordered in large numbers and is expected to fly twice as many soldiers twice as fast to locations than the helicopter it is replacing. In view of readiness deficiencies demonstrated in tests during 1980, $12 billion has already gone towards improving combat capabilities. Simulated desert warfare at the Fort Irwin base in California, is expected to prepare the forces for combat engagements in the Middle East. Since 1980, spending for spare parts has increased by 123%.

Shortages outlined suggest a direction intended for American foreign policy.
An acclaimed shortage of cargo aircraft and ships needed to cary USA-based soldiers and their heavy equipment across an ocean to a war zone and the fact that the Pentagon has stationed 16 ships near the Persian Gulf, with supplies for a 12,000-member Marine force in battle for 30 days, betrays a growing concern for the region. In addition, the Navy is converting 8 fast cargo ships for military use and more airlifters are being built. Bullets, munitions, fuel and other war-reserve stocks necessary to keep a fighting force in combat are declared as currently insufficient. The political consequences of the military-industrial preferences against those of the consumer-industrial preferences results in the heavy employment dependent high-tech high-cost weapons systems being encouraged at the expense of the practical, lower-cost parts and supplies expenditures.

Non-defense aspects of the Reagan Budget include the following:

   1. Support subsidies for farmers are to be halved from $18 billion to 9;

   2. Education loan budget is to be cut by $883 million & a means test added;

   3. Interest on public debt is expected to increase to $144 billion;

   4. Public debt is projected to increase by 16% over previous year;

   5. Energy development funds are proposed to be cut by 27%;

   6. Pollution control, conservation and land management: cut 19%;

   7. Highway outlays are intended to be raised by $12 billion;

   8. Airport funding is budgeted to increase by 17%;

   9. Contribution to International Development Banks (IDBs) to increase by 10.4% to $1.4 billion.

In addition, White House expenses were proposed to rise by 8.6%, 3.2% greater than the overall budget increase. If what is being increased is considered high priority and what is being decreased is considered low priority what do we have? -

The Reagan administration believes that increased military strength is very important in spite of an armaments stockpiling and development plan that has been consistent for over 40 years. How much killpower would be enough? Who are the Americans getting ready to attack?

The Reagan administration believes that better roads and airports are more important than fewer starving Americans and better skilled citizens. Transportation is paramount to dependability of commerce and to facilitate its expansion. It is also very important in times of civil unrest and for battlefield strategy. Will increased access benefit the economy, or benefit invasion or defense?

The Reagan administration is willing to reduce energy exploration and development at a time when American energy reserves are diminishing and American dependence on foreign oil supplies is increasing. Does it have a "guaranteed" source that hasn't yet been identified?

The Reagan administration considers national defense, national land and air access and increased bureaucracy to be crucial at a time when the public are jeopardized by a weakened food source, a weakened energy source, reduction in skill training, unemployment and increasing taxes! Quality of Life has always been a matter of priorities and choices for humans. If humans don't like what they keep prescribing for themselves, why can't they change the recipe?

1983 - In the February 14 "U.S. News & World Report",
Robin Knight, reporting from Rome, wrote .. "The Desperate Straits of Black Africa."
The following is an excerpt:

"Nigeria's mass expulsion of more than 2 million alien workers underscores the economic crisis that is ravaging black-ruled nations of Africa and setting the stage for an explosion of unrest. ...

Faced with rising unemployment, a recession triggered by the worldwide oil glut and falling oil prices, (President Shehu) Shagari (of Nigeria) ordered well above 2 million West Africans who have been working illegally (and cheaply) in Nigeria to get out of the country. At least 1 million are from Ghana and about 700,000 from Chad.

By the February 1 deadline, hundreds of thousands of refugees had fled Nigeria by foot, truck, ship and airplane. Hundreds of thousands more were trying desperately to leave to avoid arrest by Nigerian police. Dozens of Ghanaians were said to have died on the 300-mile trek from Nigeria across Benin and Togo to their homeland. ...

Since 1980, there have been coups in three African countries - Ghana, Liberia and Upper Volta - touched off by economic discontent. In the past year, there have been food riots in Sudan, Malawi and Madagascar. Tanzania is on the brink of bankruptcy. Even such 'Success stories' as Kenya and the Ivory Coast are battling economic ills. ...

The worldwide recession worsens the difficulties.
Many states that won independence in relatively prosperous times after World War II lack the institutions or skills to cope with intractable, seemingly permanent problems. The World Bank recently cataloged some of them - corruption, inefficiency, excessive government spending, overvalued currencies and neglect of agriculture.

By far the most pressing concern is the continent's foreign debt, currently topping 60 billion dollars and way out of proportion to what African states take in from abroad. Foreign earnings in 1981 totaled some 28 billion dollars, a drop of 1 billion from 1980.

One of the big reasons for declining foreign income is the plummeting prices of commodities, now at their lowest point in 30 years in real terms. For a continent almost totally dependent on sales of cocoa, copper, coffee, diamonds and similar resources, the drop in prices spells disaster. ...

Adding still more red ink to balance sheet is the fact that young African states have been heavy borrowers for years. Poor at the time of independence and anxious to carry out ambitious development programs, most African nations readily accepted large loans from the (industrially) developed nations in the 1970s. Now, just paying the interest is a burden. ...

Looming deficits already have forced Sudan, Malawi, Zaire, Zambia and other nations to work out new debt-repayment schedules with such institutions as the International Monetary Fund (IMF). At least six others, including Ghana, are engaged in similar negotiations. More are certain to do so later. ...

Nigeria is cutting spending and imports as a result of low petroleum prices.
Even so, it must try to borrow 4.5 billion dollars in 1983 for capital expenditures.
Lagos will need an additional 2 billion to cover its trade deficit. ...."

Several points should be noted here:

   a) No concern or programs for population control are mentioned;
   b) Former colonies seek the material standards of their colonizers;
   c) Corruption and debt are endemic and founded slavery earlier;
   d) Agriculture, necessary to feed a dense culture, has been neglected;
   e) Major economic base now is provision of luxury resources to others;
   f) Dependency and reliance on export markets has weakened self-reliance;
   g) Exploitation of cheap (slave-like) labour led to further weakness;
   h) Lack of population control has contributed to forced expulsions;
   i) Excessive government bureaucracy has encouraged capital dependency;
   j) Foreign lenders have irresponsibly lent for immediate profit only.

1983 - During March,
The "Strategic Defence Initiative" (SDI) was announced by USA President Ronald Reagan.
He explained that by building the system and later sharing it with the USSR, the threat of nuclear war could be neutralized. The fundamental question remains: If the USSR could trust the USA and USA-developed and produced hardware to protect both the USA and the USSR equally well, why would there have been a need for the Cold War of armaments stockpiling which has continued for 30 years? So what is the true reason?

1983 - Beginning this year,
The Demand for Sunscreen Products will rise by an average of 10% during the next 5 years to a market of US $390 million by 1988. During the previous 45 years, the appearance of a suntan has evolved in status from the mark of a labourer to a symbol of the leisure class and the beautiful. The increasing evidence made available to the public from this point on that exposure to the Sun can be detrimental to the skin will result in more care being taken to preserve it. In a few years time, the American Cancer Society will run campaigns with slogans such as "Fry Now, Pay Later!"

1983 - In May,
A 6.3+ Magnitude Earthquake at Coalinga, California, U.S.A., originates from a "Hidden Reverse Fault" and results in extensive damage. A "blind thrust fault" midway between San Francisco and Los Angeles was identified as the source of the 2 foot uplift at the time. 75% of the buildings in the town were demolished and the earth's surface remained unbroken. Scientists are confused and surprised by the location of the quake and the degree of damage from a moderate sized quake.

1983 -
Dr. S. Nordstrom and his colleagues at the University of Umea, Sweden, reported that men who worked in high-voltage electric switchyards fathered a significantly higher number of congenitally malformed children than would be expected. Examination of the chromosomal pattern of the white cells (lymphocytes) in the peripheral blood of similar workers, and found a significant increase in Chromosomal abnormalities over the normal. The exposure to the electric-power frequency fields (50 Hz in Europe) produced abnormalities in chromosomes of the sperm of the switchyard workers.

1983 -
To fool the Kremlin, the USA Defense Secretary, Weinberger, is accused of lying to the American people re the ALCM-B.

1983 -
A program begun in 1982 to build 5 nuclear power plants in Washington State, U.S.A. has resulted in cancellations after billions of dollars were spent. Two unfinished nuclear power plants near the west coast of the state, near the capital of Olympia were closed when massive cost overruns and inaccurate energy demand forecasts threatened to leave the largest bond default in U.S.A. history. The builder of the 2 plants, "Washington Public Power Supply System" (WPPSS), failed this month to meet a $15.6 million monthly interest payment that was due on $2.25 billion worth of bonds that had been issued to finance the 2 plants. Electricity bills have tripled in five years. Following a study 10 years ago, when annual increases in demand were estimated at 7%, the agency planned to build the 5 reactors, 3 in the eastern desert of the state. Costs soared from the initial estimate of $4.1 billion to $23.8 billion in 1981. An economic recession hit the area 17 months ago, contributing to the problem.

The state is suspected of harbouring a long established alien underground base in the Shasta mountain area. If correct, such a base is also suspected of being a terminus in the underground tunnel system connecting other bases across the country. Washington State has long been a site of UFO reports. Nuclear storage areas, including nuclear power stations, have long been focal points for UFO activity and missing uranium supplies have been detected at some sites following the sightings. Were humans manipulated to build "supply" sites for existing alien bases?

1983 - On June 13,
U.S.A. Pioneer 10 space probe, after 11 years of travel at 30,00 mph (50,000 kph) went beyond Neptune's orbit, at that time a little farther away than Pluto.

1983 - By August,
Anti-crime crackdowns in China had begun, yielding a supply of prisoners who would become organ donors, many of whom would not be asked for consent. Over the next decade tens of thousands of organ transplants would be made. As early as the day before their execution some prisoners would have their kidneys removed. Other executions would be purposely botched in order to retain the donor until a recipient could be found. Many would find that medical personnel had arrived before their execution and were simply waiting until the announcement of death to remove the organs. The process would become public in August, 1994.

1983 - During 1983,
The planet "Lucifer" is described in the book "The Principles of Ultra Relativity" authored by Shinichi Seike.
He writes:

"There are many small planets, called Asteroid, between the orbit of Mars and that of Jupiter. Most of them are smaller than even ordinary satellites, and some of them are not spherical. ... More than 1,600 are found. There will be more than 50,000, including the smallest which is now undiscovered. They will be the ruins of one more mother planet which was decayed in the ancient Era. It has been called "Lucifer" by some astronomers. We shall study specifications of that marvellous planet in this chapter. It is situated on the fifth orbit. .... mass of Mars and that of Lucifer are supposed equal ... thus ... total mass of Asteroid ... only 0.06 per cent of mass remains when decayed. The other mass was decayed into Gamma ray and so on. ... There was an astounding explosion. ... The size of Lucifer was about identical with that of the Earth."

[The text is the English published translation accompanying the original Japanese and the emphases are those of the author.}

This work scientifically proposes the existence of a planet which at a time early to or predating recorded human history, exploded, with a conversion of mass into gamma rays as well as a dispersal of larger pieces into the surrounding universe. Those pieces not converted into energy waves, gases, or meteors, were captured in the gravitational force of the field of the original planet: a mere .06% of the original mass.

According to spaceperson sources, this event took place 3.7 million years ago.
At that time Mars was further away from the Sun than Earth, yet in the same orbit plane such that when they passed each other they exerted considerable attraction stress on each other. This exerted considerably elevated change ratios in each planet's development relative to that of others in this solar system. Another planet, which I agree to call Lucifer, travelled in a path not on the same plane as the Earth and Mars such that the 3 only came close together once every 800 million years. On this occasion, at one-tenth the mass of the Earth and moving at 32 times the speed, ricocheted off Mars, launching Mars into a new orbit further away from the Earth and tearing off debris which settled with the fragments of Mars into an Asteroid orbit. These activities led to a stabilization of both Earth and Mars relative to the massive changes undergone before. These new orbits reduced the expansion and development of life on Mars, as we know it on Earth, and increased the expansion on the latter. The theory mentioned in Seike's work, while analytically possible, is not true to fact and lies within the limiting expectations of 20th century scientists.

1983 - During the year
A Walk-In answered the question:
What is the change from Piscean age to the Aquarian age ?

(162) ... souls from other planets have always been present here, but he asserts that until recently the mass consciousness of the human race was so dense and matter-bound that we could not contact them. "Now many souls from other stars and planets are able to incarnate here and to experience the vibrations of earth, because the earth is passing through a higher electro-spiritual field known as the Aquarian constellation. It is due to this higher influx of light vibration that we are even able to understand the fact of NC273." ... "These increased vibrations are also causing all the matter-bound souls who are not able to glimpse beyond the veil of sense perceptions to go a little crazy. This is because all of these new energies are out of 'sync' with the lower sense-mad mind. That is why the pole shift will come to liberate them from this plane and to liberate the spiritually minded from them."

"When a cold-water fish is placed in warm water it will die.
The Piscean age through which we have been passing since the time of Christ is a water sign, symbolic of cold water; yet the Aquarian age deals with electromagnetic waves of higher vibrations and of the higher vibration of water, which is steam. Aquarius is a gaseous or air sign, so all souls acclimated only to liquid water cannot survive in the higher, more spiritual electromagnetic waters of truth. We are transcending an octave in consciousness, and only one out of twenty-five souls now incarnated on this planet will be able to stand these higher vibrations. The space visitors are naturally acclimated to the higher vibration of the Christ Consciousness and are here to help usher mankind into a new golden age, dedicated to the worship of our One Father through all aspects of life."

... the earth is now in the portion of its 24,000 year orbit in which it is moving closer to the galactic centre, or seat of God. "The galactic centre is the focal point of God's energy in this galaxy as it is the magnetic point around which the central suns rotate, and is the most powerful source of energy in our system. Thus the vibrations of the atomic structure are increasing, and with this increased vibratory rate humanity as a whole is becoming increasingly more aware of the subtler states of matter like radio waves, X-rays, electromagnetic waves and the like. What this means is that humanity is becoming aware of the finer forces in nature, and thus is more able to comprehend the possibility of higher dimensional realities that in actuality are the homelands of the various extraterrestrial intelligences. As modern physics has proven, all life is vibration. As we grow spiritually we become conscious of an entire universe that transcends the limited realm of the five senses. It transcends duality, and everything in it is conscious.

1983 - During the year,
A civil war began in southern Sudan.
Over the next 3 years it would lead to the displacement of hundreds of thousands of people and would destroy the agricultural base in the vast and largely inaccessible interior. By 1986, relief officials would estimate that 500,000 displaced Sudanese were in the southern part of the country, having the largest refugee population in Africa. Early that year, the Sudan People's Liberation Army (SPLA) - Christians and Animists fighting for southern autonomy in the Moslem-dominated country - would begin attacking convoys of donated food claiming that the supplies, intended for 2,000,000 starving in the south, was being seized by the Sudanese army.

In truth, the supplies were being seized by both military factions for their own use.
UN efforts to end the war, economic disaster and starvation would be largely ineffective.
Where people were saved from hunger by food shipments, further shipments would often be irregular resulting in the birth and starvation of even larger numbers of people than if nothing had been done. This human international political principle of taking half responsibility for the solution of problems is always destructive and increasingly common.

1983 - On July 24,
William Goodlett, a Walk-In living in Salem, Virginia, experienced the following events on another planet:

(131)
" and slowly through a mist, the scene appeared before me and I was suddenly there, seated in a low chair with high back. Two feet in front of me was a little low table with a cloth on it, along with two large wooden bowls, one containing mixed vegetables and the other small pieces of what tasted like yak meat. I was eating. So were about 20 other people, seated cross-legged on the floor at individual low tables in a circle around the room, which had a central fireplace pit like the other one, but this was not the same hogan I had sat in before."

Goodlett said that several months before his visitation he had taken erythromycin for a bronchial infection, and the medicine had destroyed his smell and taste buds. "but while I was sitting there eating, in this other body, it suddenly dawned on me that I was tasting the yak meat and I thought, Oh good, my taste has come back!

I was on the right of the doorway, and there were two older men, and a boy.
The rest were women and girls. We each had our own bowls of vegetables and meat, and we ate with wooden spoons about three times the size of our tablespoons. I saw no knives or forks, but some of the bowls had beautiful carved designs on them, and all of the tables had cloth covers. Several women were coming and going through the doorway, serving the food that they brought in from outside. I saw no drinking cups or glasses. We were all talking and laughing together in a language that was not English, but which I could readily understand. We were short, stocky people with fair skin and brown hair. On finishing the meal, one of the men shook hands with me, using both hands to say good-bye. I grabbed his right hand, as we do here when we shake hands; then he put his left hand on top of our clasped hands and I put my left hand on top of his, and we shook all four hands together.

Afterwards we all went outside, and saw about 50 women and girls standing among a large group of pony-dogs that were individually hitched to sleds with high sides. The pony-dogs, because that is what we called them in that other language, were about the size of miniature Shetland ponies, but they had split hooves like deer, and their heads were rather doglike, with long hair and drooping ears. The sleds were shaped something like an old-fashioned bathtub, but smaller, and their high curved runners were wide, like skiis. There was a kind of double harness on the animals, circled around the neck and lower around the chest behind their front legs. Each woman and girl had a long staff with streamers about 2 feet long and small tassels on the end, which they waved in front of the pony-dogs to start them off.

I was holding a long staff with blue streamers and leading the journey with one of the other men. We went slowly over the land, which was thickly covered with grasses from one to two feet high, over which the loaded sleds passed easily. There were as many ponies and sleds as there were people, and we did not move in a line, but were spread out as much as three city blocks apart. The sleds were piled high with bundles wrapped in cloth and tied, but were apparently light in weight, because the pony-dogs pulled them with little effort. We went over small rolling hills much like those in Missouri, and in some of the valleys were small spring branches, but shallow, and I saw no soil erosion. After a seemingly all-day trip I was tired when we came to a cluster of hogans, some in valleys and some in the hills, but all were empty. During the journey the sky was mostly overcast, but a gentle wind blew and the cool air smelled like lemons, as it did on the other planet that I've already told about.

Through occasional breaks in the clouds we could see above us another planet about three times as large as the moon, very green looking, and we could even see the clouds on it, too. This seemed to be an overnight rest stop, and we began partly to unload the sleds and unhitch the pony-dogs, who started to run and play like puppies, and eat the grasses. As I was carrying some bundles into the hogan that apparently was mine, a little girl who seemed about 12 years old said to me, "Where do you go father when you're not with us?" I laughed and said, "Come here, child. Now, when the clouds part, see our sister planet up there? I go to be with our other family there." Well, the first time I had been on this hogan planet, I knew that I had two families and ten children, but I didn't realize that one family was on a different planet. At this point I understood that we could go there instantly, by thinking and wanting to do so. That was teleportation, and I divided my time between the two planets which revolved around each other, and also around two stars, or suns. There was a double star system around which these two planets revolved, but the other stars, or suns, were farther away, so that we did not derive much heat from them.

All of the men on our hogan planet could teleport, and there were not many of them, but lots of women. Now my son came from one of the hogans, to show me his staff which was 8 feet long, with a bunch of long streamers and tassels that were used to flutter in front of the pony-dogs to direct them which way to go. They were not struck or guided, because we did not follow a path. My son had started the journey towards the back of the caravan, but had now caught up with us, and I want to describe what he was wearing. His clothes were made by sewing together strips of material, so that the pants were two long strips from the knees up over the shoulders and down to the knees in the back. Then two strips were sewn on each side from the knee up to the waist, with two short strips inside the legs to his crotch, an apron in the front and an apron in the back. He wore a wide leather belt and a little jacket made of strips sewn together, with detachable strips for sleeves, and a turbanlike cap of strips sewn in a circle, with an inserted flat top. He had high, knee-length boots, and the entire outfit was bright yellow, with boot tassels as decoration. ... Seemingly these people could only weave material in narrow strips 6 or 8 inches in width, and would then sew the strips together to make their cloth.

I took the staff and admired it, telling my son that it was very good because since it was slender and long he could hold it a long way in front of his pony-dog. These animals were very intelligent and easily understood our language. Then while I waved the staff, watching the streamers flutter, I awakened in my own body and immediately went downstairs to write down what I had seen. ... all of my senses are acutely functioning during these out-of-body experiences. ...

Certainly these beings whom I met had teleported themselves, and I'm convinced that I was teleported by wishing and repeatedly asking to visit other planets."

1983 - In September,
Panagiotis Takis (Taki) Veliotis and James Gillilard would be indicted by a USA grand jury for extorting $2.7 million from a now bankrupt "General Dynamics Corp." subcontractor. Veliotis, who had been president and general manager of Davie Shipbuilding Ltd., of Levis, Quebec Province, Canada, and his associate Gillilard had conspired with Gerald Lee, chairman of Frigitemp Corp., and George Davis, vice-president of Frigitemp to exchange money for subcontracts with General Dynamics worth many millions of dollars. General Dynamics was aware of the improprieties from the beginning and may have "rationalized" them as cultural differences between associates to be tolerated for a positive end result. General Dynamics covered up the bribes and kickbacks being built into the budgets as fraudulent consulting fees by grossly inflating invoices for the construction of more than 18 attack submarines for the US Navy as well as in other Pentagon contracts.

On November 16, George Veliotis, brother to Takis, a businessman in New Rochelle, N.Y., had been subpoenaed in a civil suit involving the General Dynamics Quincy shipyard, committed suicide. He got up that morning, went to the basement office in his home, wrote apologetic notes to his wife and daughter and a cheque to the funeral parlour, held a Smith & Wesson Model 19 revolver to his right temple and pulled the trigger. Some companies seeking to do business with Takis often found it expedient to send a little consulting work, or bribe, to George as well. George had been approached the day before by a person who told him that he was hired "to make sure that George didn't testify". George affirmed that he did not want his family to be drawn through a long court case nor for them to be made intimately aware of his unsavoury dealings only to see him go to jail. George asked the man to give him 24 hours to tidy up his affairs, the "subcontractor" would get paid, and the job would be "clean". Not wishing to risk harm to his family if they witnessed his murder, George carried out his own execution.

Earlier, in 1980, General Dynamics Corp. had come under intense pressure in Washington because of cost overruns on the submarine program. The 3-year probe by the USA Justice Department was eventually settled with the navy paying an extra $534 million to General Dynamics? If fraud had been verified, General Dynamics might have had to repay $1.5 billion to the American taxpayer. Many lawyers and other observers would believe that because of its singular relationship with the Pentagon - it is the sole supplier both of the F-16 jet fighter and the Trident nuclear submarine, General Dynamics is almost beyond indictment.

David Berger, counsel to bankruptcy trustee Lawson Bernstein, trustee for Frigitemp Corp. would remark:

"Suppose that these two powerful executives (Veliotis and Gilliland) were exposed as having forced illegal payoffs .... This would have brought on not only substantial and severe administrative action against (General Dynamics) by the United States of America, but possibly even termination of the billions of dollars of contracts."

Veliotis (Takis) and his associate Gilliland, had been hired in 1972 by General Dynamics from Davie Shipbuilding to manage the Quincy Shipyard. In 1980, Veliotis was given a seat on the board of directors. In 1981, Veliotis had been promoted from head of its Electric Boat division to executive vice-president. Veliotis had also acquired 70,000 shares of General Dynamics stock in the interim. By 1984, he had given depositions, as had Gilliland, Davis, General Dynamics and others, in return for releases from legal action by Frigitemp. When the Swiss bank accounts of Veliotis and Gilliland were found later, a civil suit was filed against both.

In the meantime, General Dynamics sued successfully to impound Veliotis' assets in Canada and the USA as part of an attempt to recover the funds that had allegedly been siphoned off. Those assets include his secluded $1 million, 22-room estate on 4.5 acres in Milton, Mass. (with 7 bathrooms, a swimming pool, tennis and squash courts), his GD shares, and a Florida condominium.

1983 - By September 23,
A Level 4 Biocontainment Accident had occurred at the U.S. Army Fort Detrick, Maryland, "Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases" facility. Two control monkeys, housed along with several Ebola-injected test animals, contracted the virus. Located away from the infected monkeys, the controls had no means of direct contact with the blood or contaminated body fluids of the test animals which had succumbed to the Ebola virus and bled out. Either the Ebola strain had mutated into an airborne form, or, the contaminated products had somehow travelled physically from the test animal cages to the control cages.

It had to be presumed later that when the animal caretakers had washed the cages down which had been soiled with contaminated biological fluids, the force and aeration quality of the spray had created an aerosol composition of some of the material - enough to allow several Ebola particles to be inhaled by the control monkeys on the other side of the room. Two weeks later, the 2 control monkeys developed Ebola symptoms: red eyes, bloody noses, failing organs. They died.

The elementary nature of the accident conveys the lack of awareness, knowledge and preparation indicative of the most highly funded efforts of humans to try and understand and find an antidote for highly contagious and fatal infectious diseases. Understanding can sometimes lead to prevention and effective treatment. Singular efforts at eradication or "killing" are sometimes worthless in effect, wasteful in lost research time to gain an understanding, and counterproductive by spreading or strengthening the strain.

1983 - On November 29,
Dr. Robert I Sarbacher, President and Chairman of the Board, Washington Institute of Technology, in a letter to William Sreinman, states persons definitely involved in operations of recovered saucers were John von Neuman and Dr. Vannevar Bush. He also thought that Robert Oppenheimer was involved. Dr. Sarbacher had been invited by President Eisenhower to attend several discussions associated with the reported recoveries, but was unable to attend them. He did receive Special Reports on the recoveries at the Pentagon but was instructed NOT to remove them from his office.

1983 - In the December issue of "High Technology", Joseph Alper's article on "Better Weapons For Antibiotic Warfare" included the following:

"Some bacteria are so resilient and adaptive that they have developed bio-chemical immunity to antibiotics. In other cases, entirely new strains of antibiotic-resistant bacteria appear to have moved into the ecological niche vacated by susceptible species. Richard White, director of antibiotic research at Lederle Laboratories, in Pearl River, N.Y. said: 'We know the best we can do is to stay even with these creatures. To do this we will need a better understanding of how antibiotics work and the mechanisms by which bacteria develop resistance to them.'

Designing new antibiotics used to be little more than a brute-force search for anything that would kill bacteria, followed by mammoth synthesis programs to prepare thousands of analogs (molecules of similar structure), one of which might become the next penicillin. The search is now a finely tuned cross-disciplinary effort. Bacteriologists labor to unlock the mysteries of bacterial structure, growth, and reproduction, looking for weaknesses that could be exploited with the proper chemical. They use this information to develop very specific assay systems that greatly improve their chances of finding a new antibiotic. ...

The most important antibiotics by far, both clinically and commercially, are the Beta-lactams - penicillins, cephalosporins, and the new monobactams. They work by interfering with key enzymes in the bacterial cell, thus inhibiting the construction of the cell wall. ...

Early cephalosporins and penicillins were very effective at controlling aerobic bacteria - those that need oxygen to grow - and a group of organisms called Gram positive bacteria (after the name of a test method which identifies them). When the Beta-lactam antibiotics first appeared, the vast majority of serious infections were caused by these microbes.

But today the most serious infections - especially those that arise in hospitals - are caused by anaerobic species and by the more complex Gram negative bacteria. Resistant strains are a growing problem and can no longer be fought merely with larger doses of penicillin or cephalosporin. ...

... third-generation cephalosporins. These 'broad-spectrum' compounds have a wide range of bacterial activity and are much more resistant to Beta-lactamase than are most penicillins and earlier cephalosporins. They are also very expensive to produce. ...

William Craig, an infectious disease specialist at the University of Wisconsin Medical School (Madison), says: 'Without a doubt, third-generation cephalosporins will solve some serious infection problems we now see in hospitals, but these would only be a small market. What we don't want to see is their use when other antibiotics can fill the need, because the next thing you know, we'll have bacteria that are resistant to these drugs.'

... 'These antibiotics can lead to very serious secondary infections, because they also kill beneficial microorganisms that help keep fungi, molds, and harmful bacteria from colonizing the intestine' says Richard B. Sykes, vice-president for biological research at the Squibb Institute for Medical Research, Princeton, N.J. ....

Third-generation cephalosporin therapy is costly for two reasons. First, the drugs themselves are expensive, because they are difficult and time-consuming to make. Second, they must be given 3 or 4 times a day by injection - they cannot be taken orally, because their side chains are degraded by digestive enzymes - so patients must be kept hospitalized. ...

Paul Actor, director of natural products and pharmacological research (at SmithKline and French Laboratories in Philadelphia), used a biochemical trick to turn the patient's own blood stream into a drug reservoir. He reasoned that if the basic cephalosporin molecule could be modified to reversibly bind to blood proteins, then such a drug could be given in one large dose early in the day; slow release of the drug from the serum proteins would provide a constant level of the antibiotic in the blood stream. ...

A new family of antibiotics, the monobactams, was developed by Squibb to compete with third-generation cephalosporins ... much less expensive to produce and have better-defined ranges of antibacterial activity. ... screening various fungi for such a compound ... look at over a million soil bacteria ... found ... simple structures ... easy to synthesize from common amino acids ... could prepare monobactams that were active against specific classes of bacteria ... such as meningitis and pneumonia. ...

... the target enzyme is used to sabotage itself, and since the enzyme is found only in bacteria, ... no ill effects on humans. ...

Until 5 years ago, antiviral research was hampered by the need to grow viruses in animal cells. But with recent advances in tissue culture techniques, many of which have come from the biotechnology industry, this is no longer a problem. Today the primary task facing virologists is to find weaknesses in a virus's life cycle with which a drug could interfere, just as antibiotics interfere with certain bacterial processes. But with viruses this is a much more difficult task, because most of the enzymes they use during their lifetime belong to the human host. Thus many of the drugs that could kill a virus would prove toxic to humans.

Over the past 7 years, USA antibiotic sales increased 250%, totaling $1.6 billion in 1982 and projected to top $2 billion this year. Three antibiotic families - cephalosporins, penicillins, and aminoglycosides - together account for over 90% of the market. Cephalosporins, with a 20% annual growth rate, are the fastest growing segment, topping $700 million in sales in 1982. Half the antibiotics sold last year were injectables used in hospitals, and half were oral antibiotics prescribed for outpatients.

   Eli Lily (Indianapolis, Ind.)      38% of the market
   Pfizer (Groton, Conn.)              8%
   Upjohn (Kalamazoo, Mich.)           7%
   Merck (Rahway, N.J.)                7%
   Bristol Myers (New York)            6%
   Lederle (Pearl River, N.Y.)         5%
   Abbott Labs (North Chicago, Ill.)   5%
   SmithKline & French (Philadelphia)  4%
   Hoechst-Roussel (Somerville, N.J.)  3%
   Squibb (Princeton, N.J.)            3%

1983 - By December,
A "Charlie I Class" Soviet Submarine sank off the Kamchatka peninsula.
It was salvaged but never returned to service.

1983 - Beginning by the end of the year,
Coupon Fraud begins earning non-product users $10 - $30 million per year over the next 12 years.
Manufacturer's cents off coupons, used to attract new customers and retain current customers to their products, are removed from newspapers and other advertising media by coupon clipping houses backed by the defrauders. These are then submitted through cooperating stores and storefronts to the manufacturers for redemption. The stores receive the capital redeemed from the manufacturer and share it with the defrauder. No merchandise is purchased to support the use of the coupon. Average amount going to the defrauder is 90%. The defrauder pays the expense of the coupon clipping house, the overhead of their own front stores, deducts a portion for their own expenses - including visiting the various stores and co-opting new participants. The defrauders are usually sympathizers of terrorist groups, in particular, the PLO and Iranian groups. A "profit" of 50%, on average, goes to the terrorist groups.

The scheme would not be made public until 1995.
By then, one George Habash would have been known to have operated such a fraud for 10 years with a likely gross of $186 million. The coupons were submitted, at one point, through 700 storefronts in Florida state. A number of storefronts were specifically set up for the purpose of coupon submission; half the floor space was filled with empty shelving. Most of the net profit went to another George Habash, a PLO representative. This represented only one coupon fraud ring. Some were organized strictly for personal profit. In all cases, the cooperating storeowner was fully aware of the fact that they were participating in a fraud. Coupons were originally introduced by manufacturers to bribe the public into trying their product in situations where the manufacturer did not have confidence in factual or subliminal advertising being effective enough to produce the number of sales they wanted. Couponed North American products are usually marketed at higher-than-competitor prices and represent less nutritional or less efficient products than that of their competitor. Greed and lack of product comparison make the consumer the victim.

1983 -
A Neighbourhood Patrol Program begun in 1979 by the Flint, Michigan Police was being monitored by Dr. Bob Trojanowicz and his staff at the nearby Michigan State University School of Criminal Justice. Prior to the program, a police department of 310 had served the city of 155,000 residents - without any foot patrols. By 1985, 64 patrols would cover the entire city.

The program had originally been funded with a private grant from the "Charles Stewart Mott Foundation".
Note this. Bureaucracies and institutions secure their identity and their power by keeping the status quo unchanged, no matter how irrelevant. Change and innovation arise from the individual and and small private groups who are willing to take the risk of loss of their efforts and their resources in order to try and improve situations which they dislike. This fact of human organizational behaviour was repeated in 1982, when private funding ran out. The program had become so successful in the neighbourhood by then, that the citizens decided by a plebicite (still no political leadership), to pass a tax mileage increase to both continue regional coverage and extend the Program to cover the whole city. Even though unemployment was as high as 25% in Flint, in 1982, the public favoured the Program - at a cost of $60 per family per year.

At the beginning, the program consisted of 22 foot patrol officers working 14 beats, 15 hours each day (one hour overlap between shifts) and included about 20% of the city's population. Each beat covered a neighbourhood. The type of neighbourhood policing exemplified by the Flint program had the individual officer assigned to a specific neighbourhood. The geographic boundaries and populations would vary, according to whether it was business or residential in use, or, highrise or single family in style. Feedback from the residents was encouraged in the definition of neighbourhood boundaries because the police realized that natural geographic boundaries often cut through real neighbourhoods. Neat, linearly ordered theoretical structures rarely approximate reality.

The experiment meant that a neighbourhood officer provided all police services for the neighbourhood. Each neighbourhood was expected to provide its officer with an office, telephone and recorder and whatever furniture necessary. Residents were encouraged to use their neighbourhood office or telephone number for non-emergency calls. Messages could be left on the recorder and the officer's first task at the beginning of each shift was to answer these messages. Emergency calls were handled in the normal police manner.

While more findings would be made available in 1985, some of them are noted below.

"Between 1979-1982, total dispatched calls for service decreased by a staggering 43%. The researchers found that people often preferred to wait until "their" police officer could respond to their needs, even if it meant waiting a few days. In many cases, they were telephoning the neighbourhood office of their foot patrol officer and leaving a message on the recorder. When the officer did respond the matter was often then settled informally to the satisfaction of all concerned. Officers are encouraged to do this whenever possible.

Crime rates in the 14 beat areas between 1979-1982 decreased 9% while crime in the rest of Flint increased.

Residents in the foot patrol areas felt much safer in their homes and in the public than their fellow citizens in the rest of Flint.

Between 1980-1984, foot and mobile officers were asked about how safe they felt while going about their respective tasks. Remember almost all foot personnel were experienced mobil officers first. 87% of foot officers and only 41% of mobile officers felt very safe. Foot officers felt secure i the belief that most people in their areas would come to their assistance in an emergency while mobile officers believed few would. It seems that there is security in being familiar with one's surroundings.

The quantity and quality of the information flow between foot officers and citizens was much superior than between mobile officers and citizens. In fact, detectives were very quick to realize this fact even before research confirmed it and began pumping foot patrol officers for leads to cases they were working on.

People began to take a much greater interest in their neighbourhood and in crime prevention activities. They reported things to their neighbourhood officers they would never think of 'phoning in to headquarters'."

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1984 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

The Hotel New Hampshire; Access Code; The Terminator; Silkwood; Bolero; A Passage to India; Police Academy; The Never Ending Story; Mrs. Soffel; The Philadelphia Experiment; Heavenly Bodies; Top Secret; The Killing Fields; Police Academy; Tightrope; Tank; Star Trek III: The Search for Spock; Teachers; Streets of Fire; Greystoke: The Legend of Tarzan of the Apes; The Razor's Edge; Children of the Corn; The Burning Bed; Beverly Hills Cop; Places in the Heart; Windy City; Unfinished Business; A Breed Apart; Bedroom Eyes; Dreamscope; Once Upon A Time in America; Romancing the Stone; Silkwood; Lassiter; Man Under Suspicion

General News:

Consumer Price Index: 311.1

Morgan, California experiences a 6.1 earthquake.

Underground FEDERATION bases are established at both Hutchinson, Kansas (USAF) and Datil, New Mexico.

1984 - Over the next decade,
The Human Genome Project will receive more than $780 million in official open funding to determine the physical structure attached to human genetics. The cloning of human anatomical parts will be a major emphasis.

1984 - On January 1,
The "National Coordinating Center" (NCC) formally opened after 3 years of planning and preparation.
It provided the American President with the structure by which all American mass media and telecommunications could be taken over and controlled should the President believe that a state of National Emergency had been reached.

Located in a nondescript yellow brick building within a maze of government buildings, apartment buildings and office towers in the Washington, D.C. suburb of Arlington, Virginia, the aging structure was surrounded by barbed-wire fence. The main building belonged to that of the Defense Communications Agency (DCA); its mission is to make sure that all of America's global military units can communicate with one another. On the second floor of the 4-storey building, the new National Coordinating Center was located. Operated by the Pentagon, it would remain unknown outside of a few industry and government officials for a few years. It was staffed by representatives of the nation's largest commercial communications companies - the so-called common carriers - including AT&T, MCI, GTE, COMSAT, and ITT. Officials from the State Department, the CIA, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) and a number of other federal agencies would always be present as well.

On a long corridor in the front of the building is a series of offices, each outfitted with a private phone, a telex machine, and a combination safe. Known as "logo row" because each of the offices is occupied by an employee from one of the companies that staff the NCC, their corporate logos hang on the wall outside. Each employee is on permanent standby, ready to activate his company's system should the Pentagon require it. They are on call 24 hours a day and must wear pagers outside of the office. When on vacation, qualified personnel must of course replace them. The physical layout, in this manner, was similar to that of a nuclear submarine, which, when the signal alarm sounded, all hands rushed from their cubicles to their stations to activate their weapons as cued.

When the NCC received word from the President that he or she had called a state of National Emergency, the President would have the authority to further direct the NCC to take control of all American telecommunications, including satellite communications. During a "606 Emergency" the Pentagon could order the companies that participated in the NCC to turn over control of their satellite, fiberoptic, and land-line facilities to the government. This would effectively concentrate the direction and use of American mass media and the later developed use of satellite-directed space weapons within the control of a small number of persons. Once the tools are in place which are capable of motivating or destroying huge numbers of people, their control and use, in human history, has been a gamble between security and disaster depending upon accuracy of information (subject to misinformation and misunderstanding), dependability of the technology (subject to failure), and legitimacy of justification (subject to personal idiosyncrasies, cultural patterning, addictive behaviour reactions).

The NCC's Implementation Plan listed 4 phases of emergencies and how the center would respond to each.
The first, Phase 0, is Peacetime, for which there would be little to do outside of a minor set of routine tasks and exercises. Phase 1 is Pre Attack, in which the NCC locations are instructed to take over the center's functions. Phase 2 is Post Attack, in which other NCC locations are instructed to take over the center's function. Phase 3 is known as Last Ditch, and in this phase whatever facility survives becomes the authoritative NCC. Little of this theory would be taken to practical reality. Only the GRAY spacebeing base at Dulse could be expected to survive such an attack - because it was unknown and because it was built to survive one. A Plan had been intellectualized by humans once again to rationalize actions which were being taken deceptively. The intellectualizations were based in fear, pride and ignorance of the capability of rationalization, obedience to authority, and fantasy.

Later in the year, the divestiture of AT&Ts monopoly over the telephone system, on which the Pentagon had become fairly dependent for communications, would lead to a still greater concern over the control of North American communications networks of all kinds. At a 1983 Federal Communications Commission meeting, a Defense Department official offered the following explanation for the founding of the NCC: "We are looking at trying to make communications endurable for a protracted conflict (nuclear war)." Since the beginning of the Cold War in the early 1950s, the general military and political community had been encouraged and allowed to develop both an expectation and a paranoia about the inevitability of a nuclear war. In turn, these "leaders" had conditioned the general population to accept the inevitable and by breaking their spirit to such a hopeless expectation, depression had become the nationwide illness of humans in both the USSR and the USA. While so distracted, more influential individuals in the USA had sought to gradually centralize, control and direct the major conditioning influences of the culture: the mass media. The NCC and all of the other so-called defensive networks that were being constructed would have been disintegrated in the first nuclear barrage of such a war - so what could their practical purpose be? - a silent military coup - for whose leadership?

1984 - In February,
Argentine Democracy returned to power.
It would be discovered that the former military junta had authorized the illegal detention, torture, drugging, and murder of at least 30,000 civilians suspected of supporting terrorists or sympathizing with anti-government pro-democracy groups. The military would deny all. Before this time and consistently from 1976, the friends and relatives of victims had complained to government officials, local police, local priests, the Vatican, the United Nations, the OAS, Amnesty International. Only the latter had listened. Now, a Court of State Terrorism and the Church Ecclesiastes began to take action.

The government at first said that no one had been killed.
Then they announced that those which had been murdered had been buried in separate coffins.
Then it was found that the bodies of the buried victims had been cut up with hands, feet, fingers, ... being dispersed into the coffins of others so as to confuse or nullify later attempts at identification. Pictures and testimony regarding the remains of burned victims was submitted. Full-term pregnant women, male and female university students, social workers, and many others - made up the tally. Homes and apartments had been destroyed by grenades and complete blocks of houses in some small towns had been aerially bombed. It would take another 10 years before the truth became international news. Meanwhile, parents and friends would search for the graves of their son, daughter, brother or sister.

1984 -
In the USA, the "Deficit Reduction Act" made it necessary for investments with tax shelter provisions to be registered with the Securities and Exchange Comission. As such registration can be a costly procedure, this lessened the number of such investments offered and reduced the number of private placements of capital.

Private placement of capital removes capital from the banking system and reduces the degree of political control exerted on it. Tax sheltering investments further decrease the base of capital in the banking-government area of enterprise - reducing the prime assets of the banks involved, and, decreasing the tax base on which government assets (ie treasury bills) are dependent. Too much of a decrease in these areas aggravates the maintenance of reserve levels maintained in the banks. If the world capitalism base requires this degree of "fine-tuning", it suggests that the system is endangered.

1984 - During this year and earlier,
China sells arms to Iran and Iraq to raise money for other international purchases.
The Chinese supply their own troops in the Vietnam border with old weapons while newer and more advanced versions to foreign countries. When a controversy arises over the shipment of Chinese missiles to Iran, Yang Shangkun, vice-chairman of the Military Commission and foreign minister Deng Xioping meet. When Deng says, "We must stop selling these missiles and arms," Yang replies, "This business brings the Chinese Armed Forces $1.8 billion a year. So as soon as you give me that money, I'll stop."

1984 - During the year,
Yigal Amin, a Yemenite Israeli, completes his elementary school education at the orthodox Wolfson school (associated with the conservative Agudat Israel movement) and leaves home for 5 years of study at Hayishuv Hahadash, a Lithuanian ortodox high school north of Tel Aviv. He will be the only Yemenite student.

While there, Yigal will distinguish himself as a passionate student of the Torah, the first 5 books of the Old Testament. His teachers will remember him as very serious and obsessive in his devotion to studying. Fellow students would remember him as having a remarkable memory - with which he recounted the ancient Hebrew texts flawlessly. Yigal had become imprinted with the Jewish idolatry of the rational literal interpretation of human script and ethnic history.

1984 - On April 9,
The First Asteroid Explosion seen in modern times was observed by the pilot of a Japanese cargo plane over the Pacific Ocean about 400 miles east of Tokyo, Japan. The round ball-shaped cloud rapidly expanded and looked as if it were a nuclear detonation, only without a fireball or lightning, which are usually associated with nuclear explosions. The mushroom cloud grew to 200 miles in diameter, rising from 14,000 to 60,000 feet in only 2 minutes. Following the episode, an aircraft was sent into the cloud to collect dust samples, which turned out to be nonradioactive. In addition, undersea instruments located near Wake Island, close to the mushroom cloud site, failed to detect an undersea nuclear explosion.

1984 - In April,
REX-84 Bravo, an American "National Security Decision Directive 52", was a blueprint for the military subversion of the United States.
George Bush, Edwin Meese, Louis Guiffrida, Oliver North and other Federal Emergency Manpower Agency (FEMA) personnel drafted the plan which was to become operational with the President's declaration of a state of national emergency concurrent with a mythical U.S. military invasion of an unspecified Central American country, likely Nicaragua.

REX-84 Bravo was to test the FEMA's readiness to become "emergency czar" in the event of a national emergency, such as a nuclear war or an American invasion of a foreign country. The FEMA was to act as a buffer between the President and civilian agencies and would have substantial authority in appointing military commanders and running state and local governments. In addition, it would have the authority to place suspected "aliens" (political opposition) into concentration camps and seize their property. In other words, a military coup directed by the President.

The first show of force in Honduras at his time was intended to provide the "national emergency" condition required to test the FEMA's ability to arrest 400,000 undocumented Central American aliens in the USA and to distribute tons of small arms to "state defense forces" in readiness for a possible invasion. More specifically, the plan was to test the FEMA's readiness to assume authority over the Department of Defense, the National Guard in all 50 states, and a number of state defense forces to be established by state legislatures. The military would then be "deputized" thereby defeating the federal law forbidding military involvement in domestic law enforcement. Ronald Reagan, while Governor of the state of California had adopted a similar plan under the direction of Edwin Meese, who would later rise to the position of USA Attorney General, and Louis Giffrida, the FEMA director in 1984. Then Attorney General William French Smith learned of the plan in time to stall it. He would leave the administration later and the plan would be revived.

1984 -
A British study on Police-Public Perceptions revealed the following:

The police believed people liked them because of their rapid response, improved clearance rates, state-of-the-art technology, their professionalism, and, above all, the ability of the police to control crime. In reality, these factors meant little to the public, according to their responses. Asked why they liked the police, the public replied by saying that it was the positive human elements of their encounter with the police which they liked.

They liked police who stopped and talked to them, who took the time to listen to their problems, who went out of their way to help those who could not care for themselves. People were obviously looking beyond the uniform and technology and were looking for the human being within - the human being who had often being de-spiritualized by institutional training geared more to dissociation than to association. The public wanted a "social" worker; they usually got a technician.

1984 -
Research on Psychosocial Stress and Cancer yields a number of results which provide a basis for social programs and educational foci for prevention of cancers. some of these are as follows:

"(3) The notion that cancer might in some way be related to stress or emotional factors is as old as the history of recorded medicine.

(10) The high stress high-loneliness group had the lowest natural 'killer cell' activity with the reverse being true for the low stress low-loneliness cohort. ... Interferons, one of the basic defenses against viral infections, are ... suppressed under conditions of emotional stress.

(13) As one descends the phylogenetic scale and examines lower (simpler) forms of life, it becomes apparent that the incidence of cancer decreases progressively. Conversely, the ability of the organism to regenerate tissues, organs, or even parts of the body increases proportionately. ... (Humans) is unique in that (they) respond not only to actual danger but also its anticipation due to complex cognitive processes or symbolic signals. Suchthreats, or the anticipation of noxious stimuli, may elicit responses of far greater magnitude and duration than the actual injury itself.

(14) ... stress reducing lifestyles and positive emotions, all of which provide a sense of control, offer protection (against disease).

(17) Many times it is much more important (for the good physician) to know what kind of patient has the disease than what kind of disease the patient has.

(44) ... effective coping has a striking impact on both tumor development and on immune system-related hormonal changes which can be expected to influence tumor growth. The fundamental finding in these studies is that it is not exposure to a stressor per se but the ability to cope with it effectively which is most likely to influence (tumor change).

(94) Whether a disease state is manifested following the introduction of a pathogen depends upon the integrity of the immune system. This will depend upon such factors as age and genetically determined vulnerability.

(95) ... phagocytic activity (to kill viral, bacterial and fungal microorganisms) was diminished during phases of emotional excitement (ie. hate, vengeance, lust/passion) ....

(97) Allergy or hypersensitivity constitute a significant health problem since 15 to 20% of the population experiences at least one form of allergic disorder and it is commonly held that this form of hypersensitivity may be influenced by psychological factors. ... Bronchial asthma has long been considered to be associated with family conflicts, dependency states and heightened emotional arousal.

(101) Rather than a single entity, cancer actually represents a large heterogeneous group of diseases characterized by the uncontrollable proliferation of cells. In order for cancer to develop, essentially two changes must occur. First, normal cells must be transformed to malignant ones, as a result of genetic coding, spontaneous mutation, or exposure to a carcinogen. Secondly, there must be a failure of the host's defenses against this cellular proliferation.

(103) ... coping styles. Increased survival times for various forms of cancer have been observed among cancer patients who were able to express anger and hostility openly. Poor prognoses were noted among patients who maintained destructive interpersonal relationships and who had a history of alienation from others. Reactions to the disease itself may be an important indicator of prognoses, since it has been observed that denial and a sense of being physically unable to fight the disease characterize patients with short survival times. ... The extent to which stressors exert a significant influence may depend upon the coping style of an individual and the resources or social supports available. ... stressors are conceived of as a series of additive changes rather than events which can be ranked as positive or negative by the individual. ...

(127) Neurochemical consequences of stressors, ... are dependent upon prior experience [and pre-learned coping abilities]. In particular, exposure to uncontrollable stressors ... increases [awareness and reactivity] vulnerability to subsequent stressors so that relatively mild aversive stimulation will come to provoke [influence] reductions of brain NE (norepinephrine) [which normally inhibit the release of activating hormones] ... predisposing (humans) to exaggerated [high-activity] neurochemical responses upon re-exposure to stressors, or to the cues with which they are associated. ... immunological changes associated with stressors ... are similarly influenced by conditioning or sensitization processes.

(163) The way in which the person copes may effect exposure to carcinogenic stimuli ... smoking ... drinking ... [sexual promiscuity] .... Furthermore, the person's [degree of] physiological response [inhibited - normal - exaggerated] may enhance the effects of an existing carcinogen.

(174) ... an individual's adequacy as an adult functioning effectively in accordance with the expectations of society is measured by many socially-developed criteria, that incorporation of these criteria influences the individual's self-perceptions and coping capacity, and that a diagnosis of cancer may heighten the individual's vulnerability to psychosocial stress because at least two other measures (work and wellness) - and, often, a third (persoanl maney management) - may come into question and affect the course of the patient's adjustment to work, to a medical regimen, and to life itself.

(183) A common attitude encountered in the hospital committees was denial by some physician-members that the patient's work life in any way was related to the patient's mode of coping with the diagnosis and or that work had any impact on him and his dependents.

(188) A more common and serious work problem arose from the overt attitudes and behaviours of others encountered in the workplace: dismissal ... transfer to other, less desirable, shifts or locations ... no salary increases ... termination of group health and/or life insurance ... demotion ....

Sometimes interacting with these gross discriminatory acts, and sometimes totally unrelated to them, were hostile actions and statements of others in the work environment. ... A second source of psychosocial stress was the generally inadvertant ot thoughtfully 'thoughtless' response of physicians to a query by a potentialemployer or insurance carrier.

(219) Individuals who in the past have experienced a variety of environments either by moving among cultural groups or who belong to cultural groups which exist in a rapidly changing environment will have modified their knowledge based upon these personal and group experiences.. These experiences usually take the form of discovering that existing behaviour prescriptions do not achieve the desired positive results, or that additional alternatives exist. A search for new behaviour prescriptions is carried out and the successful ones are incorporated into the knowledge base.

(255) Emergent Themes ...

1. ... cancer patients have difficulty in expressing emotions, or even feeling them.

2. ...(a number of factors) predispose some individuals to develop cancer or to progress through the stages more quickly.

3. Recent controlled studies support many earlier ... clinical impressions.

4. ... Knowing one has cancer (does not) lead to mediated findings.

5. ... personality traits or long-standing characteristics of persons who develop cancer or have a less favourable course include niceness, industriousness, perfectionism, sociability, conventionality, and more rigid controls of defensiveness.

6. Underlying attitudes or tendencies of helplessness/hopelessness and of giving up rather than fighting are characteristic of persons with a more favourable course of cancer.

7. The existence and number of past or recent events appears less important than how these were cognitively, emotionally, or behaviourally dealt with.

Over the next 10 years no dramatic new nor any contradictory findings would be determined. Meanwhile, in North American institutional health care and educational systems virtually NONE of the above factors would be utilized to provide more compassionate, empathetic, preventative, care. Only some types of alternative privately funded sources of medical and therapeutic service would seek to empower their patients with coping skills which could save their lives (and their earning capacity) and save their government billions of dollars in health care cost.

All cultures have choices for responding to problems: avoidance, denial, and belittlement; spiritually-derived self-empowerment and empathic support of others; materially-derived submission to human authority together with the attendant expression of withdrawal, intolerance, anger, fear, depression, anxiety, pride. Which human cultures have followed which pattern of choices?

1984 - Between April, 1984 and August, 1985,
Thyroid Hormone Poisoning would be the diagnosis for 121 people who had eaten improperly trimmed meat.
Symptoms of the thyrotoxicosis included elevated blood pressure, nervousness and hyperactivity, sudden weight loss, elevated body temperature, and (occasionally) bulging eyes.

Diagnosed in Minnesota, South Dakota and Iowa, all victims had eaten ground beef made from neck trimmings from a single slaughter plant. The implicated meat was confirmed as the source of the extraneous thyroid when laboratory analysis showed bovine thyroid tissue in the ground beef, and when volunteers developed prompt increases in blood thyroid levels after eating some of the product.

Hormones are not influenced by cooking heats to become less active in human systems.
While hormones usually transfer throughout the body extremely fast from endocrine glands by way of the circulation system, they can also be introduced through the digestive system and some will enter the system directly through the skin. Few more than a dozen human hormones were commonly known a decade ago; more than 40 are now known. Each has the capacity to change one or more body functions and emotional states within seconds. Hormones also exist in plants and a number of herbs are used for these reasons. Hormones from organ and other meats and from spices and herbs have long been used as aphrodisiacs. Unawareness of their source or presence and a reckless use of them can result in a danger to health and life. Careless processing of meats can also be more dangerous than usually recognized.

1984 -
An experiment begins in the Shatskiy Rise region of the Pacific Ocean seabed east of Japan to determine the degree of safety in burying nuclear radioactive waste in the ocean. A platform, 14 feet long by 8 feet high is lowered 5 km (3 miles) to the seabed carrying a plutonium reactor which is to be driven into the sediment. It is then intended to create heat comparable to 250 degrees fahrenheit, which, because of the depth, will not result in the water boiling. Sensors are expected to determine how much radiation will leak out into the surrounding water.

1984 - During the year,
A USA law Authorizes the Military to License Cameras used on American satellites.
This enables the military to limit the resolution and quality of the photos taken by "private" satellites and available to the public. The National Security Agency (NSA) - the secret arm of the Pentagon and the Executive Office - responsible for gathering electronic intelligence as well as protecting sensitive USA communications, effectively maintains certain information secret from the public, scientists, and industry which some criticize as general information. What the public is unaware of is that images of covert spaceperson bases and activities in the USA and elsewhere, covert USA military intelligence operations, and UFO activities are to be kept secret, or at least "clouded". By ensuring that high resolution photos are the domain only of the military satellites, the NSA remains confident that any "suggestive" photos will be poor enough in quality to easily discredit with retained "experts" who are willing to intellectualize away anything in the interest of national security and money.

1984 -
Beginning by October, Armaments sales to Iraq begin to multiply:

   a) France         sells $5.0 billion in planes, missiles and other arms;
   b) Egypt          sells 100 airplanes and dozens of missile systems;
   c) Italy          sells $370 million in planes, helicopters & missile systems;
   d) Brazil         sells $2.7 billion in troop carriers, missiles, enriched uranium;
   e) Belgium        sells $900 million in arms expertise and manufacturing equipment;
   f) Czechoslovakia sells  $25 million worth of army vehicles;
   g) West Germany   sells $675 million in strategic equipment;
   h) Great Britain provides at least $30 million in military equipment;

   i) Canada         sells  $25 million of jet engines and artillery shells;
   j) The USA        sells $750 million in military technology including SCUD changes;
   k) South Africa   sells million of dollars in military trucks;
   l) Spain          sells 80 helicopters and 200 military vehicles;
   m) Jordon         sells 20 jet aircraft and 280 artillery pieces;
   n) Kuwait         sells 50 tanks.

All of the above orders are completed by the end of 1988.
More than 200 companies from 21 Western nations help Iraq build chemical weapons.
Many countries allowed legal sales of armaments to Iraq despite their own laws banning the sale to Iraq of "lethal weapons", "weapons", "military sales" during the Iran-Iraq war of 1980 - 1988. These included West Germany, Great Britain, Canada, the USA, and others. Black market arms transactions would only account for 5% of the arms stockpile.

In addition to the above and during the same period armament sales to Iraq originate from the following:

   a) U.S.S.R.:   4450 tanks, 355 warplanes, 80 SCUD launchers, 5438 field missiles;
   b) China :     1500 tanks, 650 trucks, 72 anti-ship missiles, 720 artillery;
   c) East Germany: 50 tanks;
   d) Poland :     400 tanks, 200 field missiles, ammunition, rifles;
   e) Libya :      400 armoured vehicles;
   f) Austria:     200 artillery;
   g) Rumania:     150 tanks.

1984 - During the year,
Two Chinese astronauts are lost in space during an unpublicised space mission.
Lee Chu-in, 37, and Hu Shengli, 36, went for a space walk and got separated from the space vehicle.
The tethers connecting them to the capsule became entangled and broke, leaving them in orbit until April 9, 1994. Other astronauts on the secret mission tried in vain to rescue their comrades but were forced to abandon the effort because of a fuel shortage. The Chinese tried to recover the bodies in missions in 1986 and 1989 without success. No admission of the flight or the mishap was made until 1992.

1984 - During the year,
John Andreadis, of New York ... Hindu ... Sanatan Dharma ... an explanation of the eternal immutable laws of the universe .... studied religion from an early age ... practised yoga ... studied Sanskrit and physics ... Frederick Von Mierers .. renowned Hindu astrologer ... unity between science and religion.

(John) knew that the I AM reincarnates - our essence but not our personalities ....

Excerpts of Arcturian philosophy ?

(167-)
The earth and her solar system are reaching the end of a grand cycle of the ages. This is much greater that the cycle of 24,000 years ... and its culmination will result in the graduation of countless souls into the permanent awareness of the great I AM. ...

The Aquarian constellation represents the powerful, spiritually charged waves of electromagnetic and spiritual energies bombarding the earth and transforming the vibrations of all things moving, living, breathing, or merely sitting upon her. All energy is being transmuted to a higher frequency. Therefore, only souls who are able to stand these new energies will be able to remain on the planet as we pass into the year 2000.

... we must learn to balance the emotional energies and transcend duality in our minds. ...

all thoughts of anger, jealousy, irritation, deceit, fear and other negative emotions ... repeated indulgence ... habits ... keep our souls earthbound in a self-created ego prison with bars molded out of thoughts. Any limitations that we perceive are only in our minds. Change your thought and you change your life. This is the Great Law. ..

You are that which watches your thoughts pass through your mind.
You are I AM, the eternal uncreated silent watcher. ...

By identifying with our thoughts, which are none other than qualified vibrations of life energy, we become attached to a particular reality pattern. But remember: First I AM, then I act. Your attention is your divine director. Let it be free. By freeing our attention from limitation we are able to attune to any thought vibration that we desire, and that will become our outer reality. ...

The secrets of energy are revealed in Aquarius, and mankind will make tremendous strides forward in this field. ... Aquarius reveals our future 2,000 years, just as we are leaving the Piscean age after 2,000 years. ...

All souls in the beginning acted in harmony with the Divine Will and never became attached to what they thought. They simply experienced their thoughts as a Divine Play. But as time progressed, many souls became attached to their Play and became entrapped in various systems of thought vibrations which ultimately evolved into planets, stars, solar systems ... All of this occurred in the mind of God, the Supreme Cosmic Dreamer.

Though many space beings, who are only souls like us that inhabit thought-worlds, actually incarnate here in the normal fashion, some walk into full-grown bodies, others are beamed down from space-ships, which are only thought-ships that materialize as they enter into this dimension, and still others come here by mental projection. The highest are the ascended Masters who are free from all limitation and can be anywhere they like in an instant. These Great Ones merge into omnipresence and emerge wherever they like through the simplest technique of identification. ... this is the destiny of every soul everywhere, to be like Jesus, the great Yogi-Christs of India, and the ascended Masters, all of whom exhibit the same awareness through identification with the omnipresent I AM consciousness.

No one is from this planet.
Everyone is from God, or consciousness. ... Creation is essentially the union of intelligence with substance. ... in the beginning was the Word and the Word was with God, and the Word was God. The Word is the sacred Aum vibration. ... Aum is both the structure of creation and the intelligent force guiding creation, and this is the basis of awareness. .... Whatever you think, you attract and become.

Thought is the basis of creation.
Thus the mass consciousness determined by the sum total of all thoughts experienced by all the souls on a particular planet determines the mass karma of that planet and that race. This also applies to nations, religions, cities, families or groups of any kind.

That is the crisis that we face on earth.
Our planet receives its life from the cosmic Source through certain energy grids.
It is like a radio. However, the mass karma of humanity is such that we create so much discord that the pattern which sustains this planet is being disintegrated by our disruptive energies. Just as when there is static on the radio, we cannot bring in a station, so do our thoughts create enough static to drown the energy received from the Source. This does not mean that the initial energy is not being sent, but it is being absorbed by discord.

1984 - By October,
"The Satellite Survivability Report" was completed by the USA National Security Telecommunications Advisory Committee (NSTAC). For years the Pentagon had been studying how to network the common carrier's facilities. Politically and economically, capitalist centralization of ownership of newspapers, radio and television stations had been allowed and encouraged. Most small facilities had been acquired by larger ones and the news stories broadcast at the upper powerful levels became the copy for smaller editions and broadcasts. A series of internal Pentagon documents had been prepared to answer the still larger scale questions of the Defense Department.

Known as the "Satellite Survivability Report", it was the only detailed analysis to date of the vulnerabilities of the commercial satellite network. Begun with the intent of finding a way to protect the network from attack and to keep it intact for the Department of Defense, it would also become a blueprint for how to manipulate the public through an abuse of it. A major part of the report contained an analysis of how to make commercial satellites "interoperable" with Defense Department Systems. The report noted that the use of different frequencies made it difficult for the Pentagon to use commercial satellites, so it recommended ways of resolving these problems. This information plus the NSDD-145's demand that satellite operators tell the NSA how their satellites are controlled, would guarantee the military ample knowledge about operating commercial satellites.

1984 - By October,
"Sexual Offences Against Children: Report of the Committee on Sexual Offences Against Children and Youths", the first report of its kind undertaken and published in North America, was published by the Canadian Government Publishing Centre, Ottawa. Following 3 years of interviews and analysis, the survey of 1300 pages, found that more than one out of every two Canadian women, and more than one in threee Canadian men, had been subjected to some kind of sexual abuse as a child. It also found that Canadians of all ages reported about the same incidence of abuse, a strong indication that sexual abuse has been occurring there with about the same frequency since WW1. The Committee concluded that:

"Sexual offenses are committed so frequently, and against so many persons, that there is an evident and urgent need to afford victims greater protection than that now being provided."

In Great Britain, reports of child abuse would rise by 70% over the 6 years ending 1988 -
largely an indication of the increasing acceptability of both admitting to such victimization as well as to the acknowledgement of it and the consideration publicly that such behaviour was anti-social. Keith Bradbrook, an official of Britain's National Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Children, would estimate by 1988 that some 50,000 British children fall victim to sexual abuse each year, in a population of 50,000,000.

Many European nations consider sexual abuse of children anti-social yet treat it as a "health problem" rather than one of law enforcement. Accordingly, few charges are laid, fewer convictions are made, and, social awareness remains nil - as the status quo and lack of social and political leadership tend to reinforce the tendency by their actions of denial. 15,000 cases would be reported in West Germany in 1985. The Italian Association for the Prevention of Cruelty to Children would suggest that the same number of reports were made in their country. In Holland, where the Ministry of Health has established special bureaus staffed by pediatricians and social workers to treat the victims of sexual abuse, an average of 3,000 cases a year are recorded from among a population of 4 million children.

The result of these behaviours would eventually grow in recognition over the next decade to included the following:

   a) modeling by adults was adopted by the children, leading to -
   b) a frequent repetition by the grown child against his/her children;

   c) a low sense of self-esteem, plus
   d) a high tendency to rage and lust feelings, plus
   e) a high degree of defensiveness towards others, plus 
   f) a low trust level of others, plus
   g) a high quotient of toxic shame feelings, plus
   h) a high tendency toward the formation of rigid behaviour patterns,

   i) a difficulty in forming and sustaining positive relationships;

   j) a development of chronic attitudes of depression;

   k) a higher than healthy incidence of acting out behaviours;

   l) an increased likelihood of addictive behaviour dependency;

   m) a tendency towards co-dependent destructive relationships;

   n) a higher than average level of suicide.

These are the "benefits" which participants within a human-authority-based social system, which has used military training and war experiences to ritualize and traumatize, receive. Spiritually deadened leadership has effected events and behaviours adequate to the spiritual deadening of the general population. Slavery to state institutions and the maintenance of a social identity builds upon the continual suppression of or deception of the spiritual strength and identity of the individual. While such a society has the capacity to construct massive military and political power - is the price worth the reward?

1984 - During the year,
The National Security Decision Directive 145 (NSDD 145) was signed by USA Defense Secretary Casper Weinberger.
Drafted by Assistant Defense Secretary Donald C. Latham, a former NSA chief, the directive conveys the control of all phone systems, data transmissions, and satellite communications to the USA military during any event deemed by the President to be a national emergency.

NSDD-145 set up a steering committee of top-level administration officials.
Their job is to recommend ways to protect information that is unclassified but has been designated sensitive. Such information is held not only by government agencies but by private companies as well.

1984 - By November,
"The Philadelphia Experiment", an American movie produced by New World Pictures, has been released.
It depicts the experience of Carlos Miguel Allende (Carl Allen) who had written 2 similar letters to Morris K. Jessup in the fall of 1955 and January, 1956.

The letters described a Department of Defense experiment which had taken place in 1943, and which the government had "covered up". The story presented, was that a destroyer naval vessel had disappeared with its crew from one dock, only to appear within minutes at another dock elsewhere in the country. The ship was then made to disappear again from a Portsmouth dock and reappear at the original dock in Philadelphia within minutes. Half of the crew were reportedly left mentally disabled. Further, Allen or Allende, stated that there were 2 kinds of aliens from space: one had hostile intentions towards humans; one may have been assisting the human designers and testers of the apparati.

Allen, not receiving much attention from Jessup, then sent an annotated copy of Jessup's book, "The Case for the UFO" to the Office of Naval Research with the same declarations. Some junior officers there, contacted Jessup for his feedback and the similarity of the information in the letters he had received and the annotated copy of his book which the ONR had received led to the conclusion that at the least the authors knew one another. The "Varo Company" of Garland, Texas, thereafter ran a small printing.

In 1968, "New UFO Breakthrough" publication ran a special and dramatic story on the letters and book; other small UFO interest groups had carried the story in their publications in the interim. Allende did not seem to know of this interest and had certainly not benefited from it financially, so, in 1969, he had admitted to Jim and Carol Lorenzen, UFO researchers, that the book was "false ... the craziest pack of lies I ever wrote." It is not unusual for persons who have had a terrorizing traumatic experience to reach a perception, after years of rejection and denial by others, that the best way to cope with the memory is to try and set it aside and carry on with one's life, as best as one can, without further reference to it. In fact, this is the advice which many modern doctors tell their patients who have chronic symptoms for which the doctor lacks the expertise to properly diagnose and lacks the will and the knowledge to constructively treat. The Lorenzen's, already hardened sceptics, gave little thanks or attention to Allende who seemed to represent the most negative aspect of their research: hoaxers.

In 1974, Charles Berlitz had picked up on the uniqueness of the story and mentioned it in his bestseller, "The Bermuda Triangle". By this time Allende had become aware of the rising interest in his "Philadelphia" story and recanted his earlier confession as "a crazy pack of lies." With increasing government secrecy, intolerance of the scientific community towards the growing thousands who had seen UFOs (a willingness to discredit before even investigating or to rationalize into denial with somewhat unintelligent assumptions, and increasing paranoia about the intentions of government military and intelligence agencies (which had now been confirmed to have withheld information from the public in order to manipulate it - the public was becoming interested in any story which suggested conspiracy. Clearly, the "Philadelphia Experiment" did that. In 1979, William L. Moore and Charles Berlitz had co-authored a book, "The Philadelphia Experiment".

In 1980, Robert Goerman, a writer and neighbour of Allende's American parents in Springdale, Pennsylvania, interviewed the parents about their son. They believed that Carlos had lived in a world of fantasy and make-believe permanently since he was a child. He had written them letters bragging (they presumed) of his deceptions (or imaginative creativity) and his fantastic (or innovative) mind. Of course, for centuries, the parents, peers and relatives of persons later termed "geniuses" have frequently regarded such individuals as evil, crazy, childish, or, otherwise worthy of avoidance or penalty. None of this received much media exposure, the leaders of which were more interested in what would sell to a public that wanted to hear more of the science fiction fantasy which the movies and television had plied them with.

In the early 1980s, Carlos Allende, in financial distress and obviously not sharing in the rewards of the interest in his story, committed suicide in a Florida park. Rumour spread, in denial of Allende's own confession and the history and letters which Allende's parents had shown to Goerman: sinister government forces had murdered him. While sinister government forces had murdered individuals to maintain secrecy about certain projects, Allende was not one of them. With paranoia rising amongst military industry scandals and "Freedom of Information" exposures, "New World" went ahead and made the movie. The book publisher and the movie producers sensationalized the story enough to raise further public interest without becoming obvious fantasy. It would become another sliver of disinformation in the eye of the public.

This would not be the end of the issue.
By 1995, with acceptance of the reality of UFOs and spacebeings growing, with new UFO magazines and scandal story news journals and TV drama documentaries growing, "The Philadelphia Experiment" would be hot news again. With the popularity of the Berlitz books and the movie and increasing suspicions about the government's motives, many people would believe it.

1984 - By the end of the year,
William (Bill) S. English had been working in Crewe, Virginia for a time at a radio station and writing articles for the local newspaper. His second wife, who had divorced him when she learned that she was pregnant, had sought child support and been denied. English, whose original intent in moving to Virginia had been to evade the military and government agencies which seemed to want him dead, was becoming too relaxed in his outlook. A number of assassination attempts had been made on him since he had seen and read the Grudge/Blue Book #13 document. His relationships and family life had also been destroyed several times. Now he was becoming more socially outgoing, which was positive for him but not for his safety.

One night, while returning from his kitchen after getting a soft drink, he tripped on his shoelaces and fell. A barrage of automatic weapons fire burst through the front of the house which was located only 2 blocks from the local police department. Later estimates by the sheriff's department suggested that several thousand bullets had been fired through the front of the house. Unknown to the attackers, a concrete foundation wall about 3 feet high, had saved his life. English moved to Blackstone, Virginia.

In Blackstone, English went to work for George Walker, a local Angus cattle farmer.
After several months, an accident resulted in English having to take several months to recover.
Fortunately, Walker had insurance which covered the cost of the recovery. During that time, English again began writing articles for a local newspaper.

1984 - During the year,
The number of Christian Bibles, New Testaments and scriptural selections distributed throughout the world numbered over 300 million. Of those it was estimated that as many as 28 million new adherents to Christianity would be generated after a period of study, that is, an average of 78,000 each day for a year by 1987.

Huge Christian congregations are forming in some countries.
In Santiago, Chile, Pastor J. Vasquez leads a church of more than 100,000.
In Guatemala, more than 1.5 million people, that is, 1/4th of the citizens, are now evangelical adherents.
In South Korea, Pastor Yonggi Cho preaches 7 services each Sunday to a total of about 500,000 participants.
In mainland China, following persecution for decades, there are now an estimated 50 to 75 million Christian adherents.

Yet there is inconsistency in the nature of the "Way of Life" being preached such that it is impossible to determine the average level of awareness, spiritual skill-building and aggressiveness of approach. Indeed, it is impossible to provide any suggestion as to where in the continuum of instruction between patterned co-dependency and acquired spiritual awareness the adherents are receiving instruction. The former encourages unrealistic hope and inaction while the latter encourages realistic assessment and response. How much of what do we have?

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1985 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

Cocoon; Commando; Right to Kill; Rocky IV; A View to Kill; Volunteers; Police Academy 2: Their First Assignment; Striker's Mountain; Test of Love; The Emerald Forest; The Peanut Butter Solution; Kiss of the Spiderwoman; Mad Max Beyond Thunderdome; Subway; Fraternity Vacation; The Undergrads; The Blue Yonder; Crimewave; Fright Night; The Coca-Cola Kid; Lost in America; Brewster's Millions; King Solomon's Mines; Pale Rider; Legend; Explorers; The Holcroft Covenant; Once Bitten; Rambo: First Blood; Back to the Future.

General News :

Consumer Price Index: 322.2

Underground FEDERATION bases are established at or near east of Carlsbad, New Mexico (AEC Waste Isolation and weapons manufacturing) and in southeast Arizona.

1985 - In January,
The United States of Europe, a proposed confederation of European states with a common economic, political and defense union - was supported in a poll by 52% of Europeans, as described in a report from Brussels.

1985 -
In Hitachi's "IC Memories Data Book", soft electronic errors - "transitory failures in which normal memory operation can be recovered by reprogramming data" are explained as follows:

Soft errors are caused by alpha particles emitted from Uranium and Thorium contained in the packaging materials. When memory chips are exposed to alpha particles, many electron-hole pairs are induced in the Si substrate, causing memory data reversion.

Consider the possible influence on military/aerospace electronics by fallout, etc.

1985 -
The CDC released its "Project SENIC" (Study on the Efficacy of Nosocomial [Hospital] Infection Control) report.
The result of a 10-year, 338 hospital survey, it divided most (hospital-induced) infections into 4 categories:

   o  About 42% are urinary tract infections, mainly from contaminated urethral catheters.
   o  About 24% are surgical wound infections in the stomach and intestines.
   o  About 10% are pulmonary infections, particularly in patients on ventilators 
                                    who contract pneumonia from gram-negative bacteria.
   o  About 5% involve septicemia associated with intravenous catheters.

Nosocomial infections can occur on any unit, of course, but they're more likely to occur in high-risk areas, such as intensive care units, burn units, or surgical units ...

All infectious microorganisms can be transmitted through the air as well as through contaminated equipment or solutions, including contaminated intravenous fluids and even disinfectants.

But the most common way all nosocomial infections are transmitted remains by direct contact ... between patients or between patients and health care personnel.

Robert Haley, PhD, who directed the SENIC Project would state:

"The problem isn't that catheters and ventilator tubes are improperly sterilized.
Usually the germs are introduced to the equipment by the nurses' and doctors' hands.
A nurse may have contact with 10 patients 200 to 1,000 times a day, and its impossible for her to wash her hands after each contact."

1985 - During the year,
"Chinese Tonic Herbs" by Ron Teeguarden would be published.

It would be the first English-language book and manual written about the 2500+ year practice of Taoist herbal health preservation. Teeguarden had been fortunate to meet Master Sung Jin Park while the latter was considering returning to Korea. Master Sung had been coached by Moo San Do Sha, a Korean master of the art who was over 85 years of age when they met. In an effort to raise money to buy a plot of sacred land, Master Sung had arrived in California in 1973 in hopes of teaching 10 people to teach the herbal art in America. After three years of searching without success, Master Sung and Ron Teeguarden met.

A constructive symbiotic relationship developed between the two men with Teeguarden teaching Master Sung the English language and encouraging him to teach seminars from the former's Acupressure Workshop holistic health center. Moo San Do Sha had become impatient in the interim, with no good news from Master Sung, and he had himself gone into Seoul and offered a class in Superior Herbalism with some success. After Master Sung and Teeguarden had been together for a year, the former received word from Moo San that the money had been raised, the property had been purchased and that there was no longer a need for Master Sung to try and raise the monies in the USA. In 1977, Master Sung Jin Park returned home. In the interim years, Teeguarden had assembled the book together and found a printer.

The Taoist reverence for Nature as the only true healer and the necessity for anyone who wished such benefits to "learn the secrets of Nature and Life" was expanded on. The ever-changing reality of nature is contrasted with Rigidity which is contrary to the Taoist "Way." As expressions of this "Way" or lifestyle one may include involvement in the practices of yoga, Tai Chi Chuan, meditation, breathing exercises, a minor consumption of meat and starches, and, tonic herbalism. Each practice demands a development of skills of awareness, appreciation, self-control and self-direction, and, flexibility of movement and perception.

The concept of cyclical processes in nature is regarded as a fundamental life principle.
It enables one to cope with negative stress experiences and disappointments with a faith in the eventual expression of positive opportunities and successes. This restricts human preoccupation with negative and destructive emotions which serve to weaken one's health, close one's mind, and turn one from the Way. The dynamic which binds reverence for reality with an awareness of cyclical experience is considered to be that of balance.

Without balance, Teeguarden notes, virtually all of the mistakes of humans takes place.
Balance in life requires awareness without confusion, sensitivity without devotion, intuition without expectation, participation without reaction: an avoidance of extremes. Teeguarden goes on to describe more of the principles underlying the practice of tonic herbalism including the law of Yin and Yang, the life energy - Ch'i, the 5 elemental classifications of energies, the 8 manners in which herbs can be used, the 7 types of tonics, the energy organ-meridian system (also used in acupuncture, acupressure and balancing forms of health enhancement, the 3 foundations of healthful existence. A discussion and description of the more popularly used herbs is given followed by recipes, principles for combining, and useful appendices.

Teeguarden cautions the North American reader that unlike their trained expectations, these tonics are "used to promote internal and external harmony," and not to "cure" disease. Other points to note include these:

   1.  Tonics should be avoided when one has a viral illness;
   2.  Certain tonics are suited to specific seasons or weather;
   3.  Other tonics are best utilized according to one's energy use;
   4.  Tonics will not excuse destructive habits or relationships;
   5.  A beneficial lifestyle must accompany beneficial herb use. 

With the increasing size of population, increasing density of population, increasing intensity of cultivation of the land, massive deforestation, increasing erosion, and increasing use of these herbs in the countries of origin, some varieties, especially the more potent, are becoming rare and high in cost. Both Wild Manchurian and Korean Ginseng plants may grow to reach an age of 200 years - their time of finest quality, with a price of up to (1985) USA $10,000 an ounce. Knowing which other varieties can still provide you with good benefits for a markedly lower cost is valuable information which Teeguarden provides.

While herbs may be prepared, and sometimes must be prepared, in one of a variety of ways, Teeguarden provides the reader with the information which differentiates effectiveness from uselessness. For the typical modern human, any consideration beyond simply swallowing (pills or fluids), pushing a button on a dispenser, or injecting a substance - requires a new awareness - which Teeguarden offers. This includes such (obvious to herbalists, ancient doctors, and wise persons (witches)) techniques as never cooking herbs in a metal pot nor cutting them with a metal knife. Enamel, glass, or porcelain pots are advised; double-boilers are best.

For the best use of an herb, the reason for its use, the season, the health of the person involved, availability, cost, and strength are just a few considerations. One must learn to be aware and flexible in one's thinking if one desires the health and longevity which is possible. Li Ch'ing Yuen was confirmed as having lived for 252 years when he died in 1930.

Chinese Herbs are available with such properties as

• stabilization of blood sugar,
• bactericidal action,
• mild laxative,
• nerve sedative,
• energy stimulant,
• anti-radiation protection,
• fertility enhancer,
• detoxifier,
• rejuvenator,
• anti-tumor activity,
• spiritually strengthener,
• organ toning,
• dispersion of energy blocks,
• antifungal and antiviral agents,
• strengthener,
• ability to raise one's pain threshold,
• removal of feelings of depression, anger, and unhappiness,
• ... and other benefits.

It's all a matter of whether YOU as an individual, or the culture surrounding you, want good health before material luxury.

1985 - In the spring,
Gary Kinder, while in Switzerland for 2 months, met Eduard Meier a number of times.
Meier was now rarely seen anywhere but on the sofa in his farmhouse parlour in front of the television. Years had passed since Meier had left the farm for a rendezvous with his Pleiadian contact, though they still spoke to him by telepathy and sometimes met him in his office. People still came to visit him but he rarely spoke with anyone. Others at the farm usually intercepted the visitors and talked with them about Meier's experiences and showed them photographs from several large albums.

When Gary had met Meier a year earlier, he had seen a tired man with a deeply lined face who walked with a shuffle. His bright green eyes, described by others as playful were then weary. The beard he had begun to grow in the summer of 1978 was now curly and half gray, and nearly fell to his waist. Only 47, he looked to be at least 20 years older. People at the farm told Gary that Meier rarely slept, he had ghost pains in his missing arm, and he saw well only out of one eye.

1985 - In June,
USA Defense Secretary Weinberger made official a requirement for all satellites launched after 1990 to have elaborate and costly protective (scrambling) systems if they were carrying unclassified government data traffic as routine as Pentagon supply information and payroll data. The Pentagon had originally issued the order.

While the Pentagon insisted later that the order was a voluntary policy, its more than a billion dollar annual leasing of commercial satellite channels to those who complied provided a powerful incentive for business to cooperate. Many industry executives opposed the policy believing that it was neither practical nor necessary. The policy does not directly affect the data which travels over satellite channels, but it does make the NSA privy to vital information about the signals needed to operate a satellite. With this information, control of any satellite could be taken over.

Justification for the added protection stems from such concerns as an unhappy employee using equipment worth a few thousand dollars interfering with a satellite's control signals and disabling or even wiping out a hundred-million-dollar satellite carrying government information. Consideration to protect the satellites from destruction by laser rays or other means were not addressed; ransom being more the concern than real loss. Industry executives were sceptical.

According to a 1983 study made at the request of the Pentagon, the protection demanded by the NSA could add as much as $3 million to the price of a satellite and $1 million more to annual operating costs. Clearly, such a policy provides extra work for military-based aerospace companies and military-based electronics manufacturers.

1985 - In the July issue of "Country Guide",
Dave Wilkins provided an overview of the Growth Hormones potential contribution and influence on the livestock business:

"VIRTUALLY every major livestock drug manufacturer in North America is developing, or at least considering, an animal growth hormone product. In fact, some companies have devoted a major chunk of research budgets to this area. The reason is simple: the first to hit the market could really make a bundle. ....

The growth hormone "somatotropin" is produced naturally in all animals, but differs slightly from one species to the next. ... Pure somatotropins have been around for years, but were far too costly to use routinely. With recombinant DNA (gene splicing) technology, however, somototropins can now be produced more cheaply in large volume.

Extra growth hormone appears to boost feed conversion ... so far, no harmful effects have been observed in treated cattle. ... a 40% improvement (in milk production) ....

One big unknown: what are the long-term effects on dairy cattle (and humans which drink their milk and eat their beef)? ... says John Burton, a researcher and nutritionist at the University of Guelph: 'We don't know whether long-term reproductive problems will develop' ...

Burton adds that "thyroxine", a hormone produced in the thyroid gland, was tested a number of years ago as a milk stimulator in dairy cattle. It worked, but had a serious side-effect. It cranked up the animals' whole metabolic system and led to 'burnout' which greatly reduced production in the later part of lactation.

... Growth hormone in mature dairy cattle isn't used for growth simply because the cow is full-grown. But in beef cattle, hogs and poultry that are still growing, the hormone improves gains and feed efficiency. Beef cattle may gain 10% to 20% more when injected with growth hormone. U.S. researchers estimate the cost of daily injections in dairy cows at 25 cents."

1985 - During July,
David Parnas, a 20-year veteran in computer science with 13 years experience developing military software, resigns from the Strategic Defense Initiative (SDI) panel. Some of his comments are as follows:

"When I was first called up, I was asked if I would like to save the world from nuclear devastation. It's hard to turn that down. ...

There's nothing less productive than over-funded research. The temptation to go ahead regardless of the evidence and just for the money is tremendous. It's a lot like prostitution.

What disturbs me most is that when I said it wasn't going to work, my colleagues said, 'well we know that, but the money is there, so let's spend it. ...

Software systems are discrete state systems that do not have the repetitive structure found in computer circuitry. There's seldom a good reason to construct software with highly repetitive structures. Traditional engineering mathematics cannot verify their behaviour."

Parnas declared that even in highly structured systems, surprises and unreliability occur because the human mind can't comprehend the myriad of conditions that arise as a result of the vast system's interaction. In a report, Parnas outlined the characteristics of the "Battle Management Software" as follows:

"
• The system must identify, track, and direct weapons towards targets.
  It must also distinguish targets from decoys, the characteristics of which are not known.

• Computing must be done by a network of computers connected to sensors, weapons and each other by channels whose behaviour at the time it is working can't be predicted because of the unpredictability of the enemy.

• It is impossible to test the system under realistic conditions prior to its use.

• Debugging time will be unrealistically short - 30 minutes, the estimated duration of an attack.

• Like many other military programs, there are absolute real-time deadlines for computation. all dependent upon target characteristics. Resources for computation cannot be predicted in advance.

• The weapons systems will include a large variety of sensors and weapons, that require a large and complex system, with characteristics which will be variable for years after deployment."

Parnas concluded:
"I am a modest man. I believe that I have as sound and broad an understanding of software engineering as anyone I know. If you gave me the job of building the system and all the resources I wanted, I couldn't do it. I don't expect 20 years of research to change that fact."

"Overcoming the complexity of the system by using Artificial Intelligence is not the answer. It is far too dangerous and unreliable."

1985 - By late July,
Dr. Bernard Etkin, an aeronautical engineer with more than 40 years of experience researching aircraft structure, satellites, re-entry vehicles and aerosonics, and who has served as a consultant to both the USA and Canadian government - replied to Parnas' assertions:

"I find Parnas' statements credible. ...

People who think they can build a defense that no one else is able to get around or through are not being realistic. The enemy can eventually find a way to disable or overwhelm you.

With SDI, much depends on the functions of satellites and sophisticated communications equipment to control lasers and particle beams to deliver the lethal punch.

The point is, .001 degree of inaccuracy would be enough disturbance to nullify the entire operation. Software's susceptibility to error would make it easy to destroy the effect. ...

I hate to say it but subconsciously (contractors) block out the realities.
Professionals faced with the potential for great sums of research money, which everyone sees from all of this, become unrealistic about what can be done."

Etkin predicts SDI will go ahead as planned and that Parnas will simply be replaced. But every year the USA military will have to reassess the problems:

"They may actually stop it. By that time the involvement will have gained momentum. Jobs will be on the line and there'll be a vested interest from industry to see that it continues."

1985 - By August,
Dr. J.B. Moore of the University of Waterloo, in Ontario, Canada, had stated regarding the USA "Star Wars" SDI.
He noted that the unreliability of (all) software is the major dilemma.
As a simplification of the problem, he offered the following:

"At some unknown time, an unpredictable number of objects will appear above the Earth's surface, moving at great speed. Sensory devices, some of which will not be working, will detect these objects.

Some of the objects are ours; leave them alone.
Destroy all of the other ones, using the available devices.
If it appears that some of the devices are not working, use the others to destroy the remaining objects.
If you fall behind, catch up.
At all costs, don't let anything through."

He concluded that there is no way that software coding by humans can be absolutely dependable. He noted that commercial systems are much simpler and have the advantage of being able to be volume tested with real information while operated with a working parallel system. Even then, serious software errors still occur. The proposed SDI software could be checked in a modular fashion; an integrated test would be much more difficult or even impossible. The susceptibility of a space-based defence system to compromise was further noted by the fact that its stable positioning in Earth orbit would make it a predictable target for an enemy.

What was not mentioned in the critiques during this year is that the Soviet Union already has the proven ability to destroy enemy satellites with their own killer satellites and are expected to soon have an Earth-based system of destruction by particle-beam or high-energy laser. Neither was it mentioned that Sunspot Maximums, which occur every 11 years, and sudden and erratic occurrences of Solar Subflares, which can happen anytime, could each disable satellite systems and influence complex electronics systems to become confused in operation and either activate incorrectly, not activate as designed, or, be destroyed. While humans have focused on building ever more electronically sophisticated weapons of self-destruction, they still are largely unaware of the influences of subtle solar activities capable of influencing the weather of the Earth, the geomagnetic fields and the operation of electrical and electronic systems. Choices - humans have choices.

1985 - By September,
The USA NSA (National Security Agency) using authority granted to it by NSDD-145 (National Security Decision Directive) - investigated the computer program that was used in local and federal elections in 1984 in America to count more than a third of all the votes. While probing the computer's vulnerability to outside manipulation, the NSA obtained detailed knowledge of the program. Both Congressmen and House Representatives criticized the expansion of military powers into areas which were not believed to be a matter of national security. The analysis would enable agents of the FEMA (Federal Emergency Manpower Agency) of which George Bush had been a major contributor between 1982 and 1986, to engineer the election of George Bush to the Presidency.

1985 - On September 19,
Mexico City, Mexico experienced an 8.1 earthquake.
The large subduction zone earthquake beneath the coast Michoacan region of Mexico caused extraordinary damage in Mexico City, 220 miles (350 km) away from the epicentre. In one instance, the shaking force resulted in a skyscraper literally falling flat on its back. Regions in between were relatively unscathed. The damage was attributed to a long period of shaking combined with amplification effects associated with the thick silt deposits from an old lake bed beneath the city centre. About 1,000 buildings were destroyed, and over 10,000 people killed. The Cocos Pacific seafloor plate snapped 20 kilometres (12 miles) down, releasing an estimated 15 megatons of force. Most of the loss of life could have been prevented by the use of better building standards, forewarnings acquired through meditation, and disaster preparation.

So violent was the earthquake that tall buildings in Texas trembled, water sloshed in Colorado pools, and the shock could be detected over the entire Earth's surface. The concrete floors of the Benito Judrez Hospital, in Mexico City, collapsed on top of each other entombing 1,000 staff and patients. Fuel tanks began leaking. Electricity in much of the city stopped when municipal generators shut down automatically. International telephone and telex lines were dead. Broken mains and aqueducts cut 6 million people from household water and hampered firemen. Reconstruction costs were estimated at $4 billion. Possibly 30,000 persons were injured and 95,000 became homeless. A government disaster plan was largely inept. A strong regional quake had been warned of by Karen McNally, director of the Charles F. Richter Seismological Laboratory at the University of California, Santa Cruz, in both 1981 and 1985. Major earthquakes occur in Mexico about every 35 years. This was the 5th correctly foreseen quake in Mexico since 1978.

It has long been known that much of Mexico City has been built on a dry clay lake bed, much of which has been dried up to serve the needs of the expanding population. As it continues to dry out, some buildings have been subsiding into the drying soil by as much as 15 centimetres yearly. Buildings between 7 and 15 storeys in height often have natural vibration frequencies of 2 seconds; with the extended double shock pattern of this quake, they became the most likely to fall or suffer damage. A shorter duration quake of 1/2 the magnitude had been the last to strike Mexico City, in 1957. The building code had been amended then to account for that level of force and in accord with the human inclination to believe that the worst disaster possible is the last one. The deficient building code, stronger quake, longer duration, unstable subsoil foundation, and inopportune building heights - together with unheeded warnings, resulted in the high losses

1985 - In September,
The Plaza Agreement was held at the Plaza Hotel in New York City.
At it, central bankers in the Group of Seven countries (Japan, West Germany, Britain, USA, Canada, France and Italy) agreed to intervene in the markets to lower the value of the U.S. dollar, in relation to other major currencies. As long as the American currency remained higher in comparative value, exports from the USA would be minimized and imports would be maximized - to the Americans. Continuation of this situation could have resulted in American employment and manufacturing rates falling while all other nations experienced more favourable social conditions. The desired change was brought about by the non-American central banks selling more American currency and the American government purchasing more foreign currencies.

1985 - During the Fall
A Walk-in answered: How are space beings working to prevent World War III ?

"Space beings are trying to infiltrate into war councils and strategy huddles of many nations to convince them of the folly of moves that would cause a world conflagration. Ethiopia is so stricken with famine (1985), and so surprised by the good offices of Western nations (in sending food supplies), that the tension there will ease and may not now erupt into war with its neighbours, thus setting off the dread conflagration. It is not yet clear, but it looks now like war will not occur in 1986 or soon thereafter. If not, there will be a period of uneasy peace, with great technological advances, and extraterrestrials will play an active role in furthering some remarkable discoveries in that field."

1985 - In September,
The USAF ASAT Test disrupts the 850 kg polar "Solwind" satellite causing it to break into 285 tracked pieces.
The majority of the potentially lethal debris (95%) would re-enter the Earth's atmosphere by early 1990 aided by the increased atmospheric density associated with the 1987 high solar activity levels, the 1988 abrupt rise in sunspot activity, and the 1989 solar burst and gigantic magnetic storm.

1985 - During the year,
An enormous hole in the ozone layer over Halley's Bay on the coast of Antarctica, was reported by a team of British scientists. The recorded depletions were so large (up to 40%) and the idea of a continent-size hole so unexpected that several research groups, including the British Antarctic Survey, NASA, and the U.S. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration had not wanted to believe their own findings. Each group had waited for independent corroboration and, hearing no confirming reports, had sat on the results for years, attributing readings of enormous seasonal loss of Antarctic ozone to instrument or computer failure: the too-oft failure of human rationalization. Once again, the human god of rationalization, with an effectiveness no better than chance had been demonstrated to be destructive in questions of survival, yet human cultures would learn no lesson from it.

Contrary to the expectations of scientists, the layer protecting the Earth wasn't just thinning gradually. The CFC-Ozone reaction wasn't linear. Instead, an immense hole had suddenly been noticed in that section of the Earth's atmosphere. Even more ominous was that the hole had appeared over the most remote part of the globe, far from where the CFCs had been released, and, fortunate for human survival. The ozone hole underscored how ignorant humans were about the manner in which their own activities influenced the stability of the Earth's ecosphere which supported their life. Spacepersons had been warning individual humans of this consequence since the early 1950s.

International meetings were held in Vienna and Montreal in 1987 where an international protocol was drawn up that called for a 50% cut in CFCs by the year 2000. By 1989, it would be clear that these standards would be inadequate, even if they were adhered to. In 1989, A Helsinki meeting would result in discussions of a total ban of chlorofluorocarbons by the end of the decade. As humans had been taught, they intellectualized and procrastinated making decisions which, in this case, could mean severe and irreversible consequences for life on Earth. Had the decision as to whether or not to use the CFCs been made at the time of their creation by cultural leadership guided by clear-minded meditation, they would never have been introduced! This cultural change, to the benefit of humanity, had been offered to human political leaders by spacepersons beginning before 1954. Such human leaders, guided by their iniquities, declined the offer.

1985 - During the year,
The USA Navy Classifies Ocean Bottom Charts making them available only for military-approved researchers whose needs are evaluated on a case-by-case basis. In the years immediately prior, 3-dimensional satellite images were compiled using technology undreamt of 25 years before. These had been made available by commercial and nongovernmental enterprises while the Pentagon wished to limit their circulation.

From a military point-of-view, highly accurate topographical maps of the ocean floor could permit safer and more concealed covert submarine operations. This advantage dwindles if a potential adversary has the same information. In addition, the location of major undersea installations, bases and environmentally or militarily sensitive sunken ships, submarines, rockets, or other apparatus could prove embarrassing to the host nation as well as limiting to their future military effectiveness.

From a national security point-of-view, the recognition of spaceperson culture underwater bases would also completely destroy the shroud of secrecy surrounding UFOs and intergovernmental cover-ups and interrelationships with such cultures - or, make it necessary to greatly expand the disinformation directed at the public. Also, a real understanding of the reality of the ocean floor topography in terms of its movements presents two concerns. An expansion of private enterprise exploitation of ocean floor riches can defeat the purpose of capitalism: profit by the control of the resource. Continuing to share information about various "mining" opportunities limits the potential profits which a monopoly can make. Public information in a global economy encourages inter-national competition which is counter-productive to national capitalist growth.

A second concern is that publicizing the predictable instability of some ocean floor regions while acknowledging the existence of massive and continuing uplifts and sinking levels in specific regions could result in negative social reactions. Raising the awareness of the public to earth changes for which they are unprepared to cope would be expected to produce mass panic or mass paranoia.

Opposition to the outright classification of these charts was mirrored in the words of Paul Wolff, assistant administrator for the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration who stated: "That's like classifying a road map for fear of invasion." Outrage from the general scientific and business community simply produced covert methods of controlling the flow of information to the public.

Under the leadership of the Reagan administration, the Department of Defense quietly implemented a number of policies, decisions, and orders that gave the military unprecedented control over both the content and public use of data and communications. The Pentagon created a new category of "sensitive" but unclassified information that allows the Department to keep from public access huge quantities of data that were once widely accessible. Other controls on the nation's entire communication system would be devised.

1985 -
American Thrift (Savings & Loan - S&L) Institutions become deregulated allowing them to invest a greater percentage of their assets in consumer loans, commercial loans, and direct real estate investments. These investments are considered to be high-risk in banking and it is advisable to maintain higher reserves to offset likely losses. This adjustment is largely not done. A significant portion of the mortgage loans originated by the S&Ls are in the form of adjustable rate mortgages, as opposed to a 30-year fixed-rate conventional mortgage. As rates and monthly payments rise, foreclosures and late payments also rise.

A number of real estate seminar entrepreneurs traverse the USA and Canada during this period promoting real estate acquisition with little or no money deposits. They are frequently encouraged to take over distressed owner properties, rental properties and equity participation agreements. While largely presented ethically, many of the attendees or cassette course subscribers make assumptions about the opportunities and strategies proposed which encourages failure. Rather than trying to assist distressed individuals and families in gracefully leaving an financially compromising situation, many seek out such situations with the intent of using manipulation, deception and fear - to obtain properties for next to no money and the assumption of the outstanding debt. Others are overoptimistic about their skills or underestimate the degree of skill required in effectively negotiating a purchase and sale as well as in the management of property and tenants.

Control of the opportunity is lost in numerous situations when the investor has obtained ownership to a rental property and subsequently does neither maintain it adequately nor choose dependable and orderly tenants nor treat the current tenants with respect. Still others oversimplify the techniques suggested in the seminars or fail to follow the cautions of the seminar leaders who encourage the participants to confirm whether all of the procedures mentioned - and used in a variety of states - are applicable and legal in the locale of the participant. On average, those attracted do not have a professional attitude and are motivated by the prospect of getting rich quick with little effort.

1985 - On October 05
Lt. General Lincoln D. Fauer, in an address to the "Association of Former Intelligence Officers", 11th Annual Convention (he retired earlier in the year from the position of director of the National Security Agency) entitled "The Future of the Intelligence Community", stated the following:

"We are, in fact, in competition with ourselves to provide systems that suit our needs in a controlled manner for specific purposes. Our technological ingenuity creates a threat to us by encouraging the pursuit of new, more, and costly systems all the time. We can always find ways of making things better, but we should not continue to pursue perfection. We must be more disciplined in deciding what to pursue and sticking to it. We need to go back to basics in identifying requirements. As a nation, we have always failed to be modest and austere in identifying our requirements. And as resources become more scarce, as money becomes tighter, a reduction in our requirements will enable us to release money for the task."

Fauer has identified the weakness of all human technologically based societies: Pride!
We tie our identities so close to our physical achievements that we constantly try to prove ourselves worthy of acceptance, power, and control by the technology we create or the body we build. The fear attached to the weakness obsesses us with the quest for perfection without which we believe we will be overpowered by another nation, another firm, another employee, another person. Ultimately, this drives the individual on the motivation of "every man for himself"; the nation is obsessed with "security through power" - of economy, of military, of image, of survival. Perhaps only three "powers" have shown the ability during the period 1950 - 1994 to define their requirements, in brief, and stick to them:

1. The REDS have assisted the survival of humanity by sabotaging several attempts at nuclear war, 
   encouraging the development of theories and technologies which have resulted in 
   medical breakthroughs, agricultural innovations, increasing human spiritual awareness.

2. The GRAYS have prepared for colonization of the Earth without human opposition 
   or interference and that is almost complete.

On the other side of the equation, the majority of humanity, during that time has demonstrated their preoccupation with iniquities rather than the cultivation of spiritual strengths. Iniquities of envy, greed, pride, weakness, gluttony, lust, sloth, fear and vengeance have resulted in our sacrifice of most of our earnings, even to huge national deficits - with little contentment, optimum health, or a clean environment to show as rewards. Our cultures, our politics, our schools, our churches and we ourselves as participants are responsible.

1985 - During the year,
Jerry Whitworth, USN retired, was charged with 8 counts of espionage and a count of tax evasion.
He was found guilty of 7 of the 8 charges and sentenced to 365 years of imprisonment with eligibility for parole at age 107. In return for his open testimony, Whitworth's son, who had also taken part in the espionage, received a reduced sentence of 25 years imprisonment. The defendant were given a "show trial" during which a great amount of media exposure was allowed and encouraged in an attempt to discourage further participations in espionage as well as to increase national fear of and hatred towards the Soviet Union. As always, the suggestion was made to the public that only the Soviets involved themselves in espionage.

None of the participants were aware of nor made aware of the nuclear retaliatory strike which had almost been launched by the Soviet Union in 1979 as a result of their efforts. Like the typical government and military dependent, they were untrained in and had no appreciation for the usual deceptions, manipulations and intrigue common to human high-level, large nation, political strategies. The simplicity of their reasoning led them to believe that at worst, the USA and USSR would be trapped in a constant stalemate, and, that anything as important as an order to start war would not be conveyed in such an immediate manner as by telecommunications.

1985 - On October 02
An Israeli Act of War resulted in Israeli jets destroying a PLO centre in Tunis where American intelligence had determined Yasser Arafat was staying. While the centre was destroyed, the PLO leader was away from the area at the time.

During 1983, the USA and Israel had signed an agreement to share some forms of information. In 1984, Jonathan Pollard, an American Jew, was assigned within USA Naval Intelligence to a position as a terrorist project courier. He initially became involved in scientific espionage, sending technical information to the Israelis. He was paid $2,500 per month. After 18 months of espionage activity, piles of information were noticed on his desk which were both sensitive in restriction and did not relate to his duties. During that period he had sent the equivalent of a room full of copied documents to the Israelis.

During 1985, he was questioned, and eventually arrested by the FBI.
He pleaded guilty to espionage and his wife was found guilty of assisting him.
He received a sentence of life imprisonment; his wife received a sentence of 5 years.
After 4 years she was released and she moved to Israel.
Clemency was requested for him by Israeli Prime Minister Rabine in 1993.
The American adminstration denied the request.

1985 - Late in the year,
A Walk-In answered the following question:
If war is averted in 1986, what is foreseen over the following ten to fifteen years ?

(232) Industry will blossom out into the most interlocking and coherent force in earth's history. Computers will require less space and fewer operators as centralization of data spreads to almost every segment of the economy. Those in charge of programming these central stations will have to be of the highest calibre, as false information and dangerous theories fed into the central data banks can permeate the thinking of all peoples and sway public opinion.

There is real danger of a few evil people slipping into these positions in order to disrupt important work and governmental economies, or to control universal thought and action. Unless these central offices are guarded and patrolled, such activity can lead to war. Never before in world history has there been such potential for a few wrong-minded people to control the masses; yet never has there been so much potential for good if right-thinking, peace-loving people are there to direct the machines that will be "read" daily by many millions in schools, offices and homes. Lives will be saved, time conserved, and a new life style emerge as people take their informational readouts from computers.

Russia is devising an electronic system that will be able to knock out U.S.A. communications at the press of a button. Communication with orbiting satellites could then be lost, and the U.S. thereby shut off from quick information and powerless to respond if a surprise attack should be launched at any time. Books and newspapers will continue to attract thinking people, but others will take the easy way of learning through radio and television, until Russia demonstrates that the present culture is at the mercy of electronic gadgetry. Better to be developing some rival systems of power from the sun and wind, so that America is not left powerless in the event that Russia decides to negate the present sources of electrical energy.

In the twenty-first century, after the shift, women will be equal with men and racial prejudice will be eradicated as a new race of people is reborn into the earth. When electrical power is restored after the shift, television and radio will largely assume the teaching role, instead of schools. Computers no larger than the human brain will make contact with intelligent beings in other planetary systems, and much will be learned from the superior technological and spiritual development.

After the shift, technological development will be in abeyance for a time "while people work on their soul and spiritual awareness. It will be an interesting time as these new souls from outer space blend with earthlings to bring about equilibrium between science and self-understanding."

1985 - On November 13
Nevado del Ruiz Volcano, Columbia erupted melting ice and sending torrents of water down its sides, forming massive mud flows which inundated surrounding river valleys. Evacuation orders were given for the town of Armero, situated directly in the path of one of the lahars (Javanese for "mudflow"), but was largely ignored until too late. As the great tide of mud surged through the town, many of the buildings were buried in up to 12 feet (4 m) of mud, and most of the inhabitants were killed. Death toll: approx. 23,000; including almost the total population of Armero. located 50 km (30 miles) from Nevado Del Ruiz.

The converging Nazca Pacific Ocean plate and the American plates had released accumulated frictional energy resulting in molten rock and gases rising inside the volcano. Partial melting of the volcano's glacier cap produced the water and mud flows. Nearly 400 years had passed since the volcano had attracted such attention with a major eruption in 1595. Due to the height of Nevado, a small flow reached a speed of 160 km per hour (100 mph) during the disaster. 90% of the volcano's ice cap remained unmelted after the disaster. Earthquakes shock the area in late 1984, and minor expulsions of gas and ash occurred periodically throughout 1985 before the eruption and the resulting mudflows. Neither the residents nor the government officials and scientists heeded the warnings.

Mudflows had occurred in the region before.
In 1845, one was described as "Stupendous and Deplorable Happening, ...".
The clergy described an earthquake-induced mudflow on the Lagunilla "so that ... their successors, would not forget ..." But they did. On September 11, fresh ash and lightweight rock was found on the snow from a major steam blast. Some residents left home until government officials assured them that everything was alright.

1985 - During the year,
A computer malfunction resulted in a temporary overdraft in the Reserve Account of the Bank of New York.
The malfunction occurred in the bank's government securities clearing business section and it was necessary for the Bank to borrow $22 billion from the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. In European countries, the lender of last resort, as required in this situation, would be the Ministry of Finance, rather than the central bank; in the Eurobond market, there is no lender of last resort. A similar problem outside of the USA could result in the liquidation of the bank!

1985 - Late in the year,
Inspector Chris Braiden, releases his report: "Bank Robberies and Stolen Bikes".
He works at the Edmonton Police Department, Alberta, Canada, and, as Special Advisor, Preventive Policing, Ministry of the Solicitor General, Ottawa, Canada,

In a survey of the American, British and Canadian policing histories and systems he finds the following:

"Much has been learned about crime and policing in the past fifteen years.
Unfortunately most of this valuable evidence remains buried in obscure government reports or academic journals. Little of it has progressed past the academic exercise stage and the term 'The paralysis of analysis' is most appropriate. ...

For too long, policing has existed as an island in a sea of social and behavioural problems. It has pursued crime as if the phenomenon has a definitive start and finish. We cannot be very effective at controlling crime until we understand the community around us. ...

Fact: In Canada in 1984 there were exactly 1,069 bank robberies which netted $2.8 M.
In the same year there were about 182,000 reported stolen bicycles which netted $45 M. The reporting rate for stolen bicycles is only 30%. Most people either don't have insurance or the loss is less than the deductible clause.

An examination of the policy and procedures manual of a typical urban police department will reveal copious instructions on how to respond to bank robberies. Meticulous records will be kept on all statistics relating to such incidents. No amount of time and resources will be spared investigating each incident, in fact more money may be spent investigating one bank robbery than all of the stolen bicycles combined. Special squads of detectives will respond to bank robberies and money is no object in hunting down the comparatively small number of criminals involved.

The manual, however, will be silent on the issue of stolen bicycles except to state when found ones are to be auctioned off. The police probably will not even respond to investigate; they will just take a report over the telephone. When a bank robbery 'goes down', all hell breaks loose in a police department. When a kid's bike is stolen, not a twitch. Why?

Are police leaders aware of the disparity of resources applied to these problems, or the magnitude of the stolen bicycle problems? I don't think so. If they were I'm sure they would do something about it. But therein lies the root of the problem. Too often they have become so enmeshed in senseless bureaucracy that they are unaware of individual community problems. They have become 'fire-fighters' with the 'In/Out' baskets dictating their daily work only to face the same baskets the next day. Contemporary policing reacts to incidents , not problems . ... It seems that current police vision does not have the capacity to look beyond an individual incident to identify a problem. We are preoccupied with the behaviour of the individual criminal rather than the debilitating effect of multiple small crimes on the (spirit of) the community. ...

There is another, more immediate need for this mental overhaul.
We know that fear of crime is a more debilitating problem than the actual incidence.
For example, many people believe there is up to five times as much crime than there actually is.
The debilitating effect of crimes such as stolen bicycles because so many homes have been victimized clearly contributes to this fear, a fear that is eating away at the confidence law-abiding people have for the health of our communities and the criminal justice system of which we are a part. ....

Many basic ideas of community-responsive policing have been discussed and written about for perhaps 20 years. Why has so little been implemented despite the apparent logic of the ideas? Those in the know may be surprised to hear that the great majority of front line officers have never heard of community policing, much less understand it. For whatever reason, it has remained the private reserve of academics and a few police leaders on the conference circuit and it has gone nowhere. ... until the people in the operations end of policing understand and accept the newly emerging ideas of community responsive policing, it will go nowhere. ...

Once the people who are closest to the delivery of police services understand the concept fully, they will come up with ways to implement it. ...

The bottom line is that the typical urban police agency of today devotes 80-90% of its time and resources to patrol operations and follow-up criminal investigations. ... Neither source seems to have contemplated community needs or input in plotting the police mandate. ...

Now, at the end of the era of urban growth, there is a much greater concern with the quality of urban life. Along with this change in focus, we find a marked growth in citizen organizations and outspokenness. ...

Multi-million dollar communication systems have been installed to improve response times by mere minutes, sometimes even seconds. In many jurisdictions, constables have been reduced to responders and report-takers who are urged to get back to their car and radio as soon as possible.

Computers and terminals are now the 'in' thing with everyone insisting they have one to function efficiently. For example, an official with the (USA) Federal Department of Supply and Services was reported recently ... as saying that expenditures by that department for this type of equipment skyrocketed from $2 M in 1981 to $33.5 M in 1984. ... But computers are irritable animals; they must be kept cool so the cars must have air-conditioning. For air-conditioning to work properly, the windows must be rolled up. Now in police jargon, 'in service' means to be in the car, close to the radio and computer. It is considered to be good to be 'in service.' 'Out of service' is bad. ... So we have now come full circle; technology contact has now become primary and people contact has become secondary. 'Load-shedding' of service calls are current buzz words. Service calls where people might just need a bit of help or advice are lowest on the totem (priority) pole. The end result is that we spend 40-60% (one study had it at 78%) of our patrol time doing nothing because the big catches do not come that often. ...

Rapid response is a factor in solving only 3% of all serious crime!
What is more important is how quickly the crime is reported to the police.
Research shows that most victims will call a relative or friend before calling the police. ...

50% of all calls for service come from sources that have called the police at least 10 times in the preceding year (spousal abuse, drunkenness, threatening, assault ...). These in fact are recurring problems being treated as individual "incidents".

The best single source of information to solve crime comes from crime victims yet we spend as little time as possible with these people. Constables, because there are more of them and they are usually first on the scene, solve much more crime than detectives because of the information supplied by victims and witnesses. Success in solving crime diminishes rapidly with the passage of time.

Contrary to what television would have us believe, most of a detective's workday has nothing to do with catching criminals. Only one-third is spent investigating crime, the rest is eaten up with paper work, disposing of seized property and 'servicing' dead-end cases not to mention countless hours spent in courthouse hallways. ...

Ordinary people know more about policing today than ever before and many of them are resentful; the police officer sitting in a comfortable, expensive patrol car (which to the observer translates into 'doing nothing') represents wasted tax revenue to the business person and a cushy, well-paid job to the unemployed. People resent paying for something they have no say in or control over. ... The best cure for crime, is time. Most people grow out of it. What is more likely is that people are reporting crime less because they are progressively losing faith in the justice system, a fact indicated in recent research.

The point to be made is that many of the programs initiated in recent years to bring police and public together were for the sole purpose of police popularity; to sell ourselves and our self-ordained product; to improve the image; without changing the product. These programs are condescending, shallow and demeaning to the true dignity of the police calling, ....

But in traditional policing, we have always tried to keep things nicely packaged and pigeon-holed. You cannot do that with community-based policing. Depending upon the problem faced, (determines the solution). ....

In our time, we have gone through a decade of adjective policing; we've had team policing, zone policing, preventive policing, proactive policing, reactive policing, hard policing, soft policing. I think all of these terms have served to confuse most of us. ... Fear of physical force can stand side by side with gentleness and kindness as legitimate tools of true policing. The good cops can do both. ...

Crime and disorder are not police problems alone, they are community problems with the police being the stimulator and facilitator towards the solution. Just as dentists cannot bring about dental health alone but must lead the community to create its own dental health by employing good habits and frequent checks for problems. ...

Community policing recognizes that de facto police work involves much more than law enforcement and catching criminals. Police are the delivery service for social 'first-aid' to the community. They are the agency of first call. They are the first to become involved in most social problems but are not expected to solve these problems or see them through to the end. They are often the link between problem and solution. This is so even in their law enforcement role; they start the process and then pass it on to the rest of the justice system. They are the gatekeepers to the criminal justice system. ...

Police leaders are paid to lead.
With some notable exceptions, few have done so.
Instead, most have chosen to bury themselves in bureaucratic memo writing and paperwork. Paperwork can be delegated; leadership cannot. ...

Even in these times of mind-boggling technological advances, the guts of police work is still human-being reacting to human-being and this is not likely to change. Robots may be able to make cars but they cannot bring peace to a family in turmoil nor can they provide a shoulder to cry on for an old 'wino' intent on suicide. Computers may have great memories, but they cannot create. We will get the best mileage out of technology by realizing its limitations and not being overawed by it. ...

Usually, foot patrols are assigned to the business sections of large cities and only because of the lobbying by the Chamber of Commerce or some similar group. This is dangerous because when the entire tax-paying population does not have a say in the role definition of their police, special-interest groups are often allowed to monopolize police time and resources for selfish reasons. In many cases the people who need us the most get the least of our times because they have no political clout. Wealth has no place in determining police service. ...

Three-quarters of most cities need little policing, the other quarter a lot.
The big task ahead of us in policing is to determine where, when, how and for what purposes we apply our resources instead of just dishing it out geographically. ...

On Occasion we are guilty of claiming we are too busy to stop what we are doing.
It seems to me that machines, hardware and 'things' are busy but our modern intelligence and ingenuity lies dormant most of the time. Our modern frazzled way of life gets in the way of exploring ourselves for solutions. We look outside ourselves too much and not inside enough. The solutions we need in policing are not to be found in cars and computers but rather in the intelligence of the people who control those things. ...

People are fast losing faith in a criminal justice system that is shamelessly expensive and inefficient. We still build palatial courthouses even though most cases are dealt away in hallways and offices. ...

Fact is we have become a society of litigators rather than doers. ...
The number of lawyers in Alberta doubled between 1975-1983 despite a severe economic depression.
There are more lawyers in Washington, D.C. than the entire country of Japan with its 115 million people. If they have a problem in that country, they'll hire a few engineers and fix it. We'll retain a dozen lawyers to argue its constitutionality. The astronomical increase in insurance rates is directly attributable to this abundance of lawyers and cavalier litigation with 'Joe Public' footing the bill for both the cause and effect of everything."

Braiden calls attention to the fact that the public are losing / have lost trust in their policing forces and that as a result more crime is being committed, less crime is being reported, the public is becoming more fearful of crime, more victimized, and, more irritated about the cost and effectiveness of their police forces. That is, the spirit of the public has been abused by legalistic, bureaucratic and technological systems of which each has been inefficient and costly - excuses not to get involved.

1985 - In November,
The Seventh "National Conference on Child Abuse and Neglect" was held in Chicago, Illinois, USA.
Fernando Guerra , a professor of paediatric medicine from the University of Texas, would state:

"As I spend more time in the practice of pediatrics I am convinced that we can no longer stop the tremendously overpowering problem of child abuse and neglect. There are people in each of our communities who are totally overwhelmed by stressful events, who face one crisis after another, and the groups that remain at greatest risk continue to fall outside the system of resources that has been developed to do something about this."

Michael Wald, a law professor from Stanford University further noted:

"Unless we fundamentally change the type of society that we are, there really is no hope for child protection."

At this point, the status quo is completely oblivious to the cultural-genetic influence of energy blocks for humans. Social leaders would remain in denial about the obvious deficiencies of the institutions which they maintained for the purpose of providing coping skills to their members. Select political, military and business decisionmakers would continue to utilize their methods of covert activities, social deception and manipulation of the banking and legal systems to enhance the aggravation felt by the majority of the participants in their society. And naive, ignorant and co-dependent persons would continue to ask: "Why would a loving God make life so difficult?"

1985 - By the end of November,
Separate Trading of Registered Interest & Principal (STRIPS) were being sold through American broker-dealers.
Book-entry zero-coupon U.S. Treasury securities, STRIPS accumulate interest over the term of the bond, and pays interest in a lump sum at maturity. A dealer or investor holding full-coupon Treasury securities may return them to the treasury for stripping. Then the Treasury returns a zero-coupon security. STRIPS defer the payment of interest cost thereby suggesting that the government expects or hopes that its income will improve markedly by the maturity date and that, for political or other reasons, a reduction in short-term budgetary expense is desirable.

1985 - By December,
"The International Institute for Strategic Studies", a London-based organization, states that war in all its aspects, including preparation for it and defense against it, is the world's biggest industry. Nations spend more than US $1 trillion a year on military programs. The North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) and the Warsaw Pact which have never fought each other directly for nearly 4 decades, account for 83.5% of that expenditure (and the benefit of it to their economies). On average, for each month since the end of WWII, 41,000 humans have died in military conflicts: almost 20 million. Of those, 3 out of every 5 killed have been civilians. Countless more have been wounded or otherwise injured, and, still countless more than those have been traumatized by the insecurity, brutality, and injustices of war.

Throughout the period since 1948 to the present, capitalistic economies have been sustained and communistic economies have been restrained by the local buildup of sophisticated weaponry and the export of military conflict between other nations with the resulting death, injury and misery occurring in non-NATO countries.

1985 - By December,
The Iran-Iraq War has been in progress for over 5 years.
The dead from both sides totals more than 130,000. There is no record of wounded.
Thousands of Iranian youths have died by walking through Iraqi minefields to clear a path for the soldiers.
Iraq, having to use most of its oil revenues to purchase a continuing supply of armaments, has repeatedly requested peace with the currently occupied boundaries. Iran has remained firm on its conditions for peace:

a) Total Iraqi withdrawal from all Iranian territory;
b) Hundreds of billions of dollars in war reparations;
c) Replacement of Iraqi President Saddam Hussein and the Baathist regime 
                                             with a fundamentalist Islamic government.

Iran also depends on its oil exports to pay for its military financing. Iraq is now attacking civilian oil tankers filling up at Iran's principal oil terminal at Kharg Island and the terminal itself. The resulting oil-fouling from such activities is killing life in the Red Sea. Estimates suggest that if the present environmental degradation continues, the Red Sea will be a "Dead" sea in 10 years.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1986 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

Star Trek IV: The Voyage Home; Cobra; Crime Wave; Platoon; Shelley; Crocodile Dundee; Aliens; F/X; Top Gun; Gothic; Heartbreak Ridge; Pirates; Stand By Me; Sword of Gideon; The Money Pit; Tough Guys; Little Spies; Clockwise; Murphy's Law; Riders of the Storm; Big Trouble in Little China; Running Scared; The Best of Times; Duet for One; About Last Night;

General News :

Consumer Price Index: 328.4

San Francisco earthquake of 5.3 magnitude.

An underground FEDERATION base is established near Fort Stockton in western Texas state, U.S.A.

The Soviet spacestation MIR is launched with a closed life-support system.
In North America there are 100 million tons of radioactive mine tailings.

1986 - By now,
Chlamydial Genital & Neonatal Infections are Epidemic in North America.
Their result is an increasing and high level of heart disease, increasing prevalance of arthritic and fibrositic symptoms, increasing weight control difficulties, increasing prostatitis and prostate cancer, increasing frequency of bowel sluggishness and bowel cancer, increasing frequency of male and female infertility, increasing frequency of headaches, increasing prevalance of lymph congestion.

While chlamydial infestions are not always the primary influence for these ailments they are epidemic and they are at least contributory in 205 of all cases and primary in as many as 40% of the remainder. Instead of looking at the evidence of tissue damage and attempting to discover what is causing it, medical researchers continue to look for ways to ameleorate the symptoms by rationalizing that various factors are resulting in a change of digestive balance, or, that drug coerced activity of certain tissues and organs confirms the problem to be related to the common concept of aging. Realization of the basic underlying influence would not be widely accepted until after 1996.

In the interim, a list of factors which appear to alleviate the symptoms and a list of factors which appear to aggravate the symptoms builds in an attempt to rationalize that a change of dietary and emotional lifestyle have both caused the diseases and can lead to their prevention. Even when the fallacies of such a model are discovered, they are ignored.

Factors considered to be aggravants contributing to the development of the above noted chronic, and eventually fatal, diseases include the following:

    - salt                  ... increases blood pressure
    - talking, shouting     ... increases blood pressure
    - anxiety               ... increases blood pressure
    - frustration           ... increases blood pressure
    - anger                 ... increases blood pressure
    - fear                  ... increases blood pressure
    - tobacco               ... increases blood pressure
    - sodium                ... increases blood pressure
    - high LDL cholesterol  ... increases blood pressure
    - sugar                 ... increases heart demand
    - high protein          ... increases heart demand
    - chlorination          ... increases tissue & cell damage
    - herpes, viruses       ... increases tissue & cell damage

Many of the above factors increase an individual's blood pressure by constricting the size of the blood vessels.
In itself, this makes the heart work harder. High LDL cholesterol levels are normal responses of the human body to tissue injury: cuts; scrapes; muscle and tendon tears; viral, bacterial, and parasite infestations. Instead of trying to lower the level of protection which the body seems to feel it requires, why not find why the protection is being sought? Because chlorination and viral infections tend to increase the potential for heart disease development, it would appear obvious that the defenses mounted by the body to counter their cellular destruction may be inadvertently overcompensating, or, not proving to be effective in their task.

High sugar and/or high protein content in a diet result in concentrated activity being required by the digestive and metabolic balancing organs which acquire their energy from the heart. If they are pressured to work more intently or for longer durations, more than average requirements are necessary from the heart. Thus, the above lifestyle indicators demonstrate that by adding additional energy challenges to the heart workload, a chronic and potentially fatal disease may develop. For over 20 years, the medical industry would seek to lower symptoms rather than to eradicate the irritant which lowered the capacity of the heart and other organs to fulfill their normal healthy operations.

Factors considered to be beneficial in reducing the symptoms of the above noted diseases include the following:

   - hawthorne extract     ... strengthens heart
   - vitamin C             ... anti-bacterial
   - vitamin E, fish oils  ... reduces LDL cholesterol
   - evening primrose oil  ... lymph cleaning
   - asperin / lemon juice ... anti-bacterial
   - calcium               ... promotes healing
   - low protein           ... lowers heart strain
   - listening             ... lowers blood pressure
   - relaxation training   ... lowers blood pressure
   - meditation            ... lowers blood pressure
   - snacking              ... lowers heart strain
   - potassium             ... strengthens heart
   - chromium              ... lowers heart strain
   - selenium              ... promotes healing
   - exercise              ... lowers blood pressure
   - licorice tea          ... encourages peristalsis
   - high fiber diet       ... encourages elimination
   - alcohol               ... anti-bacterial

Of the above factors, note that a number of activities which promote self-control and balanced emotional intensity lower the blood pressure by relaxing the walls of the blood vessels and providing less restriction for the circulation of blood. A number of factors are also noted for their anti-bacterial, lymph cleaning, or their healing benefits. Unless harmful bacteria were present and cellular and tissue damage were in progress, why would such products prove beneficial. The necessity for assisted elimination and peristaltic action is more likely to be that of obstruction rather than aging as chronic difficulties requiring such assistance have been noted in individuals as young as 25 years old.

Finally, several factors assist in reducing heart strain by reducing heavy digestive requirements and balancing assimilation of nutrient loadings. Unless the heart was already somewhat distracted in its efforts by disadvantageous factors, why should it require special concessions? The "load" might be plaque, calcium and cholesterol buildup in blood and lymph vessels and in muscles. But then why are these "healing" elements being overconsumed in a manner which indicates that they are unable to cope with the ongoing destruction?

1986 - By the beginning of this year,
William (Bill) S. English had been working in Blackstone, Virginia, and had been contacted by his mother who had bought a pig farm in error, believing that she was bidding $20 at an auction - when the bid had actually been $20,000. She wanted Bill to help her and his stepfather get it operational. After pestering him for 3 months, he agreed after she said she was going to have to go into hospital for surgery. After 6 months of shovelling manure, Bill sought a job at the local radio station in Brookneal, Virginia. There he met his third wife, Valerie. Shortly after their marriage, Bill began working for the WLVA radio station in Lynchburg, Virginia. He would win several awards for his production work and his nightly talk show.

Later in this year, John Lear, a UFO investigator, speaker and writer, would contact Bill by leaving messages with Bill's mother and stepfather. Bill first contacted Wendelle Stevens, who at this point did not know if English was still alive, and found out that his story about the Grudge/Blue Book #13 document had been highlighted in a book by Bill Steinman and Stevens, "UFO Crash at Aztec". After reading the book, English contacted Lear.

Shortly later, John Lear interviewed English, and, shortly after that the radio station where English worked, WLVA, began to experience severe financial difficulties to the point where much of the staff was laid off, including Bill. With his wife, Bill English moved to Alamogordo, New Mexico where he would later found UFINET, UFO News and Information Service, with Dick Shefler.

1986 - In January,
Hundreds of migrating birds fall out of the sky over Mexico City.
Autopsies reveal that their blood contained high levels of lead and cadmium, components of the smog which covers the city continually and provides increasing chronic health problems to the population. In 1940, the city had a population of 2 million humans. In 1990, it would have a population of more than 20 million people. Every day 3 million cars and 39,000 factories spew 45 million TONS of contaminants into the air.

Pollution would reach such high densities in January, 1989, that the government would close the schools for a MONTH. That same year, a UN Environmental Program report would state that the ground-level ozone levels in Mexico City exceeded World Health Organization (WHO) standards by 60%. Respiratory and intestinal infections are the primary killers of the children in Mexico City. One out of every 100 children born has some form of mental retardation, according to Antonio Velasquez Arellano, a leading geneticist. In another study done in Mexico City, 7 out of 10 newborns showed lead levels in their blood higher than WHO standards.

1986 - On January 28,
The "Challenger" Space Shuttle (STS-25) during a launch from Cape Canaveral, exploded 74 seconds into flight.
The launch had been delayed because of cold weather and icing problems a number of times over a 2-day period. That morning the temperature at the launch pad was 36 degrees Fahrenheit. At least 2 engineers had warned earlier that there were problems with the craft and that the mission should be cancelled and the problems worked out. A political imperative to have frequent and numerous space shuttle launches in order to lower the cost per mission was used to pressure technical representatives of the contractors to hastily complete their work, or, eliminate some safety tests, or, postpone improvements for a future flight, or, be terminated from their employment.

At 64+ seconds after liftoff, a plume of flame was recorded in the location of the aft field joint and within 10 seconds, the complete craft disintegrated. It was the first set of shuttle fatalities. It involved a crew which had become part of the NASA teacher-in-space promotional program. The number of fatalities, the nature of the fatalities and the size and visual representation of the blast shocked the American people. They had become proud in their long line of space successes and were not prepared to accept failure. NASA and the media had continually trivialized the dangers implicit for humans in trying to go into and stay in a space environment. A Presidential Commission was called to find out if negligence or terrorism had been involved in the accident.

The Commission would later report that the accident could have been prevented and was the result of the failure of a pressure seal that engineers had reported before the flight as being dangerous, particularly in cold weather. The contractor specifically involved was determined to have been negligent. NASA was given a new administrator in 1989. All shuttle flights were delayed until September 29, 1988. Billions of dollars of defense and aerospace contracts were riding on the resumption of the shuttle flights.

1986 - On February 09,
Comet Halley is observed in accord with calculated predictions made earlier.
Such predictions have had to account for the gravitational influence of other planets in the Earth's solar system, emission of materials drag, and, solar wind cosmic radiation and electromagnetic influences.

The Pioneer Venus Orbiter (NASA) which has been circling Venus since 1978, is directed to observe Comet Halley in late January, 1986. Five satellites, launched by various countries in late 1985 or early 1986 have some success in analyzing the composition of the comet. Whipple's "dirty snowball" theory of 1950 is confirmed by the rich presence of Hydrogen, Carbon, Oxygen, and Nitrogen. It is believed that water and organic materials are part of the core of frozen gases and liquids in which dust is dispersed. The cloud of gases surrounding the nucleus is estimated at 12.5 million miles (20 million km) in diameter. The nucleus itself appears to be 15 km by 7 km in oval size.

The satellites involved in these new observations included:

  VEGA-1     (USSR)    3/6/86
  SUISEI     (Japan)   3/7/86
 SAKIGAKE    (Japan)   3/8/86
  VEGA-2     (USSR)    3/9/86
  GIOTTO      (ESA)    2/13/86    European Space Agency (ESA)

1986 - During February,
George Bush releases his "Public Report of the President's Task Force on Combatting Terrorism" through the USA Government Printing Office. Bush recommended: extended and flexible emergency presidential powers to combat terrorism; restrictions on congressional oversight in counter-terrorist planning; curbing press coverage of terrorist incidents. Most security professionals would support these directions as rational responses to available terrorist data and theories or operation. Remember that the CIA had circulated handbooks and manuals to terrorist groups Asia, South and Central America. Fear can become paranoia when you are the creator of the monster.

His report leads to the "Anti-Terrorism Act of 1986" that grants the USA President clear-cut authority to respond to terrorism with all appropriate means including deadly force. It authorizes the Immigration and Naturalization Service to control and remove not only "alien" terrorists but "potential" terrorist aliens and those "who are likely to be supportive of terrorist activity within the U.S." The bill superseded the War Powers Act by imposing no time limit on the President's use of force in a terrorist situation, and lifted the requirement that the President consult Congress before sanctioning deadly force.

1986 - By April,
The continued use of Lead in Pigments in North America became public.
A number of paint manufacturers, including some larger companies, had continued to formulate their white-based paints with lead oxide - a substance toxic to human health. While the ingredient had been legally banned, companies had ignored the law and the government agencies had neither monitored the market nor enforced the law. A repetitive wave of dying and chronically ill children drew attention once again to the hazards of such use of the compound.

When the drama and excuses came to an end, the safe, inert, titanium dioxide again became the accepted substitute. Titanium increased the quality of the materials more than could be acknowledged at the time - for minimal cost increases. The North American public were beginning to become ecologically concerned at this point and less in favour of short-use purchases or health endangering products. As a pigment, titanium dioxide effectively extended the longevity of a plastic appliance by preventing its colour degradation through outgassing of the plastic and by the plastic's absorption and reaction to the air pollution chemical brew hanging over most urban regions.

The high dielectric constant of titanium is now beginning to be appreciated.
Dielectric constants for titanium compounds range from 13 for Magnesium titanium trioxide to 10,000 near 120 degrees celsius for Barium titanate. These properties are associated with a stable polarized state of the material similar to the magnetic condition of a permanent magnet; such substances are known as ferroelectrics. Yet an ability to retain a charged condition allows barium titanate to use this piezoelectric ability for its use as a transducer for the interconversion of sound and electrical energy. Ceramic transducers containing barium titanate compare favourably with Rochelle salt and quartz, with respect to thermal stability in the first case, and with respect to the strength of the effect and the ability to form the ceramic in various shapes, in the second consideration. The compound has been used both as a generator for ultrasonic vibrations and a sound detector. What all of this means, in brief, is that some titanium compounds can now be utilized to store electrical charges - as in electronic switching circuitry, and, that these compounds can also be fashioned into miniaturized transmitters and receivers of signals. Computers, satellites, surveillance and robotic guided missiles can now be improved in their speed, compactness, and effectiveness.

1986 - In April,
The "Mighty Oak" underground atomic explosion test in Nevada encountered problems when 7 foot thick doors intending to seal the entrance failed to close properly. As a result nuclear fallout was vented into the air.

1986 - In April,
Swarms of Red Locusts were reported in Kenya for the first time since 1937.
The Brown Locust was also threatening some 300,000 square kilometres of South Africa alone and swarms of the African Migratory Locust would soon penetrate as far as Capetown for the first time in more than 40 years.

Locusts swarm in dense, dark, clouds that darken the sky and strip bare anything edible. A swarm can cover 52 square kilometres (20 square miles) and destroy an entire harvest in a few days. Tanzania, Malawi, Ethiopia, Botswana, Zambia and Mozambique are also threatened by the insects.

1986 -
Paul E. Tyler's article "The Electromagnetic Spectrum in Low-Intensity Conflict", is published in "Low-Intensity Conflict and Modern Technology", edited by Lt. Col. David J. Dean, U.S.A.F. Centre for Aerospace Doctrine, Research, and Education, Maxwell Air Force Base, Ala. : Low-intensity conflicts are defined as small wars that do not involve the use of nuclear weapons. This article discusses the direct use of electromagnetic fields against personnel. Using very low strength ELF magnetic fields can deliberately produce sleep or manic behaviour. Longer exposures can induce feelings of depression through manipulation of the pineal gland. Other influences may include nausea, dizziness, headache, severe fatigue, an inability to concentrate, and difficulty with one's vision, plus major declines in resistance to diseases. It is well-established that exposure to any abnormal electromagnetic field produces a stress response. If the exposure is prolonged, the stress response system becomes exhausted, and the strength of the immune system declines below normal. Susceptibility to cancers and infectious diseases has been shown to decrease.

The U.S. Navy Office of Naval Research became very interested this year in the work of J.M.R. Delgado who had suggested the possible "Physical Control of the Mind" by electromagnetic fields in 1969, established a major laboratory for such studies at the Centro Ramon y Cajal in Madrid, Spain; reported birth defects from ELF frequency exposed embryos in 1982. Six separate laboratories were set up by the U.S. Navy, in Project Henhouse, to try and duplicate Delgado's work and findings.

1986 - April 26, at 1.23 a.m., Saturday,
A 1,000 megawatt reactor in Pripyat, 21 km from CHERNOBYL (Chornobyl), Ukraine, caught fire.
It was Unit 4 of the V.I. Lenin nuclear station. (Temperature in the pile had risen earlier, leading to expansion of the graphite and subsequent self generation of heat by the graphite. To compensate, insertion of the control rods was attempted but restricted by the bowed pile which had also resulted in blockages of the coolant tubes in which the uranium pellets were. Safety systems were disabled or useless and the combination of the restricted coolant, self reacting graphite and jamming/breaking of the control rods resulted in chain reacting heat buildup.)

A loss of coolant resulted in the core overheating, setting on fire the graphite shields which, produced intense heat, melting the zirconium-clad rods of uranium oxide and the zirconium then reacted quickly with the water to release hydrogen which exploded violently in a second explosion, blowing off the concrete upper structure and the steel roof and releases 50 tons of fallout. The steel containment roof is both thin and unsealed unlike the 3 foot thick concrete of many newer models. 15 other reactors in the Soviet Union are similar in structure to this one. Older 230 models and newer 213 models lack real containments as well as emergency cooling systems.

Before the accident, the reactor's power had been reduced to 20% of its normal output in preparation for maintenance. A skeleton staff of poorly trained workers were on this least preferred shift.

Completed in 1977, it was the Ukraine's first nuclear reactor and, by 1983, three other reactors had been built nearby. The previous February, the Ukraine's minister of power and electrifications, was quoted as saying: "The odds of a meltdown are one in 10,000 years ... The environment is also securely protected." The U.S.S.R. reported little of the accident until 2 days had passed and Sweden and Finland were asking about radiation levels at their facilities which were 25 and 6 times higher than normal. Poland experienced levels 5 to 20 times higher than normal. 50 to 60 millions of curies of radioactive material were released into the atmosphere including 7 million curies of iodine 131 compared to 150,000 curies of the same element being dispersed in a typical atomic bomb atmospheric test of 20 kilotons in the 1950's. One million curies of the long-lived cesium-137, enough for four atmospheric atomic bomb tests was released. Earlier estimates after the accident suggested quantities 3 to 10 times higher, indicating that science is still highly inaccurate in predicting the outcome of nuclear events.

Radiation was reported to have reached the water table in the area; a forbidden zone within 30-kilometre radius was established; 150 square miles of farmland were immediately taken out of service; contaminated waters were expected to run into the Black Sea from the watershed; cars, houses, trees, museum artifacts, animals, crops: all are to be buried; 3,200 of 600,000 persons involved in the cleanup were dead by 1991; 40% of the children born to relief workers have birth defects; the birthrate in the area declined by 30% by 1991; it's illegal to own a geiger counter in the Ukraine since; 5,000 Estonians were forced into service in the cleanup; there was an estimated 10,000 dead by 1991; the push for Ukrainian independence from the U.S.S.R. grew from the disaster.

By 1991, a Minsk clinic would be treating 55 children for leukemia, double the number before the accident. Approximately 14 million people in the central Ukraine, eastern Byelorussia, and the southwestern corner of Russia will receive doses of .5 to 10 rem. Many cases of leukemia, stillborn and mutations were happening with cattle. In general, people living in the region have chronic coughs and colds, awful headaches, fatigue, loss of appetite and flu or minor surgery takes 3 times as long as normal to recover from. There is 25 to 30 percent more illness than in cleaner areas. Some students could no longer concentrate; some fainted in class; others had frequent nosebleeds and blurred vision. One boy broke his arm by throwing a ball. Tonsillitis and thyroid problems became common. In "permanent contamination" areas, a stroll in the woods is not allowed, swimming and fishing in the river are banned, and playing at the beach is not recommended.

By 1992, the Cancer Centre in Minsk was treating 500 lung cancer cases per year relative to 130 annually before 1986. Before 1986, 1 child a year might be treated for thoracic cancer. In 1992, there were 60 cases. 25% of Byelorussia is designated contaminated. Children who had been sent abroad for recuperation in cleaner air and with clean food for at least 8 weeks were found to become sick 10 times less than those who were not able to go.

With hundreds of commercial nuclear power reactors, tens of thousands of nuclear weapons, and dozens of nuclear weapons production sites, plus tens of thousands of barrels of nuclear waste, the possibility for further mishaps and considerable destructive biological effects upon humanity worldwide are quite real.

1986 -
In stating a perspective on the Arab culture, Jim Graff, chairman of the Middle East Group at the University of Toronto, Ontario, Canada, stated:

"We are talking about a people (150 million) who suffered from being colonized, really suffered, and in their view the Americans are now continuing that same type of colonization.

It's obvious to the Arab man in the street that the Americans still exert control, directly or indirectly, over their oil resources and that the Americans want to be able to position their own or surrogate troops in the area to their advantage, just as the Turks, the French, Italians and British did.

Now there will be more support for (Libyan leader Moammar) Khadafy because he at least stood up to the Americans. There'll be a lot of support for him simply because his daughter was killed and two of his sons injured (in a recent American attack on their Libyan home).

Arabs take the family and family connections very seriously, much more than we (North Americans) do. The extended family is still an important social institution (for them). ...

There is the perception by them of Westerners being morally corrupt. We are regarded as not being sufficiently religious, as being promiscuous and too materialistic. These are moral deficits to them. Unfortunately all people think stereotypical and this is the way the Arab people think of us stereotypically.

1986 - During May,
An American Delta Rocket carrying a weather satellite, fails during launch.
In 1987, 4 more satellite launches will end in failure.

1986 - On May 15,
Oliver North, a USA Marine lieutenant-colonel who arranged covert arms sales to Iran, wrote in his diary-notebook:

"Cunningham running guns to Baghdad for CIA, then weapons to Teheran.
Secord running guns to Iran."

The American Executive Office and CIA were actively promoting the sale of armaments to both of the major participants in a war which had already cost hundreds of thousands of lives. Robert McFarlane, President Ronald Reagan's national security adviser, and North, while in Iran were encouraged to secure the release of militant Shiite prisoners held in Kuwait. Their freedom had been the request of those who were holding Americans prisoners in Beirut, Lebanon. North, speaking with Executive Office authority, agreed with the Iranians, explaining later that "there is a need for a non-hostile regime in (Iraq)." He had also assured the Iranians that "we can bring our influence to bear with certain friendly Arab nations" to get rid of Saddam Hussein.

North then met the Kuwaiti foreign minister and later told the Iranians that the Shiite prisoners in Kuwait would be released if Iran dropped its support for groups hostile to the Kuwaiti emir. It could only have appeared to Saddam Hussein that when Iraq was weak, the USA would intrigue against him; when it was strong, they would ply him with favours in order to get his "armaments" business. A lesson for the future would have seemed to be: If you want USA respect and support, show maximum force and bravado.

1986 - By June,
Dr. June Parnell, in a doctoral thesis at the University of Wyoming, reported on the characteristics of 225 subjects who claimed to have experienced highly unusual sightings and/or to have been in communication with UFO occupants. They were judged to be of above average intelligence, assertive, experimental in their thinking, reserved, defensive, self-sufficient, resourceful, honest, and, most significant, devoid of mental disorders so far as were tested for. They often had good jobs, families, respect in the community. In addition, some stated that they heard voices inside their heads instructing them. Many such apparent incidents go no farther than a visit to a doctor's office to try and find an explanation for strange dreams, sudden appearance of small incisions or puncture marks on their body, or a peculiar loss of time. Most have no proof of such an experience in the form of witnesses or physical evidence and most accounts arise from lengthy hypnotic regression therapy lasting months or years.

1986 - During the year,
US Navy Commander James J. Tritten observed in his "Soviet Naval Forces and Nuclear Warfare":

"Soviet Navy strategic nuclear forces are not designed for senseless punishment of an aggressor but have been clearly designed as part of an overall system that will try to prevent the U.S. from using its forces successfully. Soviet forces are more usable for peacetime coercion because the West would know that its own threat to use nuclear weapons lacked the same credibility."

1986 - in the September/October issue of "Nursing Life"
"Nosocomial Infections", an article by Tony DeCrosta, was printed.
In part, it mentions the following:

"As these true stories show, nosocomial (sfter the Greek work for hospital) infections are a serious and far-reaching problem. Of the 40 million people who enter hospitals each year, 5 percent to 10 percent acquire infections there. They're the victims of virulent bacteria, viruses, and fungi that prey on their immune systems, weakened from disease or therapy. And over 300,000 of them die: Many experts say nosocomial infections are the 10th leading cause of death in this (USA) country .

And even when they don't kill patients, nosocomial infections cost them time and money.
According to the latest figures, the toll comes to an average of 4 extra days for an infected patient's stay and at least $800 added on to his bill. ...

'Because of DRGs (Diagnosis-Related Groups), we're seeing patients discharged earlier who are then readmitted with hospital-acquired infections,' says Sandra Landry, epidemiology administrative coordinator at the University of Virginia Medical Cemter, Charlottesville (North Carolina).

To recoup their added expenses for such patients, some hospitals routinely reclassify the patients to cover their revised diagnoses (fraud). But not all the costs can be covered so simply: Last year, for example, nosocomial infections added about $2,000 per infected patient to hospitals' operating costs; almost none of this cost is recoverable from Medicare. ...

Hospital-acquired infections can cost your patients and your hospital dearly.
Each year in the United States, over 2 million patients develop infections during hospital stays, hiking hospital charges about 15% - $2 billion - a year.

Some scientists say that every patient is a potential victim:
According to a recent estimate, one third of all infections in hospitalized patients (including half of those that patients with leukemia contact) develop as a result of their hospital stay. ...

And the incidence of nosocomial infections has been rising steadily since the early 1950s (and the introduction of antibiotics). ...

Many of these infections stem from varieties of Streptococcus and Staphylococcus bacteria that are developing resistance to antibiotics. But the biggest killer is gram-negative bacteria. 'About 80,000 patients get nosocomial infections caused by gram-negative bacteria,' says nurse epidemiologist Sue Crow. 'This increases the morbidity and mortality of these patients.'

'Fifteen years ago, nurses and doctors were more concerned with hand washing for controlling infection because there weren't as many antibiotics. Today, the emphasis is on giving antibiotics, not hand washing,' Sue Crow says.

The prime example of an antibiotic with diminished effectiveness because of bacterial resistance, of course, is the former 'wonder drug,' penicillin. At first, it readily controlled many infectious bacteria; but now it's effective against only 10 percent of Staphlococcus bacteria - and only when it's given in large doses. So to combat infectious microorganisms' mounting virulence, more than a hundred potent antibiotics have been developed in recent years. 'But it's a catch-up game,' says Harold Neu, PhD, chief of the infectious diseases department at Columbia Presbyterian Medical Center in New York. 'The bacteria seem to develop resistance to the new drugs almost as fast as the Food and Drug Administration approves them.' ...

Most of the bacteria that take up residence in hospital patients are already resistant to the antibiotics currently in use at those hospitals. And transferring infected patients to other hospitals or to nursing homes ... only spreads the problem around.

Researchers are especially concerned that antibiotic-resistant streptococcal infections acquired in hospitals may be much more life threatening than the same infections acquired in the community. ...

Searching for ways to economize, many hospitals have cut staff, especially infection-control personnel. ...

Even more worrisome, some hospitals are so financially pressed that they're reusing disposables - items labelled for one-time use. The items run the gamut from syringes and cardiac catheters to hemodialysis equipment. How common is this practice? Nobody knows for sure, but some experts believe disposables are commonly reused. ...

About 1.5 million nosocomial infections occur in nursing homes each year, according to the Centers for Disease Control (CDC). ... According to a recent study of 12 nursing homes in North Carolina, none of the ICPs (Infection Control Practitioners) there had attended an infection-control education course."

1986 - By September,
The civil war and famine in the Sudan had resulted in 2 million starving persons including 500,000 displaced persons in the southern Sudan. The drought had begun 17 years earlier, in 1969; the war had begun in 1983. In Geneva, Red Cross spokesman Serge Caccia said that a combination of war, drought, famine and a locust invasion threatens to create a crisis of huge proportions.

In recent months, thousands of southern Sudanese have fled to the north and to other countries in search of food and safety. In late August, the SPLA rebels shelled Wau, a city of 50,000 civilians, in further attacks against the government troops. Warned by a rebel broadcast to leave the town before the attack, most of the poor have no access to such electronic warnings. The attack resulted in 117 government troops killed and thousands of civilians. It is curious how some humans cause so much devastation to the group which they declare they are trying to assist.

1986 -
James L. Lundy, writing his "Lead, Follow, or Get Out of the Way", following 30 years of successful experience and activity in the engineering and administration areas of large American multi-national corporations encourages would-be executives to choose "Participative Leadership" over that of the status quo of Authoritarian Management:

"Everyone wants to change humanity, but nobody wants to change himself. ...

The Subordinates' Lament ... We the uninformed, working for the inaccessible, are doing the impossible for the ungrateful! ...

It's a matter of style.

Authoritarian managers are task-oriented and prone to rely on their position of authority when directing their subordinates. ... In the extreme, these managers expect subordinates to follow orders without ever challenging them or questioning the command.

By contrast, participative leaders create an open atmosphere.
They solicit input from subordinates at the very beginning of the decisionmaking process. ... want the benefit of subordinates' thoughts before making a decision. ...

Unfortunately, when we have problems communicating or interacting, we tend to blame the environment or someone else - but not ourselves. ...

How something is said may actually be more important that what is said!

... it takes incredibly little additional time and effort to allow others to contribute their thoughts on pending decisions, to encourage involvement, to ask for commitments instead of demanding them, to be constructive and supportive when seeking improvement, and to be able to disagree without being disagreeable - and thus to capitalize on the creative ideas and support of all those who can contribute to making good things happen.

What it does take to improve the way one interacts is the appropriate attitude towards others. An understanding of the desires and needs, when coupled with nominal investments of time and effort in the short run, will yield wonderful long-term returns.

Leadership is not a function of titles; it is a function of relationships.

... constantly sought out for even small decisions.
How comforting it was for him to be needed so obviously - and to have so many opportunities to demonstrate his decisiveness. And how confusing and frustrating it was for his subordinates to try to perform effectively in the information vacuum!

... The challenges faced by an employee who doesn't understand the authority and responsibilities of his or her job are horrendous. How can you, the employee, perform effectively if you don't understand clearly what you are supposed to do? ...

To the extent that negative information is withheld, all information becomes suspect, which jeopardizes management's credibility. People can handle bad news better when they know and understand its true dimensions. ...

Those who best understand the total situation are in the best position to succeed.

... Don't be afraid to ask dumb questions.

They're easier to handle than dumb mistakes!

... Participative leaders need not be any less concerned than authoritarian managers with purpose, performance, productivity, progress and results - but their approach is entirely different. They seek the input of others before making decisions. They guide others in implementing. They discuss performance objectively and unemotionally and coach for improvements as needed. They inspire associates to reach for high levels of achievement and encourage their efforts to succeed, and they praise good performance appropriately.

Good participative leaders learn how to ask a lot of questions - not to intimidate, but to learn. They listen, and they are cautious about winning points at the risk of losing relationships. And they constantly strive to seek understanding .

Where do you currently consider yourself to be along the spectrum?
And where would you like to be?

The Choice is Yours!"

One of the companies that Lundy worked for was Xerox Corporation.
Either his message for them was too late or they chose not to listen.
Earlier in the 1980s, Xerox had been in the enviable position of employing most of those who would found the future microcomputer industry major corporate leaders. The managers at Xerox could not understand the coming electronic wave of products and possibilitites and let these individuals fall away from their development department to form their own companies. Xerox could have been the largest multinational company in the computer industry by 1996; instead it would be a minor participant with little influence. It had a choice; it made its choice; it effectively failed - to listen.

1986 - In September,
Robert J. Rennie, for the Air Force Institute of Technology, Wright-Patterson AFB, OH., School of Systems and Logistics, wrote a Master's Thesis entitled "Handling Cytotoxic Drugs".
In the report, he noted:

"Cytotoxic drugs which are used throughout the health care system to treat cancer, have not been classified in a manner that requires special Department of Transportation labelling even though there is clinical evidence that the drugs are potentially dangerous to humans if the drug material (liquid, powder) accidentally touches the skin, is inhaled, or is ingested. ... findings indicate that medical supply officer's whose facility handles cytotoxic drugs failed to demonstrate a basic knowledge about cytotoxic drugs, particulary in key areas such as environmental protection, spill response, and internal control of drugs. Those officer's whose facility did not handle cytotoxic drugs demonstrated a level of knowledge equal to the control group. This is significant because during CT 1985, an educational effort had been undertaken by the Air Force "Office of Medical Support" to inform all supply officers about cytotoxic drugs. The Department of Labour, "Office of Occupational Safety and Health" in January, 1986, issued a comprehensive guideline for handing cytotoxic drugs ... "

Why is the US military stockpiling and handling cytotoxic drugs?
Chemical warfare? After a major training effort, the awareness level was nil - encouraging an accidental environmental alert ("event", disaster). Most military systems encourage the development of personnel who are patterned to routine and order-fulfillment. The larger any authority system, the larger the potential bureaucracy. And these people are handling nuclear weapons, biological warfare agents, and death-ray lasers!

1986 - In October,
San Salvador, El Salvador receives an earthquake of 5.2 force resulting in 400 casualties occurring in the busy city during the day.

1986 - During the year,
A USA Immigration and Naturalization Service (INS) document entitled "Alien Terrorists and Other Undesirables: A Contingency Plan", outlines the potential arrest and mass detainment in concentration camps of USA residents who are citizens of "terrorist" countries, chiefly in the Middle East. Similar to an FEMA nationwide readiness exercise code-named REX-84 ALPHA earlier intended for 1984, one of the 10 military bases specified to be a REX-84 detainment camp, Camp Krome, Florida, is designated a joint FEMA-Interrogation center and Immigration Service.

1986 - In October,
The NSDD-145 Steering Group issued a memorandum that defined sensitive information, as apart from formally classified, and gave federal agencies broad new powers to keep it from the public. This new category includes all medical records on government databases and all information on corporate and individual taxpayers in the Internal Revenue Service's computers. Even agricultural statistics may be classified as sensitive.

The Defense Department invoked the NSDD-145 guidelines to tell the information industry that it intended to restrict the sale of data that were then unclassified and publicly available from privately owned computer systems. MEAD DATA CENTRAL, with some of North America's largest online databases, such as Lexis and Nexis, and with nearly 200,000 users - were approached by a team from the USAF and officials from the CIA and the FBI who asked for the names of subscribers and inquired what Mead officials might do if information restrictions were imposed. In response, and to avoid such control, MEAD purged all unclassified government-supplied technical data from its system and completely dropped the National Technical Information System (NTIS). The result was the same: once public information became unavailable.

1986 -
The USA Tax Reform Act is passed by Congress.
It simplifies the tax code, eliminates some deductions and modifies banking regulations.
It is considered the most significant change in 50 years to the tax structure.
Provisions include these:

   1. The top corporate tax rate is decreased, 46% to 34%;
   2. The top individual tax rate is reduced, 50% to 28%;
   3. Reduced the annual limit on individual pension contributions;
   4. Authorized the wider sale of mortgage-backed securities;
   5. Prohibited the use of cash-basis accounting in banks by 1990;
   6. Machinery and equipment had to be depreciated over a longer period;
   7. Restricted the use of the instalment method for sales;
   8. Phased out over 5 years the deductibility of consumer interest;
   9. Disallowed the tax deduction of loan loss reserves in some banks.

These factors encouraged increased bank deposit levels, decreased credit financing, decreased extended payment of taxes, and increased capitalization through the use of property values. This would reduce the rate of depositor run - where depositors withdraw their monies for investments or material acquisitions - which would reduce the rate of bank asset loss. Bank asset loss is critical in maintain reserve levels and profits. The greatest profit can be realized to a bank if it can maintain a low safe level of reserves and invest in high rate of return products. These goals tend to be in opposition. Government securities, gold bullion, International gold certificates, prime bank debentures and depositor cash are rated as low risk and require the lowest reserve levels. Various forms of lending have increased risk rates and require increased reserves - affording less capital available for profits from loans. Depositor cash levels can thus be important.

1986 - During the year,
"The Group of Seven", or G7 was formed.
Consisting of the finance ministers of the 7 most capitalized industrial democracies, the group met to coordinate economic and monetary policy. The participants include Japan, West Germany, France, Britain, Italy, Canada, and the USA. Their meeting confirms these among other factors:

a) International banking will fail unless strengthened;
b) If banking fails, all currencies will become useless;
c) For political and economic stability, safeguards must be adopted;
d) The capacity of the world economic system to continue sustaining
         capitalistic growth is dropping rapidly as deficits increase;
e) If capitalistic growth cannot be sustained, profits will diminish;
f) If profits diminish, job loss will increase & companies will fragment.

1986 - During the year,
The U.S.A. Voyager 2 space probe passes close to Uranus sending back photos to the Earth.
Five larger moons and seven rings were known; now, 10 more moons were discovered and 2 additional rings.

1986 -
The USA Money Laundering Control Act was passed.
It extended the requirements on bankers outlined in the "Bank Secrecy Act" (1970) which required the reporting of cash deposits of $10,000 or more, to now include the reporting of some cash transactions under $10,000 in certain states . It was obviously believed that the money laundering industry had become so active and desperate that individuals and business would go to the difficulty of severely fragmenting their capital transfers in order to elude government scrutiny and taxation. Also in the interim, it had become recognized that an increasing number of persons were attempting to conserve their earnings or profits by the use of offshore trusts and offshore bank accounts. Both legitimate tax sheltering and illegal tax evasion was increasing. The end result was that the American banking cash depository was continuing to bleed away. More than an act to serve justice, this was one of many actions taken in attempts to strengthen an ailing banking system.

1986 - By mid-December,
A Yankee Class Soviet Submarine sank in the Western Atlantic.
These submarines looked similar to the American Polaris type and carried 16 nuclear armed ballistic missiles. This sub was never recovered.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1987 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

No Way Out; Covert Action; Wish You Were Here; Gaby: A True Story; Predator; Dirty Dancing; Fatal Attraction; Hoover vs The Kennedys; Mandela; Stakeout; The Untouchables; Big Bad Mama II; Ironweed; Meatballs III; Real Men; Fatal Beauty; Who Framed Roger Rabbit; Empire of the Sun; Control; The Living Daylights; Wings of Desire; Black Widow; Ground Zero; No Way Out; Hanoi Hilton; Extreme Prejudice; Jane and the Lost City; Assassination; The Brave Little Toaster; 84 Charing Cross Road; Shy People; Spaceballs; A Winter Tan; Strange Voices; In the Shadow of the Wind; Hollywood Shuffle; Caribe; Testimony; Back to the Beach; Death Wish 4: The Crackdown; Control

General News :

Consumer Price Index: 340.4

Underground FEDERATION bases are established in northwest Texas, Tulsa, Oklahoma, and the Chocolate Mountains, California.

1987 - By this year,
SCAMS (Spirit Compromising Attitude Management Schemes) have become big business.
Individuals involved in the promotion of SCAMS are like a fungus growing on the human spirit. They have the spirit-deadening influence that a ton each of cyanide, PCB's, dioxins and phenols would have on the human body if dumped into a small municipal water supply - it only takes a drop of exposure to leave a lasting and destructive influence.

Perpetrators of SCAMS are usually spiritually-deadened intellectualizers.
Emotionally immature, they seek for constant self-gratification and social conquest.
Hollowed of their spiritual expression and appreciation by materially-centred parents, role-models, authorities, and society in general, they only require an experience of traumatic proportion to complete their formation into their self-obsessed role. Such a trauma may be the abandonment by, rejection by, or death of a parent or significant identity. The emotional deprivation, insecurity and grieving which follows often is not resolved constructively leaving the individual blocked in their emotional growth. While inherited energy blocks may predispose individuals to this experience, it cannot develop in a loving, supportive community in which mistakes and errors are perceived as opportunities for learning and in which self-worth and identity are judged according to one's consideration for others and one's constructive contribution regardless of size. With emotional growth deadened and material functionality portrayed as the means to material wealth - considered a practical indicator of success, the individual is prompted to obsess on strategy, tactics, manipulation, deception, calculation - rationality.

Addiction is an indicator of their behaviour.
While substance abuse may be added to their method of activity, their major behavioural pattern is spiritual abuse - lies for their personal spiritual gain at the expense of the hopes, dreams, and plans of others. Most often, SCAM artists steal from the poor and waste the monies on themselves, with pride. They begin their work by presenting themselves as having qualifications, contacts, or opportunities which they do not have. In reality, they portray the role of an individual for whom they have little respect and whom they have no intention of becoming. In return, they reward themselves for how well they are able to deceive others into believing that they are caring, generous, god-fearing, law-abiding professionals. To the degree to which they are successful, they gush pride and self-flattery over themselves to the point of ecstasy.

When discovered, they can appear remorseful or indignant.
Either way, they longer-term behaviour will confirm their lack of responsibility, their lack of dependability, and, their lack of trustworthiness. Little to their talk and you will always be manipulated. Evaluate their longer-term actions and you will discover their true identity. Do they really know the persons they speak of? Can you independently confirm the success of their program, their referrals, their statistics? How long have you known them? Have they ever sacrificed time and/or resources for your benefit without your having asked and without any context of payback? Do they routinely speak with compassion about the poor and disadvantaged and abused, or with sympathy or derision or false concern? Are their behaviours truly indicative of an honest person, or just an ambitious one? Addicts who SCAM come in all genders, ages, races, health - but none of them will appear ignorant, slow-witted, or boring.

What drives this individual?
To the extent that this individual has felt, and enlarged upon with obsessive fantasizing, the painful destructive emotions of rejection, abandonment, humiliation, toxic shame, and betrayal - so also will this individual take delight in the sophisticated, and often sanctioned acts of reprisal against all of humanity - from which acceptance is sought. This individual, who may have been plied with material benefits in exchange for emotional attention and consideration, will, like the rage-filled person, never hurt enough people deeply enough to satisfy the deep well of emotional loneliness which has replaced the spirit. They are the product of a destructive society turned back upon itself like a cancer: a replicant, moulded without spirit, providing a facade of appropriate emotion and rationalization convincing enough to persuade the real persons who become victims that he or she is a real person. Their achievement will be to gain your trust where they have not earned it.

The victim is also part of this equation for without persons who want to believe the proposal presented as SCAMS, they could not be successful. SCAMS fundamentally offer the victim the potential to turn a small investment of capital and/or energy into a profit, gift, or winning of much greater size. In a capital-based economy with a capital growth ethic, the average individual often becomes imbued with the perspective that without a special circumstance it is impossible to improve one's lifestyle to a higher level of material appreciation than they already have. This is particularly true of those individuals who by virtue of their religious beliefs try to avoid participation in obvious exploitation of others through the manufacture or sale of useless or substandard goods for high prices. In a much reduced manner, they may rationally choose involvement in a SCAM because they justify it as a means to gain the capital with which to do good works.

Other participants will have developed a much more cynical, though perhaps realistic, indictment of their economic and government system and believe, based on gossip and experience - that those persons who seem to "get ahead" do so by cheating or manipulating "the system." A SCAM often suggests that the victim can legally cheat or manipulate this system which is obviously repressive of the hard-working and well-intentioned person.

The first error in the choice of participation is to believe that because the majority of the society appear to be following a path, regardless of its inappropriateness and basic lack of spiritual benefit, that you must do so also: "When in Rome, do as the Romans do." It is this rationale which has justified the torture, imprisonment, enslavement, and execution of millions of fellow humans. When Rome is full of evil, pray and meditate for direction. You may be guided to leave "Rome". You may be guided to stay and work at risk to life and liberty for improvements in the cultural norm. You may be guided to work for improvement for a time and then leave, or, the reverse. The options are many, the solution is individual.

The participation of each of these individuals rests upon trust, and, that is the second error in the choice. Increasingly with the development of non-band societies, humans have been encouraged to give their trust to human authorities, who, increasingly have done less and less to earn it. In the tribe, a leader emerged because they demonstrated that they were capable of self-sacrifice and empathy. Too soon, the individual worth of the leadership individual was transferred, by spurious rationalisation, to the kin and clan of the leader. This process sometimes worked well through expectation, assumption, and maturity. At other times, devastation grew from immaturity, illness of spirit or the jealousy of the deprived. Nations developed and with them the positives and negatives of leadership by authority grew in their influence relative to the power available. Industrialization removed the individual from the potential self-sufficiency and possible enslavement of the agricultural native to the full enslavement of the wage and salary worker. Now expectations of control over one's economic present and future were surrendered to managers and owners who had no basis for a guarantee of reliability beyond that of expectation.

Still, those "authorities" who failed were quickly forgotten by the masses who were constantly motivated by real and fictional stories of a few managers and leaders who were successful. Industrialization and urbanization progressed; teenagers and youth were given rights and freedoms for which they had done nothing to earn. And so humans became trained to give trust to politicians, religious leaders, military commanders, teachers, police, corporations, scientists, doctors - who increasingly acquired their title on the honourary basis of having complied with theoretical achievements, which were referred to as "work" and deemed equal to earned real-life practical achievements because of the personal sacrifice (bribe) of time, effort and monies given to the institutions concerned. A fundamental influence which allows SCAMS to prosper now is the fact that the majority of the population has learned to transfer their trust to others who appear to have earned it. Appearances can be deceiving.

The mass media are also a part of the equation which enables SCAMS to be perpetrated on the public for without their silence there would not be the excuse of ignorance often evident in the victims. Such lack of public awareness encourages each individual to believe that, because of the evident size of the SCAM (many involve thousands and tens of thousands of victims) and the lack of public criticism of same, the SCAm in question must be legitimate. If it were not, wouldn't the newspaper or television network broadcast the details and a warning to the customers they serve? In most of these opportunities, the answer is no. Approach almost any mass media representative in North America with the details of a SCAM and request them to alert the public and nothing will be done. Sensationalism is sought, not truth, not justice, not reality.

Mass media editors and producers will often have a list of excuses why they aren't interested in the truth. You will be told that unless the perpetrator of the SCAM has been arrested, charged, tried, found guilty and sentenced - there is no story. By that time, tens of thousands of people may be needlessly victimized. And perhaps 1% of those persons operating SCAMS are ever caught, tried and sentenced. Others will tell you that unless you bring forward numerous persons who have demonstrated that they were stupid enough, greedy enough or naive enough to be involved, and, provide copies of documents to substantiate this humiliation, and, forfeit any civil case they may be contemplating before the documents are used in a trial - there isn't a story: it won't sell - there aren't names to dramatize and faces to capitalize on. And the perpetrators are confident that their targets are not that humble and welcoming of public derision.

Still others will tell you that you don't have evidence that this SCAM reaches very far - perhaps only a few people have been victimized. Few people who have been victimized in a SCAM are familiar with numerous other participants. It they were, how would they have made the same mistakes? Yet the perpetrators of the SCAM may willingly provide an interested party with the details of how many "victims" they intend to defraud before closing shop and starting anew. ALL of these concerns can be avoided by the mass media simply providing an overview of how a particular SCAM works, without names and faces. If you know what it is and how it works and fundamentally why it will fail, why would you participate. And if no one participates, SCAMMERS die on the vine and no one gets victimized. But most editors and producers "know" that the public, imprinted with a continual diet of movie, television, novel and news story drama would be too bored by simple reality to read, listen or view such a mini-article, let alone learn from it.

The state is also part of the SCAM equation for without their sanction, the perpetrators of such SCAMS would find themselves in jail without consideration for parole and for long periods of time. Instead, the legislators of the North American oligarchies have debated the rights of the accused and the guilty to a point of protection from responsibility and compassion and forgiveness without remorse. These antithetical moral principles are the result of verbal battles fought in halls of power with the only goal being self-flattery, pride, and the intellectual persuasion of like-minded, and it would seem, spiritually weak individuals. Thus, simple legal solutions to the problem of mail and phone SCAMS will continue NOT to exist for at least the next ten years. SCAM perpetrators are aware of the legal restraints of jurisdictions.

Thus, it is common for them to locate their offices in a state or province and only promote participation from other states or provinces. They know that a victim from out-of-state cannot lodge legal proceedings against them without the expense of a lawyer in their own state and a lawyer in the state from which the SCAM is operated. They are confident that you, as a victim, will either not have the $10,000 to $40,000 in funds required to carry out such a civil suit, or, that you will not wish to risk losing that much more. They are also knowledgeable of legal procedures in such situations and know that they can extend pre-charge periods by appearing to offer repayments, negotiation, and good intentions - which they have no intent of enacting. Meanwhile your legal bill continues to rise. While your activities are directed to institutional paperwork and delays from apparent administration problems or miscommunication, they continue to SCAM others.

If you are rich enough and persistent enough to continue your efforts over a period of months or years and come close to criminal charges or a civil court date - they will then simply pack up and leave the state or province. Within a month, they can be in full operation from a new location, with a slightly or radically different SCAM. A simple solution would be for state and provincial governments to harmonize their laws within the federation they belong to as a nation. Even simpler would be to make it a crime to advertise or notify someone of a gift or opportunity involving the payment of monies when there is no independent public authority which holds the gift or winning sum for distribution and enforces the impartial selection of winners or participants. Principles of full and honest disclosure usually have the appearance of being followed yet there is no effective state enforcement of same. Indeed, there are examples of governments which deceive their own citizens.

As an apparent sanction of SCAMS, state, provincial and national policing forces in North America are provided with almost no funding for personnel to investigate reported SCAMS. Perhaps One SCAM per year will reach the prosecution stage, nationally. Perhaps three will be investigated. More than 600 will be in operation, with as many as 50 or 60 originating in one province or state. One individual may set up and operate as many as 5 at one time. Meanwhile, over 160,000 individuals per year (some reports indicate millions) are swindled of money and hope. And the numbers are compounding by at least 10% annually.

As the extended name here attached to SCAMS indicates (Spirit Compromising Attitude Management Schemes),
the true long-term human loss from such unrestricted activities is not simply a loss of money. Persons who have been victimized often become chronically anxious, angry, distrustful, intolerant, rigid in their thinking, resistant to change, self-depreciating, avoidant of challenge and ruthless in their judgement of persons found or suspected to be guilty of other crimes. For some, the process may take two, three, four - even five participations in different, though possibly related SCAMS - before they become infected by the spiritual weakness and infantile emotional level of the perpetrator. The, the now "infected person" acquires one or more energy blocks which may enslave them to behaviours and perceptions which devour their remaining spiritual strength. Unless they are exceptional, they will emerge from the experience(s) as passive doomsayers or active manipulators. Some will become new SCAM perpetrators - doing unto others what has been done unto them. A society filled with persons who are all SCAMMING each other is a hell-on-Earth.

There were choices - for the individual, for the media, for the state, for the culture.
When those who are given the power to protect - by educating, by instruction in coping skills, by strengthening one's ability for responsibility and self-management, by providing order, by providing justice - fragment and diffuse that authority with rationalizations of avoidance and "passing the buck" and denial, the trust of those who provide the power will be lost. In human history, once political trust is lost, it is never regained. Instead it is taken by a conqueror or given to a dictator. Human leaders and authorities make poor spiritual mentors. Ask and you shall receive - but the slave doesn't know what a request is, doesn't know that a request can be made, doesn't know how to make the request, has no confidence that grace will be sent. Are you a slave?

1987 -
The World Military Expenditures and Arms Transfers, 1987, reports that of the top 10 arms importing nations in the world, 5 of them are in the Middle East. Even the poorest Third World countries borrow hundreds of millions of dollars annually to buy huge supplies of weapons. As soon as the developed nations have designed a new version of a weapon, their arms salesmen find some poor country that will acquire the old version at the expense of social enhancement programs. There is now one military weapon and 4,000 pounds of explosives for EVERY man, woman and child of the human species.

1987 - During the year,
Cosmonaut Yuri Viktorovich sets a new public record when he returns to Earth after 326 days aboard the MIR Soviet space station.

1987 - On February 15,
The San Jose Mercury states that the Pentagon has a Black Budget which has become a "Black Hole" for SECRET Projects spending. It is far bigger than the federal budget for education or transportation or agriculture. These projects are classified above Top Secret, therefore, very few federal investigators have the security clearances necessary to audit black programs.

1987 - On February 27,
President Jose Sarney of Brazil suspends all interest payments on the $148 billion national debt. Annual interest payments on the foreign financed debt have reached $10 billion. Brazil's economic inflation rate has been among the world's highest, reaching triple-digit figures during 5 of the past 10 years. The monthly increase in the consumer price index have and will go as high as 1,510% on an annualized basis. Within a year, rents will be up by 974%. Wage indexation laws have provided for the government's own employees to receive pay increases every month as compensation for rising prices, but when the finance ministry tried to stop that endless spiral in 1986, the Brazilian military ministers quickly blocked such reforms. The country's constitutional Congress will pass measures seeking to nationalize foreign-owned mining companies and limiting the rights of foreigners to explore for oil.

Most of the economy's troubles are a hangover from the military regime that ruled Brazil from 1964 to 1985, using overseas borrowings to finance it's country's overly ambitious and misguided expansion of some sector of agriculture and industrialization. Many of the military leaders received their military and academic training in the USA. They learned about agricultural practices which were economically productive in the temperate grasslands of North America; Brazil is a largely tropical jungle ecology. They also learned the value and power of money and how it can provide great opportunities to expand one's iniquities (envy, gluttony, greed, lust, pride, sloth, gambling, alcohol and drug use, etc.). Partly from the misguided expectations that what was suitable in North America should be suitable in Brazil, and, partly from greed, capital-intensive economic policies were instituted in an effort to replicate North American prosperity. Capital-intensive programs for a non-industrialized country, or for one which is not stealing capital from another - results in increased national debt.

The industrialization and religious myth that more people provide a stronger base for a modern economy was adopted. Already having growing urban slums in 1964, huge capital-intensive jungle clearing programs were instituted to provide new farmland. Poor families were given landholdings and a small capital grant or loan to move to these distant fields. Capital-intensive roadways were required to open up and service the new agricultural regions. Humans from industrialized societies did not understand the jungle and took no time to find out. Within 3 years of deforestation, the new lands would be sterile - unable to reforest and incapable of productive cropping. Wastelands grew in the wake of wholesale slaughtering of the jungle. Native hunting areas and legal preservations were broached by developer and settler. Natives who resisted the loss of their lands or the restrictions of their activities were shot with automatic weapons bought with foreign capital. Economically poor families moved from city slums graduated to agricultural slums. The jungle clearing continues. Birth control programs are rudimentary or non-existent. Viable programs for local manioc production to resolve malnutrition and hunger problems have never received serious attention. And the national debt increases.

As also happened in American history, native reservation lands were sometimes found to be located over precious metal and oil resources. Using new American satellite reconnaissance systems and aircraft mapping techniques, courtesy of the CIA, the country was intensively mapped and a degree of aerial geological prospecting was completed. Much of the later data went to influential North American resource development companies capable of capital investment and/or bribes to officials. Some of the richest prospective mineralization areas were within territories preserved for the aboriginal people by treaty and it was soon discovered that taking these lands was more cost-efficient than purchasing private ownership properties. If the inhabitants died off or moved, the land was free.

Missionary candidates known to be infected with, or purposely infected with illnesses to which North Americans are resistant and to which Brazilian natives have no immunization resistance (measles, etc), were sponsored into these areas. Rather than bringing the grace of God to these largely peaceful tribes, the ministers brought deadly illnesses which typically eradicated 80% of the natives. After cursory confirmation and surveillance by cooperative or deceived and naive missionaries, private mercenaries, hired by the CIA and North American companies decimated the tribes in the contentious areas by dropping explosives on them from helicopter and light aircraft and using automatic weapons. Surveying, bribes, weapons, mercenaries: capital cost which raised national and private debt.

Brazilian officials had bought the American Dream: mortgage your soul for material gain.
International bankers had also bought into the mindset of spontaneous agricultural and industrial development in an ecology where humans had existed for ten of thousands of years in balance without either: they freely advanced capital with the promotional backing of the American federal government and mass media, and the enthusiasm of Brazilian officials educated in the North American language of commerce: material exploitation, mass concentration and control of human resources, high profits. And the banks believed they had a guarantee of profit on any amount of capital advanced because it was advanced on short 3- to 5-year terms at variable market setting interest rates. They competed for who could grab the biggest chunk of the gold: national debt interest. If Brazil defaulted permanently (bankruptcy?) foreign bankers might lose $1.5 trillion in unresolved loans in the flood of default likely to follow from 121 other developing countries which shared similar economic problems.

1987 - In March,
Increased USA-CIA involvement in the Philippines was mandated by President Reagan when he approved a "finding" which suggested little hope for improvement of the economy or civil rights in the Philippines under the leadership of the Marcoses. $10 million in additional funding was provide to the CIA for the next 2 years support of the Marcos regime. It authorized the Agency to hire Filipinos to spy on each other. It included technical assistance, helping the Philippine military with intelligence gathering, providing computers, computer training, and other assistance.

Marcos assisted the decision with unsubstantiated and uninvestigated reports of secret Soviet arms shipments to the NPA, the alleged presence of Soviet advisers in NPA training camps. Civil frustration in the countryside had led to the formation of vigilante groups which declared that you were either with them or against them. The Marcos controlled mass media raised paranoia in the cities by declaring that the Communists were about to takeover at any time - whatever that would mean to the commoner. Christian fundamentalist movements like joy of the Lord Jesus , the Word of Life International , and Heaven's Magic preached fear and hatred against an unseen Communist menace. Most aggressive was the political arm of Reverend Moon's Unification Church, CAUSA International . It held conferences on National Security in Manila which mirrored the early meetings of the German Nazi Party, the American Klu Klux Klan, and the American John Birch Society. There was a rise of death squads to meet the hysteria.

1987 -
Operation Majestic-12 becomes public knowledge with the release of photostats of previously classified "Above Top Secret" U.S. Government documents.

1987 - By April,
Wallace S. Broecker, a geochemist at Columbia University, in speaking before the USA Environment and Public Works Committee of the US Senate stated:

"The inhabitants of planet Earth are quietly conducting a gigantic environmental experiment. So vast and so sweeping will be the impacts of this experiment that were it brought before any responsible council for approval, it would be firmly rejected as having potentially dangerous consequences. Yet the experiment goes on with no significant interference from any jurisdiction or nation. The experiment in question is the release of carbon dioxide and other so-called greenhouse gases to the atmosphere.

1987 -
R.E. Kenward provides a current review of biological telemetry strategies in his Wildlife radio tagging: equipment, field techniques and data analysis . He notes:

"Biologists use animal radio tags for two main purposes: to locate study animals in the field, and to transmit information about the physiology or behaviour of wild or captive animals. ...

Wildlife radio tags were first used for telemetry. One of the earliest projects, inspired by the use of physiological telemetry on U.S. Navy test pilots, resulted in an implanted transmitter to monitor chipmunk heart-rates (Le Munyan et al., 1959). ... The construction of these first tags, in the late 1950s, was crucially dependent on the development of the transistor. ...

Tags for tracking by satellite have been used since the early 1970s ...."

Consider how different human-based technology is today from its minor presence several hundred years ago. If a visiting spaceculture was as little as 1000 years in advance of that of humans, what degree of sophistication of tracking could they place on humans?

1987 - On April 26,
The U.S.S. Pennsylvania, the newest USA Trident model nuclear submarine, is described in the mass media.
It represents the destructive power of 18 previous submarines; 12 more are on order.
It costs 2.7 billion dollars to build. It carries 24 missiles with a minimum of 14 individually targeted warheads per missile. The D5 warheads used, has an accuracy of within 100 yards from a submerged launch positioned up to 10,000 miles from the target. Each of the Trident warheads is capable of delivering the explosive force of 75 - 100 kilotons. That is, one submarine is capable of targeting 336 to 408 cities and strategic points and delivering a total of 2,500,000 kilotons of nuclear explosive. A 15 kiloton device destroyed Hiroshima and over 100,000 people in 1945.

1987 - On June 4,
The USSR Early Warning System of 9 geosynchronous satellites was completed with the successful launch of Cosmos 1849. A 4-year test program began in 1972 with operational deployments in 1976. All were launched from Plesetsk in highly elliptical semi-synchronous orbits to provide overlapping detection ability of both routine launches and missile launches. Launch vehicle failures and stranded or orbital breakups delayed the full operation of the system.

1987 - During the year,
A 6.7 Earthquake occurred 18 miles along the Elysian Park Fault "A", which begins in downtown Los Angeles. Following the local earthquake in 1983, petroleum geologists studied seismic maps of the Los Angeles area and southern California in general. The hills in the area had been a source of petroleum created by the pressures of thrust faults. The ancient hills so formed were found to be often concealed below seas of sedimentary deposits. Rock samples and the use of sound waves revealed a number of Blind Thrust Faults with one, the Elysian Park "A" Fault being found directly under Los Angeles. The earthquake had occurred just several months after the fault had been discovered. Scientists would rationalize that in the future, numerous small quakes were more likely to happen than several huge ones. Over the next few years 100 active faults would be discovered situated underneath Los Angeles, including faults which ran through Santa Monica and Hollywood.

1987 - By July,
An "Arizona Patriots" terrorist action is foiled and 3 men are sent to prison on minor charges.
Within 3 years all would be released. Centred in the Kingman, Arizona area, the tribal organization had developed in reaction to increasing federal government control and monitoring of individual activities and continuing secrecy and deception of government military and intelligence agencies in their honest and open release of information to the public about UFOs, visiting spaceperson cultures, the real risks of nuclear war and global catastrophes and the apparent consistent global political and economic conspiracy which the senior American decisionmakers were involved in. The lack of information, the increasingly apparent government use of disinformation tactics and the unannounced Executive Orders which had the capacity to suspend civil liberties increased the concerns of those individuals who already had been disadvantaged by a government which had been more concerned about armamentation and industrial profits than about the provision for instruction in positive coping skills and truthfulness with and confidence in their citizens.

Members of the right-wing (personal independence) group contrived a spectacular plot in which the monies stolen from an armoured car enroute from casinos in Laughlin, Nevada, would be used to finance the bombing of federal buildings in Phoenix and Los Angeles. A mortar and machine-gun attack on Internal Revenue Service (IRS) workers in Ogden, Utah, had also been planned. Some of this enmity was derived from the employment of the IRS of officers who were pressured and rewarded for finding real and apparent tax evading citizens and then prosecuting the individuals to the maximum extent of the law, and under considerable duress, - during which the innocent as well as the guilty were treated with a minimum of respect, a lack of negotiation, and reduced civil rights.

Some of those individuals had not evaded their taxes intentionally, were living a near subsistence lifestyle and were hard working and trying to improve their financial situation to one which would be fraught with less desperation and uncertainty. They also did not have a wide range of positive coping skills, such as positive self-esteem, meditative and prayer abilities, trust and open communication, tolerance, negotiating skills, good health, .... If the American government continues to avoid placing a priority on the mass educating of these types of skills, the resolution of increasingly endemic poverty and the possibility of an economic recession - more disadvantaged Americans will be encouraged to react with negative attitudes and behaviours: suspicion, distrust, anger, intolerance, hatred, conspiracy and violence. The selection of priorities is the greatest challenge for any human government executive. Their selection determines the history of their nation.

1987 -
The U.S.A. has 20,000 metric tons of radioactive waste awaiting permanent disposal.
It is estimated that within 25 years more than 200 commercial reactors worldwide will cease operations and will have to be dismantled. Even as recent as 1977, low-level waste was dumped in landfills almost anywhere. Millions of people now live near or above forgotten nuclear waste burial sites and daily, more wells are being contaminated by radioactive waste seeping into the water supply.

1987 -
A Diphtheria Epidemic broke out in the USA this year.
The deadly disease would continue to spread during 1988, 1989, and 1990.
A deadly contagious infection which has been known for hundreds of years, the basis of the disease is a common streptococci bacteria found in the throats of many humans. When this bacteria becomes infected by a certain virus, a highly toxic to humans poison is produced as an excretion. This infected bacteria is then designated "group A strep."

Symptoms include a sore throat, runny nose, hoarseness, ill feeling, fever, fatigue, heart and nerve infections. A gray membrane may form in the throat on the tonsils and the throat walls in the vicinity, or, at a wound in any other mucous region or skin wound. If a heart infection develops, the pulse may become rapid, heart rhythm may become erratic, blood pressure may fall, and nausea and vomiting may develop. If toxic neuritis develops, symptoms can include the development of a nasal tone to the voice, regurgitation of food through the nose, an inability to swallow, motor (movement) nerve weakness, and a numbing of chest and hand and feet nerves. Largely transferred through the air from infected persons, the incubation period is typically 2 to 7 days.

A difficulty in treating the disease effectively is that a diagnosis must be made before tests can be used to determine if it is one of a number of similar-symptom illnesses. As a preventive measure, an immunization is available; to remain effective, booster injections should be taken every succeeding 10 years. For already active cases, diphtheria equine antitoxin is the most effective remedy - given in increasing concentrations relative to the progression of the disease. Antibiotics are helpful in reducing the infection if given for 7 to 10 days. Absolute bed rest for at least 3 weeks is usually indicated with a hot saline throat gargle 3 to 4 times daily. High doses of timed release vitamin C will help reduce pain and provide an antibiotic effect. Hawthorne extract in well-filtered water will help strengthen the heart. In severe cases, oxygen administration may be required. In warm, humid climates, a chronic skin ulceration may by a symptom. Mortality is typically 10% to 30%.

1987 - About September 1,
"Peter Cardinal", a name given to a 10-year-old Danish disease fatality, had died in the Nairobi Hospital with a combination of extreme symptoms that suggested a Level 4 highly contagious and highly fatal virus. The boy had come to Africa only 2 weeks before to visit his parents and older sister. On his arrival, the family had travelled by car through Kenya to Mombassa. There, Peter developed red eyes, and weakness. His mother, afraid that he might be dying insisted that the Flying Doctors take her son to the Nairobi Hospital.

Dr. Silverstein, who had taken care of Dr. Musoke some years earlier, found Peter's lungs to be "fluffy" and his breathing laboured - suggesting early pneumonia. Shortly afterwards, Peter's extremities began to turn bluish and red spots appeared over his skin. Suspecting Marburg Virus, Silverstein had his staff take precautions. Within 24 hours, Peter was on a respirator and experiencing abnormal liver functioning. The small red spots grew into larger spots and began changing to bruises. With pupils dilating, bleeding around the brain was suggested. Lastly, Peter experienced "third spacing": he bled into the space between the skin and the flesh forcing the skin to puff up like a bag. Peter's brain was dead long before his body.

Several days later, a sample of Cardinal's blood was delivered to USAMRIID biohazard expert, Eugene Johnson, at the Dulles International Airport, near Washington, D.C.

Johnson picked up the cardboard box of samples and drove it to Fort Detrick, Maryland.
There he took it to the Level 3 staging area and used the Level 4 glove boxes to open the protective metal container which held several vials of Cardinal's blood serum. Over the next several days, Johnson confirmed that the virus was extremely destructive against monkey and guinea pig cells and against live monkeys. A virus does not usually kill its normal host as effectively so the virus had likely originated with a less complex species. After a week of inquiry, Gene Johnson heard from Nairobi that the boy had visited Kitum Cave on Mount Elgon, western Kenya. Both he and his sister had explored the cave. The difference was that he was an amateur geologist who wanted to collect several specimens of the crystals in the cave. While in the cave he had used a rock hammer to chip away some of the rocks and crystals. Doing so would have dispersed some of the bat guano and crystal fragments into the air allowing them to be easily breathed in.

1987 -
An American movie for cable television, "Control", filmed in Italy and staring such famous actors as Kate Reid, Ben Gazarra, Burt Lancaster, Kate Nelligan - recounts a fictional portrayal of what is expected to happen if an atomic bomb shelter experiment were to be conducted. Some of the participants become defensive, paranoid, and violent and in the process exert coercive autonomy over the majority. The theme: "There is no shelter from the bomb, even in a shelter." Intended to stimulate a public outcry for international nuclear disarmament and peace as the only constructive alternative to nuclear annihilation of humanity, the movie receives poor reviews.

Critics largely emphasize the poor, in their terms, quality of the production with little discussion of the content. The producers develop the concept that the further construction of bomb shelters only increases the destructive belief that a nuclear war must occur, thereby sabotaging active public support of disarmament and prevention. This pleases politicians who abhor the prospect of increased tax expenditures for civilian defense. Ignored by the producers and by the politicians is the fact that people who have a plan, have made preparations for a catastrophe, and, have practised the procedures expected to be necessary - often do not panic should such a situation arrive, can be compassionate and empathetic to others, and, are often the most committed to ensuring that such procedures remain unnecessary.

The military-industrial complex and the organized crime business recognize that no disarmament talks in the past 40 years have resulted in any reduction in nuclear armaments. Any reduction reported in the next 5 years will largely be the result of faked media promotion or the retirement of missiles and bombs which are now so old as to be unreliable and hazardous due to corrosion of their parts. Because the movie represents a reflective, disturbing, depressive expectation - it proves largely non-constructive in its outcome. The media find that it lacks the humour, optimism, action, excitement, fantasy, and over-dramatization which has become and will remain the attraction of television: unreality. The producers have followed the destructive trend of the decisionmaking elite of mass societies by trying to use coercive psychology to motivate political action rather than providing hope and self-esteem through the promotion of positive coping skills. It's more successful to save one human at a time than to try and save everyone at once.

1987 - On October 16,
A Major Storm over Britain disrupted lines of communication and blocked many routes to London.
The London Stock Exchange closed early as a reaction to the difficulties. Winds in the storm were stronger than any experienced in southern Britain in the previous 200 years, with gusts exceeding 80 mph (130 km/h). More than 19 million trees were uprooted in just a few hours, some falling on iron railings with such force that the spikes were driven deep into the timber.

All of the above occurred in spite of a forecast of mild weather by the Meteorological Office only hours before the storm reached southern Britain. The total reported financial cost of this natural disaster was 1.5 billion pounds ($2.2 billion).

On the next trading day, Monday, October 19, a crisis threatened when most of the Earth's stock markets went into a free-fall of pricing. More value was lost in stock price declines in that week than had been lost in the stock market crash of 1929, during the same period of the year.

1987 - In November,
General Secretary of the USSR, Michael Gorbachev holds a secret meeting with the top leadership on the anniversary of the Communist Coup of 1917. Reported by British spy, Sir William Stephenson (codenamed, Intrepid), Gorbachev directs that the USSR must adopt policies that "stops the US Strategic Defense Initiative (S.D.I.) and puts the Americans to sleep." Stephenson went on to conclude in his report that the West would accept the apparent reality of Soviet actions and proposals at their great peril. It should be remembered that Gorbachev was head of the KGB and that USA President George Bush was head of the CIA: both have represented the most senior positions of the most powerful political intelligence agencies, familiar to the public, which direct the global involvement of the 2 most militarily powerful human nations. The reported text read:

"Gentlemen, comrades, do not be concerned about all you hear about glasnost and perestroika and democracy in the coming years. These are primarily for outward consumption. There will be no significant internal change within the Soviet Union, other than for cosmetic purposes. Our purpose is to disarm the Americans and let them fall asleep. We want to accomplish three things: One, we want the Americans to withdraw conventional forces from Europe. Two, we want them to withdraw nuclear forces from Europe. Three, we want the Americans to stop proceeding with Strategic Defence Initiative."

1987 - In December,
An ex-policeman is abducted in Great Britain.
The shape of the alien is described as having elephantine ears, long arms almost dragging to the ground, and almost club-like feet. While out in the early morning to take some sunrise photographs the man confronted the alien. It ran away, and the man ran after it as though to catch it! It turned and waved him off, then continued on. Next, the man sees a saucer-shaped object rise from behind the trees and take off. He goes home and doesn't remember anything further. Afterwards, while being interviewed in a state of hypnotic regression, he describes being taken aboard a craft which is highly illuminated inside without having any direct light source, very cold, and a hospital-like environment.

1987 - During the year,
There were 15,005 reported oil spills.
The USA EPA would estimate that there was an ongoing 10,000 oil spills each year.
During the period 1973 to 1984, 660,403,040 litres (174,460,567 gallons) of oil spilled in U.S.A. waters alone. The USA Coast Guard estimated that it would cost $10 a gallon to clean up the spills. Over $2 billion would have had to be spent during the 10-year period by the government for the cleanup. Most of the time, nothing had been done. With over 400 million vehicles on North American roads, the requirement that called for such a risk was largely cultural in origin.

By 1990, in the Los Angeles basin, there was an oil spill equivalent every month, except for brief winter breaks, with roughly 378,540,000 litres (10 million gallons) of petroleum-type products being spewed into the air causing the city to fail federal clean-air standards every 2 or 3 days. According to Larry Berg: "That's why kids in L.A. have a 10% to 15% decrease in lung capacity by the time they leave high school. On some smoggy days, it's the same as breathing battery acid." Day in and day out, in the Los Angeles area, commuters and truckers get into 7.6 million vehicles and drive a total of 376 kilometres (234 million miles) on area roads and freeways, dumping more than 6,000 TONS of pollution into the air daily in the process.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1988 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

Shakedown; Punchline; Alien Nation; Deepstar Six; Rain Man; The Vanishing; High Frequency; Funny Farm; A Cry in the Dark; The Vanishing; My Best Friend is a Vampire; The Dead Pool; Child's Play; Without a Clue; Gorillas in the Mist; Moving; Willow; The Blob; Crusoe; A New Life; Bird; Return of the Killer Tomatoes; Messenger of Death; The Night Before; Viper; Torch Song Trilogy; Pulse; Watchers; Cocoon: The Return; Tequila Sunrise; Shakedown; Hot to Trot; The Outer Space Connection; Married to the Mob; Permanent Record

Underground FEDERATION bases are established near Telos/Shasta, California, Denton, northeast Texas, and central Nebraska.

1988 - By January,
"Hitachi Zosen Corporation" of Japan, in cooperation with Nagoya University and jointly with the Hiroshima Prefectural Agricultural Experiment Station, developed an unmanned vertical takeoff/landing (VTOL) aircraft. In the same category as the American unmanned Aerial Vehicles (UAVs), the craft is square-shaped (about 3 m on each side) with a 1 m diameter rotor mounted on each of its 4 corners. Flights are remotely controlled from the ground. The rotors are enclosed in cylindrical ducts, so the craft can fly about safely between buildings. The cylindrical ducts are made of fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) that is lightweight and highly resistant to shock. The vehicle flies at 36 km/hr maximum at a preferred minimum altitude of 5 meters and can fly up to 200 meters from the transmitter.

It is currently being used to spray agricultural chemicals (pesticides) for which its underside is equipped with a spraying system. A flight lasts 20 to 30 minutes and roughly 2 hectares can be sprayed in a single flight. The chemicals are sprayed near the roots of the farm crops through low flights and downspray from the rotors. Conventional spraying methods are less efficient and have much greater potential for negative health influences on nearby humans and spray drifting to adjacent properties.

Hitachi is a multi-national conglomerate with 33 research laboratories located in Japan, Europe and the USA. It employs 16,000 persons and has a strong research and development department with a budget of almost US $2.5 billion. In 1979, the HITAC M-200H (Super-large-scale computer) utilized high-density, super-high-speed LSIs in the world's highest level of performance for its intended uses in manufacturing, wholesale, banking, insurance, securities, transportation, electric power and gas supply, printing, broadcasting, newspaper publishing, government agencies and university research institutions.

1988 -
Andrei Kokoshin, a Soviet military spokesman, states:

"We consider electronic warfare (radio-electronic combat) the most promising defence because we do not know what weapons the United States would deploy in space ... Electronic warfare has the potential to interfere with radio and laser, upset computers and feign targets. The technical means to do all that exist ... I am confident we will be able to paralyse the SDI monster without destructive means."

1988 -
Tobacco smoking mothers are found to give birth to babies which frequently mature into sexually defective adults.
Biologists Annabell C. Segarra and Fleur L. Strand, at the University of New York, are finding that female offspring in such circumstances develop sexual abnormalities such as increased ovary weight, delayed puberty, and a shortened interval of time between fertile periods. Adult male offspring behave less sexually, copulated less, had depressed male-hormone levels and preferred salty solutions to regular ones. In conclusion, Sagarra noted: "The developing reproductive system of the fetus is especially sensitive to drugs or hormones."

1988 - By February,
The Standing Armies of Humanity total 32 million soldiers.
With complete war mobilization, those nations could field armies of 570 million troops: all of these troops exert a direct restraint on the ability of the majority of humanity to live lives of moderate material adequacy by the cost of their equipping, administration and training. At the same time, while problems of a global context threaten life on the planet of Earth, groups of humanity are preoccupied in conflict with each other over what is presumed will be available in the future and over avenging wrongs which have been done in the past.

"Reshaping The International Order", a Club of Rome report, has estimated that 50% (500,000) of ALL scientists work on weapons improvement research, while over 40% of all funds spent on scientific research are focused on armaments. This represents tangible, real, chosen commitment on the part of humans to develop technologies of destruction and continue to mentor, inspire, promote, condition and otherwise motivate younger humans to expect a life of anxiety and frustration in which competitive achievement is the norm and in which war is a likely reality.

This addiction, (for what self-directed intelligent culture would choose such a direction) has proven quite effective in the calculated stifling of the human spirit, resulting in its willing enslavement to chemical and behavioural addictive (obsessional) patterns. The result continues to be:

   	- increasing inflexibility of response;
   	- increasing predictiveness of reactive response;
   	- decreasing ability to cope constructively with reality;
   	- increasing intensity of perceived frustration, acting out of denial;
   	- emotional desensitization.

Like domesticated animals, made willing slaves of their masters - humans increasingly appear to have surrendered their ability for self-direction (freedom), their sincere quest for truth as a condition of coping with reality (awareness), and their capability for recognizing the availability of options (intelligence). An invading spaceculture desirous of settling on or within the Earth have little to fear from human opposition: it can be so easily manipulated into self-destructiveness.

The annual arms trade in 1988 has grown to almost one trillion dollars.
Global human problems influencing quality of life and survival could be eliminated with a small fraction of this investment. Yet the result of current practices has left the Arab nations surrounding Israel with 300% more artillery and tanks and 500,000 more mobilized soldiers than the combined armies of NATO. Leaders of Arab nations have repeatedly threatened to destroy Israel.

1988 - In the Spring,
Eugene Johnson of the USAMRIID, had persuaded the US Army to sponsor and the Kenyan government to authorize a biohazard investigation of Kitum Cave, the suspected site of 2 earlier filovirus outbreaks. Gene arrived with 20 shipping crates of biohazard gear and scientific equipment. There were 35 team members including wildlife naturalists, doctors and labourers.

The Cave was closed off to the public for the duration, test animals were placed in cages throughout the cave, biohazard suits were used by all of the staff when in the cave, and local animals and wildlife found in the cave were tested for evidence of the Marburg virus. Birds, rodents, hyraxes, bats, flies, ticks, guinea pigs, monkeys, cattle and some of the local Masai were tested. Large animals like the elephant, antelope, leopard and cape buffalo were bypassed. After 30 days, no evidence of the virus was found.

1988 - During the late 1980s,
"Mad Cow Disease", a viral multi-host disease infected and resulted in the death of tens of thousands of cows.
Normally placid agriculturally herded cows became agitated with some becoming aggressive while others became quite fearful of people. As the disease progressed, the animal became weaker and weaker, eventually losing the ability to stand, and finally, dying. The disease was found to be transferrable to cats and other animals, including some humans, by the eating of infected meat.

1988 - By April,
Crop Genetic Uniformity was the caution expressed by Pat Roy Mooney, co-founder of "Rural Advancement Fund International", an Amsterdam-based agricultural research organization; he is also a lecturer in agricultural economics. His concerns included:

"... of the world's top 10 leading seed companies, 7 are connected to pharmaceuticals and to crop chemicals. They now want (a) monopoly for plants (as they have) for drugs (through patent legislation). ... Plant breeder' rights in other countries have encouraged uniformity - sometimes called chrome-and-tailfin breeding or "me-tooism" in research.

... companies take successful varieties and make minor cosmetic adaptations in order to be assured of both a patent and a market. The result is a proliferation of brand names but greater crop vulnerability. ....

Every significant pesticide manufacturer in the world is now concentrating, through biotechnology, on the development of plant varieties that will survive spraying by the company's herbicides.

Where once we had breeders who prided themselves in developing pest-resistant plant varieties, corporate breeders now focus on pesticide-resistant plant varieties. ... our food system will be faced with more chemical residues. Crop uniformity creates a market for crop chemicals."

What would happen if transportation and capital resources were interrupted for 3 years and you could not purchase the herbicides without which your crops could not survive?

1988 - By May,
RU-486, an antiprogesterone agent, has been developed by Professor Etienne-Emile Baulieu, in France.
If taken shortly after a missed menstrual period, it provides a 96% chance of inducing a miscarriage. As such, it is being considered for use as a delayed contraceptive. Opposition by anti-abortion groups in the USA would discourage American pharmaceutical companies from openly manufacturing it and lead to a black market supply and distribution network. During 1989, Baulieu would receive the Albert Lasker award for his lifelong work with steroid hormones - which led to his discovery of RU-486, after almost 40 years of work.

Each year, the World Health Organization (WHO) estimates that about 200,000 women die from unsuccessful surgical operations. Another 500,000 die from crude abortions done in unhygienic situations by unskilled persons. Still others die from complicated miscarriages. Some doctors in all countries still perform D and C's (dilation and curettage), the scraping away of the internal lining of the uterus - without anaesthetizing the patient so that she will intentionally be forced to "suffer for her sins." Of course, the men involved in the relationship, the state religious and educational facilities (which could inform the people of effective contraception methods, and, the politicians - who could maintain better educational, health, counselling, and financial assistance programs - are all denied responsibility for their contribution to the sought abortion.

Progesterone is a hormone which during the second phase of a woman's menstrual cycle is essential for a successful human reproductive function. In the uterus, this hormone protects the developing embryo and fetus by promoting the attachment of the egg to the uterine wall. RU-486, as a progesterone antagonist, breaks the bond between the fertilized egg and the uterine wall, and the egg is expelled. A single dose (600 mg) of RU-486 must be taken within 3 weeks of a missed period for reasonable effectiveness. 48 hours later, the patient is given a small dose of prostaglandin, another hormone, which influences the woman to shed her uterine lining as would happen in a heavy menses.

In some pregnancies, the delivery of a full-term, normal baby when the cervix doesn't open well could be facilitated by the use of RU-486, thereby eliminating the need for Caesarean section surgery. Use of the anti-hormone has also led to a marked reduction of pain for women with endometriosis. Some breast cancer tumours have also responded well to its administration. At least one form of Cushing's disease has benefited by RU-486 inhibiting cortisone and reducing the excessive adrenal function associated with the disease. Birth defects in infants not aborted after the use of RU-486 have been non-existent. Regarding hormone awareness and research, steroid hormones in the brain relating to memory would not yet be discovered for another year.

Initial marketing of RU-486 began in September, 1988, but was initially limited by misunderstandings, the political necessity to standardize procedures associated with its use, and, by intolerant pro-life activists. Spiritually, all individuals make their choices before God and are responsible for the results. By 1990, popular media would refer to RU-486 as an abortion pill.

1988 -
The Noll Family, while driving at night in the desert, in Australia, had their car lifted by a UFO, which then put it down with such force as to blowout a tire. Fifteen minutes later, a tuna fishing boat had a similar incident of being raised and lowered. After each experience, one unknown to the other, the voices of the abductees changes for a short period "as if they had been breathing helium". OMNI magazine, an American science publication, tried to make light of the Noll experience with a mundane excuse that did neither take into account the second incident, their similarities, or the change in voice which the participants of both were observed to have. (January)

1988 - During May,
The Soviet MIR spacestation receives a high velocity particle impact against one of its twin-pane portholes.
A window crater and fracture lines are left over an area of 6-8 mm.
Through concerns over the increasing amount of space debris in orbit, external shutters are added to the portholes.

1988 - During May,
High-temperature powder metallurgy aluminum alloys, as replacements for titanium in aircraft structure materials are announced publicly by "Lockheed Aeronautical Systems". Cost savings of 50-70% have been forecast for the alloys that can be made and processing will be by techniques similar to those used in making customary aluminum. Prospects for a continued increase in the demand for titanium will drop over the following months; demand will not.

1988 - In June,
The BLONDS rebel against the GRAY's increasing impatience and attempts at precipitating a human nuclear war.
Several underground bases in western U.S.A., previously under the direction of the Federation of Peoples of the Orion and Milky Way Galaxies are split into Orion-human and GRAY-human bases with their connecting tunnels sealed off. For the first time, the humans involved in these covert activities become aware of the deception which has been put to them by the GRAYs.

Since the 1930s, the GRAYS had told various human groups a variety of the following:

   a) They were from a galaxy in constellation .............;
   b) they had been forced to seek relocation elsewhere when their sun died;
   c) they had influenced human life for a long time;
   d) they had bioengineered humans to become "intelligent";
   e) they had founded most of the major religions to bring peace to humanity;
   f) they had created Jesus Christ and engineered his resurrection;

   g) they were back now to assist the "best" nation to rule the world;
   h) they now had to prepare to stay on Earth permanently;
   i) they needed genetic material from humans to assist their own re-engineering;

   j) human leaders believed that they had to remain secret to not create panic;
   k) they would transfer some of their technology in exchange for assistance;
   l) they would not mutilate or harm any more humans in their experiments;
   m) they would quietly abduct human subjects for experimentation;
   n) the implants they used were only to monitor human behaviours and responses;

   o) the senior human leaders approached were conceited, proud, greedy, envious 
          and co-dependent enough in their obsessions to believe all of the above.

After reviewing the written histories, spoken concerns and political communications of human groups, the GRAYs had concluded that religion was a unifying factor for humans and that its elements were increasingly, and effectively being used to manipulate the human masses. As live human "drones" were more valuable to them than adversity promoting corpses, the GRAYs followed the strategy of human leaders: power by deception. Aware that humans were particularly easily influenced by a visual experience, and possessing advanced holographic projection technology - they manufactured a realistic "re-enactment" of several major human elements of history surrounding religious scenes. One of these was the life of Jesus Christ. Further aware that humans had an inclination to show reverence for power and technology and to fear that which was unlike themselves, the GRAYs changed their appearance in the sight of humans and concentrated on the advantages of power which the human leaders would gain from their assistance.

Many of the rationales for their presence and their requirements were demonstrated now to be deceptions.
The truth was as follows:

   A) They were from a galaxy in constellation SIRIUS;
   B) they had chosen to spread and colonize elsewhere in the universe;
   C) they had not influenced human life for a long time;
   D) they had not bioengineered humans;

   E) they had not founded any of the major religions;
   F) they believed that the life of Jesus Christ was a political deception;
   G) they would work with whomever would be easiest to deceive and held power;

   H) they now intended to stay on Earth permanently;
   I) they needed genetic material from humans to assist their own re-engineering;

   J) human leaders believed that they had to remain secret to not create panic;
   K) they would transfer some of their technology in exchange for assistance;

   L) they would not mutilate or harm openly as many humans in their experiments;
   M) they would abduct human subjects with the aid of government disinformation;

   N) the implants they used were to monitor and direct human behaviours;
   O) the senior human leaders approached were conceited, proud, greedy, envious 
          and co-dependent enough in their obsessions to believe all of the above.

The World Order had financed movies and books promoting the possibility of "friendly, docile, emotional, weird-looking" GRAY spacebeings arriving on Earth in the near future and of the status quo necessity of approaching such beings with confidence and friendship and the reverence due to a lifeform which was highly technologically advanced to all of humanity. Now the World Order had a MESS. It had to prepare for a REAL threat to the freedom and existence of humanity by a spaceperson culture which was already on the Earth, with its sanction, and prepare to obstruct it, WITHOUT alarming the common population.

The strategy had to be, based on the historical human patterns:

   	1. Consolidate human worldwide technology;
   	2. Conduct real battlefield tests of the most modern weaponry;
   	3. Begin to allow the dissemination of real facts about the GRAYS;
   	4. Encourage the mass media to keep the populations distracted;
   	5. Organize a true World Government ASAP;
   	6. Do whatever is necessary to achieve points 1-5.

1988 - During the year,
"R.J. Reynolds Corporation" introduces the ultracool cartoon character of "Joe Camel" as its marketing image to pre-teens in North America. The character shoots pool, rides motorcycles and associates with attractive women.

1988 - By June,
The number of spacecraft & space probes being launched annually by the Soviet Union has reached 150, while the U.S.A. has a launch schedule of 100. The Russian Academy of Science controls more than 300 basic research institutes. The Soviet Union was launching cheaper, simpler, short-lived spacecraft rather than the more highly technical, expensive and long-lived American efforts. Soviet engineers have a superior ability to find simple solutions to complicated problems, construct strong and large devices and to build for practicality than their American counterparts.

1988 - On June 8,
"Project Beta" is described in a letter from Paul F. Benewitz.
Its goal is to find, inventory and propose ways of destroying Alien bases. One such base was found in New Mexico; it is now abandoned. NASA film aided in the locating of the base and revealed USA military involvement. GRAYs helped the military to build a working flying saucer, Atomic Powered. Two women and a boy exposed to radiation burns by the craft have not received any assistance from the government for their medical bills. Another group called "ORANGE" is based on the west slope of Mt. Archeleta near the "Diamond".

1988 -
Don Schmitt, an investigator with the (Aerial Phenomena Research Organization) (APRO) in Tucson, Arizona, was interviewed by Captain Kevin D. Randle, USAF, ret. on the then current trends in the UFO situation. He responded that

"There has been more interaction as far as an open approach ... close encounters of any kind are way down. We're not getting the (reported) occupant cases as we used to through the mid-1950's and especially in 1973. We certainly are getting more abduction cases, however. So its ... showing more of a direct approach, more motive, and more purpose. But yet it's more secretive. That's where we're concerned. That these are legitimate experiences and that it's gone underground. And, they're now picking people at will. ... We are getting an increasing number of cases where they describe the two as working together. The humanoid with the human-appearing entities during the course of the abduction (working with the aliens). ... these are not the norm. ...

Where we have to be careful is with people who aren't looking for that release.
This feeling that something else happened. But we cannot create an entire scenario that only accentuates their difficulty, their whole problem, making it all the more difficult for them and making it that much more difficult for their spouses."

1988 - During mid-June,
A Toronto, Ontario Bankers' Third World Debt Summit met to try and find and offer solutions to countries considering permanent default of their excessive foreign loan balances. In jeopardy was $1.5 trillion in unresolved loans to 122 developing countries with major debtors including Brazil and Mexico. Basic policies advocated in order to keep these "customer" nations "on board" supporting international capitalism included these:

1. Extension of repayment of principal terms from the original 3 or 4 years to 20 years or longer;

2. Reduction of and stabilization of interest rates on the current loans;

3. Forgiveness of interest payments outstanding, in some situations, in return for a resumption of payments;

4. A return of the status of defaulted countries to creditworthiness so that renewed economic activity would permit new tax revenues to service the outstanding debts.

1988 -
Elliott Abrams, an Architect of Ronald Reagan's anti-communist crusade in Central America would later recall what happened when he complained to the Guatemalan strongman of the day about the army's alleged complicity in the murder of two Guatemalan citizens working for the U.S. Agency for International Development (AID). The two men were communists, declared the strongman, General Oscar Mejia Victores. Even so, said Abrams, murdering them was wrong. Replied Mejia: "These are necessary evils." More than 100,000 civilians would be killed.

A State Department official would later add:
"If you want to know about scum, you have to recruit scum." But scum sticks to whoever employs it.

1988 - During June,
"The War On Drugs", introduced by President Ronald Reagan's administration was now being reconsidered as the next American Presidential election was approaching. USA taxpayers had been paying between $10 billion and $14 billion each year for a program which had contributed to the extension of federal powers over the individual, an extension and centralization of civilian surveillance and policing, and an increase in public reaction against the abuses that were likely to emanate from such an authoritarian, coercive, and manipulative approach to culture shaping.

Drug-related problems were costing USA workers at least $40 billion in lost earnings during 1983 alone.
Strict enforcement of drug laws did little to influence that figure.
In 1986, 824,100 drug arrests had been made by state, county and city drug-enforcement officials.
Federal arrest added more. The sheer number of arrests were crippling the USA court system and overloading the prisons. Prison construction and incarceration was at an all-time high. At this rate 10% of the American population would soon be in prisons. The illicit drug industry had passed the $trillion mark.

The new proposed policy of the Reagan administration was that government make most - or even all - drugs legal. During 40 years of deception and manipulation by White House administrations, national security institutions, the advertising industry, the defense and energy industries, and the political and academic status quo - many Americans had lost faith in themselves and their political system and their economic future. Despair, conditioned immaturity, and traumatic personal experiences had conditioned many into rebelliousness or docility - each feeding the other. Honesty and awareness was the first step in the healing - to be avoided. Without that, no programs of drug rehabilitation would turn the tide, and few were proposed. The authoritarian prohibition approach to law and order had NEVER worked. The empowerment of the individual through skills training and awareness had never been long-term nor focused and could never succeed while billions of dollars promoted social anarchy. Why would an administration simply adopt a position of defeat: no options except abandonment? What could be done to regain a unified spirit between Americans?

1988 - By July,
96 Serious Nuclear Accidents had been tabulated by the "Center for Defense Information".
Such incidents were individually capable of starting a nuclear war and/or resulting in an extensive ecological disaster. The number did NOT include an additional number of more than 50 incidents kept secret by the USSR and its allies nor 10 incidents remaining secret within the USA defense bureaucracy.

Developed countries are currently spending less than 1/2 of 1% of their annual military budgets on international aid. It is not unusual that 50% of the international aid received by a country will carry with it a stipulation that it be used to purchase armaments from the granting nation. This ensures that the granting company to both receiving accolades in the public press and the common political circles for their generosity, while in reality, the granting nation is simply deceiving its citizens into supporting the home-origined armaments trade.

1988 - On July 18,
The building of a new Titanium pigment plant in the USA is announced by NL Chemicals.
No other plants have been built in the USA since 1978 although utilization of titanium has continued to increase in its applications and quantity. With new government motivation, in North America, to ensure that lead-based paints are replaced with safer alternatives, the titanium pigment industry has been given a long-term boost.

In addition, demands by environmentalists for paper manufacturers to use chlorine bleaching less because of the harmful chemicals released during manufacture and paper incineration (dioxins and others) has also boosted the industry. Titanium dioxide can be used as an alternative to the bleaching in order to attain a bright white product without toxic consequences for humans. Further, the utilization of titanium dioxide in consumer product plastics has demonstrated an economic and environmental advantage in by such products keeping their new white appearance much longer than the typical product which "yellows" within several years.

"NL Chemicals" will be building their new plant in Lake Charles, Louisiana.
Start-up: 1991. The new plant will be based on NL Chemicals' proprietary chloride process. Titanium pigments are used in the production of paints, plastics, paper, ceramics and fibers. World demand at the moment is estimated at 3 million tons per year with USA demand expecting to reach 1.1 million tons in 1988. The new plant will cost $200 million and produce 90,000 tons per year of titanium pigments. It will boost NL Chemicals' titanium pigment production to 445,000 tons per year, that is, over 13% of world supply. NL is already the Earth's 4th largest pigment producer with sales of $750 million. It's total corporate sales exceed $1 billion. All of the new plant's output will be marketed in the USA to alleviate a growing dependency on imported supplies. This is expected to improve the USA trade balance by $180 million/year.

Titanium esters, formed by the reaction of Titanium Tetrachloride with alcohols are becoming useful as waterproofing agents for a variety of natural and synthetic fabrics. The tetrabutyl and tetraisopropyl esters hydrolyse in moist air to give the dioxide - and, can be used to provide thin, transparent, and adherent coatings. Other compounds are being considered as flame-retardant additives for cellulose fabrics and as a cross-liking agent in lacquers so that on drying, the resulting film becomes inert to solvents. Each of these applications could further expand the use of titanium into the consumer market where the advantages of quality, utility, safety and health and environmental benefits are becoming more of a concern. Once again, the reactive properties of titanium and its resultant stable products, in the Earth's atmosphere, have been found to have positive potentials.

1988 - In July,
"Uniform Capital Guidelines" are published by the Basle Committee: "International Convergence of Capital Measurement and Capital Standards".
They would be slated to come into effect globally on January 1, 1993.
Because of a year-end in March, the Japanese had an action date of March, 1993.
The standards had been under consideration since first set out in 1977 under the title, "Second Banking Co-ordination Directive" and associated measures (2BCD). Their intent was to set minimum standards for banking capital reserves relative to the risk of the assets in the bank's possession and the risk of the lending and investment liabilities which the bank had taken.

A bank involved in international business was to have a minimum capital reserve of 8% of its risk-weighted assets. The standards were agreed to by the Group of Ten, which now included Switzerland, for a total of eleven nations, in December, 1989. Other countries would agree later, to avoid sanctions or to obtain the benefits of "membership". Now each country had until 1993 to modify their national banking laws to mandate and authorize the changes. Many would be late.

Basle Committee chairman Peter Cooke said:

"Capital standards in international banking have been eroded, are continuing to be eroded, and should be eroded no further." Given the dangers of international lending, capital levels also needed to be rebuilt.

A permanent subcommittee was left to spend its time at looking at proposals for new forms of capital-raising. But as ever more complex financial instruments are invented, it becomes increasingly difficult to decide whether the funds should be regarded as high- or low-risk varieties. Stock market would continue to be unreceptive to new issues of bank stock (considered a risk-less asset).

Special types of lucrative bank stock would be created in an attempt to force the market.
At the same time new forms of securities, such as derivatives, were introduced onto the market and difficulty followed in trying to assign them a risk-weighting. Risk exposure from changes in foreign exchange or interest rates had not even been considered yet as reserve levels had proven to be the panic.

In general, capital elements were divided into two categories.
Tier One included paid-up share capital/common stock and non-cumulative preferred stock.
Tier Two included loan loss reserves, perpetual preferred stock, mandatory convertible debentures and subordinated debt.

The total of Tier One could not be exceeded by the total of Tier Two.
A "Solvency Ratios Directive" defined capital into a minimum ratio of capital to risk assets and further stipulated how risk was to be assessed and calculated for those assets. Essentially, a core (that is, basic) capital reserve equal to 3% of the total assets of the bank was to be maintained.

In addition, for risk-based capital, 8% had to be retained - a minimum 4% Tier One and a minimum 4% of Tier Two type. In other words, safe banks could "lend" out as (the equivalent capital) much as 89% of their assets earn income. The weighting of the asset determined how much of it you could hold relative to your reserve level. Typically, higher income assets yielded a higher risk of default or loss.

Risk Weighting defined by the 2BCD Basel Directives were as follows:

Riskless Assets: (0%)
- cash, preferred stock, gold bullion, gold certificates, U.S. Treasury securities;

Depositor Services : (20%)
- demand deposits, cheques in process, letters of credit, short-term claims;

Medium -risk : (50%)
- residential mortgages, private mortgage-backed securities, municipal bonds;

Higher-risk lending : (100%)
- high yield bonds, consumer loans, commercial loans, industrial development bonds, joint ventures, exchange rate controls, etc.

The higher the risk weighting, the higher the reserves desired for safety.

CAMEL (Capital, Asset, Management, Earnings, and Liquidity) ratings were introduced to measure the relative soundness of a bank. Ratings ran from 1-5, with 1 being given to those with the best performance. The ratings would be used by banking supervisory agencies to evaluate bank condition; those with a rating of 4 or 5 would be placed on an alert list. The ratings would be disclosed to bank management but not to the general public - no sense causing a panic. No controls or supervision would be available for banks involved in the insurance business, banks owned by non-financial institutions, or private banks. The principles of the plan would not become public until 1993 and then would NOT be carried in most mass media.

Michael Blandon, an informed writer in banking literature would write in 1993:

"What went wrong? The banks forgot the basics. Lending money carries risks.
There was a frenzy of competition to attract funds and to pass them on to borrowers - both at home and internationally - during the boom years of the 1980s. The result was that margins on lending were squeezed to an extent which ignored the possibility that when the world economy turned down, the banks would need to cover their backs against the threat of loan losses. ... Particularly in the international markets, banks borrowed ... at market-related rates rather than on interest-free current accounts. ... as the banks started to get into trouble and their own status in the marketplace deteriorated, many of their large clients found they could borrow more cheaply in the open market than could their own bankers."

1988 - During the year,
A UN survey estimated that 1.25 billion urban dwellers live with unacceptable high levels of air pollution.
In the East German city of Bittefeld, 90 to 100% of children had respiratory diseases.
In Athens, death rates were 6 times higher on heavily polluted days than on those when the air was relatively clear. In Hungary, the National Institute of Public Health concluded that "every 24th disability and every 17th death ... is caused by air pollution."

1988 - During the summer,
An Updated BMEWS (Ballistic Missile Early Warning System) became operational at Thule, in northern Greenland.
A new $80 million phased-array antenna, 50 m high and 122 m long, had been added for better detection of ICBMs approaching from the north. Similar improvements had been announced for the Fylingdales Moor station in Yorkshire, England. The new antennas are much smaller than the previous football-field-sized earlier ones and the giant spherical radomes previously dominating the landscape. The Fylingdales modification should be completed in 1992 and represents a $200 million contract to the Raytheon Co.

1988 - On July 18,
"NL Chemicals", a Titanium manufacturer, publicizes its intent to build a $200 million, 90,000 tons per year titanium pigment plant in Lake Charles, Louisiana. Start-up is expected to occur in 1991. No titanium pigment plants have been built in the USA for the past 10 years. The new plant will be based upon NL Chemical's proprietary chloride process.

1988 - During the year,
An Earthquake occurs in northeastern Armenia.
It is the strongest earthquake in Soviet history.
25,000 die and numerous towns and cities are destroyed.

In 1989, Mikhail Gorbachev would pledge that cities in northern Armenia would be rebuilt within 2 years.
In 1991, the Soviet Union would fragment politically. Armenia would be left a newly independent impoverished republic with less than 1/2 of the rebuilding completed in the better areas and less than 20% completed in other areas. By 1995, little additional rebuilding would have taken place.

At that time in Gyumri, a northeastern city, previously known as Leninakan, almost 50% of the 250,000 population would still be living in shipping crates and temporary shelters - rated as suitable for 2 years maximum of use and now entering their 7th year. Subject to leaking ceilings, rotting floors, cold, poorly or non-insulated mould impregnated housing - the prospect of epidemic chronic illness would rise. With most factories closed, unemployment high, water and hydro utilities undependable, heating supplies inadequate, government interim financial support minimal, the following factors continued to increase:

   	- minimal washroom facilities;
   	- overcrowding;
   	- poor sanitation;
   	- malnutrition;
   	- incidences of criminality;
   	- tuberculosis incidence;
   	- cholera incidence.

During 1994, the World Bank would advance a US$ 28 million loan to restart the rebuilding programs.
Samvel Mkhitarian, the construction manager of the World Bank would advise that "International experience shows that a disaster of this magnitude usually takes 16 years to repair, even in much more stable and well-developed countries. Arthur Khachatourian, a World Bank logistics officer would reflect: "Year by year, it's becoming worse. The economic situation isn't changing. People feel like they're in a big prison." Suicide rates would be climbing and people would be increasingly dependent on aid.

While the earthquake could have been prepared for and warning issued beforehand, IF humanity had set spiritual skills and self-sufficiency abilities ahead of the security and material benefits of dependency education and employment, such was not the choice. Will this become a future tend of hell-like existence for increasing numbers of humans?

1988 - By August,
Insectigone (diatomaceous earth / silicon dioxide) an insecticide "made entirely of natural, non-toxic (to humans) substances" is being marketed by "Chemfree" in Pascal stores and major garden centres in the Montreal, Quebec, Canada region. The talcum-like powder kills crawling insects such as earwigs, cockroaches, ants and spiders within 20 minutes by cutting into the insect's protective shell, causing dehydration and death. Yet the product is considered completely safe for humans, even if accidentally swallowed by children. Reasonably available as a basic inexpensive substance, many who become interested in the product will simply purchase and use the raw material. For this reason and the reasonable market price of the product, extensive advertising cannot be cost-justified. Much more toxic (to humans) and less effective chemical agents of much higher price will continue to be extensively promoted and used.

1988 - By August,
Sidney Lens, in his historical research on disarmament agreements considered and entered into since 1945, concludes that out of a total exceeding 6,000 negotiating sessions, not one thermonuclear warhead has been destroyed in 43 years of agreements. Strategic Arms Limitation Talks (SALT) have largely considered the removal from service of aging military hardware with the full acknowledgement that such devices would be manufactured into more modern designs which promise increased accuracy, dependability, destructiveness, complexity, and technology dependency.

1988 - In August,
The Iran-Iraq War ends.
Pressure on Iraq would be exerted enthusiastically by the Sabah ruling family of Kuwait inspired by top-level CIA involvement. Saddam Hussein of Iraq wanted compensation for his war debt from Saudi Arabia and Kuwait, as well as settlement of the long-standing Kuwaiti-Iraqi dispute. The Iraqi's believed that the Kuwaiti's had encroached on Iraqi territory and was siphoning off Iraqi oil either directly, or by slant drilling along the border. This was likely an error, but the refusal of the Kuwaitis to allow a confirmation through an inspection of their drilling operations would only encourage the Iraqi's to assume that the Kuwaitis were stealing their oil.

1988 - After August,
The USA "Anti-Drug Abuse Act" is debated and brought into law by the 100th Congress as Public Law 100-690.
It was the next step in the global plan.
It would not be announced formally to the public until September 6, 1989.
Powers suggested in the anti-drug strategy then would include ousting those persons "suspected" of associating with drug dealers or sellers from public and private housing; mobilization of the National Guard and the USA military to fight addictive drug trafficking (not including alcohol, tobacco, coffee, or prescription drugs) in the continental USA; confiscation of property belonging to drug users; incarceration of first time offender drug users in work camps.

There was no hint of a recognition of the originating factors of hard drug use, no program to reduce or eliminate those factors, no programs for treatment and support towards health lifestyles and attitudes. While billions of dollars had been spent to create the problem, no one was interested in spending money on constructive research which would challenge the medical norms and status quo and lead to both an understanding of the addictive process and a cure from it. Material rationalism and capitalist market expansion were being forwarded by ignorance, fear, paranoia, a desire for control, and greed. .

1988 - By September,
An official Soviet Mars probe is postponed from 1988 to 1990.
It would subsequently be postponed until 1992, then 1994, then 1996.
The European Space Community, which had developed many of the experiments and instruments for the mission was becoming especially annoyed before 1994. A follow-up mission was expected to put a balloon in the planet's atmosphere and a rover on the surface; it was originally scheduled for 1994. By then, it was rescheduled for 1998.

1988 -
The SWIFT network is expanded to allow for broker-dealer and security firm access.
Security transfers and redemptions are added to the network services which facilitate the exchange of payment messages around the world and enable invoicing and receipt of payment to be effected within minutes.

This completes the first level of factors necessary to effect the support and growth of the capitalist world economy by maintaining a growth in reserve capitalization amounts despite cultural factors which are headed in the opposite direction of influence. Noteworthy factors include:

   A. Gold certificates have been used extensively for funding since 1973;
   B. The Basel Concordat committed banks to assist each other since 1975;
   C. Third Country Acceptances > payment in the $$ of the "seller" since 1977;
   D. CHIPS revisions led to settlement at the end of the day, since 1981;

   E. Eurodollar deposits become acceptable for USA banks, since 1981;
   F. The Group of Seven determine to stabilize economic policy, since 1986;

   G. SWIFT facilities are extended to broker-dealers & security firms, 1988;
   H. Capital Adequacy regulations for reserves have been set out since 1977;

   I. The Marcos had been removed from power and were under indictment.

International banking reserves were low and quickly diminishing as a recession was setting worldwide and depositors were using their savings to pay off debts, pay down mortgages, make direct purchases, support themselves through unemployment, pay for retraining, assist disadvantaged sons and daughters, purchase securities rather than accept low bank account interest. All nations had their citizens complaining of high taxes and high deficits were just beginning to become a concern. An increasing proportion of taxes was simply being required to pay the interest due annually on the national debt. More taxes could not be used to increase the supply of gold certificates. Gold bullion could not be purchased directly, unless you had a budgetary surplus - something which capitalistic nations had avoided for decades. What could be done to maintain and raise the level of banking reserves to prevent world currency meltdown?

The central banks could not legally purchase non-governmental securities UNLESS they were risk-free AND had an established market value. Pools of capital and bullion had been growing for decades, secretly, and, technically, illegally. Since the 1930s, Swiss banks had been providing numbered and special accounts for use by the dictators, generals, underworld and high income earners of many countries. For the first time, Swiss banks following the Basel Concordat, opened their confidential records to the US Treasury Department. Together with the assistance of the CIA, they identified 6 major sources of what they considered illicit funds - some of which had been obtained with, or "hidden" with the assistance of the CIA:

   1.  The accounts of the Marcoses;
   2.  The account of the Shah of Iran;
   3.  The accounts of the American Mafia;
   4.  The account of an American billionaire and tax defrauder;
   5.  The accounts of SE Asian underworld triads;
   6.  The accounts of South American junta leaders.

As they were "discovered", they were "seized" and made available to a Trilateral Commission which with the assistance of the Swiss banks in question, began issuing original source corporate capital debentures in US $100 million values, which, of course, were guaranteed by the Swiss banks.

But these "raw" debentures could not be used to build bank reserves until they had established their value by being traded in an "open" market. Nor could the banks offer the Bonds for sale, as that act would be illegal. Through selective contacts with national accounting, legal, real estate, and investment house firms, an arrangement was offered.

The arrangement, in simplified terms, runs as follows:

1. The private prospective investor would approach the bank and submit a written "Letter of Intent" declaring that he was interested in buying Prime Bank Debentures (also referred to as Prime Bank Guarantee of Funds Certificates). The documents were, essentially, a guarantee by a Swiss bank that the capital described was on hand and in safekeeping at the bank.

2. The bank would then acknowledge that such securities existed and that they could be purchased.

3. The prospective investor would then be asked to offer verification that indeed he did have the cash required to make such a purchase.

4. When the prospective investor's bank confirmed the presence of the capital, held against any other use than this investment, the bank brought out a contract on behalf of a Trilateral front corporation.

5. The astute investor also asked about the possibility of arranging a sale for the to-be-traded securities and the bank concurred from the present market as to which central banking facility required an injection of reserve funding.

6. A contract was arranged between the prospective investor and the central, or major, bank to be involved.

For the investor not to lose part or all of the cash paid for the security, it was necessary for the security to change hands immediately to a new buyer - so as not to acquire further banking and exchange charges.

The investor wanted a profit from such a large and confidential transaction and it was provided.

1988 - In September,
Chemical Weapons were used as part of an ongoing search-and-destroy operation in Kurdistan by the Iraqi government under the leadership of Saddam Hussein.

It was not the first time that the Kurds had been gassed.
The British Army had killed thousands more by gas shells in 1920.
Neither incident incurred international penalty, thereby suggesting sanction.

The men, women, and children in the town of Halabja became the latest civilian casualties.

1988 - During the year,
Unmanned Aerial Vehicles (UAVs) and their development was centralized within the Defense Department under order of the USA Congress. The "Joint Project Office" (JPO) was created to oversee the unified program. Of course, this centralization would still not include "black" (secret) programs. Now that the programs were largely out in the open, their continuance would demand a tactical demonstration of their usefulness.

1988 - During the year,
Louis Rapoport, in his "Confrontations", reports and comments on Israeli life and the conflicts within Israeli society:

"Thousands of Israelis leave (Israel) every year for a period of study abroad, government or Zionist organization business, sabbaticals or just 'a break' to earn real money. A good many, even some of the aliya emissaries, never come back. These people are often the cream of the crop. ...

'I'm not sure anymore if Israel is the answer. Zionist goals are not my goals.'

Zionism, he felt, had been co-opted, or swept away, by those who believe in a Greater Israel or a religious Israel, who say that democracy is not really part of Judaism, and who easily justify the subjugation of another people. 'We Jews, who have been wronged by nationalism, are doing the same to our Arab neighbours. When you are in the army, and you are fighting, you have to believe in what you are fighting for. I had to ask myself, who is closer to being my brother, Arik Sharon or my Arab neighbours? There's no doubt in my mind - my Arab neighbours.

Those people who feel they must leave for economic, psychological or other reasons cannot survive on hope; they feel they have no choice. It is a painful decision for most of them. Why should they be burdened with guilt laid on thick by the self-righteous souls who think people are only looking for an 'excuse' to leave. That attitude is almost Soviet: 'We educated them, gave them everything, and then they spit in our faces and abandon us.' ...

I know a veteran Israeli, a man who has devoted most of his years to the Jewish people, ... His feelings had nothing to do with the economy, the horrible drivers, the maddening bureaucracy, the inefficiency or the everyday meanness some people encounter in the streets. He believes Israel is on a collision course with disaster, because the country's leaders do not deal with basic issues concerning national and religious identity, relations with the Jews outside Israel, and the Palestinian question. ...

Something is obviously wrong if only 60,000 American Jews have come to Israel since 1948, while at least 6 times that number of Israelis have gone to the U.S., the home of the largest Jewish population in the world, a land that has drawbacks of its own.

What would happen if, for example, a genuine land reform were enacted, if the land in Galilee and the Negev and the central plain were no longer held in trust for 'the Jewish people' but made available cheaply to Israelis and Jews abroad who want to immigrate to this tortured but vibrant land? What if a unilateral Israeli peace initiative brought results? What if honest pay were accorded for honest work, a total reform of the inequitable tax system? What if parasitical institutions, whose only product is red tape, were eliminated? Perhaps hundreds of thousands would come, and tens of thousands who want to leave would change their minds. For Israel, despite all the legitimate complaints, is a glorious place to live, and it does seem to have a special future.

1988 - By October,
The "1988 Annual Study of the UN Population Fund" has concluded that the amount of agricultural land available for human use is now decreasing. New deserts, largely resulting from overpopulation and eradication of forest and jungle landcover, are growing at the rate of 14.8 million acres every year. Over 26 billion tons of topsoil are lost each year and the tropical forests, which produce significant amounts of the planet's oxygen, are shrinking by 27 million acres per year. 1/3rd of humanity is approaching starvation; 3/4ths are malnourished, that is, undernourished or overnourished - out of balance. If you are not aware of this REALITY and the others presented in this document, on what reality are you making your decisions and interacting with those persons who make decisions on your behalf?

The human population on the Earth is growing at the rate of 220,000 people per day; 150 babies per minute. 90% of these are born in the materially disadvantaged Third World countries. In 20 years, 6 billion humans could be cramped into these countries. Social unrest and military autocracy is at its highest prevalence in such countries. At this rate of population growth and current rates of fatality, in 600 years there would be one person standing on every square meter of current Earth landmass. Obviously, long before that time, many humans would have starved themselves and fought each other to death in a desperate bid to survive. The influence of the activities of such masses of people would also have encouraged the possibility for the development of and pandemic of fatal diseases both currently known and unknown while climates would continue to become more extreme and agriculture less productive.

When European farmers invaded North America, there were regions with 6 to 10 feet of topsoil.
Erosion, lack of crop rotation, human induced climatic change, and, reliance upon harsh chemical fertilizers - has decreased that average surface layer of plant nutrition to 3 inches, with some areas having only 1 inch. In the latter case, one dry season could result in such lands becoming deserts as their topsoil disappears into the air. An investment of less than 1% of the annual expenditure on armaments - US $10,000,000,000., could educate most people about the long-term benefits of organic farming and the recycling of organic "waste" and sewage: a low-cost, non-dependency form of land regeneration.

1988 - By November,
"The National Emergencies Act" (50 USC sec. 1601) had been passed by the American Congress.
It conferred special powers in the time of war or national emergency to the President.
The President can invoke those special powers simply by declaring a national emergency, as in a banking or environmental crisis. Once invoked, the emergency powers are directed by the National Security Council and administered, where appropriate, by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) . There is no requirement that Congress be consulted before an emergency is declared or findings signed. The only restriction on President Bush is that he must inform Congress in a "timely" fashion -- he being the sole judge of "timeliness". Ultimately, the president's perception of the severity of a particular threat to national security and the integrity of his appointed officers determine the nature of any state of national emergency.

1988 - Beginning during this year,
The Bank of Canada would adopt a policy of mandating high interest rates for the purpose of eliminating and preventing inflation in the Canadian economy. Charged with the dual responsibilities, as the Central Bank of Canada, with both control inflation and encouraging economic growth - the balance of those priorities would be lost until the economy and culture were hopelessly ruined in the later 1990s.

Canadian business and political leaders have frequently received their later economic theory mentoring from American universities - either through early intellectual patterning, the political influence of prestigious American university (i.e. Harvard) journals and academic speakers, or, through their envy for the American system and the assumption that Canada was, or could be, a logical extension of the American system. The American model, at this point, has promoted the capitalist myth that lower taxes and greater individual freedom of choice would make for a more just society. In reality, their concept of greater individual choice is one of minimal government funding for education, medical and other social service programs.

This works well to favour the richer 5% of the American population who possess the majority of American investment (and interest income) assets and who can easily afford the expenses associated with private schooling, private health care, and, seldom need be concerned about being laid off, transferred or downsized from the companies which they own. The consistent reality of such a system is that the poorer participants in the society are continually exposed to the vagaries of economic and environmental mishaps and are continually targeted by the advertising media for exploitation: the services and products available to them are often inefficient and economically costly. Still, it is in the interest of the economically advantaged, and within their economic power - to perpetuate the myth that such a capitalistic system provides the opportunity and incentive whereby the ruthless and obsessed and fortunate person can, occasionally, "beat" the system and evolve into the higher earning levels of the culture.

Few cultures have more dramatically accepted the American myth of capitalism more than that of Canada. Buoyed by the idealism generated by excessive dependency of the electorate upon government funded education, health care, welfare, and a multiplicity of special interest support programs - Canadians have grown to desire lower taxes, as a nation of predominantly debtor participants, while expecting a wide range of government supported services to be retained.

Moody's Rating Service, an internationally referenced and respected securities rating service has become, and will continue to be, lobbied by "frantic" representatives of the Canadian Investment Community (largely occupied by Americans, Germans, Saudis, Chinese, and other non-Canadians) to lower the quality rating of Canadian government bonds. The oft proposed rationale is the desire to force political action into reducing the Canadian National Debt. The end and desired result is to raise interest rates and provide elevated incomes to the participants in the Canadian Investment Community (a general and informal classification of investors). The plan works, media and political paranoia regarding the National Debt is parleyed into a simplistic policy of stringent inflation control - and interest rates are maintained at relatively high rates for an economy in need of growth out of a recession.

The influence of the policy is predictable, drastic, and sustained.
Higher business costs reduce profits and result in companies, downsizing staff, becoming more aggressive and deceptive in their practices, and increasing numbers go bankrupt, merge, or fade into oblivion. Reduced employment will result in higher personal debt loadings, reduced spending, reduced taxation income to the government, increased government expense for social services, and, an increasing government debt.

Had a balanced approach been taken politically, greater employment would have provided greater government revenues and the possibility of lowered national debt levels while conserving social services. A rise in the value of the Canadian dollar would have increased the asset value of Canadian investments much beyond any losses from possibly lower interest returns. A largely unsophisticated, dependent, and naive Canadian public will allow their economy to be raped (forcibly seduced into submission) by the investment community. Much widespread hardship will result as the media and the politicians remain largely in denial.

1988 - During this time,
The Allagash River Abduction of 1976 began to be researched in greater detail.
Jim and Jack Weiner, brothers and two of the four participants had discovered in their communications that the nightmares which each had experienced over the past 12 years since the incident were nearly identical. They went to see Ray Fowler, a "lost-time" abduction researcher who regressed each separately through the use of hypnosis to the time of the incident. Each remembered almost the identical experience which they had not had conscious recall of earlier. Assembling the four men involved, each was tested by Earnest Reid, a polygraph examiner, to determine if they were telling the truth. All tested positive.

With the help of hypnotic regression, it was remembered, independently, that after the beam of light from the large, round, bright, yellow-white aerial object came to rest on them while they were paddling their boat to the shore, they felt as if their bodies were being pulled apart molecule by molecule. At the same time there was a sensation of pressure and heat. One then saw himself positioned on an examination table with the other three sitting on a bench nearby, naked. One of the brothers saw that a strange bipedal being of same or higher height with an insect-like head having unblinking large dark eyes was inspecting his brother with a wand of approximately 1 foot in length with a bulbous tip at the end. In fear, an anal exam was experienced and their minds were flooded with hologram-like images which forced them to be aroused sexually: a sperm sample was taken. After the experience, both Jim and Jack Weiner had noticed that their artistic and intellectual abilities and motivations changed dramatically.

Because the nightmares continued, Jim and Jack suspected that they were continuing to be abducted and had earlier been "tagged" in some fashion to enable the spacebeings to relocate them easily and quickly. They also began to suspect that the repetitive pre-teen experience which they had shared regarding a being they had termed "Harry the Ghost" was actually a visit from or an abduction by spacepersons. When they had mentioned the youthful experiences to their parents, the parents had simply laughed off the descriptions as childhood imagination. Since the relating of the experiences never gained the boys more than a passing notice, there was no motivation for them to "invent" the stories. Yet this does demonstrate the frequent response of parents toward children who inform them of experiences with which they cannot relate and of which they cannot understand: denial.

This reaction of denial appears to be more prevalent in human societies which follow a human authority basis and centralized political and educational system. Humans appear to normally be born with a considerable capacity for change, awareness, and reverence regarding perceptions of the unknown. In the more frequent form of authority-based human society, humans are conditioned to believe that all perceptions hold specific meanings as determined by past and present human authorities within the culture and that other meanings or observations are wrong or inappropriate.

While this social mechanism promotes a concentration of power and a reverence for human leaders, achievements and knowledge - it restricts the individual's likelihood of survival in situations in which personal, independent, innovative action must replace tradition-bound, group-dependent and narrow-optioned alternatives, strategies and tactics. All brittle structures eventually crack and crumble into dust under the challenge of increasing requirements for change.

1988 - November 19th:
Captain Kevin D. Randle, USAF ret., researcher and author concludes his book "The UFO Casebook" with these words:

"Ten years ago if you had suggested that the answers to the questions would be found inside, in libraries and archives and darkened rooms, I would have laughed at you, sure that the answers would be found in the burned areas on the ground, or the films being taken. Now, today, I'm convinced that the answers have already been learned by a select group of people. The answers to the puzzle exist, here on Earth, and it's going to be someone in an archive who's going to find them. That's an ironic thing. The answers to whether there is life on other planets is not going to be found in the field or by studying astronomy. The answer is going to be found in a library -- just where you've always been told to go to find the answers to the difficult questions."

1988 - During the year,
Operation Starwatch is initiated by the FBI with the intent of obtaining surveillance of drug smuggling activities taking place between Columbia and the USA. The plan is to sell Turbo Commander aircraft, considered to have the best capabilities for low level, fast flights of cargoes over longer distances, to the Colombian drug lords. Each aircraft is to be fitted with the latest electronic surveillance equipment to enable it to be tracked by satellites during its flights. The intelligence so gained is hoped to define the shipment routes and the end points involved in the drug trafficking trade.

An FBI front-company is set up in Memphis, Tennessee, to sell the planes.
Over the next 3 years, 50 planes, worth US $45 million are sold to the Columbian cartel.
The information obtained only confirms what is already known. The planes are used to transfer the drugs from Columbia to Mexico, Guatemala and Canada - from where they enter the USA overland. The USA Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA) warns the FBI that the Colombians know what the FBI is doing by the time the 10th plane has been sold and that the Colombians are laughing at the ineptitude of the FBI. In one instance, Canadian RCMP Narcotics agents catch a plane loaded with 500 kilos of drugs with the help of one of their informants. After more than 5 years, the program has been cancelled and the Londono family have been charged with money laundering: there have been no drug-related charges laid.

What facilitated the laundering of $45 million dollars was the following:

   1. It depended on the cooperation of the major USA intelligence agencies;
   2. Once approved, the bureaucracy kept it going in the hope of proving itself;
   3. Senior FBI officers were instructed by the NSA, to continue the operation;

   4. The DEA advised the FBI that the plan had been uncovered, and was ignored;
   5. Almost 40 American agencies share drug enforcement activities, separately;

   6. The CIA would not allow use of their best electronic bugs for fear of loss;
   7. Second choice tracking mechanisms were used;
   8. The NSA, CIA and Pentagon refused access to their satellites;

   9. The NSA wanted the drug trafficking to continue.

In the interest of National Security, it was reasoned as more dangerous to completely stop the supply of addictive drugs to a highly addicted population than to let it continue. A complete disruption of the supply would lead to an epidemic of individuals acting out as they responded to "cold turkey" withdrawal symptoms. That would result in the almost immediate revelation of who and how many persons in America were drug dependent. Such was expected to shock the average American on multiple levels. At least 1% of those addicted would be expected to die of sudden withdrawal factors including chemical shock, overdosing, suicide, violence. The suddenness of these 1000+ deaths was expected to provide an additional public shock.

Drug related crimes were expected to increase by 400% for a period of at least 2 weeks after such a restriction as addicts went through forced withdrawal or responded in desperation to purchase disappearing supplies at inflating prices. These crimes would include more-violent-than-usual thefts, robberies, spousal battering, aggravated assaults, rapes, manslaughters, murders. This drug "cleansing" of the country would justify the use of Presidential powers to declare a state of martial law and utilize the Executive Orders already passed to maintain order. This was not desired because the NSA and the President had a more urgent international political agenda to satisfy first.

Be warned. When a national state of emergency must be called, or, when any of numerous national or global catastrophes occurs, this drug-cult impact will be felt.

1988 -
Dr. Robert Birge of Carnegie-Mellon University reports that nonthermal microwave radiation could cause a change in the light-sensitive chemicals in the retina. This change was accompanied by the total absorption of the microwave radiation. It was suggested that Stealth-type aircraft could be made totally invisible to radar by being coated with similar chemicals. Details of this project are now classified.

1988 - By this year,
Suburban Contract Killings and Contracts in the USA begin to become noticeable and to increase.
At least 60% will originate in the home with disgruntled spouses, lovers or children initiating the request. Most will neither involve business, drugs or money. Most will originate in middle-class families and suggest an overt reliance on TV "reality". The trend suggests an increasing degree of emotional immaturity, an increased emphasis on the material aspects of a relationship and an increasing dissociation from reality and self-responsibility.

1988 - On December 2,
The Atlantis Space Shuttle (STS mission 27) was launched and incurred considerable exterior tile damage (125-175) during the maximum angle assent led to some concern. The Martin-Marietta $500 million Lacrosse satellite was deployed using the remote manipulator arm some 7 hours after launch. There was some difficulty in releasing the solar arrays to their full 45.8 m span. Lacrosse later used its own thrusters to place it in an orbit from which it could provide the NSA and CIA their first all-weather day/night metre-class imaging of the Soviet Union.

1988 - During the year,
Salman Rushdie, a London, England-based author, has his novel entitled "The Satanic Verses" published.
A popular author of children's stories, this would be one of his first adult novels to be published.
It would rush him into notoriety as the author made most popular by a Moslem religious leader's declaration that it was a privilege that any Moslem should murder Rushdie, and receive a reward of at least $1 million. The significance of this lies not with Rushdie but with the actions of the Ayatollah Khomeni, appointed spiritual leader of the Middle Eastern Moslems and new political powerlord of Iran. His declaration betrays the intent of Mohammed, the founder of the Moslem religion of Islam in that it refutes the dignity of life, admonishes followers to commit one of the worst spiritual crimes, mentors an abuse of power which mandates that coercion is preferable when the end result is rationalized as worthy, condemns the religious tolerance which confirms the spiritual strength of any religion, and, sets an example of ruthless egotism by a leader for those who look to him for guidance.

Nadine Gordimer, a reviewer, praises the novel on the book jacket:

"Abundant in enchanting narratives and amazingly peopled.
The "Satanic Verses" is both a philosophy and an Arabian nights entertainment.
What wit, what real warmth in Rushdie's thousand-eyed perceptions of the inferno within us and the vainglory of our aspirations! His ambitions are huge, and his creativity triumphantly matches them."

In the acknowledgements noted in the rear of the book, Rushdie qualifies, in part, his references to the Koran:

"The quotations from the Quran in this book are composites of the English versions of N.J. Dawood in the Penguin edition and of Maulana Muhammad Ali (Lahore, 1973), with a few touches of my own; ...."

First of all, the work is a novel and as such it is meant to relate a fantasy and not reality.
Yet, for the story to be successful in stimulating the reader, it must suggest the scent of reality in its portrayals and must persuade the reader to sympathize with the emotions and actions of the characters described. Perhaps Rushdie was too effective in his portrayal of modern day Moslems as part of the common British-American society and part of the larger community of industrial economy humanity.

Rushdie speaks of the famous and the average equally falling weakly into dreams of and actions of debauchery and emotional excess. An Indian movie star playing the roles of Hindu gods on the screen becomes a philanderer in constant betrayal to his wife. The intellectual passivity of philosophical characters is demonstrated as repeatedly they are challenged with circumstances to which they respond by rebellious thoughts which they conceal in egotistical shyness. Hallucinations, superstitions, obsessive erotic dreams and allusions, deliriums, nervous exhaustion, schizophrenic visions and confused perceptions of spiritual meaning are punctuated by an incessant stream of the all too common slang of the industrialized world: blasphemy. A few excerpts may convey a sense of some of the musings expressed by Rushdie:

The use of rationalization as an excuse for irresponsibility:

"In ancient time the patriarch Ibtahim came into this valley with Hagar and Ismail, their son. Here, in this waterless wilderness, he abandoned her. She asked him, can this be God's will? He replied, it is. And left, the bastard. From the beginning men used God to justify the unjustifiable. He moves in mysterious ways: men say." 95

The use of materialistic and idolatrous personified spirituality in which the adherent is taught to expect that by the magic of ritual that God can be harnessed to one's needs, and then, be disappointed when God fails to hear our demands because we have lost our humility and reverence.

"Halfway into sleep, or halfway back to wakefulness, Gabreel Farishta is often filled with resentment by the non-appearance, in his persecuting visions, of the One who is supposed to have the answers, He never turns up, the one who kept away when I was dying, when I needed him. The one it's all about, Allah Ishvar God. Absent as ever while we writhe and suffer in his name." page 111

The use of superstition to justify our existence, to enable us to deny awareness in the service of some ego flattering assumption which elevates our identity above that of the rest of miserable humanity - so judged by the men who proclaim themselves to be our spiritual leaders. Those leaders who lead us away from the spiritual skills and strengths which would enable a communication link between ourselves and the Holy Spirit of God.

"The sock was removed, revealing what looked to be a perfectly ordinary, if outsize, foot. Then Gabreel counted and counted again, from one to six. 'The same on the other foot,' Maslama said proudly. 'I never doubted the meaning for a minute.' He was the self-appointed helpmate of the Lord, the sixth toe on the foot of the Universal Thing. Something was badly amiss with the spiritual life of the planet, thought Gibreel Farishta. Too many demons inside people claiming to believe in God." page 193

The apparent transformation of humanity's perception of God from that of a spiritual entity which words could only describe through the reflection of its characterisitcs to one of physical image - an image one could possess, see, and worship with pride rather than a entity one could revere with humility.

"This notion of separation of functions, light versus dark, evil versus good, may be straightforward enough in Islam - O children of Adam, let not the Devil seduce you, as he expelled your parents from the garden, pulling off from them their clothing that he might show them their shame - but go back a bit and you see that it's a pretty recent fabrication. Amos, eighth century BC, asks: "Shall there be evil in a city and the Lord hath not done it?" Also Jahweh, quoted by Deutero-Isaiah two-hundred years later, remarks: "I form the light, and create darkness; I make peace and create evil; I the Lord do all these things." It isn't until the Book of Chronicles, merely fourth century BC, that the word shaitan is used to mean a being, and not an attribute of God.'"

Then, there is the awareness expressed of the ultimate weakness of humanity: its desire to emulate a God which it has transformed to become an image of itself: self-worship.

"In my family, too," Mirza Saeed in his insomnia answered the sleeping toy merchant, "we have suffered from a kind of disease; one of detachment, of being unable to connect ourselves to things, events, feelings. Most people define themselves by their work, or where they come from, or suchlike; we have lived too far inside our heads. It makes actuality damn hard to handle." page 490

And, a call to the masses to consider the technological world of lies and half-truths which humanity is ever increasingly being smothered by.

"On the (airplane's) cabin's movie screen a stewardess was demonstrating the various safety procedures. In a corner of the screen an inset male figure translated her into sign language. This was progress, Chamcha recognized. Film instead of human beings, a small increase in sophistication (the signing) and a large increase in the cost. High technology at the service, ostensibly, of safety; while in reality air travel got daily more dangerous, the world's stock of aircraft was ageing and nobody could afford to renew it. Bits fell off planes every day, or so it seemed, and collisions and near-misses were also on the up. So the film was a lie, because by existing it said: Observe the lengths we'll go to for your security. We'll even make you a movie about it . Style instead of substance, the image instead of the reality ...." page 513

Rushdie, for having written a book, would now have to live a life of fear and paranoia.
His wife would leave him, unable to cope with the constant seclusion, secrecy, and threats to their family. When the Jews discovered that a fellow Jew called upon them to leave their idolatrous self-worship and return to the spirit of their faith, they lobbied for His death and for that of those who followed His Way. When the Roman Catholics could not coerce the commoner to deny religious abuses and totalitarian human authority, they burned books and those who wrote, read and published them. When they discovered that the natives of other cultures and nations held their own religious beliefs and sacred writings, they massacred and dominated the natives, burned the books, and pronounced these achievements in the name of their God!

Torn by the hypocracy of the practices of professed Jews and Christians, Mohammed called for self-assertion, self-defense, and the peace of a unified community with the hope that such uniformity would enable a return to the reverence for a spiritual God rather than an idol. The founders of most institutionalized human religions have failed in that those self-appointed to spread the word after the mentor departed, did so by ritual and force rather than by personal example of spiritual strength. The invocation of murder because you cannot stave the criticism of others with the demonstrated benefits of your chosen WAY, is an admission that your Way is weak and easily defeated, or, that you have forgotten what your Way means.

1988 - In December,
Bob Oechsler, while on a late night research effort at Gulf Breeze, Florida, U.S.A., experienced a time lapse.
He was alone at the Players Golf and Country Club resort awaiting the prospect of a sighting. He had been keeping tight records with regular time checks when, less than ten minutes after a time check recording, it suddenly became quite warm in the car. The outside temperature was chilly, so Bob initially thought that his car heater was being quite efficient. He lowered his car window, leaned back on the seat and looked up at the constellation of Orion. Instead of the typical 3 stars in a row there were 5 and he pondered this for what he felt was several minutes, then realizing that he was quite chilly.

Raising the window he noticed that at least 15 minutes had lapsed and glancing around he noticed that he was no longer at the Club but had mysteriously been relocated to Southside Drive, the scene of a number of previous sightings. He was parked in the same spot that Ed Walters, the prime reporter of Gulf Breeze sightings had been with his truck on January 12, 1988 during an incident. No explanation could be found.

Later in the month, while travelling across the Three Mile Bridge to Pensacola with Ed Walters in his truck, they saw a UFO little more than 200 feet out over the water at an altitude of about 50 feet moving at a comparable velocity as themselves. At first it moved parallel with them and then it drifted away at the same speed, leaving a reflection on the water of the golden-orange ring on the bottom of the craft. The sighting lasted 2-3 minutes as the object disappeared from view near the pier area on the Pensacola shoreline.

Although an automatic camera was at hand, it never occurred to either of the men to take a picture. Charles Flannigan was driving in a vehicle behind them and was totally unaware of the occurrence and the two ahead of him seemed to be too stunned to signal to him.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1989 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

Uncle Buck; Parenthood; Star Trek 5: The Final Frontier; Glory; Cyborg; The Abyss; Weekend at Bernies; In The Belly of the Dragon; Troop Beverly Hills; Lethal Weapon II; Relentless; Leviathan; Out of the Dark; Bye Bye Blues; Lock Up; War of the Roses; Hit List; Jacknife; Bulleseye!; Blind Fury; They Live; Drugstore Cowboy; True Believer; Raider of the South Seas; Pet Sematary; River of Death; The Experts; Freakshow; Out of the Dark; Sweet As You Are; Shirley Valentine; She's Out of Control; My Left Foot; Kickboxer

A joint human-GRAY underground base is established in northeast Oklahoma state.

General News:

The Exxon Valdez oil tanker runs aground in Alaska's Prince William Sound.
Almost 11 million gallons of oil fouled the environment in the subsequent spill.

1989 - By this year,
The GRAY Three Virus (G3V) begins a breakout in infected humans.
That is, since before 1974, some GRAY-abducted humans have been cross-infected with the dual viruses which the GRAYS came to the Earth to recover from, plus a virus which was accidentally produced during the GRAY's bioengineering experimentation.

As mentioned earlier, the dual virus influences the display of subtle long-term symptoms in the infected humans which are idiosyncratic to the human lifeform (depression and increased sexual obsession). The abducted humans have been accidentally exposed to the GRAY dual virus during artificial fertilization procedures on human females and during artificial semen extraction from human males. This was a result of the change in experimental emphasis during 1957 to 1974 to that of gene transfer or exchange between humans and GRAYS.

It was during that period that a new virus, G3V, was experimentally formed and spread through much of the GRAY population before it was discovered. Technical ability of a lifeform does not relate directly to awareness. It is transferred by way of the life solution which humans call "blood." Blood exchanges between GRAYS spread the virus. Smaller blood sampling of humans were the vector by which this third virus entered subject humans. Perhaps fortunately, the new virus remains dormant in humans until it is triggered by a biochemical catalyst. At that point, a protective covering surrounding the virus is degraded and the virus "leaks" out and becomes active.

The "catalyst" which engenders this activation within infected humans is a high dosage of raw, crushed garlic. Key ingredients in garlic include fluorine, ammonia, .... In the intestine, these ingredients are effective at driving parasites out because they chemically suggest that the host has died and is in a state of decay. Parasites do not generally seek to stay or live in dead hosts. A secondary factor is that these chemicals are corrosive and adequate quantities in close proximity to small organisms are very irritating to them: toxic. Thus garlic does not help digestion directly. It drives away other organisms which are in competition with your body for the nutrients which you have taken in for your own survival and health.

Examples of parasites which humans can acquire include these:

   amoebiasis
   amoebic dysentery
   balantidium coli
   chilomastic mesnilii
   clostridia
   cryptosporidium
   dientamoba fiagilis
   endolimax nana
   enteromanas hominis
   entomba coli
   giardiasis
   iodamoeba beutschilii
   isospora belli
   leptospirosis
   microsporidium
   pseudomembraneous colitis
   retortomonas intestinalis
   salmonellosis
   sarcocystis hominis
   schistosomiasis
   shigellosis, and many more.

Categories of other parasites include bacteria, boils, fleas, flukes, fungi, heartworms, hookworms, leeches, lice, mites, nematodes, pinworms, ringworms, ticks, trematodes, venereal diseases, viruses, warts.

Garlic is often used by humans as a flavouring accent in their foods as well as for reasons of health improvement.
Humans frequently eat fried foods spiced with fried garlic or fresh foods lightly spiced with crushed garlic as well as bread slices with a thin spread of garlic puree. None of these dosages are ordinarily strong enough to act as a catalyst for this virus. A catalyst must be present in exactly the required concentration or greater for it to provide any influence.

The human symptoms of an activated GRAY-Three virus (G3V) are best described as follows:
minor neck muscle stiffness; minor muscle aches; facial flushes of temperature; minor incidences of sweating; rapidly developing fatigue; deep sleep; febrile paralysis; coma; death.

If the person is driving a vehicle, the development of fatigue and a slippage into deep sleep may happen quickly enough to result in an accident involving injuries, the shock of which can activate a heart attack, or stroke, in the latter minutes of life. These are usually noted as the causes of death unless other, accident initiated injuries appear to be more devastating.

If the person is walking through an area in which a fall could prove fatal, the progression of these latter symptoms may be such as to result in such a fall and such a presumed death. Crossing a street, standing at the edge of a subway or train platform, descending a long flight of stairs, ....

Other hazardous environments for such an individual include SCUBA and deep diving, working with explosive gases, working near sources of radiation which are fatal to humans, working near enclosed toxic gas reservoirs (agricultural silos, manure storage tanks), and toxic gas (chlorine, ammonia, hydrogen sulfide, ...) conveyance repairs.

These and similar environments and conditions represent no greater-than-normal hazard, UNLESS the human under consideration in BOTH infected with G3V, and, has triggered its activation with a relatively high ingestion of raw garlic.

The G3V may be confused and "anaesthetized" by the presence of other "stronger" competitors in the blood, or in organs which feed nutrients into the blood: large and small intestines, liver. Such competitors include other forms and species of established parasites - such as liver flukes, iodamoeba beutschlii, nematodes, roundworms, tapeworms, and others. Eradication of these from the person's system removes a chemical compound produced by each of these lifeforms during its presence. Without the presence of this toxin, the G3V begins to multiply in the blood. Nothing else is known to retard or stop the development of G3V, other than Biocidin.

A "natural" remedy for the expulsion of some of these parasites which has been used by humans for thousands of years is a combination of molasses and crushed raw garlic - taken in relatively large concentration: 1 rounded tablespoon of garlic and 2 tablespoons of molasses with 10 +/- ounces of water three or four times daily and with relatively no additional food for an initial period of 7 days. Typically, since some parasites can only be expelled in the adult stage of growth, and, they will not develop from egg-to-larva and larva-to-adult, while the medication is being taken - this dosage must be repeated 3 or 4 times with growth periods of about 10 days between. When sufficient cycles have been repeated, the body is cleared of the parasites affected. This is least expensive and has relatively common ingredients. A crushed garlic or a garlic puree commercial preparation, which has few ingredients other than garlic and oil can also be used. If you are infected with G3V, it will be modified by the garlic concentrations, and, begin to multiply.

Not to be confused with the symptoms of G3V, during the interim periods of the above treatment when garlic is not being consumed, larval development of the parasite may take place. With some forms of parasites, for example, nematodes, this is the active and tissue destructive stage. Depending on the type of parasite, pains may seem to migrate through the body, or, a reflection of intestinal health may appear on the tongue. While the sudden display at this interim period of white patches on the tongue, a brilliant and sore red tongue, or deep fissures in the tongue may, under different circumstances, all indicate something else - if you have not experienced such before, they may indicate the destruction of intestinal tissue.

A remedy which will slow this larval development and may end the destruction is for you to take a rounded teaspoon of prepared mustard (vinegar and crushed mustard seed, no sugar or chemical additives) and 4 or 5 stewed pitted prunes with each meal. The digestion of the mustard and vinegar produce chemicals which have the influence of anaesthetizing the larvae. The prunes act as a tonic and natural laxative to keep things moving. Modify the dosage for your particular system until the major display of the symptoms disappears. The intent is not to stop the larval development but to restrain it to a manageable level. The larvae cannot be expelled until they are adults. The balance is to permit development without incurring dramatic tissue injury.

Many of the (3.6 million) humans abducted by GRAYS temporarily for use in the experiments do not live in tropical regions and in cultures where such a parasitic infection would be more prevalent. That meant that once they had acquired G3V, it would never activate nor need to be "controlled" unless the individual for some unknown reason ingested a large amount of crushed uncooked garlic. Korean and Thai foods culturally contain higher concentrations of garlic than many other diets - but not usually in raw form. Once G3V is activated, death can follow within 10 days. The cause of death would always be stated as "normal", even though such a reason may seem odd to those who have known the individual. That is, there was no indication of an acute disease - with symptoms similar to those of known human viral and bacterial diseases.

G3V is unrecognized by any of the human immune system defenses.
There are no common indications of traumatic illness for humans:
no elevated white cell counts; no visual indications of infection; no swelling or bruising; no acute pains; no failure of one organ exclusive of others; no dramatic examples of bleeding or loss of other fluids; no respiratory distress; no acute change in brain function; no elevated fever; no usual cause for alarm. How can a human die of a disease without symptoms? By not knowing what symptoms to look for and by never testing for them.

The GRAY-Three virus attaches to human haemoglobin - which is responsible for transporting the oxygen breathed in by the lungs to all of the cells of the body, and, transporting most of the carbon dioxide from all of the cells of the body to the lungs for excretion. Human respiratory function is activated in accord with the concentration of carbon dioxide in the lungs. As the level increases past a threshold point, the brain stimulates the lungs to expel their air faster and take in new, hopefully oxygen-rich, air. The opposite would also be true if it were not for the patterned training of the human from birth to breathe at a particular rate according to one's home elevation. Of course, the human home may change location and elevation and in such situations, the autonomic nervous system simply "adjusts" the breathing rate, or adapts the carbon dioxide threshold, over a period of days. Persons who practice specific forms of meditation can also adjust their regular breathing rate. But what happens if the carbon dioxide level does not increase and the oxygen level uptake decreases?

In a manner similar to that of breathing carbon monoxide (CO), less oxygen reaches the cells than is required. As the haemoglobin is "bound" less carbon dioxide reaches the lungs. The brain is signalled that everything is adequate while cell functioning is decreasing. At some point, cell function becomes so reduced that consciousness is lost, the lungs continue to relax, and the person suffocates into a coma and dies. The difference is that with carbon monoxide poisoning, the blood may be analyzed after death and found to contain a concentration of CO. With G3V, everything looks normal in the bloodstream - unless it is viewed under a magnification of 90,000. No autopsy is required for a "normal" death, and, unless you could convince an "authority" that this apparently healthy person suddenly died from an unknown virus with no obvious symptoms of infection or disease - such a sophisticated test would never be performed.

And, if you were to tell any of most of the human authorities with the power to call for such a test why you believed this person might be so infected - you would, historically, be either ignored, or examined for mental difficulty. On the much less dramatic and more possible context of trying to confirm or deny the existence or absence of a parasitic infestation and determine appropriate treatment, it will be normal for North American physicians to be in complete denial of and almost total ignorance of parasitic infestations which have influenced humans for millennia. It would not be uncommon for a general practitioner in 1996 to tell a concerned patient that humans could only acquire one form of parasite (tapeworm), send the patient for a test which searched for the presence of 14 potential parasites in stool, and waste precious days or weeks discounting symptoms which they could not provide an explanation for. Modern human institutionally based medical practice is totally archaic by the standards of any extraterrestrial visiting culture.

Few humans wish to die of a chronic parasite infection.
Few humans will choose to live a life of chronic aches, pains, headaches, digestive upset, and organ deterioration resulting from a parasite infection, and, after a period of 5 to 50 years, die from liver disfunction, heart failure, respiratory distress. If aware, others will not wish to undergo the risk of having to take such strong pharmaceutical medications that they expose themselves to such negative side-effects as the following:

     emetine hydrochloride: loss of sense of taste, heart failure, death;
              furazolidone: colitis, enteritis, partial deafness;
                iodoquinol: permanent loss of vision, emaciation;
             metronidazole: overgrowth of Candida, decreased libido;
       paromomycin sulfate: nephrotoxicity, overgrowth of other organisms;
   pentamidine isothionate: confusion, anemia, acute renal failure;
           quinine sulfate: coma, acute asthma, renal failure, death.

The above drugs are prescribed for the eradication of various parasites.
All have a considerably larger list of side effects than that noted.
Those side effects noted are some of the possible worst symptoms.
Worst symptoms do happen, otherwise, medical references wouldn't note them at the risk of the non use of the drug.

A better possibility, for most humans who wish to eradicate parasites from their bodies is the use of an herbal remedy called "Biocidin". It must be used in accord with strict guidelines if it is to be helpful and not harmful. These are simple. It is an herbal liquid which is dispensed by dropper. The maximum dose for an adult is 5 drops taken 3 times a day with meals, or, a total of no more than 15 drops daily with no more than 5 drops taken at any one time. The drops should be mixed with several ounces of water. Expel excess solution from the dropper back into the bottle before replacing the stopper. This is to reduce the possibility of an accumulation of old and drying solution within the stopper which could clog the stopper and result in a spurt of 7 to 10 drops when you want a maximum total of 5. If you do accidentally finish with more than 5 drops of Biocidin in your dose, throw out the dose and prepare a new one. A toxicity of the formula in your system may produce a headache and require you to discontinue your dosages for 24 or more hours and such disturbs the effectiveness of your treatment. Expect to take the formula for a period of 4 to 8 weeks, until the bottle is finished. Biocidin will not activate G3V.

If you are sensitive negatively to Biocidin and have a parasitic infestation, you may then have to choose between the use of a dangerous pharmaceutical, persist with the parasitic symptoms, or use the garlic and molasses remedy. Sometimes, a choice is not how one wishes to be cured but how one chooses to die.

An herbal tonic should be taken with Biocidin and may be added to the water mixture.
Matol is an example of a suitable tonic.
A 950 ml container should be sufficient for one treatment extending for the duration of the bottle of Biocidin. With Matol, 2 tablespoons should be added to your mixture; that is, you will do so 3 times per day and decrease the amount added to each mixture if your frequency for the day is going to be 4. You may find your mixture of tonic, water and Biocidin adverse to your sense of taste and smell. If desired, 2 teaspoons or more of molasses may be mixed with the water and tonic solution to help mask the taste of the former.

Intestinal activity may become sluggish during the period when you are trying to rid your system of parasites and during which you may eat an amount of food which is less than you are accustomed to. If stool stays too long in your intestines, toxins will enter your blood and will often result in headaches and muscle aches and stiffness. You may find that some foods appear to encourage bowel clearing for you while others retard it. Note which foods these are and attempt to balance them. Taking an ounce of aloe vera gel in 3 or 4 ounces of water with your meals will assist in maintaining regular bowel clearing while encouraging tissue healing and health. It is advisable that either licorice root tea (encourages peristaltic action), cinnamon teas (antibacterial), or Chinese ginger tea (assists cleansing) be brewed and substituted for most regular hot or cold beverages. Between meals, an intestinal flora compound which contains at least 2 of the following may be taken to replenish the good bacteria which humans require for efficient digestion and assimilation:

   L-Acidophilus Rhamnosus
   Bifidobacterium Adolescentis
   Lactobacillus Acidophilus ATTC
   Bifidobacterium longum
   S. Faecium

Swiss brand, "Enteric Coated Max Strength "5" Strain Dophilus" capsules are one example of an intestinal flora. Remember that the capsules must be kept refrigerated or in a cool, dry area. Biocidin is distributed by Bio-Botanical Research, P.O. Box 1061, Soquel, (or, 144 Pioneer Road Corralitos) CA. 95076 - if you cannot find a local naturopath or herbalist supplier. BEFORE buying and using any such product you should test it against your system by means of muscle testing or meditation. You want to know if you are allergic or hypersensitized to any of the ingredients, whether it will weaken your system, whether it is too strong for your system, and, generally, what is your maximum starting dosage.

Several alternatives are available.
Now that you know that such a virus exists and its route of entry you can use hypnosis, muscle-testing, or meditation -

     a) to determine if you have the GRAY-Three virus;

     b) to determine if you have been abducted by spacebeings;

     c) to determine if the spacebeings were ever GRAYS;

     d) to determine if you have a destructive parasite infestation;

     e) to determine which herb or medication is best for you;

     f) to determine which per use dosage is best for you;

     g) to get well and keep well.

There is almost no amount of rationalization, laboratory testing, or symptomological interpretation which can give you these answers.

Once the G3V has become active in the infected human, Biocidin may be helpful, for a time, in retarding its progress. In the interim, the action of the Biocidin solution may change the shape of any of the three GRAY-introduced viruses. As you know, from information provided earlier, the shape and contour of the virus will determine it degree of success in attaching to and/or entering a living cell. Until now, the contours of the G3V has not enabled this activation. With the use of high doses of garlic, the "skin" on G3V has been modified and enabled it to gain access to cells within the blood. Biocidin provides a negative environment for G3V, and, G3V responds by mutating. Eventually, one or more viruses may be so formed which either unite with, modify, or deactivate other viruses present in the human.

The number of active GRAY-origin viruses in the subject's blood may begin to change in number with the consequence that the symptoms of infestation will appear to fluctuate between dramatic improvement and dramatic deterioration of health. That is, the count of active GRAY viruses may begin at 3, rise to 4, decrease to 3 (2 become united), rise to 4 (1 transformed into 2), increase to 5 (another transformed into 2) and so on. Once, G3V is activated and has no opposition, such mutations may proceed relatively rapidly (within hours) until the subject dies, or, a virus mutates into an antibody which neutralizes all of the others. The latter has happened and the blood of such individuals could be used as a vaccination.

The potential disaster, for humanity, is that if a communicable virus is formed which can spread through the air - hundreds of millions of people may die. Whether that ever occurs will depend upon how many infected individuals have their G3V activated, and, how long they live thereafter. By 1996, 11 individuals will have become active, and 10 will have died.

1989 - By this year,
The USSR will have the only Operational ASAT (Anti-Satellite Attack) system.
The use of energy-beam weapons from bases at Tyuratam, Dushanbe, Sary Shagan and Semipalatinsk make it possible to attack low altitude satellites on at least 2 passes each day.

During 1987, General John Piotrowski, then Commander-in-Chief of the USA Space Command, publicly assessed the capabilities of Soviet ground-based lasers as follows:

"A 'hard kill' of satellites below 400 km is possible with general damage to satellite components in orbits as high as 1200 km. More sensitive elements, such as surveillance or altitude control sensors, are vulnerable up to GEO,"

1989 - On January 1,
The USA - Canada Free Trade Agreement (CFTA) went into effect.
After 2 years, U.S. exports to Canada had increased by 17%, suggesting that loss of manufacturing business within Canada might also be that amount. Implementation is to be completed in 1998.

Under NAFTA, tariffs on all products traded between the USA and CAnada are being gradually phased out over a 10-year period. Tariffs on some goods, including computers, telephones, and industrial machinery are eliminated immediately. Duties on other products are being removed in 20% cuts over 5 years. Products in this category include furniture, paper, printing machinery, and electrical parts. These items will be duty-free beginning January 1, 1993.

Likewise, all remaining duties are being cut 10% a year over 10 years.
Steel, processed foods, apparel, and chemicals are among the products in this category.
These products will be duty-free beginning January 1, 1998. At the request of USA or Canadian industry, tariff removal on certain products may be accelerated provided both governments agree.

American business will now enjoy an open and predictable investment climate in Canada, improved border-crossing procedures for temporary business visitors, and expanded access to Canadian federal government procurement contracts valued at $500 million annually.

The political result will be that each country will be economically encouraged to concentrate their production on those items which each is most efficient and best prepared to engage in. While advantageous to the average consumer, this will increase economic co-dependency and a considerable reorganization of the production patterns of each. Economic dependency has usually resulted in political coercion in the human past with the more powerful nation stating a willingness to continue to supply a "necessary" product to the weaker or smaller nation, on condition, that the later favour a political stance not usually taken yet desirable by the more powerful economic supplier.

Job fragmentation and job loss will occur in those situations in which national production of a product cannot compete in an international market. Both of these outcomes cannot be adequately offset by job creation UNLESS substantial capital is made available to enable the expansion of existing internationally competitive industries AND the development of industries capable of international competitive success. The capital requirement for adequate retraining, retooling and relocating to offset losses demands a low debt, high growth economy. Both nations have very high national debt and are entering an apparent recession.

1989 - On January 2,
Bob Oechsler was driving by Shoreline Park, Gulf Breeze, Florida, U.S.A. at about 1.00 a.m. when he decide to stop and relax at the site of a previous incident before continuing on his drive back to Maryland. As his eyes followed the opposite shoreline (Pensacola Beach), he noticed an odd light that was too high to be a boat but too close to the water to be any kind of land vehicle. The lack of sound eliminated any possibility of it being a helicopter. The object was moving along the shoreline, occasionally retracing its path before continuing in the direction of the Bob Sykes Bridge. He quickly grabbed his camera and snapped two pictures at the fully zoomed setting. Looking away for a moment to call to anyone else nearby, there wasn't anyone, he lost sight of it on turning back.

Momentarily, military jets approached from the direction of the Pensacola Naval Air Station passing in front of Bob and continuing in the direction of Santa Rosa Sound, the last heading he had observed of the UFO. It seemed peculiar that the jets displayed no lights of any kind as they passed through the ground lighted cloud canopy. The two photographs turned out to be an exact match of the last object which Ed Walters had photographed on May 1, 1988, as he had inadvertently triggered a camera just before being neurologically paralysed by something associated with the craft that had moved overhead.

1989 - In the January-February issue of "Bioelectromagnetics Society Newsletter",
An unattributed article entitled "Walter Reed's Microwave Research Department: Its History and Mission", discussed the use of high-power pulsed microwave as it relates to anti-personnel use.

1989 - In the February 2 issue of the Alnaby, New York "Times Union",
Mark Rodeghier wrote
"It looks very curious that while the (B2) Stealth bomber was under development, beginning in 1981, this boomerang object, that looks remarkably like the bomber in profile and could not be spotted on radar, was being sighted continually. And then, even more interesting, is that the sightings suddenly evaporated just before the plane was unveiled (in late 1988)."

The world's only known wing of F-117 Stealth fighters was moved to Holloman Air Force Base, near Alamogordo, new Mexico, in 1990 from the Tonopah Test Range in central Nevada, U.S.A.

1989 -
Tryptophan induced reduction of serotonin (TIRS) in the human brain has been linked to chronic depression by Yale University researcher Dr. Pedro Delgado. By giving people a drink designed to deplete their tryptophan supplies, and then letting them eat normally, he jarred them out of their chronic depressions. One such treatment was found to be effective for up to 10 days with patients who had been taking anti-depressant drugs. Serotonin receptors in the brain were sensitized eliminating the feelings of depression. This process is found to work almost immediately; anti-depressant drugs typically take 2 weeks to begin to reduce depression and another 2 weeks to induce a lifting of the chronic depression. With such individuals, a therapy of drugs may be prescribed for the rest of their lives. Periodic tryptophan depletion could be both more convenient, act faster, and, have less side effects.

1989 - On February 13,
Near Nalchik, in the U.S.S.R., a horizontal cylinder about 1500 feet long, spotlights in front and at back, fins on the tail, porthole-like openings along the sides, parts seemed to dematerialize and rematerialize, 1000's saw.

1989 - On March 13/14
A very large magnetic storm occurs; the earth's magnetic declination at Lerwick changed by almost 8 degrees in less than an hour.
It is the largest magnetic storm to be recorded since records were started in 1868.
In many instances, such disturbances are accompanied by widespread displays of auroras, marked changes in the incidence of cosmic rays, an increase in the reception of "noise" from the Sun at "radio frequencies", and rapid changes in the ionosphere and induced electric currents within the Earth which adversely affect radio and telegraphic communications.

In North America, spectacular displays of the aurora borealis were seen as far south as Florida.
A power surge was induced in the power transmission lines in Canada resulting in a shutdown of sections of the power grid leaving 6 million people without power for 9 hours. In California, a top-secret military communications band was interrupted between security installations and trucks transporting nuclear weapons around the country. A naval installation in California lost contact with ships offshore; when it changed to a different frequency, electronically operated garage doors in suburbs nearby mysteriously (to the residents) opened and closed. Higher solar bursts were received in August; still higher on September 29; still higher on October 19.

In the USSR, at a central strategic nuclear ICBM launch site, the electronic controls and interlocks capable of starting a total nuclear war against the USA are all ACTIVATED down to the last switch. No button had been pushed, there was not an alert at the time, no malfunctions were found in the circuitry later, no reason was determined as to why the final relays had not sent the 36 100 megaton plus missiles on their way to designated targets all over the USA. A primitive 18 kiloton weapon destroyed Nagasaki city in Japan in 1945. Invisible spacebeings from the Constellation Bootes had stopped the process from completion.

The disturbances are caused by changes in the stream of ionized particles which emanates from the Sun and through which the Earth is continuously passing. Some of these changes are associated with visible sunspot eruptions. There is a tendency for disturbances to occur after intervals of about 27 days, the Sun's rotational period.

1989 - On March 22,
An asteroid, 1989FC, came within 430,000 miles of the Earth, the closest in recorded history.
It was the size of an aircraft carrier.
Had it entered the Earth's atmosphere on a closer collision course, it would have resulted in the formation of a crater at least 1.2 miles wide and exploded with a force equal to 100s of nuclear weapons. There would soon be closer passes noted. It was not detected until it was moving away from the Earth.

1989 - During the year,
The "Financial Institutions Reform, Recovery and Enforcement Act" is passed by the American government.
It establishes the "Resolution Trust Corporation", the "Bank Insurance Fund", the "Savings Association Fund", and the "Office of Thrift Supervision". Together, these provide government funds to insolvent savings and loan associations, and mandates sweeping changes in the examination and supervision of savings and loans. The act requires S&Ls to adopt new reserve capital standards, transfers the regulatory powers of the Federal Home Loan Bank Board (which had failed in its tasks) to a new agency, the Office of Thrift Supervision, a bureau within the U.S. Treasury Department; and placed the 12 district Federal Home Loan Banks under control of an oversight board, the Federal Housing Finance Board. The "Federal Savings and Loan Insurance Corporation" was abolished.

The "Bank Insurance Fund" and the "Savings Association Insurance Fund" insured deposits in savings institutions up to a value of $100,000. per account.

The "Resolution Funding Corporation" (REFCORP) was a federal corporation authorized to finance the liquidation of insolvent S&Ls. It was to issue $30 billion in zero-coupon bonds with funds from the retained earnings of the Federal Home Loan Banks. An additional $20 billion was to be used in closing insolvent thrifts and was to be raised directly by the U.S. Treasury Department through the sale of Treasury obligations.

The "Resolution Trust Corporation" (RTC) was responsible for the disposal of assets of failed S&Ls. Acting as a liquidator, it was to be funded by securities issued by the Resolution Funding Corporation, direct Treasury borrowings, and assessments on the district Federal Home Loan Banks.

New minimum capital reserves standards were introduced similar to those adopted internationally by the central banks. Goodwill was to be excluded from core capital calculations after 1994. Tightened restriction as to selection of borrowers, size of allowable loans, certification of real estate appraisals, bank fraud added to criminal law, banned certain tax breaks, required establishment of an Affordable Housing Program, and conducted several research studies - were some of the provisions included.

The best way to placate a dependent public which is annoyed by the negligence of the institutions created by its government - is to change the name of some institutions, create more bureaucracy, impose greater restrictions and penalties - but never, take the real problem to the commoner. A spiritual approach would have been to determine why the abuses and problems occurred, admit to ones complicity in such developments, and initiate a new cultural direction in which honesty and truthfulness is rewarded. Obviously, this is impossible for a government which has built a society around it and within it which cherishes deceit, fraud, manipulation, greed, ...

1989 - During the year,
A 7.0 Major Earthquake would last for a duration of 12 seconds in southern California.
It had been predicted 4 days before by Jim Berkland, a geologist in the region for some time.
He had used a combination of gravitational forces of the Sun, Moon, planets, together with previous records and the behaviour of cats in the neighbourhood to determine the time. He had noticed through a correlation of missing cat reports with previous California earthquakes, that many more cats appeared to run away from home just before an earthquake than at any other time. Other non-scientific researchers had determined that carrier pigeons avoided flying over regions which were about to experience an earthquake. It is known that electrostatic charges are released from the ground shortly before a quake and that local electromagnetic fields may also be influenced. Mr. Berkland was not respected by most government researchers because he did not utilize exclusively mechanical sensors and intellectualized theories of earthquake behaviour. The difference: no one else accurately predicted this earthquake. Would humans learn?

1989 - In the April-June issue of the "Journal of Psychoactive Drugs",
An article by B. Gorney, entitled "Domestic violence and chemical dependency: dual problems, dual interventions", was summarized in an abstract as follows:

"This article addresses the link between domestic violence and chemical dependency. Both are extremely prevalent and pose serious threats to individuals, families, communities, and society at large. The commonly observed association between substance abuse and violent interactions has traditionally been explained as a cause-effect sequence. It is assumed that intoxication leads to violence, and this viewpoint has traditionally dominated research on the subject as well as treatment methodology. This interpretation may lead treatment providers to assume that once abstinence from alcohol and other drugs is achieved, violence will also disappear. Researchers in the field of domestic violence argue that violence occurs both when substance abuse is present and absent. This article addresses the need to assess and treat both problem areas concurrently. In addition to providing assessment and treatment guidelines, the article describes the scope of the problem, etiological issues, and factors that may serve as barriers to treatment providers in identifying violence as a problem in chemically dependent relationship systems."

This again demonstrates where humans have placed their energies, resources and concerns in the past 4,000 years - not in the area of balanced personal and societal health and not in the spiritual approach of prevention through the dissolution of negative mindmaps or thinking patterns by releasing blocked energies. Instead interpersonal strife and miscommunication has not only been allowed to exist and spread, it has been encouraged - in the service of authority systems which diminish the self-esteem and constructive coping skills of individuals. The above concept is elementary to ANY visiting spaceculture. It has taken humans this long to uncover it. How "intelligent" does this make modern humans?

1989 - During the year,
Yigal Amir, a Yemenite Israeli, now aged 19, graduates from the Israeli Lithuanian orthodox high school, Hayishuv Hahadash, and progresses to the Karem Dyavneh, a respected school combining military service with advanced religious studies. He would spend 20 months in the elite Golani Infantry brigade - a company which proudly called its members "the cruel ones." Much of his service would be spent protecting the occupied territories, especially communities of religious settlers whom the government of Israel had encouraged to make their home in the "land of Israel." Amir became devoted to the cause of the military and his fellow soldiers became impressed with his intellectual skills of rote memory of the Torah and forceful literal interpretation of the 5 books.

1989 - On April 7,
The U.S.S.R. nuclear submarine "Comsomolez" (Komsomoletz), carrying two torpedoes with nuclear warheads sinks in the Norwegian Sea 300 miles off Norway after a blaze breaks out on board. The uncontrollable fire apparently begins in the electrical circuits in the pump control system and after raging for 3 hours, an explosion occurred, and the ship sunk in 4,500 feet (1,370 m.) of water. An escape sphere was used but resulted in the saving of only one life. 42 of the 69 crew members died. Most had only had simulator training. Officers did not realize the severity of the situation, aggravated by a carbon monoxide buildup, until it was too late for too many.

It was equipped with 2 nuclear warheads.
Small amounts of highly radioactive plutonium-239 begin to be released.
It was a one-of-a-kind "Mike Class" submarine.
In May, 1994, Soviet scientists from the Polar Institute in Murmansk, declare that the worst estimate of pollution would be that several thousand kilometres would be polluted with radioactivity making fishing in those waters unsafe for up to 700 years.

1989 - On April 14,
A Power Surge resulted in the disabling of the Vax Mainframe computer in Canada's capital, Ottawa.
This resulted in the shut-down of the network connecting Canadian ports of entry.
While all files handled by the system have protection systems to preserve them from accidental erasure, the equipment self-disconnects until an investigation reveals the problem and a repair is made, or, the equipment is checked and deemed safe to proceed with.

Affected by the shut-down were the Import-Export inspectional control system, electronic mail, and other programs accessible via remote terminals. During the shut-down all information was handled by the "I.B.M." system ("It's Better Manually"). All government functions were performed manually to the satisfaction of all through this period which should reassure those who have concerns about the computerization dependency of the government bureaucracy. Evidently, the cost of the computerization has been a waste if the efficiency of using the system has remained unchanged.

1989 - By May,
The "Influence on Sex Gland Secretions after Vasectomy" was reported by Danish researchers H. Jakobsen, H. Rui, T. Hald and K. Purvis to be the following:

"Significant reductions were observed in seminal plasma volume ... and the total ejaculate contents of zinc ... magnesium ... PAP ... and citric acid ... indicating a major impact on secretions of prostatic origin. Unaltered PGE-1 ... and fructose ... indicated no effects on the secretory function of the seminal vesicles. A marked reduction was demonstrated in the ejaculatory contents of the polyamines, spermidine ... and spermine ... but not ... putrescine, which is also of prostatic origin."

That is, vasectomy decreases the ejaculatory losses of minerals and vitamins from the male body while not producing a marked variation of ejaculate volume. "Normal" sexual orgasm should be possible with a reduced with a reduced nutritional demand.

1989 - By May,
The "Computerized Venting of Scented Air" into office buildings begins with the second main office building of Kajima Construction in Tokyo, Japan. Developed by Shiseido, the experimental aroma system is intended to revitalize stressed out and sluggish workers. Lemon and jasmine scents are expected to spur workers out of post-lunch drowsiness; lavender and rose fragrances are believed to calm the mind and ease negative stress - as well as lower blood pressure. Computers which are already being utilized to monitor the HVAC (Heating, Ventilating & Air Conditioning) of the building, will have their functions extended to include automatic blending and releasing of fragrances. Since studies have shown that men and women sometimes favour separate scents, the type of fragrance released in a room will depend on whether and in what proportion the genders are represented.

Elementary considerations which appear to have been overlooked by this rationalistic detached analysis include the following:

   a) Exposed to a scent, human senses tend to cancel awareness of it;
   b) Scents often contain chemicals, hormones and proteins;
   c) Fragrance ingredients can trigger human hypersensitivities;
   d) Positive coping individuals may become over-relaxed, distracted;
   e) Fragrance deposits may accumulate in ducting & on other surfaces;
   f) Fragrance deposits will attract dust, moulds, bacteria and viruses;
   g) Specific scents sometimes stimulate the memory of traumatic events;
   h) Removing gummed fragrance-dust-moisture from surfaces is difficult.

Usually, a consideration of human characteristics is as important as the consideration of efficient activity planning for a constructive result to be achieved.

1989 -
In the June/July issue of "Purchasing Management", Harvey Skolnick, in a "management memo" column notes the following "Listening Traps":

   "Wishful thinking trap: hearing what you want to hear, instead of what's actually being said.
          Mind-drift trap: hearing nothing because you allow your mind to drift to other subjects.
Forest-for-the-tress trap: hearing only details of what's being said and thereby losing
                                                                              the broad picture.
          Words-only trap: hearing the literal message and failing to pick up on the messages
                      conveyed through gestures, facial expressions, and other unspoken language.

  By watching out for these traps, you can prevent communication problems and develop good 
                                                     listening skills and business relationships."

1989 - On June 06,
Near Konantsevo, U.S.S.R., a luminous dot which became a shining sphere.

1989 -
The CUSIP International Numbering System (CINS) comes into effect.
Using the Committee on Uniform Securities Identification Procedures system developed by the American Bankers Association in 1970 for all USA securities as a base, the system is expanded to include foreign securities being traded through the electronic banking system. The CINS system will use 9-digit numbering rather than the 7-digit, 2-character system of the original CUSIP.

This makes way for access to internationally sourced capital for the purpose of augmenting international bank reserves in accord with the new reserve standards. It also makes practical the use of foreign sourced gold certificates, and gold bullion debentures drawn on non-USA sources. This has become necessary because the amount of capital required to meet the reserve regulations and permit continued capital funding of IMF and other international development banking organizations can no longer be met by the government treasuries of the major industrial nations of the world.

One source of capital immediately made available is German gold bullion certificates used to pay reparations at the end of WWII. The Federal Reserve Board mandates that American major banks honour the certificates when presented, to the end of 1995, yet refuses to reimburse the banks for their conversion of the certificates. This results in some bank officers shredding the documents when tendered and then denying ever seeing them. These certificates range in value from 1000 grams of gold upwards. Other investors are more fortunate in using the certificates as collateral to arrange letters of credit and loans for the purpose of bank debenture trading, capitalization of mining operations, capitalization of movie production and other projects.

1989 - During June,
The Defense Services and Equipment of India surpassed commonly held expectations.
The country had 1.3 million armed forces personnel and a defence budget of nearly US $10 billion, and increasing. Traditionally, India had purchased much of its armaments from the Soviet Union. Now it is broadening its import base. India has a relatively sophisticated domestic manufacturing base for military products. Defence production falls to 9 public enterprises supervised by the Ministry of Defence and 36 ordnance factories and 44 laboratories of the Defence Research and Development Organization. Many of the products manufactured by these facilities are made with technology and expertise transferred from foreign manufacturers.

1989 - On June 26,
A Soviet "Echo II Class" nuclear-powered guided missile submarine experiences an engineering problem involving a leaking reactor cooling system, off Bear Island. A first-generation nuclear-powered submarine, it was able to use a diesel auxiliary engine, and was partly towed, to its home port on the Kola peninsula. Microscopic cracks were found on a welded joint in a pipe of the primary reactor cooling system. The finding led to the retirement of some "November", "Hotel", and "Echo" Classes of Soviet submarines.

1989 - On July 04,
Over the Dnieper River near Kiev, Ukraine, U.S.S.R., a silvery craft like a huge barrel with a circular antenna on top was seen.

1989 -
Vera Profofiyevna, Alexandra Stepanovna, and daughter were told by 3 beings with long blond hair, that one person per day was being taken from our world to theirs each day. Their experience occurred near Kiev, by the Dnieper River, on July 4th.

1989 -
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) concludes in its annual report that more than 100 million Americans live in areas where the air pollutants exceed federal standards. The EPA revealed that some 1.1 billion kilograms (2.4 billion pounds) of toxic chemicals are released into the air each year by chemical-manufacturing plants and other industrial concerns. That included more than 320 chemicals, 60 of which were listed by the U.S. government as causing cancer. 90% of all Americans were determined to be carrying measurable concentrations of toxic chemicals including dioxins, furans, chlorobenzene, dichlorobenzene, benzene and styrene in their fatty tissues. All were believed to be cancer causing.

1989 -
Testosterone hormone, is found to directly influence human intensity of sexual desire.
Research by Dr. Barbara Sherwin, a psychologist at McGill University in Montreal, Quebec, Canada, shows that the addition of testosterone to estrogen replacement therapy can increase the libido of some women whose interest has waned after menopause or after surgery in which their ovaries and uterus have been removed. Two USA studies also found correlations between increases in women's natural testosterone levels mid-way through their menstrual cycles and increases in their desired frequency of coitus.

Testosterone, usually referred to as a "male" hormone because of its much greater presence in human males, encourages immediate active responses to difficulties and opportunities including the acting out of anger in assaults, fighting, physical abuse, ... Testosterone agonists, which diminish the presence of testosterone, are increased in the human system by activities including meditation, prayer, reflection, and, reduction in the diet of foods, such as meat, which contribute testosterone. Anxiety, defensiveness, and boredom tend to reduce testosterone production.

1989 - In July/August,
An increasing prevalence of the Ebola Virus was noted in a French Institute of Scientific Research article.
The conclusions came from a 1984 - 1989 study of 5070 randomly selected subjects living in 6 central African countries. The countries were Cameroon, Central African Republic, Chad, Congo, Equatorial Guinea and Gabon. Of the 6 viruses tested for, the Ebola virus was shown to have been exposed to by 12.4% of the subjects, more than double the exposure to the next highest noted virus. The remaining viruses showed an exposure presence of less than 1%.

It would later be suggested that the virus was carried out of the African jungles by subjects along the Kinshasa highway to more widespread areas, even as it was suspected that the AIDS virus spread. The monkey death rate is very high and the disease easily spreads to humans. By early 1995, humans and lab monkeys will have died in laboratories in Germany, France and the United States in spite of the use of the highest degree of safeguards and containment. Dr. Philip Russell, head of a team of U.S. Army virus experts, in Reston, Virginia, would state: "With certain kinds of small changes, this virus could become one that travels in rapid respiratory transmission through humans. Imagine a virus with the infectiousness of influenza and the mortality rate of the Black Plague in the Middle Ages - that's what we're talking about." By early 1995, there still would be no known medicine to halt the progress of the disease, no vaccine to prevent it.

Ebola kills a victim's tissue while he or she is still alive.
The virus attacks every organ and tissue in the body excepting skeletal muscle and bone.
It keeps on multiplying until affected organs throughout the body are blocked and then it moves through the body by way of the bloodstream. The liver turns to yellow liquid resulting in the failure of the kidneys. Haemorrhages occur in the spleen, intestines and genitals. The brain decays, causing seizures and tremors. The eyes turn red and blood runs from them and other body openings. By the time the person dies, the corpse has become a giant source of contamination.

1989 - On July 27,
The USA House of Representatives approved a $305.4-billion defence budget bill that would radically alter the reality of the White House intentions. President George Bush had hoped for a much larger budget. When White House and Congressional leaders had met in April, 1989, they had agreed that the Pentagon (DOD) would get $305 billion in fiscal 1990, which starts October 1. This was to be part of a deficit reduction plan. The military budget represents almost 33% of the total federal budget. The Senate is expected to pass the bill in about a week's time and the bill is expected to be ready in September. Key items include:

B-2 Stealth Bomber:
$70.2 billion for 132 planes; procurement delayed by the House - Pentagon to review and cut costs.

Strategic Defense Initiative:
$4.9 billion requested, received $3.1 billion; scaled back because of doubts about the technology.

Midgetman Missile:
Bush sought $100 million in 1990 for this truck-mounted ICBM; the House suspended it outright.

MX Mobile Peacekeeper Missile:
Nuclear missiles to be placed on 25 trains on the USA railroad system to use against the USSR in a war; Bush asked for $1.8 billion; House cut the request by $502 million.

F-14D Tomcat Jet Fighter: Bush and Cheney wanted it to be scrapped; the House authorized $946 million for new planes.

V-22 Osprey tilt-rotor Aircraft:
Bush sought to scrap the program; the House approved $508 million for more planes.

During the week, the White House and defence contractors waged intense publicity drives to rally support for their desired programs. Next week, Bush and Cheney will launch a major public relations effort proclaiming a need for a better strategic balance with the USSR. The House decision to save the Tomcat purchases was considered to be a lifesaver for Grumman Corp. which would otherwise have been the defence contractor who lost the most in proposed contracts. It was regarded by some commentators as the classic example of the political forces that rule the defence budget - economic needs of defence contractors and saving jobs and votes in one's constituency.

Les Aspin, Wisconsin Democrat and House Armed Services Chairman, commented:

"We've shredded George Bush's strategic programs.
We got a Michael Dukakis defence budget. Mike won the election.
We got no midgetman, no rail MX, big cuts in SDI and a slowdown of the B-2."

Aspin had warned the Pentagon regarding the cost of the B-2 bombers: "Prune it or park it."
It's prototype has only had one test flight, July 17, and that was 18 months late. $23 billion would be approved for 13 planes. TIME magazine estimated that at a price of $1 billion each, the 70-ton B-2s were worth their weight "in gold". Aspin further suggested that the Pentagon's budget lacked any sign of a major restructuring of the defence establishment in spite of the fact that Americans and Soviets are working hard on arms reductions. He added: "Suppose peace does break out? What are we going to do with all these programs?"

During the Reagan White House years, the USA Congress felt humbled by Reagan's personal popularity; many exotic military weapons and high-tech war strategies were adopted. The stronger Congress now feels obliged to exercise its power at the expense of George Bush. What they fail to realize is that Bush has long-standing ties throughout the national intelligence agencies and that global politics can be made to force local policies. With the Defence establishment also behind him, Bush and his administration will recover their ground, and take more.

1989 - During July/August,
Mick Kelly, a British climatologist, noted in an interview that the temperature of the Earth was higher than it had ever been since the first records of temperature had been started. The 6 hottest years of the past 110 years had included 1989 and were all in the 1980s. He speculated that the rate of change had accelerated because of the pollution spewed into the atmosphere during humans in the 1950s and 1960s. He cautioned that any further warming would push the Earth beyond the limits of natural vulnerability and that at that time, the first substantial impacts on humanity would occur.

From 1983 to 1989 there had been a 10% worldwide increase in carbon dioxide emissions sourced from human technological activities. As far back as 1957, Roger Revelle and Hans Suess, working at the Scripps Institute of Oceanography in San Diego, California, had determined that the oceans were only capable of absorbing 50% of the excess carbon dioxide produced by humanity. Where did the rest go?

During September, it was estimated that if the West Antarctic ice sheet started to slide into the ocean, the world could be looking at a 4.9 meter (16 foot) rise in sea level. In addition, climate warming was projected to produce a rise in the volume of water in the oceans through a natural process of expansion when warmed such that a further rise in sea level by as much as 1.5 meters (5 feet) could be expected.

A third of the Earth's human population and more than a third of the Earth's human economic infrastructure are concentrated in coastal regions with altitudes below 1.5 meters (5 feet). Many island countries were at total risk. More than 75% of Americans, that is, more than 180 million people, live within 80 kilometres (50 miles) of a coast. Coastal land was also the most fertile. Rice production in China, Bangladesh and Thailand would be threatened by ANY rise in sea level.

1989 - On July 29,
USA President George Bush, on the 20th anniversary of the Apollo 11 landing on the Moon, announced that:

"History proves that we have never lost by pressing the limits of our frontiers."

He commits the nation to the development of Space station "Freedom" for the 1990s, to be followed by "Back to the Moon, Back to the Future, Back to Space" in the next century.

Bush was fully aware of what most of his citizens were not. The USA had a balance of payments position in trade that had been served by the export of high-cost high-tech missile and rocket hardware. The sale of one Titan rocket to a foreign country would bring an infusion of capital sufficient to offset the purchase by American consumers of 10,000 Toyota cars. American industry had become so dependent upon the arms and aerospace trade that it had lost its capacity and consumer confidence in the production of higher priced consumer and office equipment: cars, hi-fi, televisions, computers, calculators .... Now, American industry was losing its technological lead because increasingly, private industry had to compete with government dominated industry.

1989 -
At the "World Energy Conference" in Montreal, it was presented that by the year 2020 global industrial emissions of carbon dioxide could be 70% higher than current levels, assuming only moderate economic growth. Department of Energy projections in the USA, Canada, and Britain confirmed the news.

USA Department of Energy figures showed that rather than a cut of carbon dioxide by 2005, there will actually be an increase of 31% over 1985 emission levels. A confidential department of Energy memo in Britain projected an increase of carbon dioxide, in the same period, of 37%. In Canada, a report prepared for the provincial and federal Energy ministers in 1989 had estimated that Canadian CO2 emissions would increase 49.3% by 2005, if current trends continue.

1989 - In August,
A spaceperson-injected Implant came free from the skin of Richard Price.
Richard had experienced what he believed was a spaceperson abduction in 1955.
In 1964, he had been harshly treated by social authorities and peers when he had revealed concerns about the implant. In 1981, unprofessional UFO researchers had advised him to do nothing further about it. In June of this year it had begun to protrude from beneath his penile skin; now, it had fallen out. It was a round, cylindrical object about 1 mm wide by 4 mm deep and had 6 appendages. The interior was amber and the shell was white. Price now began to look for someone who would be willing to analyze the object for him. By 1992 he would have some answers.

1989 - By September,
Wilson Bryan Key's book "The Con in Confidence, The Sin in Sincere" is published.
In it, he concludes the following from his sociolinguistic study of mass communications in North America:

"Perceptual distance gives you a platform from which you can see actions to reactions to reactions. Advanced chess players can often self-reflect out to 3 or 4 levels. The technique can render "conscious" perceptual reactions that were "unconscious".

The collective effects of mass media, quite unfortunately, reinforce a population's superficial, one-dimensional reactions to immediate, first-level stimuli. ... Indoctrinated populations remain helplessly vulnerable to verbal or pictorial manipulation in any direction profitable to manipulators. ....

Scottish Philosopher David Hume believed the verbal concept "because" was totally unverifiable and unexplainable as a part of language and thought. .... Such reports only confirm that journalists and readers need to perceive the world in simplistic cause-effect relationships. ...

For example, cause-and-effect medicine is simplistic nonsense.
Organisms respond as whole, integrated entities - from causes known, unknown, and unknowable.

Simplistic cause-and-effect assumptions are questionable, even though acted on with apparent success in a practical, commonsense framework. Anyone who keeps track of his or her unsuccessful decisions based on cause -and- effect conscious assumptions will discover an ego-shattering high score. Humans do not keep such scores, of course. They consciously note a preponderance of wins, repressing or denying the losses. Cause and effect are also verbally formed after the fact, as a rationalization, rather than before. ...

Whenever events or coincidences, repeat frequently enough, an individual expects they will continue. The coincidence can actually be relatively infrequent for a predictive like to be become established. ... Nobel prize-winning physiologist Ivan Pavlov taught dogs to salivate in expectation of food when a buzzer was sounded. ... Humans can also be conditioned to salivate to pictures and music in radio and television commercials. Humans will even salivate in a delayed-time response, days or weeks after viewing a TV commercial, when they perceive the brand label in a supermarket (Poetzle effect). Such training easily develops ritual behaviours around the stimulus.

... (In Skinner's pigeons) These repeated behaviours, of course, eventually appeared to produce food pellets which would have occurred with or without [randomly] the behaviour. The behaviour merely provided the pigeons with the fantasy that they were in control. Cause and effect, for the pigeons, became a self-fulfilling prophecy. Once ritualized behaviour becomes established, it is very difficult to change it in either animals or humans. ...

Consciously and unconsciously, humans are still victimized by word magic, ritual behaviours, and immersion in an ocean of fantasized cause-and-effect delusions. Modern, educated individuals think themselves liberated from the darkness of superstition and ignorance. Yet they mindlessly accept words and phrases intentionally designed to camouflage reality. U.S. ad media carefully avoid factual, measurable descriptions of product qualities .... Word magic sells products, people, political ideology, religious faith, and everything else sold in the U.S. ...

The freedom to choose what one wears, drives, or eats replaces meaningful social, economic, or political alternatives. Commercial hypes conceal much of what is corrupt, authoritarian, unjust and cruelly exploitive. Such hype also muffles and distorts clear perceptions of the rest of the world. ...

Once individuals understand and accept the subjectivity of human perception, they acquire enormous power over their lives. They can protect themselves from manipulation or - ... go into the business of managing the perceptions of others."

1989 - In the September "Chatelaine" magazine issue,
Dr. Harold Kalant, a Toronto pharmacologist is quoted as saying:

"Due to physiological difference, women don't always respond the same way as men to drugs and other medical treatments. The most significant differences are that the female body contains less water, more fat and fluctuating levels of hormones. The hormonal ups and downs are associated with menstruation, pregnancy, menopause, use of oral contraceptives and estrogen replacement therapy.

... medical researchers tend to prefer male subjects because women's changing hormone levels complicate the studies. Researchers also want to avoid the possibility of exposing a fetus to an unknown drug - e.g., if a woman participates in a study before she realizes she is pregnant. ....

The current understanding and treatment of alcoholism is based predominantly on studies of men, but some clinicians have noted significant differences between female and male patients. In general, a woman's body is more vulnerable to the ravages of alcohol, because her body contains less water. Female alcohols are more likely to develop anemia because of iron and folic acid deficiencies related to the demands of menstruation."

1989 - On September 01,
At Shevchenko, U.S.S.R., a giant cigar-shaped object was witnessed.

1989 - During September,
Werner Heisenberg is quoted as saying:

"All information between humans can only be exchanged within a field of tolerance for uncertainty. Every judgement, especially those judgements of science, stands upon the edge of error."

1989 - During September,
Hurricane "Hugo" crossed the eastern seaboard of the USA at a speed of 160 mph (260 km/h), killing 71 people and causing $10 billion worth of damage. At peak strength, such a wind can release energy that is equivalent to 25 Hiroshima-type nuclear bombs.

1989 - During September,
Iraq reaches the capability of a future space vehicle launch with a ballistic missile launch.
It is recorded at the combined headquarters of NORAD (North American Aerospace Defense Command) and the USA Space Command at Peterson AFB in Colorado. The "Space Surveillance Center" inside the hollowed-out Cheyenne Mountain is enclosed in 15 steel buildings and includes a series of control rooms and offices. The buildings are cushioned on steel springs inside vast chambers cut out of the granite mountain. Some 30,000 to 60,000 daily observations from the radar and optical sensors of the Space Surveillance network are relayed to the complex and processed by SSC to maintain a database of all catalogued Earth satellites. These data are forwarded to the Space Defense Operations Center (SPADOC) where government & military satellite activities are co-ordinated.

1989 - On September 21,
Over Voronezh, U.S.S.R., witnesses saw a sphere of 60 feet in diameter with 4 landing legs.

1989 - On September 27,
Over Voronezh, a luminous ball estimated at 45 feet in diameter was reported.

1989 - On September 29,
A very high solar burst and magnetic storm occurred.
It was stronger than the high storms on March 13/14 and in August.
The highest recorded saturation of X-rays and particles (cosmic rays) and a 380% increase in neutrons (7% is usually considered a large increase) of the satellite era were recorded.
The general public were never informed.

1989 - On October 4,
At "Hazelton Research Products" in the city of Reston, Virginia, a biohazard incident occurred in the Reston Primate Quarantine Unit. At this point, 16,000 wild monkeys were being imported each year into the USA from tropical locations for the purpose of research experimentation. Monkeys are chosen because of their similar biology. The importation quarantine was to cull sick animals rather than risk a spread of imported contagious disease.

Dan Dalgard, was the consulting veterinarian at the Unit, available from another Corning subsidiary: "Hazelton Washington", Reston.

A shipment of 100 primates had arrived from the Ferlite Farms, in the Philippines.
Crab-eating macaques had been collected from the rainforest on the island of Mindanao.
There, they are competitors with humans for the use of the environment.
They have sharp canine teeth, a human-like hand, human-like breasts, Caucasian-coloured skin and a dog-like snout. They travel in troops and feed on vegetation, fruits, insects, grass, roots, pieces of clay (for minerals and internal cleansing), crabs and farmer's crops. A dominant male leadership hierarchy is enforced by the leader staring down subordinates, and, attacking them if necessary. From Mindaneo Island they had been flown, boxed in wooden crates, to Amsterdam and then to New York City - then delivered by truck to Reston. Two of the monkeys that arrived today were dead in their crates. Over the next 3 weeks, an unusual additional number would die.

1989 - During October,
The U.S.A. launches the Galileo space probe satellite on a 6 year journey to Jupiter.

1989 - On October 08,
Near Voronezh, U.S.S.R., a large shining ball or oval disc was again observed.

1989 - On October 19,
The highest strength solar burst ever recorded occurred.
It rivalled the August 1972 in peak numbers but it stayed at that level for days longer.
In a few days of exposure, solar electric power panels on satellites aged the otherwise normal equivalent of 5 years, cutting the life of some satellites in half from 10 years to 5. Ground controllers had to send 177 control maneuvers to one communications satellite in a day - equivalent to 1-1/2 years of regular activity. Frantic activity was required to forestall USA power grid failures.
The general public were never informed.

1989 - During October,
A 6.9 San Andreas Earthquake resulted in the damage of many buildings and the death of nearly 300 people.
A freeway and a section of the Bay Bridge linking San Francisco with Oakland collapsed.
A massive fire followed in Oakland Hills.

1989 - By now,
Cosmetic and Toiletry Formulations contain up to 35% polymers and more than 50% of their ingredients include specialty raw ingredients such as polymers, mild surfactants, cosmetic active ingredients, thickeners, and ultraviolet light absorbers. In general, formulations may include 30% to 80%

Sales of hair care products have nearly doubled between 1982 and 1987 with the introduction of mousses.
In an effort to satisfy the concerns and vanities of their customers, cosmetic companies have called on their suppliers to formulate products which were good for the body rather than just making it look better. The newer products are becoming closer to pharmaceuticals than to cosmetics. As more sophisticated promises for their products are made by the cosmetic companies, it becomes necessary for them to have chemical suppliers who will substantiate such claims to the regulatory Food & Drug Administration. There is an increasing emphasis on being able to guarantee results, not just meet specifications.

Sales of skin care products are currently growing at a rate of 10% annually.

The aging of the North American and European populations together with an increasing consumer awareness of the dangers of excessive exposure to ultraviolet rays has increased the sale of skin care products. One strategy is the inclusion of liposomes - active ingredients which permeate the skin's surface, increase skin elasticity; enhance the appearance of skin's surface texture, making it appear younger and healthier; balancing the oiliness of the skin by reducing dryness and minimizing oiliness. In addition, sunscreens are added to absorb the U-V rays and hydrating agents are added to slowly inject moisture into the skin. The ideal sought for is an attempt to replicate the eden-like environment of the rainforest - at least for the face. Some new polymers, like Dermacryl 79, form a moisture barrier on the skin in an effort to retain moisture which would otherwise evaporate - possibly providing natural cooling and toxin release. The suntan lotion market will grow by 14% this year. Men appear to be as interested in skin care products now as women, with sales of toilet soaps, skin moisturizers, antiperspirants and deodorizers exceeding $2.1 billion for 1989.

Companies are now looking to inorganics such as titanium dioxide, which is considered inert in relation to the skin, and, because it won't penetrate. Quite a few titanium dioxide sunscreens are entering the market with added ingredients to reduce the usual whitening blob often associated with the oxide. Lipsticks are being updated to include pigments that won't change colour and lubricants that don't blur. While better than the stain approach to colouration, these products are enabling the high stress lifestyles of women to proceed and expand rather than to become more balanced. Catering to women who work long hours, including leaving their children in day care, eating erratically scheduled meals and having insufficient regular balanced exercise and relaxation breaks, these products excuse destructive coping habits by substituting paint for true health. Taking a short meditation or exercise break, closing the office door at a regular time each day for a brief though relaxed lunch, eating simple though balanced prepared foods, eliminating cigarette smoking, reducing caffeine intake, using an office humidifier, and smiling occasionally - all contribute to good skin health with adequate moisture. Of course, it is easier to do a quick fix, especially when advertisements suggest that your "looks" are more important about you than your health.

This approach is also extended to the market in the form of multipurpose products, such as combined hair conditioner-shampoos, which offer to simplify purchasing and reduce time expenditure. Even with this apparent awareness and servitude to the desires of the consumer, companies are planning for the mass global market. Rather than developing products which have regional acceptability, many are being tested for acceptability by the regulating authorities internationally. To offset a sense of impersonal big business, many companies are abandoning distributor-based marketing and forming specialty companies of personal care consultants. Increasing consumer concern over package listings of ingredients has led to the FDA considering requesting legislation. Voluntary ingredient labelling has not gained much of a following earlier; now, the Cosmetic Toiletry & Fragrance Association (CTFA) is promoting a voluntary ingredient labelling program for "professional products".

Media exploitation of the animals testing topic have resulted in a one-sided reaction from so-called "Green" sympathizers who are now calling for "natural" products which presumably do not require pretesting. Manufacturers are seeking to develop such formulations; most of the ingredients have at some time been animal tested. The prospect of introducing herbal pharmaceuticals to the foreign and idiosyncratic biological environment of the humans skin organ, often as a spot application - invites immune or sensitivity reactions which could result in either widespread negative media exposure or costly court cases. Few humans appear to wish to be used for the experimental testing procedures necessary in order to assure government authorities of the potential safety of the product. Finally, attempts to use herbal and "natural" formulations without the addition of chemical ingredients, including toxic fungicides, introduces dangerous products to the market.

Such natural ingredients are only healthy when used in a fresh state.
The longer the product is in use, unrefrigerated, frequently contaminated by naturally oily fingers, and exposed to handbag, bathroom, and makeup counter environments - the greater potential there is for fungal and bacterial contamination and growth. The only "best" option is regulate your own individual lifestyle for a healthy skin and make your own formulations in small quantities from fresh common ingredients. That requires self-awareness, knowledge, self-esteem, self-direction, organization, and, self-responsibility. Obviously there is no capital gain in promoting these habits and skills.

1989 - By November 1,
Bill Volt, the Reston Primate Quarantine Unit colony manager, called Dan Dalgard, the consulting veterinarian.
Out of a shipment of 100 monkeys which had arrived about a month earlier, 2 had arrived dead and 29 more had died since. Most of the deaths had occurred in one of the 12 holding rooms. In all, there were about 500 monkeys in the Unit. Dalgard was busy and didn't reach the Unit until the following week.

1989 - In November,
An unexplained skyquake was reported over the Gulf Breeze area of Florida, U.S.A..
An area of swirled grass was found shortly afterwards, similar to a crop circle. Two months later, the same sequence of events would occur again. The measurements of the ground circles would match with those calculated for the base of the UFOs photographed by Ed Walters and others in the area (14-15 feet). They were quite unlike the ground circle found behind the Gulf Breeze High School in December, 1987. In that case, the grass appeared to have been subjected to a great amount of pressure which removed the chlorophyll from the grass, which died immediately.

1989 - On November 9,
Dan Dalgard, consulting veterinarian with the Corning subsidiary, "Hazelton Washington", visited the Reston Primate Quarantine Unit to investigate a possible disease outbreak reported a week earlier. In the primary holding room of concern, Room F, he found 2 monkeys with fevers, runny noses, and droopy eyelids. Overnight, they died.

The Unit manager, Bill Volt, dissected the animals in an attempt to determine the cause of death and was confused by the findings. He phoned Dalgard and requested that he inspect the corpses. He came over immediately that morning, November 10. Heat stress appeared a possibility. The Quarantine Unit had been overheated for weeks because the building thermostat was defective and the landlord had not yet repaired it. Unusually, the spleen had enlarged and there was blood in each of the animal's intestines. The possibility of a contagious agent began to be considered by Dalgard. He began to suspect simian haemorrhagic fever, SHF, a monkey virus not dangerous to humans. It can wipe out a monkey colony, though.

That evening, Dan returned to the Unit to check on the monkeys in Room F.
He found 3 more dead. He removed them and dissected them.
The symptoms of the dead past, present and near future monkeys would all be similar:
a swollen spleen, enlarged kidneys, sporadic occurrence of haemorrhage in a variety of organs, abrupt anorexia, lethargy. Otherwise, most of the animals were in prime health. Most peculiar, the spleens were enlarged, tough and dry. Usually, the spleen would be small, soft, and would ooze blood like a sponge when cut into. During November 12, Dalgard again checked the Unit, Room F, and found 3 more monkeys dead. This time, he took a spleen biopsy and a mucous throat swab from one of the dead monkeys, "O53", for later laboratory analysis.

1989 - On November 11 and 13,
Robert Lazar and his revelations about a secret "black" projects Department of Defense base located north of Las Vegas were aired on the evening news show of Las Vegas's KLAS-TV station. The outcome of a 1-1/2 year investigation conducted by reporter George Knapp, it brought the reality of the base, variously referred to as "Groom Lake", "Area 51", "S-4", and "Dreamland", into public view. One of the early uses of the base had been for Lockheed to develop the U-2 spyplane for the CIA, beginning in the mid-1950s. Lazar told Knapp that he had been hired by the Navy to study some classified technical papers on advanced propulsion systems, and related that he was alarmed to read about systems which were too advanced to be of human origin.

In his movements around the base, Lazar recounted how he was taken past a disc-like craft which he was instructed not to look at directly and which he later saw test fly quietly to hover a distance above the ground. Eventually he was allowed to view 8 other shapes of craft, all of which were disc-shaped yet had distinctive appearances. A glimpse inside one of the craft, possibly recovered, allowed him to see small crew seats, which he judged too small for human adults. He further discovered that the element 115, not yet publicly recognized in the Earth science community, played a major role in the development of gravity-harnessing technology. In addition, he noticed that at least one of the power sources for the crafts was "an Anti-matter reactor," something of which there was no published concept of.

For human inventions, it is usual that a great amount of time is spent in developing a humanly understandable working concept before attempting to test principles that must be confirmed before a prototype design is even attempted on paper. The only exception is when humans receive "divine inspiration" in an apparent flash of awareness which conveys information to them of which they have been totally unaware previously, and, which now appears relatively easy and straightforward to understand - as if they had been tutored while in a sleep-state of hypnosis, received the information by some form of mental telepathy or thought transfer, or were shown the process while in an altered state of consciousness and left with the expressed ability to remember only that part of the experience on awakening.

1989 - On November 13,
USAMRIID, Fort Detrick, was asked by Dan Dalgard to provide assistance in identifying the disease agent killing the monkeys at the Reston Quarantine Unit. Peter Jahrling, a civilian virologist, became Dalgard's contact. He agreed to inspect a sample which Dalgard would send to him. The next day, a sample of monkey O53's spleen and throat mucous arrived for Jahrling, wrapped with few precautions.

Jahrling took the samples to Level 3 containment and began inspecting them with a pathologist.
Later that day, frustrated with the hazardous manner in which the samples had been packaged and sent to him, he telephoned Dalgard and instructed him on how to pack any future specimens. Meanwhile, Joan Rhoderick, a civilian technician, prepared a culture of the specimens.

1989 - During November,
General Vladimir Kryuchkov, head of the KGB, speaking at anniversary celebrations of Lenin's 1917 Revolution declared:

"In military affairs, perestroika and modernization of Soviet technology under the new economic thinking and more open East-West trade will help increase the military might of our country ... Soviet disarmament proposals act as solvents to 'disarm' the military - industrial complex of NATO."

1989 - Late in the year,
Sister Dianna Ortiz, an American nun working in Guatemala, is kidnapped by 3 uniformed Guatemalan men.
She is gang-raped and burned more than 100 times with lit cigarettes.
The men then dropped her into a pit filled with dead bodies and live rats.
Suddenly, a man called Alejandro shouts in English: "Shit!"
Then, in American-accented Spanish, he told the 3 men: "Idiots, she's a North American!
Let her alone." He then helped her put on her clothes and took her to a gray Jeep, insisting all the while that it had been a case of mistaken identity. He promised to take her to a friend at the U.S. Embassy, but fearing for her life, Ortiz fled. The treatment of civilian women by the rebels and military at the time repeated the above incident with a fatal ending many times.

CIA paid "consultants" were introduced into the country to train the local peasant male to be ruthless, aggressive, authoritarian technicians of war. Using the usual marine-style psychological self-esteem robbing techniques, it was not unusual for some men, under the enthusiasm of their "advisors" to be degraded to a point that a submerged rage lay in wait for expression. Since reaction against the abusive commanding officers was not tolerated, it was sometimes expressed against the more helpless members of the society: civilians, including women. Taking peaceful men from a simple agricultural lifestyle, submersing them in a routine of humiliation and brutality and then removing them from their lovers for months at a time can do wonders to the human mind. Most of the results are neither surprising nor pleasant, and, after the war, none will ever be able to return to the degree of emotional freedom and spiritual strength which they held before. Was the price of political manipulation worth the cost to the social fabric and loss of human potential?

1989 - On November 15,
Bill Volt found Reston Quarantine Unit Room F had 8 more monkeys with symptoms of the fatal disease which had killed half the monkeys in the room. Late the next morning the anxious Dalgard received word from USAMRIID's Jahrling that the tentative diagnosis was SHF, harmless to humans, lethal to monkeys. Later that afternoon, on November 16, Dalgard and another veterinarian injected all the remaining monkeys in Room F with a lethal dose of anaesthetic. The disease had to be prevented from further spreading through the quarantine unit. The dead monkeys, including 8 dissected ones, were placed in clear plastic bags and placed in a Unit chest freezer for later disposal.

1989 -
A USA Government Census Report found computer use and ownership skyrocketing.
But use and ownership by African-Americans was almost negligible.
The report said that 26.9 million blacks - used computers at home.
Among children age 3 to 17, some 10.7 million white children used computers at home compared with 806,000 black children. In school, the number of children using computers rises significantly for both groups, but the gap is just as profound: 17.4 million white students but only 2.4 million black students.

The same report found that owning a computer was closely associated with household income (and education) levels: 47.5% of households with annual incomes of $75,000 or more owned computers; 4.8% of households with incomes of $15,000 or less owned them. Combine that with the fact that nearly 1/3rd of all black Americans lived in poverty in 1990, according to the census bureau (the government defines poverty as a 2-person household with an annual income $9,165 or less per year, or a 4-person household with an annual income of $13,924 or less).

1989 - On November 17,
Thomas Geisbert, an intern at USAMRIID specializing in the operation of the electron microscope exercised his curiosity and determined to look at the recently acquired samples which had come from the Reston Primate Quarantine Unit. Geisbert was an introspective person who had developed a compulsive workaholism. While his marriage was dissolving, his fascination with technology, viruses and solitary work habits had been growing.

In the Level 3 lab, he met Joan Rhoderick who expressed concern over the performance of the cultured samples of the Monkey O53 disease. Geisbert found that something was destroying the cells in the samples - puffing them up first with dark crystalline specks inside - and then exploding them. Geisbert, now also concerned, left the lab, scrubbed, spoke to Peter Jahrling, their senior, and returned with Peter to the lab. A possibility, and annoying occasional occurrence, is that a bacteria will contaminate the samples and kill the cells. When this happens, an odour is usually released to the air (rotting), whereas, if cells die from virus influence, there is no noticeable change in odour. There was no noticeable odour. Jahrling suggested that Geisbert examine the tissues under the electron microscope.

Geisbert prepared the sample for analysis: decanting, centrifuging, selection, and plastic resin encasement.
Geisbert was an avid outdoorsman, he had been planning a Thanksgiving deer hunting weekend with some buddies and it was Friday afternoon. He went home and packed. The sample would wait until after the weekend. Filovirus strains are highly fatal to humans and contagious in transmission: after exposure, 3 to 18 days incubation follows in the human; then the person gets a headache.

On the same day, Dan Dalgard had returned to the Reston Primate Quarantine Unit and found 5 more dead monkeys - in Room H. It was evident that the disease which had killed well over half the monkeys in Room F was spreading through the containment unit. What concerned him was how the disease was being transmitted and how it could be controlled.

1989 - On November 23,
The USA Discovery Space Shuttle was launched to carry the National Security Agency's (NSA) second "2.7 ton Magnum Signal Intelligence" GEO satellite for monitoring Soviet & Chinese voice and data transmissions.

1989 - On November 27,
Tom Geisbert, working the electron microscope at USAMRIID, to analyze sample slices from Reston Primate Quarantine Unit monkey O53, found a filovirus. The cells were not just dead, they had blown apart - and the cell was now crammed with worm-like virus. His experience encouraged him to rationalize that this was the similar-shaped Marburg virus. Electron microscopes provide the operator with the option of making photographs of the microscopic view. Geisbert made several and developed them.

Geisbert found that the virus had altered the structure of the cell with added crystal-like blocks of pure virus inclusion bodies. Geisbert showed the pictures to his senior, Peter Jahrling, who notified Colonel Clarence James Peters, MD.: chief of the disease assessment division at USAMRIID. Peters expressed scepticism yet confirmed that Jahrling was arranging to test the samples for Marburg and Ebola. Secretly, Geisbert and Jahrling included a sample of their own blood for testing: they had sniffed the samples days before.

Late on November 28, after extensive procedures to test the samples, Jahrling came up with the results that indicated that the Reston virus was neither Marburg, nor Ebola Sudan; it was Ebola Zaire! That virus had a fatality ratio of 9 out of 10 infected humans.

Colonel Peters was informed and he introduced the findings to Colonel David Huxsoll, commander of USAMRIID: there was an Ebola-like filovirus in a bunch of monkeys outside of Washington, D.C., the capital. Lt. Colonel Nancy Jaax, the Institute's chief of pathology was informed. A meeting was called at the office of Major General Philip K. Russell, MD, commander of the United States Army Medical Research and Development Command. At the meeting it was agreed that a national emergency loomed before them.

There was evidence that the virus could travel through the air: Nancy Jaax's incident in 1983.
In 1986, monkeys had been infected in an experiment which had the test monkeys exposed to the virus in aerosol form. ALL of the monkeys so exposed to Ebola had died. None of the results had been published. Jahlring continued to rationalize that he hadn't really "inhaled" the virus, and kept silent about the incident with he and Geisbert. Options for control were limited to biocontainment. There still were no vaccines or drugs which could counter its progression. Jaax had never seen a monkey survive an Ebola strain; it was also a species jumper: it could mutate and quickly infect other species.

No strategy for coping with a Level 4 biohazard in North America had yet been formulated and instituted for the USA. A clear definition of which officials to contact in such an incident was lacking. Colonel Peters contacted his friend and one of the original founders of the Ebola virus Frederick A. Murphy, now director of the National Center for Infectious Diseases. From there, the group were charged with alerting the State and County authorities, the US Dept. of Agriculture, the EPA, Dalgard, ....

1989 - On November 29,
Colonel C.J. Peters of USAMRIID contacted Dan Dalgard and received permission for himself and Nancy Jaax to visit the Reston Primate Quarantine Unit and inspect several samples for infection. They confirmed their earlier diagnosis of a suspected Ebola. For security and legal reasons, the officers requested that Bill Volt package several samples in plastic and deliver them at a distance from the facility. They were concerned when he later showed up with 7 complete monkeys double-bagged in garbage bags. They had died the night before. With Jaax rationalizing that the law did not permit her to transport the infected bodies, the Colonel drove the load to Fort Detrick.

Later that afternoon, Lt. Colonel Nancy Jaax and Lt. Colonel Ron Trotter donned their UDAMRIID Level 4 space suits performed an autopsy on one of the 7 monkeys from Rexton. Jaax found the spleen enlarged and tough; very little bleeding into any of the organs or thoracic cavity; a ring of bleeding spots between the stomach and the small intestine;

Meanwhile, a meeting of the Army USAMRIID Fort Detrick senior personnel (Colonel Clarence James Peters, MD and Peter Jahrling), Centers for Disease Control (CDC) representatives from Atlanta, Georgia (Major General Philip K. Russell, MD, Dr. Joseph B. McCormack and Frederick A. Murphy), and the Reston veterinarian (Dan Dalgard) was being conducted in the Fort Detrick headquarters boardroom. Political dynamics were sensitive making teamwork difficult. Only McCormack had seen and treated human casualties of Ebola. He knew it and he was confident of his expertise. Competition for authority existed between the Army and the CDC regarding who would take control for the resolution of the incident.

When Peters suggested that it could take a week for tests to confirm whether a sample had the virus in it, McCormack revealed that he had a quick test for Ebola that would provide confirmation in 12 hours. In the final analysis, the Army had 7 dead primate samples, was growing the virus in cultures and had two Lt. Colonels in a Level 4 laboratory running tests. General Russell suggested a compromise. He and Murphy set out how the CDC would manage the human health aspects of the outbreak and would direct the care of any human patients; the Army would be responsible for the monkeys and the monkey house focus of the outbreak. Now each group could organize their "Mission".

Colonel Peters determined that the monkeys would have to be killed and removed from the Hazelton Monkey House (also known as the Reston Primate Quarantine Unit) under Level 4 biohazard conditions (the use of Tyvek self-contained 'space suits'). He placed Lt. Colonel Nancy Jaax in charge of the mission. Soldiers and civilian personnel were to be assembled in 24 hours. Gene Johnson, who had conducted the Kitum Cave project in the Spring of 1988 - and who had kept the tons of equipment assembled, now readied to reassemble the gear for use at Reston. Had he not done so, enabled by the sloppy administration of the bureaucracy, acquiring the required equipment could have taken almost a week. Nancy Jaax completed her analysis late in the day: it indicated the presence of either or both of Ebola and SHF virus in all 7 of the monkey specimens. Which, was the anxious question.

1989 - On the morning of November 30,
An Army Insertion Team was organized by Colonel Jerry Jaax, under the authorization of Colonel Peters.
Essentially, the Fort Detrick, Maryland commissioned officers were gathered together and asked if they wanted to go to Reston: to 'play' in the mission. They would make an "insertion" (entrance) into the monkey house, kill all of the monkeys, and, bring back samples - all while dressed in Tyvek suits and operating under Level 4 biocontainment procedures. They would leave the next morning. The core members of the team would include Major Nathaniel Powell, Captain Mark Haines, Captain Steven Denny, Sergeant Curtis Klages, Sergeant Thomas Amen, and, a civilian animal caretaker, Merhl Gibson.

Sergeant Klages and Gene Johnson drove down to Reston to take a quick recon of the location that would help them build a strategy for the next day. On arrival they went in the front door and immediately noticed a stench of monkey excrement, urine and blood. The handlers had stopped cleaning the cages after receiving a warning not to enter the quarantine rooms more than once a day nor have any unprotected contact with the monkeys or their byproducts. Received by Bill Volt, Klages and Johnson were afraid to touch anything, suspecting that the whole building was "hot" with virus. They tried not to breathe much of the air in the building.

When the two had a general floorplan of the Unit, Gene asked the monkey attendants to seal off the back part of the building which had Room H in it: the room in which most of the monkeys had died. The door leading to the back monkey rooms was taped closed. Media had begun to gather outside. The Army was still trying to keep public awareness of the situation nil. Gene expected that the team would enter by way of some vacant side offices, proceed towards the back of the building, enter a storeroom, put on their 'space suits', and then proceed down a corridor to the quarantine rooms concerned. All of the action would take place away from the cameras and with the best safety possible afforded to the team.

Radio reports earlier that morning in the Reston area had alerted residents, including the lab workers for the Hazelton offices, that there was a possibility of an Ebola outbreak and that the Ebola virus had "killed hundreds of thousands of people in Africa." Many of the workers were near panic when Lt Colonel Nancy Jaax, Colonel C.J. Peters and Joe McCormack arrived at the offices. With rational good intentions, McCormack tried to calm their fears by describing his experiences in southern Sudan. The problem was that the near panic women had to wait until the end of a lengthy description for the punchline: McCormack believed that Ebola was not easily transferred; he had survived. His attempts only made the lab workers more uneasy with his description of the dying victims. One woman got to the point stating that she didn't care what anyone's qualifications were - was she going to get sick and die? Jaax asked several straight-forward questions about whether anyone had experienced any accidents with the lab equipment while running their tests. None had. She said they would all be OK then. Dalgard then took the three visitors over to the Quarantine Unit.

On arrival, Jaax noticed that there were no respirators in use or available, despite an earlier request from Dalgard for each to be wearing one inside the building. Most of the remaining live monkeys appeared sick. Jaax took shallow breaths, stood back away from the cages and was careful not to stare at them for fear that an aggressive response might result in spitting - which could easily land in ones eyes - and infect a person. She also noticed that the canines of the monkeys had not been filed down as they usually were. Monkeys have 5 prehensile (grabbing) limbs (including the tail); they run very fast; they can jump long distances; they defend themselves by sitting on your chest, tail around your neck, slashing your face with their canines. Generally, in hand-to-hand combat, humans are no match for scared monkeys. Mistakes in this operation could be very costly.

1989 - On December 1,
A Front Page Story blazed across the front of "The Washington Post" newspaper:
"Deadly Ebola Virus Found in Va. Laboratory Monkey."
A 50% to 90% mortality rate and the fact that it was highly contagious and that no known vaccine existed - offered little solace with the additional information that the authorities were working on the problem and that Colonel Peters was quoted belittling the concern. American were becoming accustomed to disbelieving authorities who appeared to be communicating with them as if they were children. A major military biohazard operation was about to occur near the USA capital and an ignorant public would best remain ignorant to avoid panic. Had there been civilian awareness beforehand (to prevent over-dramatization, gossip-generated myths, hysteria-promoted disinformation), a formulated civilian plan (which uneducated African tribal chiefs had), and a demonstrated ability to detect and cope effectively with suspected similar incidents - the outcome would have proceeded much more smoothly and constructively.

Early that morning, a line of unmarked vehicles, containing soldiers in civilian clothing, a Level 4 biocontainment ambulance, and a supply van - set out from Fort Detrick. Arriving at the Quarantine Unit, the unmarked ambulance and supply vehicles were driven close to the back of the building. A daycare centre was in operation next door.

Colonel Jerry Jaax and former Green Beret, Captain Mark Haines - were the first to put on surgical scrub suits with Racal field biological suits over them. When the two stepped out of the storage room into the "airlock" corridor to the monkey rooms, there were no lights on and neither had brought or had flashlights! The thermostats in the building still had not been repaired such that the monkey rooms were exceedingly hot. As the two left the dark corridor and entered another corridor which led past the back monkey rooms they almost ran into two Hazelton workers with respirators who had entered by an entrance unknown to the team. Eventually, with the assistance of Dan Dalgard in a respirator, who had been waiting in a front office for their arrival, Jerry and Mark surveyed the monkeys in all of the rooms. They began to suspect that the whole building was highly contaminated. Monkeys in each room appeared to be sick.

Team participants continued to suit up and go down the corridors until Room H was filled with ballooning suits in a state of confusion. The first and more sick monkeys to be killed were multiply bagged and boxed and deconned with bleach spray. Then they were loaded in a refrigerator truck and taken back to Fort Detrick by Nancy Jaax and a driver. Back at USAMRIID, Jaax and Trotter would work in Level 4 until 1:00 A.M. checking the 4 monkey corpses for Ebola indicators: they would find many. The intestinal tissue cells had died and begun to decay as if the animal had been dead for 3 or 4 days. Massive blood clotting in the intestinal muscles had cut off blood circulation to the area, while uncoagulated blood had collected in the intestine from separations of organ and other tissues. Within hours after leaving Reston, some of the monkey corpses had practically liquified under the influence of the spreading virus.

The remainder of the team set to anaesthetizing the remaining 65 animals in "Room H".
Blood samples were taken and then each was given an injection of T-61, a fatal poison.
Then, the corpses were cut open and samples of liver and spleen were taken and placed in plastic bottles.
Then, the remains were bagged and boxed and placed in the corridor.
Lastly, the team decontaminated in pairs, dressed, and left the building.

1989 - A December USSR Budget Report
Indicated that 2/3rds of all launches of satellites supported defence objectives.
Around 80-100 satellites operate daily to supply information to the Communist countries.
Soviet "civil" satellites, like those in the West, have the potential for supporting military operations in times of crisis. All meteorological data for military, government and civilian needs is supplied by the USSR Meteor weather satellites. In addition, 40% of the 1989 military space budget was estimated to be recouped by savings in the military communications programme alone.

The MIR spacestation, while promoted as entirely for peaceful purposes, nevertheless has been used to conduct military applications of remote sensing, oceanography, meteorology and geodesy. Astronomical observations can provide data useful for the maintaining the orientation of certain equipment to an accuracy of a few arc-seconds, a capability needed to aim directed-energy weapons. Space programmes for military purposes are expected to enhance the combat effectiveness of a nation's armed forces by 150 to 200%, that is killing and destructive power effectiveness.

The ability to rendezvous and manually dock with uncooperative spacecraft, available since the late 1960s, now makes use of a laser rangefinder, a night vision device, and an optical sight - all of which have military applications. While the procedure can be used to rescue stranded astronauts, it can also be used to disable enemy satellites.

1989 - On December 4,
Milton Frantig, a monkey caretaker at the Reston Primate Quarantine Unit, left the Unit early in the morning.
He still had a white Tyvek protective suit on and as Dan Dalgard pulled into the parking lot, Frantig was standing bent over, hand on his knees, vomiting and retching. Frantig had been working at Hazelton for more than 25 years. As Frantig had been preparing to feed the monkeys he had suddenly become ill. Unable to find a bucket, he had rushed outside. Now, Dalgard could not find a thermometer to check Frantig's temperature. Dalgard sent Volt to buy one and on his return it was determined that Frantig had an elevated temperature. Dalgard was very concerned. Two of his four workers were now ill. Another, had experienced a heart attack on November 29th and was still in the hospital. Dalgard drove quickly to the Hazelton head office and recommended that the monkey facility be evacuated immediately.

Officials from the CDC were waiting in Dalgard's office and he briefed them on Frantig's condition, his concerns, and his recommendation of closing down the monkey house and turning it over to USAMRIID. The CDC agreed with Dalgard's decisions, but specified that they wanted Frantig sent to Fairfax Hospital, inside the Washington Beltway.

Dalgard next notified Colonel Peters of USAMRIID that the Army could now take responsibility for the monkey facility and that the CDC were moving Frantig to Fairfax. Peters was concerned about the possibility of a spread of Ebola within the hospital and contacted Joe McCormack at the CDC. Peters stressed that he could place Frantig in an Army biocontainment pod, transport him by Army ambulance to Fort Detrick and treat him in the Level 4 containment hospital at USAMRIID. McCormick declined the offer.

With all of the confusion, arrival of Army personnel, sight of the Tyvek suits, requirement to wear respirators, loss of 2 personnel, media descriptions, local gossip and the ambulance fleeing with the media in pursuit - the remaining workers locked the Quarantine Unit with the remaining 450 monkeys inside and left.

Later that day, Colonel Peters and General Russell signed a letter to Dalgard and Hazelton taking over control of the Quarantine Unit. Colonel Jerry Jaax was placed in charge of organizing a much larger second team. This time they would be killing 450 monkeys, not 69. The Army 91-T animal-care technicians were assembled, briefed, and selected for duty beginning the next morning. Their training in the use of the Tyvek suits and in biohazard situations was nil.

That evening, out of concern for the 91-T volunteers, Gene Johnson went through the motions at his home that he expected would be required at the monkey house. Noting each movement, any dangers in getting a suit tear or puncture, and the best position for an assistant to be at - he wrote out many pages of procedure that would be applicable in any biohazard operation.

1989 - On December 5,
A Second Biohazard Team gathered at USAMRIID and headed for the Hazelton Monkey House in Reston.
Colonel Jerry Jaax and Sergeant Thomas Amen entered first.
They found monkeys in every room with apparent symptoms of Ebola.
The monkeys not having had their cages cleaned for a time and hungry - had trashed the rooms from within their cages. First, Jaax and Amen fed the monkeys to calm them.

Meanwhile, the male and female privates were being prepared and suiting up.
When ready, Captain Mark Haines gave an orientation and motivational speech - then entered the building. Suiting up was aggravated by the bitter cold outside and the sweltering heat inside the building. Each soldier had to strip naked, in a truck outside, put on a surgical scrub suit, socks, sneakers, and a hair cap - and then run into the building where they would be helped into a Tyvek "spacesuit."

The suits were not sized according to the volunteers and some who were small ended up in extra-large sized suits: a hazard. The first team officers organized themselves and the privates into an assembly line to make the operation more efficient. This was not pre-planned. It was done on the spot. There was an anaesthetizing team, a bleed team, a euthanasia team, and a necropsy (opening the corpse for tissue samples) team. Sometimes, an officer might change with a private and let him or her do the injecting or cutting. Radio contact was maintained with Gene Johnson outside the building by way of military frequency radios.

Late in the afternoon, Rhonda Williams, a specialist, experienced trouble with her blower; she didn't have a spare battery, nor did anyone else. Her suit deflated before she could get out and monkey house air started to seep into her suit. Jerry radioed outside for another battery. Nearer, a soldier brought one in. Rhonda was tired and anxious about the air failure. A private, Charlotte Godwin looked tired. Jerry sent both outside for a rest.

At the decon station, a sergeant sprayed both women's suits with bleach.
He noticed that Rhonda had a hole in her suit, asked her about it, and tapped it.
With the heat in the building and the exertion of the work, everyone's scrub suit, socks, and cap were soaked with sweat. That made it difficult to become aware of any liquid seeping into the suit. Meanwhile, a TV van had arrived outside. Gene was trying to limit the publicity so he asked the women to rush out to the van, change clothes, keep out of sight and say nothing.

The two women rushed out to the van to change into their dry clothes.
They couldn't find them! They rolled up in overcoats to keep warm.
Eventually the media van left, unaware of the Operation being carried out in the building and uninterested in the 2 unmarked vehicles at the rear of the building. Now Rhonda and Charlotte dressed. Not having used a bathroom all day, they rushed off to a nearby wooded area behind the building to do so. There they found hypodermic syringes with needles attached to them. They had been used. Reported, the syringes were picked up by some of the safety personnel.

1989 - By December 6,
The "Rapid Elisa Test" had been developed by Thomas Ksiazek working in the Level 4 lab at the USAMRIID.
It would quickly test blood and urine samples for the presence of Ebola virus.
Samples from Milton Frantig, who had been working at the Hazelton Monkey House in Reston came out negative.

The second day of the USAMRIID cleanout of the Quarantine Unit, someone had finally remembered to bring a floodlight for the dark interior corridor which connected the staging area storeroom with the monkey room hallways. About mid-morning a commotion occurred in Room C and a monkey escaped into the hallway. It ran into a makeshift rest area and under the legs of specialist Rhonda Williams, who was seated in her Tyvek suit. The frightened monkey then ran back into Room C and over the cages of the one other scared monkeys remaining. They became angry at his behaviour and bit at his feet, making them bleed and resulting in blood smears throughout the room. The situation was now one of maximum hazard.

Colonel Jerry Jaax and Sergeant Amen entered the room with a net and the injection pole amidst 100 hysterical screaming monkeys. The light was dim; their suit faceplates were steamed. Repeatedly, Jaax would near the monkey and it would suddenly leap up to 12 feet through the air over him. Outclassed in this environment, Jaax decided to leave the escaped monkey and Room C overnight for the terror in the monkeys to die down.

With the boredom of the assembly line routine, some of the privates complained that they should be given more responsibility. They were allowed to temporarily and occasionally exchange positions with the officers. The major tasks had potential shock value. If an anesthetized monkey began to wake up too early, it would be a strong foe for the person taking a blood sample. If the death injection hit the intended target, the heart, a spurt of blood would follow the removal of the hypodermic; if it missed, a death reflex from the animal could result in the eyes moving and the body arching as if preparing to struggle. Specialist Williams was eventually moved to the bleed table.

Williams was beginning to take a blood sample from one of the monkeys when it began coming out of its anaesthetic. Its eyes moved, it tried to sit up, - it reached out and grabbed her by the hand holding the syringe. The needle was pulled out of the thigh and Williams suited hand was being pulled toward the monkey's mouth. Williams yelled for help and tried to contain a haemorrhage building under the monkey's skin at the point of the injection. In time, a soldier ran up and stuck the monkey with a double dose of ketamine. Later, Rhonda Williams was in the main corridor of the monkey house when she say a monkey coming down the hall toward her. It had a hypodermic needle in its hand. It was running. She turned and ran - but neither far enough or fast enough. The monkey caught up to her and plunged the needle through her suit.

Late on the afternoon of December 7, the last monkey in the Quarantine Unit was caught, bled and killed. It was the free one. After hours of chase, it had become jammed in a crack behind a cage - long enough to get a massive dose of ketamine through its tail. On orders from Gene Johnson, outside, Sergeant Klages searched the building for any remaining monkeys. He found none - except in a storage room chest freezer. There he found 10 to 15 frozen monkeys. They had been some of the first Ebola hit animals from Room F. Frozen into shapes which prevented their packaging into the biohazard boxes, they were left in the hallway overnight to thaw. By days end, the team had collected 3500 blood samples for the USAMRIID lab.

As the soldiers came out of the building, the decon team entered.
Led by Merhl Gibson, it tried to wash everything down with bleach.
Some blood and stool were caked on the walls like cement.
It would take hard work and putty knives and steel spatulas the next day to complete the job.
At this point, no one in the Mission yet knew of the source of the diseased monkeys nor why no humans had acquired it after Mayinga's blood had reacted to it.

1989 - In the winter,
The Antarctic ozone hole was the largest ever recorded.
The hole covered an area two and a half times the size of Canada, one of the largest Earth nations.
Within that area, 45% of the ozone was gone.

1989 - By December 18,
The Initial Decontamination of the Reston Primate Quarantine Unit with bleach had been completed.
Next the building was sealed. Patches of paper saturated with Bacillus subtilis niger were spread throughout the building. Harmless to humans, the spore was known to be hard to kill; it was used as an indicator of the effectiveness of the next stage: gas decontamination. Sunbeam electric fry pans (39) were placed throughout the building, connected to a central electrical cable which was hooked to a master switch. A handful of white crystals was dropped into each pan, the pan thermostat was turned to high, and the switch was engaged. Formaldehyde gas boiled into the air: the same gas that seeps out of permanent press and dry cleaned clothing and out of most carpeting. After 3 days of gassing, nothing tested alive in the Reston building. The virus had looked like Ebola but not acted exactly like Ebola. It had come from a region half way around the Earth from the earlier founding of Ebola.

1989 - On December 24 or 25,
About 48 km south of the centre of Chelyabinsk, U.S.S.R., Vladimir Kuzmin, a jet pilot instructor, was flying alone in an L-29 at an altitude of 8,000 metres. While making some acrobatic maneuvers, he noticed a yellow-white cigar-shaped object to the north of him at an estimated distance of 18-25 km and an estimated altitude of 7,500 metres. It subtended an angle of about 5 degrees arc and remained stationary and horizontal. After performing a vertical loop where he could once again observe its direction, it had disappeared from view. He radioed to the air controller at the local airfield but they had nothing on radar except his own plane.

He had looked at the object for a total of 4 minutes or less.
Some time after he landed, he noticed that his exposed facial region was covered with a thick crust which was sensitive (but not painful) to the touch. It was similar to a skin scald and was red. This gradually subsided and was gone after about 10 to 12 days. No nausea or other physiological effects were noted after the sighting. He did not report the incident to the authorities. He had previously shared a sighting in the autumn of 1979.

1989 -
A marine conference held in Halifax, Nova Scotia, estimated that 5,000,000 plastic containers are thrown into the oceans every day.
Earlier in the year, in April, the residents of a small Nova Scotia village awoke one morning to find on the beaches a wall 1 meter (3 feet) wide and 8 kilometres (5 miles) long, composed of every type of plastic product known and disposed of by humanity, from washbasins to oil containers, disposable lighters, and children's toys.

1989 - By the end of the year,
The impact of the automobile on the North American ecology was evident.
Parking a car at home, the office, and the shopping mall required on average 372 square meters (4000 square feet) of asphalt. More than 155,388 square kilometres (60,000 square miles) of land in the United States had been paved over: that is, about 2% of the total surface area, or, 10% of all arable land. Worldwide, at least 1/3rd of an average city's land was devoted to roads, parking lots, and other automobile-related elements. In American cities, close to half of all the urban space went to accommodate the automobile; in Los Angeles, the figure approached 2/3rds.

The use of cars had allowed humans to deny the pollution of the factories they built by locating their homes apart from areas of industry. Doing so contributed more pollution in both the factory and housing areas as well as between. Humans had used cars to enable them to become more specialized in their work duties and more interdependent. Most Americans were not self-sufficient in their food production; many did not produce any food. By the use of vehicles - tractors, combines, trucks - farm production rates had increased remarkably. Access to surplus foodstuffs through vehicle distribution to local retail centres, accessible by vehicles made it all possible for the average consumer.

1989 -
In an Environics forecast of Canadian attitudes for the 1990s based on public surveys, the following was concluded:

"Our surveys indicate that Canadians will continue to structure much of their lives around the pursuit of personal happiness and the enjoyment of an unashamedly materialistic lifestyle. The actual expression of these hedonistic tendencies is at present being tempered by the current economic slowdown, but the values of the 'me' generation will continue to have an overwhelming influence on the decisions Canadians make throughout the 1990s."

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1990 - HIGHLIGHTS:

Movies:

Total Recall; Air America; Blue Steel; Robocop II; Rocky V; The Rookie; Dances With Wolves; Die Hard 2; Ghost; Narrow Margin; The China Lake Murders; The Hunt for Red October; The Jetsons; The Exorcist 3; Loose Cannons; Delta Force II; Predator 2; Gremlins II: The New Batch; Look Who's Talking Too; Almost an Angel; Ghost; Flashback; Mermaids; Stanley and Iris; Wild Orchid; Jacob's Ladder; Journey of Hope; The Punisher; The Station; The Jetsons

General News:

Consumer Price Index (USA):

 Example of American Cost of Living 
One-Family Home:               $122,000
Annual College Costs - Harvard  $20,655
Intermediate sized car:         $17,000
Monthly Electric bill:               60.00
Haircut:                             14.00
Gasoline per gallon:                 $1.10
Daily newspaper:                     $0.50
First Class Postage:                 $0.25
Production Worker: Gross Earnings: $24,433
after tax earnings as a Percent of Gross: 83

1945 - During the year,
Many inhabitants of Aramza, in the region of Susamyr, Kirgizskaya, U.S.S.R., reported strange sphere-like objects in the sky, and many more people claimed to have seen a strange "Bigfoot" or "Snowman"-type being.

1990
The F-117 Stealth fighter wing was moved from the Tenopah Test Range in central Nevada to the Holloman Air Force Base near Alamogordo, New Mexico, U.S.A. It was then, the only known wing in the world. Holloman employed 4,600 military personnel in 1993. Alamogordo is at an altitude of 4,300 feet, has 360 days of sunshine per year, has brief thunderstorms and an annual precipitation of 10 inches.

1990
Crop circles and pictograms reported and observed during this year reached higher numbers than previous years, going beyond 1,000.

1990 - On January 11, in the morning,
Over the city of Shanghai, China (the second largest city in the world, with a population of over 12 million, Zhao Gang reported:

"The bus driver suddenly noticed a peculiar luminous object right in front of the bus and about 300 metres above ground level. The object was about as high as a six-storey building. From its lower part a light flared which lit up a tree and a lawn by the side of the road. The area it lit up was tremendously intense - as bright as daytime (it was still dark, before sunrise).

This frightened the bus driver, and he stopped the bus.
The passengers crowded to the windows and stuck their heads out to see.
Suddenly, the object began approaching the bus. This reminded the driver of stories of flying saucers abducting people, and he was trembling with fear. But the object stopped in mid-air and after a few seconds began moving back faster and faster, then disappeared in the vastness of the night."

This sighting was reported in a broadcast on Shanghai Radio.

1990 - By early January,
The Reston Primate Quarantine Unit was returned to Hazelton Research Products for use as a monkey house.
Hazelton began purchasing more shipments from the Farm in the Philippines near Manila on Mindanao Island from which their October, 1989 shipmants had come.

By mid-January, some of the monkeys in Room C began dying with bloody nose symptoms suggestive of a return of the Ebola outbreak the previous fall. This virus was assumed to be the same as the previous one. Because that one had taken no human fatalities, the US Army, the CDC, and Hazelton - all decided to let the disease run its course within the confines of the building.

It was found that the Reston Ebola virus spread quickly from room to room and mutated quickly to something that looked like the common cold. Still, the monkeys did die with their lungs destroyed; with pneumonia; with locations of non-clotting blood; with red eyes; with stunned expressions on their face. When a single animal with a nosebleed showed up in a room, 80% of the other animals in the room could be expected to die.

By January 24, the virus had travelled into Room B, and monkeys there began to die.
It was determined that the virus was travelling through the air ducts in the building.
Eventually, all of the monkeys in the building would die. All four of the monkey handlers at the Unit would be found to have the virus in their blood and throughout their cells; yet, it did not kill them. It was never determined why.

It was theorized that a minor change in the 7 protein structure making up the standard form of Ebola had made it less harmful to human. It had become more species specific - capable of killing all of the monkeys but none of the humans. The true concern that arose was of the opposite tact: a minor mutation could also have made the disease species specific to humans and capable of transmission through the air. Such a virus would have the capability to effectively kill at least 90% of humans.

1990 - In the February 5 issue of "Forbes",
William P. Barrett wrote an article entitled "I Get a Kick Out of Seeing Something Being Made" about the rules Robert Cizik, of Cooper Industries follows. Cooper Industries has become a $5-billion industrial giant and Cizik expects a 17% or more return on equity within a few years. 2 million products are manufactured ranging from fuses to turbine compressors. Cizik's rules:

"1. Stay with what is known or what can be learned quickly.
 2. Listen to plant managers when considering acquisitions and implementing efficiencies.
 3. Emphasize the high-quality end of the market line.
 4. Take some risks.
 5. Diversify into business lines that have business cycles that offset one another.
 6. Maintain a "lean" executive staff."

1990 - On March 8,
Near Mars, PA, U.S.A., nine unusual markings were found in a grassy field.
The oval "burns" were approximately 2.4 m. in diameter, and were aligned in a row.
Around the edges of each circle was a ring of depressed grass about 18 cm in width.
A pink, glowing light was seen hovering in the area prior to the discovery of the ground markings.

1990 - On March 23,
E. Pavlov, an officer of the local garrison in the town of Kohtla-Iarve, Estonia, U.S.S.R., went out onto his balcony and was startled by the appearance of a silent, disc-shaped object in the sky, with bright yellow lights along its perimeter.

Together, they observed the object descending and hovering about 1.5 metres from the ground, near the electricity substation, at a distance of about 150 metres from them. Pavlov got his binoculars and determined that the object was about 15 metres in diameter and 3-7 metres in height. Apparently, some children then attempted to get close to the object and it flew away in the direction of Leningrad.

1990 - On March 24,
E. Pavlov, an officer of the local garrison in the town of Kohtla-Iarve, Estonia, U.S.S.R., saw the UFO he had seen last night or an identical one, a silent, disc-shaped object in the sky, with bright yellow lights along its perimeter.

This time, the object descending and landed near the electricity substation, at a distance of about 150 metres from him. Pavlov got his camera and was able to take several photographs.

1990 - On March 25,
A silent, disc-shaped UFO with bright yellow lights around its perimeter returned for a third time to an electrical substation in the town of Kohtla-Iarve in Estonia, U.S.S.R.. This time, it was observed by hundreds of people.

1990 - In the March 27 issue of "Fortune" Magazine,
The American Home-Ownership Trend is described as follows:

"Among aspiring first-time home buyers, young families in the 25-to-29 age group have been hardest hit. The proportion who own homes has tumbled from 44% a decade ago to just over 36% today."

1990 - On March 28, at 10.10 in the evening,
Mei Qi reported 4 UFOs over the region of Huangshi, Hubei Province.
At first, he noticed a line of bright lights moving overhead.
Looking more directly, he saw 4 points of light, evenly spaced, at a distance of about a thousand metres, forming a line and moving from east to west at a moderate speed. The 2 lights at the rear were both followed by what looked like comets' tails connected to them, and this gave them a long winding form. Every so often, dazzling lights flashed from within them. The 2 lights in front, however, were very sharply defined and had no tails.

After flying about one minute, these 4 lights disappeared.
No sound accompanied them, they were flying low, they did not fall, and they had no navigation lights.
They appeared to have been flying against the wind.

1990 - In the April 9th issue of "Fortune", Job Loss in the USA was interpreted as follows:

"Companies have been laboring to become 'lean and mean' for nearly a decade ... The Fortune 500 (largest) industrial companies sweated off 3.2 million jobs in the Eighties. Isn't that enough? Not by a long shot. Says Daniel Valentino, president of United Research, a management consulting firm that helps companies restructure: 'The Eighties were just the tip of the iceberg, and we're going to see dramatic reductions in the Nineties. Corporate America is still as much as 25% overstaffed."

1990 -
Dr. Jens Peter Norgaard, a Danish physician and researcher at Denmark's University of Aarhus, finds that the use of "DDAVP Nasal Spray", a prescription pharmaceutical containing an antidiuretic hormone produced normally by the pituitary gland, to be effective in the treatment of children with enuresis (bedwetting). Each dose of the spray costs about $2.00; a typical bedwetters family will pay the equivalent of $1,100 annually in extra costs for laundry, diapers, and, the replacement of bed linen.

Most children begin to produce the hormone by age 4 or 5 but some children's bodies mature later and they continue to wet the bed long after most other children have stopped. About 15% of children have been found to experience this delay in development. Boys have a higher incidence of the problem than girls. Those with the delayed development have lower nighttime levels of the hormone.

Bedwetting has long been considered a psychological problem or one of character; in 95% of cases, it is not.
Nature eventually will cure the problem regardless of the measures taken.
This fact plus the anxiety of the parent has resulted in many spurious and superstitious concepts arising in human societies throughout the past 2,000 years.

Particularly in the past 300 years, parents of such children, especially in families or cultures of European origin, have been frustrated by the sanitary problems arising from the condition, socially embarrassed - so as to keep it secretive within the family, and psychologically abusive to the child. Beginning after the Great Pandemic in Europe, many children grew up without access to the wisdom of their parents or other older relatives. When they parented their children, their assumption and only expectation was that their offspring should be small replications of themselves complete with the most often used abilities of adults.

Unfamiliar with a "normal" childhood growth cycle, many conveyed the pride in their assumptions into heightened intolerance, anger, and both physical punishment and scathing and emotionally hurtful comments which lowered the self-esteem of the child. In turn, generations - even populations of low self-esteem, authoritarian adults were encouraged. Destructive shame has only recently become defined and a constructive therapy provided (Bradshaw, 1988).

Children who have bedwetting problems in many "developed" societies are prone to developing feelings of social isolation, inferiority, guilt, negative shame. While these destructive attitudes and emotions usually begin with parents and close relatives (including brothers and sisters who are not similarly affected), they are also frequently promoted by peers - who are either repeating the authoritarian attitudes of their parents and teachers, or, who are bedwetters themselves who are trying to conceal their own shame.

The prevalent result of this toxic shame is an attraction of the person to addictions which seem to counter the feelings and have often enhanced the social acceptance of the individual. Alcohol encourages the shy person to be gregarious; work addiction counters accusations of being lazy; tobacco and coffee counter chronic anxiety and nervousness; power enables vengeance and manipulation to play out the suppressed anger of the ostracised child; money can be expressed through power as well as through the ability to afford the repititious use of low nutrition mood altering addictive substances.

While bedwetting has a number of herbal remedies which contain hormones - consult your herbalist - and which were known of and used widely before the Great Pandemic and the Catholic Inquisition, have largely been replaced by pharmaceuticals of low efficiency (sedatives and antidepressants) which alter the sleep pattern), electromechanical alarms (more recent and more effective), and electric shock (most recent, somewhat effective).

Bedwetters have a tendency to go almost immediately into a Stage 4, REM deep sleep rather than progressing through the other regualr stage s of sleep and only remaining in stage 4 for short periods of time. In REM, the human brain is totally focused on processing and reordering the anxieties and stimuli of the day and sorting out what it knows (from experience, mentoring, education, training, heredity) to be relevant and worthy of "indexing" for easier remembering, and, what is less important and can be simply stashed away.

These processes are mediated by specific brain peptides (hormones), the presence of which is determined by heredity, energy blocks, biofeedback, meditation, and self-directedness. Because of this phenomenon, many bedwetters dream that they have awakened and walked to the bathroom to urinate, only discovering that this was a dream, upon waking to a wet bed. Indeed, if an enuretic is taken out of bed, made to walk to the bathroom and urinate, and return, possibly talking as they go, the individual will usually not remember the incident the next day. For many children, the repeated trauma of the experience, when negatively received by others, results in the dream not being remembered.

This arises from the fact that the child is placed into total confusion between the reality of the dream of having gone to the washroom, as expected, and having wet the bed, as not intended. Ultimately, he must believe the wetness. The trauma-induced alternative is to disbelieve all dreams, not remember most dreams, and hold an emotional distrust of one's own judgement. This perception and attitude is sometimes responded to with the development of a security-oriented character (behaviour pattern). In an adult, this drive for security will push the individual to behaviours of action and passivity according to what concepts have been mentored regarding "security".

That childhood enuresis may become such a directing influence on adults can be better empathized with if the reader looks at the "experience" of the child who is being parented by a mother and/or father who are unaware, intolerant, and uncompassionate. For years, this child may wake up in terror and disgust every night - unable to conceal the terrible deed and feeling guilty (consciously responsible) for it. The only comparable emotionally destructive repetitive experiences (learned) are the possession of an outward physical deformity, the arrival of a natural, though misunderstood, repetitive biological cycle, or, of an inward mental abnormality.

Frequently, the individual comes to believe through experience (or is taught), sometimes with similar consequences, that they are ugly, weird, stupid, or insane. Nocturnal emmisions (males) and menstruation (females) therefore also encourage this reactive "character" development when parents and cultures do not have constructive perceptions and coping skills. Much of the North American and many of the European families have such "talented" individuals. The bedwetting syndrome appears at this point to be hereditary; it will eventually be shown to be otherwise.

Regardless of which modality of experience pushes the individual into trauma-based energy block originating addictive behaviours, the resulting adult will be most comfortable in career positions which have been promoted socially as providing the desired environment of security. Flexibility in this direction is seldom guided by awareness (because of the energy block control over emotions and choices) and the individual will often develop a career pattern of consistency (success, failure, anonymity, dramatic, change). That is, such a person can appear in any social strata, any gender, any nationality, any occupation.

The defining difference between the self-directed, spiritually free individual and the energy (spiritually) blocked individual is that in eras requiring constructive AND dramatic changes - the later cannot make the change. Emotional reinforcement to remain in their bureaucratic position (security by tenure), their entrepeneurial risk (security by profit), or, their constant change (security be eventually making the "right" guess, choice, or gamble) is more primary than a constructive response to REALITY. Whenever a question of population survival is presented to modern humans, it is the energy blocked pattern compulsive individuals who pave the killing fields first.

Remedies out of this predicament are covered in the Appendix: NERGY.BLK

1990 -
Helmut Tributsch, a West Berlin physical chemist, describes animal responses in his "When the Snakes Awake: Animals and Earthquake Prediction", M.I.T. Press. In a Peruvian town just prior to a major quake, chickens could not be persuaded to go into their coops. Mother cats carried their litters from houses to gardens. Cows bellowed in unison. Other similar dramatic responses have often been noticed prior to earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, and unusual shifts in magnetic fields, or the introduction of or change of an electromagnetic field within a local region. In almost every instance, humans discount the relevance of the responses, and continue with their activities until the disaster occurs.

Jim Berkland, a Santa Clara County, California geologist, notes that he has predicted earthquakes for about 10 years based on animal behaviour and ocean tides. Standard theories state that earthquakes occur when thermal changes and subterranean disturbances cause Earth geological plates to scrape and buckle against each other. Berkland adds to the equation that:

"At the new and full moon, when the Sun, Moon and Earth are aligned, they get into a tug of war and the lunar pull distorts the Earth like a rubber ball."

That geological stress is also believed to result in changes in magnetic fields which animals may be able to detect. Berkland even goes further and states that:

"When the tides are abnormally high and then abnormally low, and lost-and-found ads indicate more animals than usual are running away, something is coming within a week."

Berkland has used the above form of pattern recognition to successfully predict more recent earthquakes. Other researchers, particularly those working for institutions, have been quick to respond with criticism - often without a full awareness or acknowledgement of what has been presented. Thus, Bill Bakun, seismology chief at the U.S. Geological Survey in Menlo Park, California, countered that "High tides and earthquakes don't always coincide." This conclusion was never suggested by Berkland or others.

Tributsch further suggested that:

"Venting ground gases could excite animals, or, perhaps, changes in the groundwater table ...(or) changes in atmospheric pressure, slight swaying of the ground - even ultrasound emitted from rock that is nearly bursting."

While ignorance results is a plethora of rationalizations, the known facts are that many animals have more sensitive detection and awareness of ultrasound and ground vibrations arising from destabilization movements. Humans are individually incapable of the former yet could self-discipline themselves to be more aware of the latter.

Animals are frequently aware of the presence of the geomagnetic-ionizing rays which indicate the presence of underground aquafers and humans are occasionally gifted with the ability to detect this energy also. In addition, other humans can learn the awareness skill; some call it dowsing. No scientific instrument has yet been constructed to efficiently detect this form of energy. Highly adept dowsers are frequently more than 80% accurate in their location choices whereas well-drillers utilizing other forms of technology, experience, and regional statistics are often only 35% correct in their site selections.

Changes in the strength and positioning of geomagnetic-ionizing rays always accompany both geological fault movements and volcanic eruptions. Some individuals, usually as a result of trauma-induced hypersensitivity to changes in the pattern of these rays, experience negative stress symptoms within hours or days before a nearby event: nausea, headache, depression, intense bone and muscle aches. Like animal indicators, these individuals are also largely ignored before the disaster involved. Needlessly, lives are endangered and lost.

1990 - On April 24,
The Hubble Space Telescope (HST) is carried into space and launched into orbit by the "Discovery" Shuttle on its 10th mission (STS-31). The 10,878-kg, bus-sized unit had been delayed from 1986, largely because of the "Challenger" accident. It was now 7 years late and $1 billion overbudget.

The HST's 15-year mission required the shuttle to attain the highest altitude (619 km) of any USA-manned mission since Apollo 17 had returned from the Moon. While flying over Florida, the HST was lifted out of the cargo bay, deployed and launched. After more than 7 hours, the Hubble switched to its own power from the 48,760 2 x 4 cm silicon solar cells. It was released on April 25 over the east Pacific.

It was planned that orbital verification would take 3 months, followed by 5 months' Science Verification in which the instruments would be checked out and calibrated. It was to be the greatest scientific advance since its beginning in 1973. At that time, $300 million was authorized for the project, to be spent over 10 years. Now, delivered into orbit, it had cost $2.1 billion.

There were problems.
In order to restrain costs, the heart of the telescope, the mirror, had not been tested. Now it was found that the mirror had been incorrectly polished to the wrong optics and the first, and any long-distance photos, were blurred. What would have cost $1.7 million to test and repair before launching, would now cost $624 million and require the efforts of 4 astronauts working 4 days from a space shuttle to replace parts as big as a streetcorner telephone booth. It would not be fixed until December, 1993.

1990 - On May 01,
Near Runcorn, Cheshire, UK, A man (Tony) was startled by a low flying object, circular in shape with a dome on top, which flew past in front of him at tremendous speed, with a bobbing movement. It appeared to be very low and silent. It was creamy white in colour and illuminated.

1990 - On May 5,
Near Widnes, Cheshire, UK, Mr. J was awakened by a sort of vibrating, rushing noise which seemed to sweep along the road and past his window. It took 3 minutes to pass and caused a window upstairs and downstairs to shake violently. It returned twice more and on the third pass, Mr. J. went to the window and saw a huge white ball of light just above the road which hovered for several seconds. As he opened the curtains, it shot upwards and disappeared. No one else heard the object.

1990 - On the night of May 18/19,
At Kairma, near Frunze, Kirgizskaya, U.S.S.R., a mother and her son saw beings with glowing suits and 3 claw-like fingers on each hand. Later in the night, a strong droning sound was heard, the local power supply was affected, and at 00.30 (may 19) a huge red disk-shaped object flew over Kairma, with bright beams of light shining down. At 13.21, a group of grey-coloured discs was seen flying over Frunze.

1990 - On May 17,
Near Finleyville, PA, U.S.A., two concentric rings surrounding a bare circle were found in a grassy field.
The rings were not evident 2 days prior to the discovery.
There were no tracks leading into or out of the area.
The outer ring was 16.5 m. in diameter, the middle ring was 12.1 m. in diameter, and the inner circle was 1.8 metres. The outer ring was 60 cm in width and the middle ring was 123 cm.

1990 - On May 18,
The first Cheesefoot Head (Hampshire, U.K.) crop circle of 1990 appeared in the Punchbowl there.
This was unlike other circles in having an internal concentric band of standing corn.
There soon followed other circles, such as two triple-ringers (with wide rings, each about 4 feet thick) one having the inner rings in the form of segmented arcs, which had never previously been seen. Geometric patterns started to appear nearby.

1990 - On May 18,
In the village of Kairma, near Frunze, Kirgizskaya, U.S.S.R. at 21.40, Dima, a 10-year-old boy ran outside his home and then quickly returned with a look of horror on his face.

"Mother, extraterrestrials are here!", he said.
The mother took his hand and taking him outside, she also saw the beings.
She described them as wearing helmets and of a height of 1.1 metres.
They wore suits with stripes on their sleeves and trouser legs.
The boy noticed that their hands had 3 fingers, as sharp as claws, and that their suits were glowing.
He also reported that when they noticed him, they pulled out a box-like device from behind them and some things like aerials appeared on their heads. Their footsteps were very light, almost as if they were sliding.

Beside the house there is a ditch with water.
When a car appeared from the distance, all the beings jumped into the ditch and remained under the water until the car had passed by. Dima's mother said that the air all around them was vibrating. They were both frightened and ran to a neighbour's house, but when they came out into the street there was no sign of the beings. The mother and her son observed the beings for about 10 minutes.

Later, when researchers arrived, they found the grass where the beings had stood had turned yellow, and by standing in those spots themselves, their legs went numb.

At 23.30, a strong droning sound was heard over Kairma, and voltage in the electrical transmission system began to fluctuate markedly. Showers of sparks could be seen falling from the substation. Later, the electricity supply was cut off altogether. A local electrical engineer as well as an engineer from Frunze were unable to find any signs of damage.

At about 00.30, on May 19, a huge red disc-shaped object flew over Kairma, with bright white beams of light coming down from it.

By morning, the voltage had returned to normal.
At 13.21, a whole group of UFOs, resembling grey-coloured discs, were seen flying very fast from south to east, over the central part of Frunze. Many eyewitnesses reported this sighting.

1990 - In May,
The UN Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) warned that if carbon dioxide emissions are not cut by 60% immediately, the changes in the next 60 years will be so rapid that nature will be unable to adapt and man incapable of controlling them.

1990 - On May 19,
Near Warrior, Alabama, U.S.A., a woman driving to work was confronted by an object with 6 huge lights approaching her at treetop level. She stopped, it hesitated, then passed over her truck, during which time she felt a vibration. The craft was described as being the size of a house with a trapezoidal front section with a broad, outwardly-angled fuselage and blunt rear. Along the fuselage was a strip composed of red, green and blue lights. The duration of the sighting was 6 to 8 minutes.

1990 - On May 21,
Nine strange dots of light were reported in the sky over Kairma, U.S.S.R., flying at great speed.
They seemed to be flying in some sort of order - in threes - and not far from them could be seen a large red disc-shaped "cloud".

1990 - On May 23,
The first of the pictogram series of crop circles was found between Chilcomb and Cheesefoot Head, U.K.
The basic component of these formations is a "dung-bell" consisting of 2 circles joined by a straight avenue of flattened crop. This one had 2 narrow parallel rectangles on either side of its avenue: these were often repeated, in pairs or singly, in subsequent pictograms.

Roughly every week or so, a further pictogram would appear near Cheesefoot Head with Pictogram #7 on July 6.
Many of these incorporated a tractor tramline as the dumb-bell's shaft, making it into part of the design.
A frequent tendency of many of the crop circles was that of their alignment with the tramlines, suggesting that the agency which forms the pictograms is "aware" of the tramlines, and makes use of them, rather than their always being formed on the random descent of an object from the sky.

1990 - On May 24 at 23.00
In North Huntingdon, Pennsylvania, U.S.A., a woman was walking her dog when she saw a dark, delta-shaped object, somewhat larger than a commercial prop-driven aircraft, with 9 large white lights extending around the 2 leading edges. The rear edge had a boomerang curvature. The vehicle hovered 300 feet above the ground near power lines, then quickly left and was lost from view. The witness sensed a vibration during the 30 second sighting.

1990 - On May 28 at 02.30,
John Bentley, was standing outside in Kirwan, Queensland, Australia, looking for Austin's Comet, when he saw a fast-moving object travelling from north to south with no noise. It appeared to be delta-shaped with white lights around the perimeter.

1990 - On May 29,
At Kairma, near Frunze, Kirgizskaya, U.S.S.R., three women at a garage office on a collective farm reported seeing a strange being with glowing eyes, no nose and a slit for a mouth. It began about 08.50 in the morning when there are usually many drivers in the area; today there were none. The three women were T.M. Knaup, Ludmila Sadovskaia, and a trained nurse, A.L. Sitnik.

Strange horn-like sounds were heard, becoming stronger, followed by the sensation of a "presence".
Ludmila raised her head and through the office window she saw a being with a glow where the eyes should be.
She also noticed the absence of nose and a slit for the mouth.
The face was greenish-grey in colour.

Ludmila told Knaup to lock the door, and at that moment the sound of footsteps could be heard moving away. All attempts to ask for assistance by radio were in vain. The three women then ran out of the office, shouting for assistance. No one saw the creature who visited the building, but many drivers later reported seeing strange footprints, as if from dust or powder. These later disappeared. The marks were 30 mm. in length, with 3 "stripes". The needle of a compass deviated up to 90 degrees where the being had been standing, and investigators noted a feeling in the ears similar to that experienced during change of altitude in a plane.

From another direction, 2 boys had been guiding cattle when they saw a "flying saucer" appear above the garage and land after a few maneuvers. One boy, 8-year-old Mashmich Artem, approached the garage and hid behind a wheel. He observed as a hatch opened and a ladder was pulled out of the craft, followed by seven "pilots". One was 3 metres tall, the rest a metre and a half tall, who divided into 2 groups. The other boy had run away in fear.

The beings were wearing bright golden-coloured, close fitting overalls with emblems like human figures with wings. On the feet could be seen something like studs. The boy noticed 2 aerials on the head of the tall being, from which were spreading "concentric circles". The group then divided in two, and the first group gathered samples of black oil from the ground. Strangely, this viscous liquid "gathered" into a sphere, then appeared in the beings' hands. The second group headed for the offices with one being approaching the office directly.

Later, the boy saw the women running from the office.
After 15 minutes, the beings returned to their craft, took off, then landed not far from the repair shop.

1990 - On June 17 at 1.00 a.m.,
Aleksandr Pavlovich Dolotov, a 42-year old bus driver, left a relative's flat not far from Leningrad's Baltiyski station, where his wife works. He was walking along Lermontovski Prospekt, near the Hotel Sovetskaia when he thought it strange that the street was empty of people. Going around an obstacle in the street, he came upon 4 beings approaching him in pairs, 2 metres tall with well proportioned figures, wearing what looked like black diving suits and black helmets, but with faces and hands exposed.

These "men" appeared to be walking very fast and when they were about 10 metres from him, he suddenly lost consciousness. When he recovered, he found himself in the Volodarski Hospital, and the time was 05.00. He was told that he had been found near house #66 on Izmailovski Prospekt. That was 600 metres from where he had encountered the strangers. He was formally inspected and he noticed before leaving the hospital that several small holes appeared to have been cut out of his trousers.

At Baltiyski station, Dolotov was met by his wife who inquired as to what had happened.
At first, he thought he had been in a fight with some soldiers but when she examined him they did not find the marks of a street fight nor signs on his body of a violent struggle. Two oval, clean, bloodless wounds were already healing below the knee. They did not coincide with the holes in the trousers?

After some questioning, he remembered being approached and recalled the men in black helmets bending over him and saying "Remember, you were beaten by soldiers." He also recalls being told that it would be harmful for him to speak about the incident. A phone call had been made to the medical station by a soldier, who explained that a man was lying on the street near #66. When the ambulance arrived, 3 soldiers were holding him upright and his eyes were open. His only response to all questions at that point was "Never".

1990 - In June,
56 nations agreed to a total ban on CFC use by the year 2000.
They were the same nations which had met and signed the 1987 protocol in Montreal, Canada, and agreed at that time to a 50% reduction by the year 2000. Further environmental studies had shown that the ozone layer was depleting still faster than previously believed. The USA, Japan and the Soviet Union declined to accept such responsibility and 14 countries issued a separate declaration stating an intended phaseout by 1997 of halons and CFCs.

F. Sherwood Rowland admitted that even if a ban had been placed into effect globally immediately, "we would expect things to get worse until the end of the century and then gradually recover over two centuries." Every year of continued global CFC use increases the projected recovery time for the ozone layer by 3-1/2 years. Most CFCs remain in the atmosphere for 75 to 100 years. For that reason, nearly all the CFCs ever released - roughly 800,000 kilograms (1,763,668 pounds) to 1 million tons were added EACH year during the early to mid-1980s - are still in the atmosphere.

1990 - In June,
Australian scientists announced that yet another ozone hole had been discovered over MacQuarrie Island in Australia.
The damage was spreading. Even outside the "holes", the layer had been thinning.
A report released in London, England showed a 10% reduction in ozone since 1967 over the middle latitudes of Europe and North America. The observations were made over Switzerland, Germany, and Canada.

A UN Environmental Program draft report estimated that just a 1% decrease in ozone would lead to a 3% increase in the rate of skin cancer worldwide and would result in 100,000 additional cases of blindness caused by cataracts. The same report estimated that such a depletion would increase outbreaks of infectious disease, because normal immune system responses would become distracted by the increasing ultraviolet "B" radiation. That would mean more widespread and frequent outbreaks of measles, herpes, tuberculosis, and leprosy could be expected. Compounding the problem would be the loss of effectiveness of vaccines injected into the skin after it had been exposed to increased levels of ultraviolet "B".

A further indication suggested by the UN report was that increased UV light caused by the thinning of the Earth's ozone layer would lead to decreased food production on both land and at sea. On land, many plant species would not grow, flower, or germinate in increased UV light. In water, phytoplankton, microscopic plants that live in lakes and oceans and are essential to the food chain, would also be influenced. Surface kills, or blooms, could be expected to increase. Phytoplankton are also responsible for absorbing as much as 1/2 the carbon dioxide produced globally each year. As it increases, global warming would escalate.

1990 - During the year,
Humans released between 5 and 6 billion TONS of carbon annually.
Another 2 to 3 billion TONS were released from deforestation.
George Woodwell, of the Woods Hole Research Centre on Cape Cod in the USA, stated that according to his calculations "within 10 years we'd have to reduce fossil-fuel use by 75 or 80% to get to the point where we are no longer building up carbon dioxide in the atmosphere from that source. ... it cannot be started soon enough. It's a bit late for discussion and time for action."

1990 - In June,
Foreign Minister Eduard Shevardnadze criticized U.S.S.R. officials for fuelling a chemical arms buildup "to win an honour banner of socialist competition". The U.S.A. has an estimated 30,000 tonnes and the Soviets 50,000 tonnes of the weapons. Shevardnadze cited the chemical arms buildup as an example of overall bad policy: buy everything and as much as possible, only to discover later a mound of excess.

1990 - On June 21,
In Pensacola, Florida, U.S.A., a woman noticed an unusual low cloud in the near distance through a window of a business establishment at 14.15. She called it to the attention of 4 companions and momentarily, a large silvery disc emerged from the cloud and hovered. The bottom of the object was described as a rimmed crescent lined with apparent portholes, overlying which was a "straw hat-like" crown. The surface reflected the sun's glare. After 3 minutes, the observer's attention was distracted and when they looked back it was gone.

1990 - On June 22,
While driving home from work, Debbie Meldrum, near Williams Lake, British Columbia, Canada, encountered a large, bright orange, saucer-shaped object. The bottom of the craft was lighter in colour than the rest, with small holes that she believes could have been windows. She tried to take photos, but the light coming from the object set the light meter in her camera off the scale so she gave up. "It was so bright, it blinded me when I looked through the camera" she said.

Her right arm and then her left started to get numb.
Soon her face began to numb and she decided to leave. It started to move then also.
It followed the river which runs parallel to the road, keeping pace with her for awhile.
She eventually lost sight of it.

1990 - On Friday, June 22,
Jose Antonio Valdes, his wife Matilde and a military friend witnessed a sighting at 6.30 p.m..
While the 2 men were repairing the Valdes' wooden house in the Los Pinero sector in Guavate, Cayey, in the eastern part of Puerto Rico, they saw a large, strange "ball of light" fly over the house at great speed. It was described as "a round ball of bright yellow light with a very bright red light in its centre". As soon as it had passed over them, "four military jets appeared as if trailing or chasing it at high speed".

The jets were described as of a "bluish-grey metallic colour, with two "booster" engines, and all of them had their wings positioned backwards and flew very fast". This description fits with that of U.S. Navy F-14 Tomcat jets. The jets continued to fly over the area as if looking for something. The apparent size of the UFO was estimated at three times the size of the jets they all saw, that is, about 180 feet in diameter.

After a further 5 or 6 minutes, the observers saw a big jet with a round flattened thing on top fly over, in the same direction as the previous aircraft. It was later identified as an AWACS (Airborne Early Warning and Control System) plane. All came from the direction of the Roosevelt Roads Naval Station.

The military officer friend stated that
"On many occasions you can see these objects flying around,
and then suddenly they descend into certain mountain areas and disappear there".
The UFO was soundless and very bright.

1990 - On June 27,
Ten ground circles were found on a subdivision lot by a man who was picking raspberries.
The circles were ignored until early October when reports of other circles in the region were publicized.
The circles ranged in diameter from 1.7 m. to 3.3 m. and were in a field of metre-high grass and shrubs.
All had an even, counter-clockwise spiral pattern.

1990 - During the summer,
The White House aggressively lobbied against the USA Congress imposing sanctions against Iraq for Saddam Hussein's well-documented record of civil rights abuses. Many congressional leaders, senior people without influence, were dismayed at the Bush administration support for Saddam.

Secretary of State James Baker defended Hussein on Capitol Hill.
Senior Republican senators, including Bush supporters Alan Simpson from Wyoming and Senate Minority leader Robert Dole from Kansas, flew to Baghdad, Iraq, earlier in the year to offer support to Hussein. According to an Iraqi transcript, Dole told Saddam that an official responsible for the critical stance of some Voice of America broadcasts had been fired [for voicing the truth].

1990 - On June 27,
Mr. B., of Wicklewood, Wymondham, Norfolk, U.K., was awakened at 00.18 by his 3-year-old son crying.
After settling the child, the parents heard a distinctive sound which suggested to them that a large object was moving through the air. A very bright light briefly illuminated the room through the curtains. The recall hearing similar sounds before without the light and the local police commented that their patrols had "witnessed similar phenomena on past occasions".

1990 - On June 28,
Jose Rodriguez, a resident in the Barrio Playita area of Yabucoa, to the east of Puerto Rico, near the Roosevelt Roads Naval Station saw a UFO which appeared to be playing with U.S. military jets, outdodging them at great speeds before flying off at great speed from them.

1990 - On July 5
At Pensacola Beach, Florida, U.S.A., Bob and Mary Oechsler photographed a sighting.
At 4.00 a.m., Bob awoke abruptly and looked out over the balcony of their eighth floor Holiday Inn room in time to catch a bright light on the horizon over the Gulf of Mexico. It did not seem to move and was very bright to the extent that he was able to see the line between the sea and the sky even at such a distance.

He got his video camera and after several minutes set up his 35 mm Pentax on a tripod and had almost completed a 36-exposure roll when a second object appeared on the horizon. That was about 30 minutes from the beginning of the sighting. The first object began to change into a slow rhythmic pulsing light and the two objects merged into one lighting up the whole horizon. Seconds later the composite object changed from a brilliant white to a brilliant green. At about 5.00 a.m. everything disappeared into darkness.

Over 250 reported sightings of UFOs, other than those reported by Ed Walters and family - the principal witnesses, were documented by the end of 1990. Over 500 witnesses have actually been named in those reports. The sightings never completely stopped but did seem to come in groups or cycles. Numerous video films exist. Over 100 photographs have been taken by numerous photographers, using all formats of film, including infra-red.

Evidence has been recorded confirming telepathic communication, biological material recovered from an abduction encounter which was determined to be from a silica-based organism unknown to science, unusual liquid apparently jettisoned from a UFO which apparently bubbled without giving off heat for several weeks.

1990 - On July 7,
Over the Anhui, Jiangsu and Shandong Provinces, China, numerous witnesses sighted a cluster of up to 32 star-like objects, in a regularly changing pattern. Hi Jiyun, a teacher in Taiping High School, Sihong County, Jiangsu Province was hoeing in the field when he saw the phenomenon.

"Suddenly, someone shouted, 'The sun has two sparks!' As I looked up, indeed it was so. This was 6.50 p.m. I also noticed that to the upper right of the sun was a little black cloud with many stars around its edge. While the cloud sailed off to the east, some of us counted that there were a total of 16 'stars'."

"At the time, the sky was spotlessly clear except for a few tiny clouds on the eastern horizon. Even though the sun was blinding, the silver-white flashes of the 'stars' were dazzling, and they were also constantly shifting, but these transformations were restricted to a fairly small sector of the sky to the upper right of the sun. ... Especially around sunset, the sight of the stars flashing, blue sky in the background, pink clouds below reflecting them, was extraordinarily enchanting; the kind of sight one would only expect in a dream!"

"The number of 'stars' kept changing: every few minutes we counted now 16, now 18, 22, 26, 28, 29, 31, and 32. The longest-lasting number was 32, and we weren't sure how (often) it popped up. By around 9.00 p.m., the number decreased. When they were disappearing rapidly, there were still 16 left."

Many other witnesses reported the same findings, noting the brilliance of the 'stars' even though night had not yet fallen.

1990 - On July 9,
Over the Shawan District, Sichuan Province, China, a UFO was seen by a number of witnesses to eventually divide into 2 identical saucers and perform a number of manoeuvres. Song Liang, Ai Xiandfu and Liang Yingxiong, went to the balcony of Yingxiong's 4th floor residence early in the morning to relax in the cool. Ai Xiandfu sighted a disc-shaped blob of light which had suddenly appeared to the upper left of them.

"When I first saw the flying saucer, its diameter was about 12 centimetres and it appeared to be a round blob of light, but not too distinct. As the blob of light gradually grew larger, to the point where its diameter was about 30 centimetres, its form became clear. It looked like two Chinese-style conical straw hats joined together, but not bulging out quite as much as the crown of a straw hat.

Next, the flying saucer, maintaining a diameter of 30 centimetres and spiralling counter-clockwise, flew downwards and forwards towards the place from where we were watching it. It was noiseless and unblinking, and judging by appearances its speed would not have seemed very high, but considering its initial and final positions, it was going at an astonishing speed. After the approximately 30 seconds in which that occurred, the flying saucer suddenly stopped moving and shot out a sweeping flash of light. The flash was about 10 centimetres wide.

A few seconds later, the flying saucer had ceased flashing its light, and continued approaching and descending in a counter-clockwise loop. This continued for about a minute. Suddenly, the saucer very quickly divided into two saucers about 60 centimetres apart. All the characteristics of the two saucers after division - size, shape and brightness - seemed exactly the same as the one saucer before the split in two. The splitting took place while the saucer was moving but not flashing.

The 2 saucers ... continued approaching and descending in the same manner as before, and also gradually approached each other and combined into one. The joining also took place while the saucers were moving. In the process, the saucer grew to about 75 centimetres and began descending at a more rapid pace than before. It was no longer spiralling counter-clockwise and was now moving along a diagonal path. However, as it approached our position, it became fuzzy, faded and then suddenly disappeared.

The excited observers kept watching the sky for a reappearance and after 2 minutes, "Yang Xuan was the first to see a blob of light suddenly appear to the south-east, but further south and a little closer to us than the first time. Its diameter was about 28 centimetres, and it had a tail with a clear comet-tail form. This saucer must have been a bit brighter than the first one, and its pattern of motion was similar to that of the first saucer after recombining, ... but it was not as fast.

After about 30 seconds of this, the saucer suddenly stopped moving and shot out a sweeping light, which was 60 centimetres wide. After the flash, the saucer suddenly disappeared. We didn't notice any fuzziness or fading before its disappearance."

1990 - On July 12,
A set of crop circles appeared in the wheatfield below Adam's Grave at Alton Barnes, U.K.
The 8th pictogram to form in 1990, this one consisted of 2 dumb-bell formations together in line, with several additional circles, the whole extending over about 130 yards. The major circles in the sets, either ringed or plain, were all swept clockwise, but these exhibited protruding features never previously seen. Variously referred to as "keys" and "claws", they resembled rudimentary hands with either two or three "fingers".

At the same time, a further similar giant pictogram was discovered near Milk Hill, close by.
This too had "keys" or "claws" protruding from the principal circles.
Both pictograms pointed directly away from the Alton Barnes White Horse, carved in chalk on the slopes of Milk Hill, and both lay approximately 3/4 of a mile from it. It is surely no coincidence that the White Horse, for which the circles have always shown a marked predilection, as at Westbury and Cherhill in particular, symbolizes the gateway between the physical world and the psychic, or metaphysical domain, or so has been suggested by George Wingfield, Director of Field Research for the Centre for Crop Circle Studies (CCCS).